Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

WO2023157911A1 - Resin composition, cured product, multilayer body, method for producing cured product, method for producing multilayer body, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device - Google Patents

Resin composition, cured product, multilayer body, method for producing cured product, method for producing multilayer body, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023157911A1
WO2023157911A1 PCT/JP2023/005417 JP2023005417W WO2023157911A1 WO 2023157911 A1 WO2023157911 A1 WO 2023157911A1 JP 2023005417 W JP2023005417 W JP 2023005417W WO 2023157911 A1 WO2023157911 A1 WO 2023157911A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
atom
resin composition
compound
compounds
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2023/005417
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
賢司 大工原
俊栄 青島
大輔 浅川
和也 尾田
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2024501426A priority Critical patent/JPWO2023157911A1/ja
Publication of WO2023157911A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023157911A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B15/00Layered products comprising a layer of metal
    • B32B15/04Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • B32B15/08Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B15/00Layered products comprising a layer of metal
    • B32B15/04Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • B32B15/08Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin
    • B32B15/088Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin comprising polyamides
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F283/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers provided for in subclass C08G
    • C08F283/04Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers provided for in subclass C08G on to polycarbonamides, polyesteramides or polyimides
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F290/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers modified by introduction of aliphatic unsaturated end or side groups
    • C08F290/08Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers modified by introduction of aliphatic unsaturated end or side groups on to polymers modified by introduction of unsaturated side groups
    • C08F290/14Polymers provided for in subclass C08G
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G73/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming a linkage containing nitrogen with or without oxygen or carbon in the main chain of the macromolecule, not provided for in groups C08G12/00 - C08G71/00
    • C08G73/06Polycondensates having nitrogen-containing heterocyclic rings in the main chain of the macromolecule
    • C08G73/10Polyimides; Polyester-imides; Polyamide-imides; Polyamide acids or similar polyimide precursors
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/56Organo-metallic compounds, i.e. organic compounds containing a metal-to-carbon bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L101/00Compositions of unspecified macromolecular compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L79/00Compositions of macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming in the main chain of the macromolecule a linkage containing nitrogen with or without oxygen or carbon only, not provided for in groups C08L61/00 - C08L77/00
    • C08L79/04Polycondensates having nitrogen-containing heterocyclic rings in the main chain; Polyhydrazides; Polyamide acids or similar polyimide precursors
    • C08L79/08Polyimides; Polyester-imides; Polyamide-imides; Polyamide acids or similar polyimide precursors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/028Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with photosensitivity-increasing substances, e.g. photoinitiators
    • G03F7/029Inorganic compounds; Onium compounds; Organic compounds having hetero atoms other than oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a resin composition, a cured product, a laminate, a method for producing a cured product, a method for producing a laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device, and a semiconductor device.
  • resin materials are being utilized by using resin compositions containing resins.
  • cyclized resins such as polyimide are used in various applications because of their excellent heat resistance and insulating properties.
  • the above applications are not particularly limited, but in the case of a semiconductor device for mounting, use as a material for an insulating film or a sealing material, or as a protective film can be mentioned. It is also used as a base film or coverlay for flexible substrates.
  • the cyclized resin such as polyimide is used in the form of a resin composition containing a precursor of the cyclized resin such as a polyimide precursor.
  • a resin composition is applied to a substrate, for example, by coating to form a photosensitive film, and then, if necessary, exposure, development, heating, etc. are performed to form a cured product on the substrate.
  • a precursor of the cyclized resin such as a polyimide precursor is cyclized, for example, by heating, and becomes a cyclized resin such as polyimide in the cured product.
  • the resin composition can be applied by a known coating method or the like, for example, there is a high degree of freedom in designing the shape, size, application position, etc. of the resin composition to be applied. It can be said that it is excellent in sex.
  • cyclized resins such as polyimide, from the viewpoint of such excellent manufacturing adaptability, industrial application and development of the above-mentioned resin compositions are increasingly expected.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a phenol compound with a specific structure, a titanocene compound with a specific structure, a 3-aminopropyltrialkoxysilane with a specific structure, a polyamic acid, and carbon carbon that can be dimerized or polymerized by actinic radiation.
  • a light-sensitive material containing a compound having a double bond and an amino group or a quaternized salt thereof is disclosed.
  • the viscosity does not easily change even under a yellow light and that it is easy to work under a yellow light.
  • a resin composition whose viscosity does not easily change even under a yellow light and which is easy to work under a yellow light is also referred to as a "resin composition excellent in working stability under a yellow light”.
  • the present invention provides a resin composition excellent in working stability under a yellow light, a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition, a laminate containing the cured product, a method for producing the cured product, and the laminate It aims at providing the semiconductor device manufacturing method including the manufacturing method, the manufacturing method of the said laminated body, and the semiconductor device containing the said hardened
  • ⁇ 1> Resin, and containing a metallocene compound,
  • the metallocene compound has a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and an aromatic ring directly linked to the metal atom,
  • the aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom as a substituent directly connected to the aromatic ring,
  • the resin composition, wherein the metallocene compound has a molar absorption coefficient at 500 nm of 330 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less.
  • the metallocene compound has a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and an aromatic ring directly linked to the metal atom, and the aromatic ring is a substituent directly linked to the aromatic ring.
  • a resin composition having a halogen atom as a group and an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom.
  • ⁇ 4> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein the resin is a polyimide or a polyimide precursor.
  • ⁇ 5> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, further comprising a polymerizable compound.
  • ⁇ 6> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein the metallocene compound is a titanocene compound.
  • ⁇ 7> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, further comprising a photopolymerization initiator different from the metallocene compound.
  • R 2 is a fluorine atom
  • R 3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
  • R 4 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom
  • R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom
  • one of R 5 is a fluorine atom
  • each R 6 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
  • R 7 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom.
  • each M independently represents a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom
  • each R 8 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • each R 9 independently represents a hydrogen atom or represents a fluorine atom
  • one of R 9 is a fluorine atom
  • R 10 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
  • R 11 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom
  • R 12 Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom
  • one of R 12 is a fluorine atom
  • each R 13 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
  • R 14 has an electron-withdrawing property different from that of a halogen atom.
  • R 15 and R 16 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • A represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • R 4 and R 7 in the above formula (1-1) are each independently a trifluoromethyl group or a nitro group
  • R 11 and R 14 in the above formula (1-2) are each independently a trifluoromethyl group.
  • the resin composition according to ⁇ 8> which is a fluoromethyl group or a nitro group.
  • ⁇ 11> A cured product obtained by curing the resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10>.
  • ⁇ 12> A laminate comprising two or more layers made of the cured product according to ⁇ 11> and a metal layer between any of the layers made of the cured product.
  • ⁇ 13> A method for producing a cured product, comprising a film forming step of applying the resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10> onto a substrate to form a film.
  • the method for producing a cured product according to ⁇ 13> comprising an exposure step of selectively exposing the film and a development step of developing the film with a developer to form a pattern.
  • ⁇ 15> The method for producing a cured product according to ⁇ 13> or ⁇ 14>, comprising a heating step of heating the film at 50 to 450°C.
  • a method for producing a laminate comprising the method for producing a cured product according to any one of ⁇ 13> to ⁇ 15>.
  • a method for producing a semiconductor device comprising the method for producing a cured product according to any one of ⁇ 13> to ⁇ 15> or the method for producing a laminate according to ⁇ 16>.
  • ⁇ 18> A semiconductor device comprising the cured product according to ⁇ 11> or the laminate according to ⁇ 12>.
  • a resin composition excellent in working stability under a yellow light a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition, a laminate containing the cured product, a method for producing the cured product, and the laminate
  • a semiconductor device manufacturing method including a method for manufacturing a body, a method for manufacturing a laminate, and a semiconductor device including the cured product or the laminate are provided.
  • a numerical range represented by the symbol "to” means a range including the numerical values before and after "to” as lower and upper limits, respectively.
  • the term "process” is meant to include not only independent processes, but also processes that are indistinguishable from other processes as long as the desired effects of the process can be achieved.
  • a description that does not describe substitution or unsubstituted includes a group (atomic group) having no substituent as well as a group (atomic group) having a substituent.
  • alkyl group includes not only alkyl groups without substituents (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also alkyl groups with substituents (substituted alkyl groups).
  • exposure includes not only exposure using light but also exposure using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified.
  • Light used for exposure includes actinic rays or radiation such as emission line spectra of mercury lamps, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
  • (meth)acrylate means both or either of “acrylate” and “methacrylate”
  • (meth)acrylic means both “acrylic” and “methacrylic”
  • (meth)acryloyl means either or both of “acryloyl” and “methacryloyl”.
  • Me in the structural formulas represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group.
  • total solid content refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent.
  • the solid content concentration is the mass percentage of other components excluding the solvent with respect to the total mass of the composition.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are values measured using a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) method, unless otherwise specified, and are defined as polystyrene conversion values.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are, for example, HLC-8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), guard column HZ-L, TSKgel Super HZM-M, TSKgel It can be obtained by connecting Super HZ4000, TSKgel Super HZ3000, and TSKgel Super HZ2000 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) in series. Unless otherwise stated, their molecular weights were determined using THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent.
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
  • detection in GPC measurement uses a UV ray (ultraviolet) wavelength detector of 254 nm.
  • UV ray ultraviolet
  • a third layer or element may be interposed between the reference layer and the other layer, and the reference layer and the other layer need not be in contact with each other.
  • the direction in which the layers are stacked with respect to the base material is referred to as "upper", or when there is a resin composition layer, the direction from the base material to the resin composition layer is referred to as “upper”. and the opposite direction is called “down”.
  • the composition may contain two or more compounds corresponding to each component contained in the composition.
  • the content of each component in the composition means the total content of all compounds corresponding to that component.
  • the temperature is 23° C.
  • the pressure is 101,325 Pa (1 atm)
  • the relative humidity is 50% RH, unless otherwise stated. Combinations of preferred aspects are more preferred aspects herein.
  • a resin composition according to a first aspect of the present invention comprises a resin and a metallocene compound, wherein the metallocene compound comprises a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and the It has an aromatic ring directly connected to a metal atom, the aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom as a substituent directly connected to the aromatic ring, and the metallocene compound has a molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm of It is 330 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less.
  • two atoms or structures are directly connected means that two atoms or structures are bonded without a linking group or the like between them.
  • an aromatic ring directly linked to a metal atom means that the metal atom and the aromatic ring are linked without a linking group between the metal atom and the aromatic ring.
  • a resin composition according to a second aspect of the present invention comprises a resin and a metallocene compound, wherein the metallocene compound comprises a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and the It has an aromatic ring directly linked to a metal atom, and the aromatic ring has a halogen atom as a substituent directly linked to the aromatic ring and an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom.
  • the resin composition according to the first aspect of the present invention and the resin composition according to the second aspect of the present invention are collectively referred to as "the resin composition of the present invention".
  • the resin composition according to the first aspect of the present invention having a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and an aromatic ring directly connected to the metal atom,
  • the aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom as a substituent directly connected to the aromatic ring, and a metallocene compound having a molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm of 330 mol ⁇ 1 L cm ⁇ 1 or less. Also referred to as "the first specific metallocene compound”.
  • a metallocene compound having a halogen atom as a substituent directly bonded to the aromatic ring and an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom is also referred to as a “second specific metallocene compound”.
  • a metallocene compound corresponding to at least one of the first specific metallocene compound and the second specific metallocene compound is also simply referred to as the "specific metallocene compound”.
  • the resin composition of the present invention is preferably used for forming a photosensitive film subjected to exposure and development, and is preferably used for forming a film subjected to exposure and development using a developer containing an organic solvent.
  • a developer containing an organic solvent preferable.
  • the resin composition of the present invention can be used, for example, to form an insulating film for semiconductor devices, an interlayer insulating film for rewiring layers, a stress buffer film, and the like, and can be used to form an interlayer insulating film for rewiring layers. preferable.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a cyclized resin or a precursor thereof as a resin and is used for forming an interlayer insulating film for rewiring layers.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may be used for forming a photosensitive film for positive development, or may be used for forming a photosensitive film for negative development.
  • negative development refers to development in which non-exposed areas are removed by development in exposure and development
  • positive development refers to development in which exposed areas are removed by development.
  • the exposure method, the developer, and the development method include, for example, the exposure method described in the exposure step, the developer and the development method described in the development step in the description of the method for producing a cured product described later. is used.
  • the resin composition of the present invention is excellent in working stability under yellow light. Although the mechanism by which the above effects are obtained is unknown, it is presumed as follows.
  • an operation of curing a resin composition to obtain a cured product has been performed.
  • an operation of forming a composition film from a resin composition and exposing and heating it to obtain a cured product can be mentioned.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the cured product is improved by using a metallocene compound together with the resin in the resin composition.
  • a titanocene compound is used as a polymerization initiator in combination with an acrylic monomer and polyamic acid.
  • the dark polymerization includes polymerization of a resin and a metallocene compound, polymerization of resins, polymerization of a resin and an optionally contained polymerizable compound, polymerization of polymerizable compounds, and the like.
  • the specific metallocene compounds in the first aspect and the second aspect of the present invention have a structure in which an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom is directly linked to an aromatic ring. By having an electron-withdrawing group other than a halogen atom, the wavelength of the absorption spectrum of the specific metallocene compound is shortened, and dark polymerization under a yellow light can be suppressed.
  • the resin composition of the present invention containing the metallocene compound of the present invention is considered to have excellent working stability under yellow light.
  • the specific metallocene compound in the first aspect of the present invention has a molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm of 330 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less. According to such a mode, since the photosensitivity under a yellow light is suppressed, it is considered that the working stability under a yellow light is excellent.
  • the metallocene compound in the second aspect of the invention further has a halogen atom directly attached to the aromatic ring.
  • the degree of polarization of the metallocene compound is increased, and the stability of the metallocene compound in the resin composition is considered to be improved.
  • the working stability under yellow light is further excellent.
  • the titanocene compound described in Patent Document 1 is a metallocene compound in which the substituent on the aromatic ring is a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, or a heterocyclic group, and the aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group other than halogen. is neither mentioned nor suggested.
  • the composition film formed from the resin composition of the present invention also suppresses dark polymerization under a yellow light. That is, even when a composition film formed from the resin composition of the present invention is handled under a yellow light, dark polymerization is suppressed, and, for example, fine patterns are likely to be obtained in pattern formation.
  • Patent Document 1 does not describe a resin composition containing a specific metallocene compound.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a resin.
  • the resin is not particularly limited, and includes, for example, resins used in conventional pattern-forming compositions. It preferably contains, and more preferably contains a precursor of the cyclized resin.
  • the acid value of the resin is preferably 0 to 0.8 mmol/g, more preferably 0.03 to 0.5 mmol/g, More preferably 0.1 to 0.3 mmol/g. Since the specific metallocene compound in the present invention has high stability, it is presumed that even when it is used together with a resin having such an acid value, it has excellent working stability under a yellow light.
  • the acid value is measured by a known method, for example, by the method described in JIS K 0070:1992.
  • the acid group contained in the resin preferably has a pKa of 0 to 10, more preferably 3 to 8, from the viewpoint of both storage stability and developability.
  • the pKa is expressed by the negative common logarithm pKa of the equilibrium constant Ka.
  • pKa is a value calculated by ACD/ChemSketch (registered trademark).
  • ACD/ChemSketch registered trademark
  • the values listed in the Chemical Society of Japan, Revised 5th Edition, Basics of Chemistry may be referred to.
  • the acid group is a polyvalent acid such as phosphoric acid
  • the above pKa is the first dissociation constant.
  • the resin preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxy group, more preferably a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxy group.
  • the cyclized resin is preferably a resin containing an imide ring structure or an oxazole ring structure in its main chain structure.
  • the main chain represents the relatively longest connecting chain in the resin molecule.
  • cyclized resins include polyimide, polybenzoxazole, and polyamideimide.
  • a precursor of a cyclized resin is a resin that undergoes a change in chemical structure by an external stimulus to become a cyclized resin, preferably a resin that undergoes a change in chemical structure by heat to become a cyclized resin.
  • a resin that becomes a cyclized resin by forming a ring structure is more preferable.
  • Precursors of the cyclized resin include polyimide precursors, polybenzoxazole precursors, polyamideimide precursors, and the like. That is, the resin composition of the present invention contains, as a specific resin, at least one selected from the group consisting of polyimides, polyimide precursors, polybenzoxazoles, polybenzoxazole precursors, polyamideimides, and polyamideimide precursors. It preferably contains a resin (specific resin).
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains polyimide or a polyimide precursor as the specific resin.
  • the specific resin preferably has a polymerizable group, and more preferably contains a radically polymerizable group.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a radical polymerization initiator described later, and contains a radical polymerization initiator described later and a radical cross-linking agent described later. is more preferred. Further, if necessary, a sensitizer described later can be included. For example, a negative photosensitive film is formed from the resin composition of the present invention.
  • the specific resin may have a polarity conversion group such as an acid-decomposable group.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a photoacid generator, which will be described later. From such a resin composition of the present invention, for example, a chemically amplified positive photosensitive film or negative photosensitive film is formed.
  • polyimide precursor Although the type of the polyimide precursor used in the present invention is not particularly limited, it preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (2).
  • a 1 and A 2 each independently represent an oxygen atom or -NH-
  • R 111 represents a divalent organic group
  • R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group
  • R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • a 1 and A 2 in formula (2) each independently represent an oxygen atom or —NH—, preferably an oxygen atom.
  • R 111 in formula (2) represents a divalent organic group.
  • divalent organic groups include groups containing linear or branched aliphatic groups, cyclic aliphatic groups and aromatic groups, linear or branched aliphatic groups having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, A cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group consisting of a combination thereof is preferable, and a group containing an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the hydrocarbon group in the chain may be substituted with a group containing a hetero atom, and in the cyclic aliphatic group and the aromatic group, the ring member hydrocarbon group is a hetero atom.
  • may be substituted with a group containing Groups represented by -Ar- and -Ar-L-Ar- are exemplified as preferred embodiments of the present invention, and groups represented by -Ar-L-Ar- are particularly preferred.
  • Ar is each independently an aromatic group
  • L is a single bond, or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO -, -S-, -SO 2 - or -NHCO-, or a group consisting of a combination of two or more of the above. Preferred ranges for these are as described above.
  • R 111 is preferably derived from a diamine.
  • Diamines used in the production of polyimide precursors include linear or branched aliphatic, cyclic aliphatic or aromatic diamines. Only one type of diamine may be used, or two or more types may be used. Specifically, a linear or branched aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group consisting of a combination thereof is preferably a diamine containing, more preferably a diamine containing an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. In the straight-chain or branched aliphatic group, the hydrocarbon group in the chain may be substituted with a group containing a heteroatom. may be substituted with a group containing Examples of groups containing aromatic groups include:
  • * represents a binding site with other structures.
  • diamines include 1,2-diaminoethane, 1,2-diaminopropane, 1,3-diaminopropane, 1,4-diaminobutane or 1,6-diaminohexane; ,3-diaminocyclopentane, 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4-diaminocyclohexane, 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane, bis-(4- aminocyclohexyl)methane, bis-(3-aminocyclohexyl)methane, 4,4′-diamino-3,3′-dimethylcyclohexylmethane or isophoronediamine; m- or p-phenylenediamine, diaminotoluene, 4,4′- or 3,3'-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether, 3, 3,3
  • diamines (DA-1) to (DA-18) described in paragraphs 0030 to 0031 of International Publication No. 2017/038598.
  • diamines having two or more alkylene glycol units in the main chain described in paragraphs 0032 to 0034 of International Publication No. 2017/038598 are preferably used.
  • R 111 is preferably represented by -Ar-L-Ar- from the viewpoint of the flexibility of the resulting organic film.
  • Ar is each independently an aromatic group
  • L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S- , —SO 2 — or —NHCO—, or a group consisting of a combination of two or more of the above.
  • Ar is preferably a phenylene group
  • L is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S- or -SO 2 - .
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group here is preferably an alkylene group.
  • R 111 is preferably a divalent organic group represented by the following formula (51) or (61).
  • a divalent organic group represented by Formula (61) is more preferable.
  • Equation (51) In formula (51), R 50 to R 57 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or a monovalent organic group, and at least one of R 50 to R 57 is a fluorine atom, a methyl group or a trifluoro It is a methyl group, and each * independently represents a binding site to the nitrogen atom in formula (2).
  • the monovalent organic groups represented by R 50 to R 57 include unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms), A fluorinated alkyl group and the like can be mentioned.
  • R 58 and R 59 are each independently a fluorine atom, a methyl group, or a trifluoromethyl group, and * is each independently a binding site to the nitrogen atom in formula (2) represent.
  • Diamines that give the structure of formula (51) or (61) include 2,2′-dimethylbenzidine, 2,2′-bis(trifluoromethyl)-4,4′-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2′-bis (Fluoro)-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4'-diaminooctafluorobiphenyl and the like. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • R 115 in formula (2) represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • a tetravalent organic group containing an aromatic ring is preferable, and a group represented by the following formula (5) or (6) is more preferable.
  • each * independently represents a binding site to another structure.
  • R 112 is a single bond or a divalent linking group, a single bond, or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -, and -NHCO-, and preferably a group selected from combinations thereof, having 1 to 1 carbon atoms optionally substituted by a single bond or a fluorine atom 3 alkylene group, -O-, -CO-, -S- and -SO 2 -, and -CH 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, -C( It is more preferably a divalent group selected from the group consisting of CH 3 ) 2 -, -O-, -CO-, -S- and -SO 2 -.
  • R 115 specifically includes a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of an anhydride group from a tetracarboxylic dianhydride.
  • the polyimide precursor may contain only one type of tetracarboxylic dianhydride residue, or may contain two or more types thereof, as the structure corresponding to R115 .
  • the tetracarboxylic dianhydride is preferably represented by the following formula (O).
  • R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • the preferred range of R 115 is synonymous with R 115 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • tetracarboxylic dianhydrides include pyromellitic dianhydride (PMDA), 3,3′,4,4′-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3′,4,4′- Diphenyl sulfide tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3′,4,4′-diphenylsulfonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3′,4,4′-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3′ ,4,4′-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2′,3,3′-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3′,4′-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3′,4′-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4,4′-oxydiphthalic dianhydride,
  • tetracarboxylic dianhydrides (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) described in paragraph 0038 of WO 2017/038598 are also preferred examples.
  • R 111 and R 115 has an OH group. More specifically, R 111 includes residues of bisaminophenol derivatives.
  • R 113 and R 114 in formula (2) each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • the monovalent organic group preferably includes a linear or branched alkyl group, a cyclic alkyl group, an aromatic group, or a polyalkyleneoxy group.
  • At least one of R 113 and R 114 preferably contains a polymerizable group, more preferably both contain a polymerizable group. It is also preferred that at least one of R 113 and R 114 contains two or more polymerizable groups.
  • the polymerizable group is a group capable of undergoing a cross-linking reaction by the action of heat, radicals, or the like, and is preferably a radically polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group examples include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an alkoxymethyl group, a hydroxymethyl group, an acyloxymethyl group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a benzoxazolyl group, a blocked isocyanate group, and an amino group. be done.
  • a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferred.
  • Groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, an isoallyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, a group having an aromatic ring directly bonded to a vinyl group (e.g., vinylphenyl group), and a (meth)acrylamide group.
  • a (meth)acryloyloxy group a group represented by the following formula (III), and the like, and a group represented by the following formula (III) is preferable.
  • R 200 represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group or a methylol group, preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • * represents a binding site with another structure.
  • R 201 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, a cycloalkylene group or a polyalkyleneoxy group.
  • R 201 examples include ethylene, propylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, pentamethylene, hexamethylene, octamethylene, alkylene groups such as dodecamethylene, 1,2-butanediyl, 1, 3-butanediyl group, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, polyalkyleneoxy group, ethylene group, alkylene group such as propylene group, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, cyclohexyl group, polyalkylene An oxy group is more preferred, and an alkylene group such as an ethylene group, a propylene group, or a polyalkyleneoxy group is even more preferred.
  • alkylene groups such as dodecamethylene, 1,2-butanediyl, 1, 3-butanediyl group, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, polyalkyleneoxy group, ethylene group, alkylene group such as propylene group, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2
  • a polyalkyleneoxy group refers to a group in which two or more alkyleneoxy groups are directly bonded.
  • the alkylene groups in the plurality of alkyleneoxy groups contained in the polyalkyleneoxy group may be the same or different.
  • the arrangement of the alkyleneoxy groups in the polyalkyleneoxy group may be a random arrangement or a block arrangement. Alternatively, it may be arranged in a pattern such as an alternating pattern.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 10, and 2 to 6. is more preferred, 2 to 5 is more preferred, 2 to 4 is even more preferred, 2 or 3 is particularly preferred, and 2 is most preferred.
  • the said alkylene group may have a substituent.
  • Preferred substituents include alkyl groups, aryl groups, and halogen atoms.
  • the number of alkyleneoxy groups contained in the polyalkyleneoxy group is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 10, and even more preferably 2 to 6.
  • a group to which an oxy group is bonded is preferable, a polyethyleneoxy group or a polypropyleneoxy group is more preferable, and a polyethyleneoxy group is still more preferable.
  • the ethyleneoxy groups and the propyleneoxy groups may be arranged randomly, or may be arranged to form blocks. , may be arranged in a pattern such as alternately. Preferred embodiments of the number of repetitions of ethyleneoxy groups and the like in these groups are as described above.
  • the polyimide precursor when R 113 is a hydrogen atom, or when R 114 is a hydrogen atom, the polyimide precursor may form a tertiary amine compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond and a counter salt. good.
  • tertiary amine compounds having ethylenically unsaturated bonds include N,N-dimethylaminopropyl methacrylate.
  • R 113 and R 114 may be a polarity conversion group such as an acid-decomposable group.
  • the acid-decomposable group is not particularly limited as long as it is decomposed by the action of an acid to generate an alkali-soluble group such as a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxyl group. , a tertiary alkyl ester group and the like are preferable, and from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, an acetal group or a ketal group is more preferable.
  • acid-decomposable groups include tert-butoxycarbonyl, isopropoxycarbonyl, tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, ethoxyethyl, methoxyethyl, ethoxymethyl, trimethylsilyl, and tert-butoxycarbonylmethyl. groups, trimethylsilyl ether groups, and the like. From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, an ethoxyethyl group or a tetrahydrofuranyl group is preferred.
  • the polyimide precursor preferably has a fluorine atom in its structure.
  • the content of fluorine atoms in the polyimide precursor is preferably 10% by mass or more, and preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the polyimide precursor may be copolymerized with an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure.
  • an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure there is an embodiment using bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, bis(p-aminophenyl)octamethylpentasiloxane, or the like as the diamine.
  • the repeating unit represented by formula (2) is preferably a repeating unit represented by formula (2-A). That is, at least one polyimide precursor used in the present invention is preferably a precursor having a repeating unit represented by formula (2-A). By including the repeating unit represented by the formula (2-A) in the polyimide precursor, it becomes possible to further widen the width of the exposure latitude.
  • a 1 and A 2 represent an oxygen atom
  • R 111 and R 112 each independently represent a divalent organic group
  • R 113 and R 114 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
  • at least one of R 113 and R 114 is a group containing a polymerizable group, and both are preferably groups containing a polymerizable group.
  • a 1 , A 2 , R 111 , R 113 and R 114 are each independently synonymous with A 1 , A 2 , R 111 , R 113 and R 114 in formula (2), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • R 112 has the same definition as R 112 in formula (5), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • the polyimide precursor may contain one type of repeating unit represented by formula (2), but may contain two or more types. It may also contain structural isomers of the repeating unit represented by formula (2). It goes without saying that the polyimide precursor may also contain other types of repeating units in addition to the repeating units of formula (2) above.
  • the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (2) is 50 mol% or more of the total repeating units.
  • the total content is more preferably 70 mol % or more, still more preferably 90 mol % or more, and particularly preferably more than 90 mol %.
  • the upper limit of the total content is not particularly limited, and all repeating units in the polyimide precursor excluding terminals may be repeating units represented by formula (2).
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide precursor is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000, still more preferably 15,000 to 40,000. Also, the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 2,000 to 40,000, more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, still more preferably 4,000 to 20,000.
  • the polyimide precursor preferably has a molecular weight distribution of 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more. Although the upper limit of the polyimide precursor's molecular weight dispersity is not particularly defined, it is preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, and even more preferably 6.0 or less.
  • the molecular weight dispersity is a value calculated by weight average molecular weight/number average molecular weight.
  • the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion of at least one polyimide precursor are preferably within the above ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, the number-average molecular weight, and the degree of dispersion calculated from the multiple types of polyimide precursors as one resin are within the ranges described above.
  • the polyimide used in the present invention may be an alkali-soluble polyimide or a polyimide soluble in a developer containing an organic solvent as a main component.
  • the alkali-soluble polyimide refers to a polyimide that dissolves at 23° C. in an amount of 0.1 g or more in 100 g of a 2.38% by mass tetramethylammonium aqueous solution. It is preferably a polyimide that dissolves, and more preferably a polyimide that dissolves 1.0 g or more. Although the upper limit of the dissolved amount is not particularly limited, it is preferably 100 g or less.
  • the polyimide is preferably a polyimide having a plurality of imide structures in its main chain from the viewpoint of the film strength and insulating properties of the resulting organic film.
  • the term "main chain” refers to the relatively longest linking chain in the molecule of the polymer compound that constitutes the resin, and the term “side chain” refers to the other linking chain.
  • the polyimide preferably has a fluorine atom.
  • a fluorine atom is preferably included in, for example, R 132 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later or R 131 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later, and the formula ( It is more preferably contained as a fluorinated alkyl group in R 132 in the repeating unit represented by 4) or R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later.
  • the amount of fluorine atoms relative to the total mass of polyimide is preferably 5% by mass or more and preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the polyimide preferably has a silicon atom.
  • a silicon atom for example, is preferably contained in R 131 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later, and R 131 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later is an organic modified (poly ) is more preferably contained as a siloxane structure.
  • the silicon atom or the organically modified (poly)siloxane structure may be contained in the side chain of the polyimide, but is preferably contained in the main chain of the polyimide.
  • the amount of silicon atoms relative to the total mass of polyimide is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the polyimide preferably has an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • the polyimide may have an ethylenically unsaturated bond at the end of its main chain or in a side chain, preferably in a side chain.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond preferably has radical polymerizability.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably contained in R 132 in a repeating unit represented by the formula (4) described later, or R 131 in a repeating unit represented by the formula (4) described later.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably contained in R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later, and ethylene It is more preferably included as a group having a polyunsaturated bond.
  • the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond includes a group having an optionally substituted vinyl group directly bonded to an aromatic ring such as a vinyl group, an allyl group, a vinylphenyl group, a (meth)acrylamide group, a (meth) Examples include an acryloyloxy group and a group represented by the following formula (IV).
  • R 20 represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group or a methylol group, preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 21 is an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, —O—CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, —C( ⁇ O)O—, —O(C ⁇ O)NH— , a (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms (the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 2 to 12, more preferably 2 to 6, and particularly preferably 2 or 3; the number of repetitions is preferably 1 to 12, 1 to 6 are more preferable, and 1 to 3 are particularly preferable), or a group in which two or more of these are combined.
  • the alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms may be a linear, branched, cyclic, or a combination of these alkylene groups.
  • an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • R 21 is preferably a group represented by any one of the following formulas (R1) to (R3), more preferably a group represented by formula (R1).
  • L represents a single bond, an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, a (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, or a group in which two or more of these are combined
  • X represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom
  • * represents a bonding site with another structure
  • represents a bonding site with the oxygen atom to which R 21 in formula (IV) bonds.
  • a preferred embodiment of an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms or a (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms in L is the above-mentioned R 21 having 2 to 12 carbon atoms. It is the same as the preferred embodiment of the 12 alkylene group or the (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • X is preferably an oxygen atom.
  • * has the same meaning as * in formula (IV), and preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the structure represented by formula (R1) is, for example, a polyimide having a hydroxy group such as a phenolic hydroxy group, and a compound having an isocyanato group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond (e.g., 2-isocyanatoethyl methacrylate, etc.). Obtained by reaction.
  • the structure represented by formula (R2) can be obtained, for example, by reacting a polyimide having a carboxy group with a compound having a hydroxy group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond (eg, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, etc.).
  • the structure represented by formula (R3) can be obtained, for example, by reacting a polyimide having a hydroxy group such as a phenolic hydroxy group with a compound having a glycidyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond (e.g., glycidyl methacrylate, etc.) can get.
  • a polyimide having a hydroxy group such as a phenolic hydroxy group
  • a compound having a glycidyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond e.g., glycidyl methacrylate, etc.
  • * represents a binding site with another structure, preferably a binding site with the main chain of polyimide.
  • the amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds relative to the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 0.0001-0.1 mol/g, more preferably 0.0005-0.05 mol/g.
  • Polyimide may have a polymerizable group other than the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • Polymerizable groups other than groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include cyclic ether groups such as an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, alkoxymethyl groups such as a methoxymethyl group, and methylol groups.
  • a polymerizable group other than a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably included, for example, in R 131 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below.
  • the amount of the polymerizable group other than the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond with respect to the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 0.0001 to 0.1 mol / g, preferably 0.001 to 0.05 mol / g. more preferred.
  • the polyimide may have a polarity conversion group such as an acid-decomposable group.
  • the acid-decomposable group in the polyimide is the same as the acid-decomposable group described for R 113 and R 114 in formula (2) above, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • Polar conversion groups are included, for example, at R 131 and R 132 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later, the terminal of polyimide, and the like.
  • the acid value of polyimide is preferably 30 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, and more preferably 70 mgKOH/g or more, from the viewpoint of improving developability. is more preferable. Also, the acid value is preferably 500 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, and even more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less. Further, when the polyimide is subjected to development using a developer containing an organic solvent as a main component (for example, "solvent development” described later), the acid value of the polyimide is preferably 1 to 35 mgKOH/g, and 2 to 30 mgKOH.
  • the polyimide preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxy group, more preferably a phenolic hydroxy group.
  • the polyimide preferably has a phenolic hydroxy group from the viewpoint of making the development speed with an alkaline developer appropriate.
  • the polyimide may have a phenolic hydroxy group at the end of the main chain or in the side chain.
  • a phenolic hydroxy group is preferably contained in, for example, R 132 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later or R 131 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later.
  • the amount of phenolic hydroxy groups relative to the total weight of the polyimide is preferably 0.1-30 mol/g, more preferably 1-20 mol/g.
  • the polyimide used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having an imide structure, but it preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (4).
  • R 131 represents a divalent organic group and R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • the polymerizable group may be located on at least one of R 131 and R 132 , and the terminal of the polyimide as shown in the following formula (4-1) or (4-2) may be located in Formula (4-1)
  • R 133 is a polymerizable group, and other groups are the same as in formula (4).
  • Formula (4-2) At least one of R 134 and R 135 is a polymerizable group, and when it is not a polymerizable group, it is an organic group, and the other groups are as defined in formula (4).
  • R 131 represents a divalent organic group.
  • the divalent organic group are the same as those of R 111 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • R 131 also includes a diamine residue remaining after removal of the amino group of the diamine. Diamines include aliphatic, cycloaliphatic or aromatic diamines. A specific example is the example of R 111 in formula (2) of the polyimide precursor.
  • R 131 is preferably a diamine residue having at least two alkylene glycol units in its main chain from the viewpoint of more effectively suppressing warping during baking. More preferably, it is a diamine residue containing two or more ethylene glycol chains, propylene glycol chains, or both in one molecule, and more preferably the above diamine, which does not contain an aromatic ring. is.
  • Diamines containing two or more ethylene glycol chains, propylene glycol chains, or both in one molecule include Jeffamine (registered trademark) KH-511, ED-600, ED-900, ED-2003, and EDR. -148, EDR-176, D-200, D-400, D-2000, D-4000 (trade names, manufactured by HUNTSMAN Co., Ltd.), 1-(2-(2-(2-aminopropoxy)ethoxy) propoxy)propan-2-amine, 1-(1-(1-(2-aminopropoxy)propan-2-yl)oxy)propan-2-amine, and the like.
  • R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • examples of the tetravalent organic group are the same as those for R 115 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • four bonds of a tetravalent organic group exemplified as R 115 combine with four —C( ⁇ O)— moieties in the above formula (4) to form a condensed ring.
  • R 132 includes, for example, a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of an anhydride group from a tetracarboxylic dianhydride.
  • a specific example is the example of R 115 in formula (2) of the polyimide precursor.
  • R 132 is preferably an aromatic diamine residue having 1 to 4 aromatic rings.
  • R 131 and R 132 has an OH group. More specifically, R 131 is 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 2,2- Bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, and the above (DA-1) to (DA-18) are preferred examples. and more preferred examples of R 132 are the above (DAA-1) to (DAA-5).
  • the polyimide preferably has a fluorine atom in its structure.
  • the content of fluorine atoms in the polyimide is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the polyimide may be copolymerized with an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure.
  • the diamine component include bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane and bis(p-aminophenyl)octamethylpentasiloxane.
  • the main chain end of the polyimide is blocked with a terminal blocking agent such as monoamine, acid anhydride, monocarboxylic acid, monoacid chloride compound, monoactive ester compound. preferably.
  • a terminal blocking agent such as monoamine, acid anhydride, monocarboxylic acid, monoacid chloride compound, monoactive ester compound.
  • monoamines it is more preferable to use monoamines, and preferred monoamine compounds include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1-hydroxy-7 -aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2 -hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-
  • the imidization rate (also referred to as "ring closure rate") of the polyimide is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, from the viewpoint of the film strength, insulating properties, etc. of the resulting organic film. More preferably, it is 90% or more.
  • the upper limit of the imidization rate is not particularly limited, and may be 100% or less.
  • the imidization rate is measured, for example, by the method described below. The infrared absorption spectrum of the polyimide is measured, and the peak intensity P1 near 1377 cm ⁇ 1 , which is the absorption peak derived from the imide structure, is obtained. Next, after heat-treating the polyimide at 350° C.
  • the polyimide may contain repeating units represented by the above formula (4 ) that all contain one type of R 131 or R 132 , and the above formula ( 4) may contain a repeating unit. Moreover, the polyimide may contain other types of repeating units in addition to the repeating units represented by the above formula (4). Other types of repeating units include, for example, repeating units represented by formula (2) above.
  • polyimide for example, a method of reacting a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and a diamine (partially replaced with a monoamine terminal blocker) at a low temperature, a method of reacting a tetracarboxylic dianhydride (partially with an acid anhydride) at a low temperature a monoacid chloride compound or a monoactive ester compound) and a diamine, a diester is obtained by a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, and then a diamine (a part of which is a monoamine A method of reacting in the presence of a condensing agent) with a condensing agent, a diester is obtained by tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride and alcohol, then the remaining dicarboxylic acid is acid chloride, diamine (part of which is a monoamine Using a method such as a method of reacting with a terminal blocking agent) to obtain a polyimide precursor
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000, still more preferably 15,000 to 40,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the folding resistance of the cured film can be improved. A weight-average molecular weight of 15,000 or more is particularly preferable in order to obtain an organic film having excellent mechanical properties (e.g., elongation at break).
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of polyimide is preferably 2,000 to 40,000, more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, still more preferably 4,000 to 20,000.
  • the polyimide has a molecular weight distribution of preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more.
  • the upper limit of the polyimide molecular weight dispersion is not particularly defined, it is preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, and even more preferably 6.0 or less.
  • the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion of at least one type of polyimide are preferably within the above ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, the number-average molecular weight, and the degree of dispersion calculated using the above plural kinds of polyimides as one resin are within the ranges described above.
  • polybenzoxazole precursor used in the present invention is not particularly defined for its structure and the like, but includes, for example, compounds described in paragraphs 0049 to 0074 of International Publication No. 2021/172420, and these descriptions are herein. incorporated into the book.
  • Polybenzoxazole is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having a benzoxazole ring, but it is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (X), and a compound represented by the following formula (X) and more preferably a compound having a polymerizable group.
  • a radically polymerizable group is preferred.
  • it may be a compound represented by the following formula (X) and having a polarity conversion group such as an acid-decomposable group.
  • R 133 represents a divalent organic group and R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • the polar conversion group such as a polymerizable group or an acid-decomposable group
  • the polar conversion group may be positioned at least one of R 133 and R 134 . It may be positioned at the end of the polybenzoxazole as shown in formula (X-1) or formula (X-2).
  • R 137 is a polar conversion group such as a polymerizable group or an acid-decomposable group, the others are substituents, and the other groups are the same as in formula (X).
  • the polarity conversion group such as a polymerizable group or an acid-decomposable group is synonymous with the polymerizable group described above for the polymerizable group possessed by the polyimide precursor.
  • R 133 represents a divalent organic group.
  • Divalent organic groups include aliphatic groups and aromatic groups.
  • a specific example is the example of R 121 in formula (3) of the polybenzoxazole precursor. Preferred examples thereof are the same as those of R121 .
  • R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • Tetravalent organic groups include examples of R 122 in the polybenzoxazole precursor formula (3). Moreover, the preferred examples thereof are the same as those of R122 .
  • four bonds of a tetravalent organic group exemplified as R 122 combine with the nitrogen atom and oxygen atom in the above formula (X) to form a condensed ring.
  • R 134 when R 134 is the following organic group, it forms the structure below. In the structures below, each * represents a bonding site with a nitrogen atom or an oxygen atom in formula (X).
  • Polybenzoxazole preferably has an oxazole conversion rate of 85% or more, more preferably 90% or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, and may be 100%.
  • the oxazolization rate is measured, for example, by the method described below.
  • An infrared absorption spectrum of polybenzoxazole is measured to obtain a peak intensity Q1 near 1650 cm ⁇ 1 which is an absorption peak derived from the amide structure of the precursor.
  • the polybenzoxazole may contain repeating units of the above formula (X) that all contain one type of R 131 or R 132 , or may contain repeating units of the above formula (X) that contain two or more different types of R 131 or R 132 . ) repeating units.
  • the polybenzoxazole may also contain other types of repeating units in addition to the repeating units of formula (X) above.
  • Polybenzoxazole is obtained by, for example, reacting a bisaminophenol derivative with a dicarboxylic acid containing R 133 or a compound selected from dicarboxylic acid dichlorides and dicarboxylic acid derivatives of the above dicarboxylic acid to obtain a polybenzoxazole precursor. , which is obtained by oxazolating it using a known oxazolating reaction method.
  • dicarboxylic acid in order to increase the reaction yield, etc., an active ester type dicarboxylic acid derivative pre-reacted with 1-hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole or the like may be used.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of polybenzoxazole is preferably from 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably from 8,000 to 50,000, even more preferably from 10,000 to 30,000.
  • the weight average molecular weight is particularly preferably 20,000 or more.
  • the weight average molecular weight of at least one kind of polybenzoxazole is within the above range.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of polybenzoxazole is preferably 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably 8,000 to 12,000, still more preferably 9,200 to 11,200. be.
  • the polybenzoxazole has a molecular weight dispersity of preferably 1.4 or more, more preferably 1.5 or more, and even more preferably 1.6 or more.
  • the upper limit of the polybenzoxazole molecular weight dispersity is not particularly defined, for example, it is preferably 2.6 or less, more preferably 2.5 or less, further preferably 2.4 or less, and even more preferably 2.3 or less.
  • 2.2 or less is even more preferable.
  • the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion of at least one type of polybenzoxazole are preferably within the above ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, the number-average molecular weight, and the degree of dispersion calculated from the plurality of types of polybenzoxazole as one resin are within the ranges described above.
  • Polyamideimide precursors are not particularly defined for their structure and the like, but include, for example, compounds described in paragraphs 0075 to 0093 of WO 2021/172420, and these descriptions are incorporated herein.
  • the polyamideimide used in the present invention may be an alkali-soluble polyamideimide or a polyamideimide soluble in a developer containing an organic solvent as a main component.
  • the alkali-soluble polyamideimide refers to a polyamideimide that dissolves at 23° C. in an amount of 0.1 g or more in 100 g of a 2.38 mass % tetramethylammonium aqueous solution.
  • a polyamideimide that dissolves 5 g or more is preferable, and a polyamideimide that dissolves 1.0 g or more is more preferable.
  • the upper limit of the dissolved amount is not particularly limited, it is preferably 100 g or less.
  • the polyamideimide is preferably a polyamideimide having a plurality of amide bonds and a plurality of imide structures in the main chain from the viewpoint of the film strength and insulating properties of the organic film to be obtained.
  • the polyamideimide preferably has a fluorine atom.
  • a fluorine atom is preferably contained in, for example, R 117 or R 111 in a repeating unit represented by formula (PAI-3) described later, and is preferably contained in a repeating unit represented by formula (PAI-3) described later It is more preferably contained in R 117 or R 111 as a fluorinated alkyl group.
  • the amount of fluorine atoms is preferably 5% by mass or more and preferably 20% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of polyamideimide.
  • the polyamideimide may have an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • the polyamideimide may have an ethylenically unsaturated bond at the end of the main chain or in a side chain, preferably in the side chain.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond preferably has radical polymerizability.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably contained in R 117 or R 111 in the repeating unit represented by formula (PAI-3) described later, and the repeating unit represented by formula (PAI-3) described later.
  • R 117 or R 111 It is more preferably contained as a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in R 117 or R 111 in .
  • Preferred embodiments of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond are the same as the preferred embodiments of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the polyimide described above.
  • the amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds relative to the total mass of polyamideimide is preferably 0.0001 to 0.1 mol/g, more preferably 0.001 to 0.05 mol/g.
  • Polyamideimide may have a polymerizable group other than the ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • the polymerizable groups other than the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the polyamideimide include the same groups as the polymerizable groups other than the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the polyimide described above.
  • a polymerizable group other than an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably included in R 111 in a repeating unit represented by formula (PAI-3) described later, for example.
  • the amount of polymerizable groups other than ethylenically unsaturated bonds relative to the total mass of polyamideimide is preferably 0.05 to 10 mol/g, more preferably 0.1 to 5 mol/g.
  • -Polarity conversion group- Polyamideimide may have a polarity converting group such as an acid-decomposable group.
  • the acid-decomposable group in polyamideimide is the same as the acid-decomposable group described for R 113 and R 114 in formula (2) above, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the acid value of the polyamideimide is preferably 30 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 70 mgKOH/g, from the viewpoint of improving developability. g or more is more preferable. Also, the acid value is preferably 500 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, and even more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less.
  • the acid value of the polyamideimide is preferably 2 to 35 mgKOH/g, 3 ⁇ 30 mg KOH/g is more preferred, and 5 to 20 mg KOH/g is even more preferred.
  • the acid value is measured by a known method, for example, by the method described in JIS K 0070:1992.
  • the acid group contained in the polyamideimide the same groups as the acid group in the polyimide described above can be mentioned, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the polyamideimide preferably has a phenolic hydroxy group.
  • Polyamideimide may have a phenolic hydroxy group at the end of the main chain or in the side chain.
  • a phenolic hydroxy group is preferably included in, for example, R 117 or R 111 in a repeating unit represented by formula (PAI-3) described later.
  • the amount of phenolic hydroxy groups relative to the total mass of polyamideimide is preferably 0.1 to 30 mol/g, more preferably 1 to 20 mol/g.
  • the polyamideimide used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having an imide structure and an amide bond, but it preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (PAI-3).
  • R 111 and R 117 have the same definitions as R 111 and R 117 in formula (PAI-2), and preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the polymerizable group may be located at least one of R 111 and R 117 , or may be located at the end of the polyamideimide.
  • the main chain end of the polyamideimide is blocked with a terminal blocker such as a monoamine, an acid anhydride, a monocarboxylic acid, a monoacid chloride compound, or a monoactive ester compound.
  • a terminal blocker such as a monoamine, an acid anhydride, a monocarboxylic acid, a monoacid chloride compound, or a monoactive ester compound.
  • Preferred aspects of the terminal blocker are the same as the preferred aspects of the terminal blocker in the polyimide described above.
  • the imidization rate (also referred to as "ring closure rate") of polyamideimide is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, from the viewpoint of the film strength, insulating properties, etc. of the resulting organic film. , more preferably 90% or more.
  • the upper limit of the imidization rate is not particularly limited, and may be 100% or less.
  • the imidization rate is measured by the same method as the ring closure rate of the polyimide described above.
  • Polyamideimide may contain repeating units represented by the above formula (PAI-3), all of which contain one type of R 111 or R 117 , and two or more different types of R 131 or R 132 . It may contain a repeating unit represented by the above formula (PAI-3). Moreover, the polyamideimide may contain other types of repeating units in addition to the repeating units represented by the above formula (PAI-3). Other types of repeating units include repeating units represented by the above formula (PAI-1) or formula (PAI-2).
  • Polyamideimide is, for example, a method of obtaining a polyamideimide precursor by a known method and completely imidizing it using a known imidization reaction method, or stopping the imidization reaction in the middle and partially imidizing the imide structure and a method of partially introducing an imide structure by blending a completely imidized polymer with its polyamideimide precursor.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of polyamideimide is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, even more preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the folding resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain an organic film having excellent mechanical properties, the weight average molecular weight is particularly preferably 20,000 or more. Further, the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the polyamideimide is preferably 800 to 250,000, more preferably 2,000 to 50,000, still more preferably 4,000 to 25,000. .
  • the polyamidoimide has a molecular weight distribution of preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more.
  • the upper limit of the polyamidoimide molecular weight dispersity is not particularly defined, it is preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, and even more preferably 6.0 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion of at least one type of polyamideimide are preferably within the above ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion calculated from the plurality of types of polyamideimide as one resin are within the above ranges.
  • Polyimide precursors and the like for example, a method of reacting a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and a diamine at a low temperature, a method of reacting a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and a diamine at a low temperature to obtain a polyamic acid, a condensing agent or an alkylating agent A method of esterification using a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol to obtain a diester, then a method of reacting in the presence of a diamine and a condensing agent, a method of reacting a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol to obtain a diester, After that, the remaining dicarboxylic acid can be acid-halogenated using a halogenating agent and reacted with a diamine.
  • the method of obtaining a diester from a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, then acid-halogenating the remaining dicarboxylic acid with a halogenating agent, and reacting it with a diamine is more preferred.
  • the condensing agent include dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, diisopropylcarbodiimide, 1-ethoxycarbonyl-2-ethoxy-1,2-dihydroquinoline, 1,1-carbonyldioxy-di-1,2,3-benzotriazole, N, N'-disuccinimidyl carbonate, trifluoroacetic anhydride and the like can be mentioned.
  • alkylating agent examples include N,N-dimethylformamide dimethyl acetal, N,N-dimethylformamide diethyl acetal, N,N-dialkylformamide dialkyl acetal, trimethyl orthoformate and triethyl orthoformate.
  • halogenating agent examples include thionyl chloride, oxalyl chloride, phosphorus oxychloride and the like.
  • organic solvent In the method for producing a polyimide precursor or the like, it is preferable to use an organic solvent in the reaction. One type of organic solvent may be used, or two or more types may be used.
  • the organic solvent can be appropriately determined according to the raw material, but pyridine, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (diglyme), N-methylpyrrolidone, N-ethylpyrrolidone, ethyl propionate, dimethylacetamide, dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran, ⁇ -butyrolactone, and the like. are exemplified.
  • pyridine diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (diglyme)
  • N-methylpyrrolidone N-ethylpyrrolidone
  • ethyl propionate dimethylacetamide
  • dimethylformamide dimethylformamide
  • tetrahydrofuran ⁇ -butyrolactone, and the like.
  • the basic compound can be appropriately determined depending on the raw material, but triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, pyridine, 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene, N,N-dimethyl-4-amino Pyridine and the like are exemplified.
  • terminal blocking agents include monoalcohols, phenols, thiols, thiophenols, monoamines, and the like. It is more preferable to use monoalcohols, phenols and monoamines from the viewpoint of their properties.
  • Preferred monoalcohol compounds include primary alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, hexanol, octanol, dodecinol, benzyl alcohol, 2-phenylethanol, 2-methoxyethanol, 2-chloromethanol and furfuryl alcohol, and isopropanol. , 2-butanol, cyclohexyl alcohol, cyclopentanol and 1-methoxy-2-propanol, and tertiary alcohols such as t-butyl alcohol and adamantane alcohol.
  • Preferable phenolic compounds include phenols such as phenol, methoxyphenol, methylphenol, naphthalene-1-ol, naphthalene-2-ol, and hydroxystyrene.
  • Preferred monoamine compounds include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6- aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1- Carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-6-amin
  • Preferred capping agents for amino groups are carboxylic acid anhydrides, carboxylic acid chlorides, carboxylic acid bromide, sulfonic acid chlorides, sulfonic anhydrides, sulfonic acid carboxylic acid anhydrides, etc., more preferably carboxylic acid anhydrides and carboxylic acid chlorides. preferable.
  • Preferred carboxylic anhydride compounds include acetic anhydride, propionic anhydride, oxalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, benzoic anhydride, 5-norbornene-2,3-dicarboxylic anhydride, and the like. are mentioned.
  • Preferred compounds of carboxylic acid chlorides include acetyl chloride, acrylic acid chloride, propionyl chloride, methacrylic acid chloride, pivaloyl chloride, cyclohexanecarbonyl chloride, 2-ethylhexanoyl chloride, cinnamoyl chloride, and 1-adamantanecarbonyl chloride. , heptafluorobutyryl chloride, stearic acid chloride, benzoyl chloride, and the like.
  • the method for producing a polyimide precursor or the like may include a step of depositing a solid. Specifically, after filtering off the water absorption by-products of the dehydration condensation agent coexisting in the reaction solution as necessary, water, aliphatic lower alcohol, or a poor solvent such as a mixture thereof, the obtained A polyimide precursor or the like can be obtained by adding a polymer component and depositing the polymer component to precipitate it as a solid and drying it. In order to improve the degree of purification, operations such as redissolution, reprecipitation, drying, etc. of the polyimide precursor may be repeated. Furthermore, a step of removing ionic impurities using an ion exchange resin may be included.
  • the content of the specific resin in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, and 40% by mass or more with respect to the total solid content of the resin composition. is more preferable, and 50% by mass or more is even more preferable. Further, the content of the resin in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 99.5% by mass or less, more preferably 99% by mass or less, more preferably 98% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resin composition. % or less, more preferably 97 mass % or less, and even more preferably 95 mass % or less.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain only one type of specific resin, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains at least two resins.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain a total of two or more of the specific resin and other resins described later, or may contain two or more of the specific resins. It is preferable to include two or more kinds.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains two or more specific resins, for example, two or more polyimides that are polyimide precursors and have different dianhydride-derived structures (R 115 in the above formula (2)) It preferably contains a precursor.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain other resins (hereinafter simply referred to as "other resins") different from the specific resins in addition to or instead of the specific resins described above. good.
  • Other resins include phenolic resins, polyamides, epoxy resins, polysiloxanes, resins containing siloxane structures, (meth)acrylic resins, (meth)acrylamide resins, urethane resins, butyral resins, styryl resins, polyether resins, and polyester resins. etc.
  • a (meth)acrylic resin by further adding a (meth)acrylic resin, a resin composition having excellent applicability can be obtained, and a pattern (cured product) having excellent solvent resistance can be obtained.
  • a high polymerizable group value having a weight average molecular weight of 20,000 or less for example, the molar amount of the polymerizable group in 1 g of the resin is 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 mol/g or more
  • the coating properties of the resin composition and the solvent resistance of the pattern (cured product) can be improved. can.
  • the content of the other resins is preferably 0.01% by mass or more, and 0.05% by mass or more, relative to the total solid content of the resin composition. More preferably, it is more preferably 1% by mass or more, even more preferably 2% by mass or more, even more preferably 5% by mass or more, and further preferably 10% by mass or more. More preferred.
  • the content of other resins in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 75% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the resin composition. It is more preferably 60% by mass or less, even more preferably 50% by mass or less.
  • the content of other resins may be low.
  • the content of the other resin is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, and 10% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content of the resin composition. is more preferable, 5% by mass or less is even more preferable, and 1% by mass or less is even more preferable.
  • the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited as long as it is 0% by mass or more.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of other resin, or may contain two or more kinds thereof. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a specific metallocene compound.
  • the specific metallocene compound (first specific metallocene compound) contained in the resin composition according to the first aspect of the present invention comprises a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and the above It has an aromatic ring directly connected to a metal atom, the aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom as a substituent directly connected to the aromatic ring, and the molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm is 330 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less.
  • the specific metallocene compound (second specific metallocene compound) contained in the resin composition according to the second aspect of the present invention comprises a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and the above It has an aromatic ring directly linked to a metal atom, and the aromatic ring has a halogen atom as a substituent directly linked to the aromatic ring and an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom.
  • the type of the metal atom contained in the specific metallocene compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably a Group 4 metal atom, more preferably a titanium atom, a zirconium atom, or a hafnium atom, from the viewpoint of stability in the composition. is more preferably a titanium atom. It is presumed that this is because the titanium atom has a small atomic radius, which improves the stability of the compound.
  • the specific metallocene compound of the present invention is preferably a metallocene compound containing a Group 4 metal atom, more preferably a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound, or a hafnocene compound, and even more preferably a titanocene compound.
  • the number of metal atoms contained in the specific metallocene compound is not particularly limited, but may be 1 or more, more preferably 1 to 4, further preferably 1 or 2, and 1 is particularly preferred.
  • the specific metallocene compound contains two or more of the above metal atoms, the types of the above metal atoms may be the same or different.
  • the specific metallocene compound may contain two titanium atoms, or may contain a titanium atom and a zirconium atom.
  • the specific metallocene compound has an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand. That is, the specific metallocene compound is a cyclopentadienyl complex.
  • the cyclopentadienyl ligand preferably coordinates to the metal atom in a ⁇ 5 -type coordination mode.
  • the substituent in the cyclopentadienyl ligand is not particularly limited as long as the effects of the present invention can be obtained, and examples thereof include alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the specific metallocene compound may have only one cyclopentadienyl ligand, or may have two or more cyclopentadienyl ligands, but preferably has two.
  • the specific metallocene compound has two or more cyclopentadienyl ligands, their structures may be the same or different.
  • the aromatic ring directly linked to a metal atom may be an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic heterocyclic ring, but an aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferred.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably an aromatic ring having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, and still more preferably a benzene ring.
  • As the aromatic heterocyclic ring a ring structure represented by a 5-membered ring, a 6-membered ring, or a combination thereof is preferable.
  • aromatic heterocycles include pyridine ring, imidazole ring, thiophene ring, pyrazine ring, pyrrole ring, azepine ring, thiepine ring, pyrazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, imidazoline ring, thiazine ring, indole ring, iso Indole ring, benzimidazole ring, purine ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, quinoxaline ring, cinnoline ring, pteridine ring, benzofuran ring, pyrimidine ring, pyridazine ring, etc., but not limited thereto.
  • the specific metallocene compound may have one or more aromatic rings directly connected to the metal atom, but preferably has one or two, more preferably two. .
  • the specific metallocene compound has two or more aromatic rings directly connected to the metal atom, their structures and substituent structures may be the same or different.
  • the aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom as a substituent directly bonded to the aromatic ring.
  • the electron-withdrawing group include -CF 3 , -NO 2 , -CCl 3 , -CN, -CHO, -COCH 3 , -COOC 2 H 5 , -COOH, -SO 2 CH 3 , -SO 3 H etc., and -CF 3 or -NO 2 is preferred.
  • the aromatic ring may further have a substituent in addition to the electron-withdrawing group. Examples of such substituents include halogen atoms and alkyl groups.
  • the aromatic ring may have two or more electron-withdrawing groups, having only one is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
  • the electron-withdrawing groups may have the same or different structures.
  • the aromatic ring is a benzene ring
  • the benzene ring preferably has the electron-withdrawing group at the para-position with respect to the bonding site with the metal atom in the benzene ring.
  • the aromatic ring preferably further has a halogen atom as a substituent in addition to the electron-withdrawing group described above.
  • the aromatic ring further has a halogen atom as a substituent in addition to the electron-withdrawing group described above.
  • the halogen atom in these specific metallocene compounds include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, with a fluorine atom being preferred.
  • the aromatic ring in these specific metallocene compounds is a benzene ring and further has the halogen atom as a substituent
  • the benzene ring is positioned ortho to the bonding site with the metal atom in the benzene ring, or It preferably has the halogen atoms at the ortho-position and the meta-position, and more preferably has the halogen atom at the ortho-position and does not have the halogen atom at the meta-position.
  • the benzene ring may have the halogen atom at both of the two ortho positions.
  • the benzene ring preferably has the above halogen atom only on one side.
  • the benzene ring has the halogen atoms at the ortho and meta positions with respect to the bonding site with the metal atom on the benzene ring, the benzene ring has the above at both the two ortho positions and the two meta positions, respectively.
  • it may have a halogen atom, it is preferable to have the above halogen atom only at one of the two ortho positions and only at one of the two meta positions.
  • the specific metallocene compound may further have other structures.
  • the first specific metallocene compound may further include an unsubstituted aromatic ring.
  • Preferred embodiments of the aromatic ring are the same as the preferred embodiments of the aromatic ring in the aromatic ring having a substituent.
  • the molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm of the first specific metallocene compound is 330 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less, preferably 300 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less, and 250 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less, more preferably 200 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less, and particularly preferably 150 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less.
  • the molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm of the second specific metallocene compound is preferably 330 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less, more preferably 300 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less, and 250 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less is more preferable, 200 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less is particularly preferable, and 150 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less is most preferable.
  • the lower limit of the molar extinction coefficient is not particularly limited, and may be 0 mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ L ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or more.
  • the molar extinction coefficient can be measured by the method described in Examples.
  • a specific metallocene compound having photopolymerization initiation ability can also be used. In the present invention, even when such a specific metallocene compound is used, dark polymerization is likely to be suppressed, and it is considered that the working stability under a yellow light is excellent. Specifically, for example, a compound having photoradical polymerization initiation ability can be used as the specific metallocene compound.
  • the specific metallocene compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (1-1) or (1-2).
  • M represents a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom, each R 1 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and each R 2 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom.
  • R 2 is a fluorine atom
  • R 3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
  • R 4 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom
  • R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom
  • one of R 5 is a fluorine atom
  • each R 6 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
  • R 7 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom.
  • each M independently represents a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom
  • each R 8 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • each R 9 independently represents a hydrogen atom or represents a fluorine atom
  • one of R 9 is a fluorine atom
  • R 10 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
  • R 11 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom
  • R 12 Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom
  • one of R 12 is a fluorine atom
  • each R 13 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
  • R 14 has an electron-withdrawing property different from that of a halogen atom.
  • group, R 15 and R 16 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • A represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • M is preferably a titanium atom.
  • each R 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • one of R 2 is preferably a fluorine atom and the other is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • each R 3 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the halogen atom for R 3 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, with a fluorine atom being preferred.
  • Preferred embodiments of the electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom in R 4 in formula (1-1) are the same as the preferred embodiments of the electron-withdrawing group described above.
  • Preferred embodiments of R 5 , R 6 and R 7 in formula (1-1) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 2 , R 3 and R 4 in formula (1-1).
  • both M are titanium atoms, both are zirconium atoms, or both are preferably hafnium atoms, and both are more preferably titanium atoms.
  • Preferred embodiments of R 8 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 1 in formula (1-1).
  • Preferred embodiments of R 9 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 2 in formula (1-1).
  • Preferred embodiments of R 10 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 3 in formula (1-1).
  • Preferred embodiments of R 11 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 4 in formula (1-1).
  • Preferred embodiments of R 12 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 5 in formula (1-1).
  • R 13 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 6 in formula (1-1).
  • Preferred embodiments of R 14 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 7 in formula (1-1).
  • R 15 and R 16 are each independently a cyclopentadienyl ligand optionally having a substituent as described above, an aromatic ring directly linked to the metal atom described above, or Other structures are preferred. Preferred aspects and specific examples of these structures are respectively as described above.
  • A is preferably an oxygen atom.
  • R 4 and R 7 in the above formula (1-1) are each independently a trifluoromethyl group or a nitro group
  • R 11 and R 14 in the above formula (1-2) are each independently A trifluoromethyl group or a nitro group is preferred.
  • the absorption wavelength of the specific metallocene compound can be made shorter, and it is considered that the working stability under a yellow light is more likely to be improved.
  • the molecular weight of the specific metallocene compound is preferably 200 to 2,000, more preferably 300 to 1,500, even more preferably 400 to 1,000.
  • the specific metallocene compound can be synthesized, for example, by reacting an aryl halide with n-BuLi and further reacting it with titanocene dichloride. Moreover, it may be synthesized using other known synthesis methods, and the synthesis method is not particularly limited.
  • titanocene compounds are generally synthesized by the following method. The following reactions are carried out under a nitrogen atmosphere. A 1.6 M (mol/L) hexane solution of n-BuLi (50 mmol, 31 mL) is slowly added dropwise to a THF (100 mL) solution of aryl bromide (50 mmol) at -78°C.
  • a specific metallocene compound can be synthesized by using a halogenated aryl compound having a structure in which an electron-withdrawing group is directly linked to an aromatic ring as the "aryl bromide”. Synthesis conditions, solvents and the like may be changed as appropriate.
  • Specific examples of the specific metallocene compound are not particularly limited, but include A-1 to A-21 used in the examples.
  • the content of the specific metallocene compound with respect to the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.2% by mass or more, still more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 15% by mass or less, even more preferably 10% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 8% by mass or less.
  • One of the specific metallocene compounds may be used alone, or two or more thereof may be used in combination. When two or more are used in combination, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a specific metallocene compound and a radical polymerization initiator described later (radical polymerization initiator different from the specific metallocene compound), the specific metallocene compound and the radical polymerization initiator (specific metallocene compound
  • the total content of the radical polymerization initiator different from the above) is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.2% by mass or more, still more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 15% by mass or less, even more preferably 10% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 8% by mass or less.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain an organometallic complex from the viewpoint of chemical resistance.
  • the organometallic complex referred to here does not include compounds corresponding to the above-mentioned specific metallocene compounds.
  • the organometallic complex may be an organic complex compound containing a metal atom, but is preferably a complex compound containing a metal atom and an organic group, and is preferably a compound in which an organic group is coordinated to a metal atom. More preferably, it is a metallocene compound.
  • the metallocene compound refers to an organometallic complex having two optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl anion derivatives as ⁇ 5-ligands.
  • the organic group is not particularly limited, a hydrocarbon group or a group composed of a combination of a hydrocarbon group and a hetero atom is preferable.
  • Preferred heteroatoms are oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen atoms.
  • at least one of the organic groups is preferably a cyclic group, more preferably at least two are cyclic groups.
  • the cyclic group is preferably selected from a 5-membered cyclic group and a 6-membered cyclic group, more preferably a 5-membered cyclic group.
  • the cyclic group may be either a hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring, but is preferably a hydrocarbon ring.
  • As the five-membered cyclic group a cyclopentadienyl group is preferred.
  • the organometallic complex used in the present invention preferably contains 2 to 4 cyclic groups in one molecule.
  • the metal contained in the organometallic complex is not particularly limited, but is preferably a metal corresponding to a Group 4 element, and at least one metal selected from the group consisting of titanium, zirconium and hafnium. More preferably, it is at least one metal selected from the group consisting of titanium and zirconium, and particularly preferably titanium.
  • the organometallic complex may contain two or more metal atoms or may contain only one metal atom, but preferably contains only one metal atom. When the organometallic complex contains two or more metal atoms, it may contain only one kind of metal atom, or may contain two or more kinds of metal atoms.
  • the organometallic complex is preferably a ferrocene compound, a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound or a hafnocene compound, more preferably a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound or a hafnocene compound, and even more preferably a titanocene compound or a zirconocene compound.
  • titanocene compounds are particularly preferred.
  • an embodiment in which the organometallic complex has photoradical polymerization initiation ability is also one of preferred embodiments of the present invention.
  • having the ability to initiate radical photopolymerization means being able to generate free radicals capable of initiating radical polymerization upon exposure to light.
  • radicals capable of initiating radical polymerization upon exposure to light.
  • the organometallic complex has photoradical polymerization initiation ability
  • the organometallic complex is preferably a metallocene compound, more preferably a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound or a hafnocene compound, and a titanocene compound or a zirconocene compound. is more preferred, and a titanocene compound is particularly preferred.
  • the organometallic complex is at least one selected from the group consisting of titanocene compounds, tetraalkoxytitanium compounds, titanium acylate compounds, titanium chelate compounds, zirconocene compounds and hafnocene compounds. More preferably at least one compound selected from the group consisting of titanocene compounds, zirconocene compounds and hafnocene compounds, and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of titanocene compounds and zirconocene compounds More preferred are compounds of the species, and particularly preferred are titanocene compounds.
  • the molecular weight of the organometallic complex is preferably 50 to 2,000, more preferably 100 to 1,000.
  • Preferred examples of the organometallic complex include compounds represented by the following formula (P).
  • M is a metal atom
  • each R is independently a substituent. It is preferable that each R is independently selected from an aromatic group, an alkyl group, a halogen atom and an alkylsulfonyloxy group.
  • the metal atom represented by M is preferably an iron atom, a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom, more preferably a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom, still more preferably a titanium atom or a zirconium atom, and titanium Atoms are particularly preferred.
  • the aromatic group for R in formula (P) includes an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, or , 2-naphthyl group and the like.
  • the alkyl group for R in formula (P) is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and is a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an octyl group, and an isopropyl group. , t-butyl group, isopentyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 2-methylhexyl group, cyclopentyl group and the like.
  • Halogen atoms for R include F, Cl, Br and I.
  • the alkyl group constituting the alkylsulfonyloxy group in R above is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an octyl group, isopropyl group, t-butyl group, isopentyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 2-methylhexyl group, cyclopentyl group and the like.
  • the above R may further have a substituent.
  • substituents include halogen atoms (F, Cl, Br, I), hydroxy groups, carboxy groups, amino groups, cyano groups, aryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, aryloxy carbonyl group, acyloxy group, monoalkylamino group, dialkylamino group, monoarylamino group, diarylamino group and the like.
  • organometallic complex examples include, but are not limited to, tetraisopropoxytitanium, tetrakis(2-ethylhexyloxy)titanium, diisopropoxybis(ethylacetoacetate)titanium, diisopropoxybis(acetylacetoacetate)titanium, and diisopropoxybis(acetylacetoacetate).
  • nath)titanium bis( ⁇ 5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluoro-3-(1H-pyrrol-1-yl)phenyl)titanium, pentamethylcyclopentadienyltitanium tri
  • methoxide bis( ⁇ 5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluorophenyl)titanium, and the following compounds.
  • the content of the organometallic complex is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass based on the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, still more preferably 1.5% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 3.0% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 25% by mass or less. 1 type(s) or 2 or more types can be used for an organometallic complex. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
  • Polymerizable compounds include radical cross-linking agents or other cross-linking agents.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a radical cross-linking agent.
  • a radical cross-linking agent is a compound having a radically polymerizable group.
  • the radically polymerizable group a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferred.
  • Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include groups containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond such as a vinyl group, an allyl group, a vinylphenyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a maleimide group, and a (meth)acrylamide group.
  • the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably a (meth)acryloyl group, a (meth)acrylamide group, or a vinylphenyl group, and more preferably a (meth)acryloyl group from the viewpoint of reactivity.
  • the radical cross-linking agent is preferably a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds, more preferably a compound having two or more.
  • the radical cross-linking agent may have 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds.
  • the compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds is preferably a compound having 2 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bonds, more preferably a compound having 2 to 10 ethylenically unsaturated bonds, and 2 to 6.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a compound having two ethylenically unsaturated bonds and a compound having three or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds. It is also preferred to include
  • the molecular weight of the radical cross-linking agent is preferably 2,000 or less, more preferably 1,500 or less, and even more preferably 900 or less.
  • the lower limit of the molecular weight of the radical cross-linking agent is preferably 100 or more.
  • radical cross-linking agent examples include unsaturated carboxylic acids (eg, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), their esters, and amides. They are esters of saturated carboxylic acids and polyhydric alcohol compounds, and amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyhydric amine compounds.
  • addition reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a nucleophilic substituent such as a hydroxy group, an amino group, or a sulfanyl group with monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies, or monofunctional or polyfunctional is also preferably used.
  • addition reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having electrophilic substituents such as isocyanate groups and epoxy groups with monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines, and thiols, and halogeno groups
  • substitution reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a leaving substituent such as a tosyloxy group and monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines, and thiols.
  • paragraphs 0113 to 0122 of JP-A-2016-027357 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • the radical cross-linking agent is preferably a compound having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure.
  • Compounds having a boiling point of 100° C. or higher under normal pressure include compounds described in paragraph 0203 of International Publication No. 2021/112189. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Preferred radical cross-linking agents other than those described above include radically polymerizable compounds described in paragraphs 0204 to 0208 of International Publication No. 2021/112189. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD D-330 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD D-320 (Nippon Kayaku ( Ltd.), A-TMMT (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD D-310 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)), dipenta Erythritol hexa(meth)acrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and A-DPH (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)), and their (meth)acryloyl groups are ethylene glycol,
  • radical cross-linking agents examples include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains, manufactured by Sartomer, SR-209, a bifunctional methacrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains, manufactured by Sartomer. 231, 239, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • DPCA-60 a hexafunctional acrylate having 6 pentyleneoxy chains, TPA-330, a trifunctional acrylate having 3 isobutyleneoxy chains, urethane oligomer UAS-10 , UAB-140 (manufactured by Nippon Paper Industries), NK Ester M-40G, NK Ester 4G, NK Ester M-9300, NK Ester A-9300, UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (Japan Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), Blenmer PME400 (manufactured by NOF Corporation) etc.
  • radical cross-linking agents examples include urethane acrylates such as those described in JP-B-48-041708, JP-A-51-037193, JP-B-02-032293, JP-B-02-016765, Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-049860, JP-B-56-017654, JP-B-62-039417 and JP-B-62-039418 are also suitable.
  • compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-01-105238 are used. can also
  • the radical cross-linking agent may be a radical cross-linking agent having an acid group such as a carboxy group or a phosphoric acid group.
  • a radical cross-linking agent having an acid group is preferably an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid. is more preferable.
  • the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol is a compound.
  • Examples of commercially available products include polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. such as M-510 and M-520.
  • the acid value of the radical cross-linking agent having an acid group is preferably 0.1-300 mgKOH/g, particularly preferably 1-100 mgKOH/g. If the acid value of the radical cross-linking agent is within the above range, the handleability in production is excellent, and furthermore the developability is excellent. Moreover, the polymerizability is good. The acid value is measured according to JIS K 0070:1992.
  • a radical cross-linking agent having at least one selected from the group consisting of a urea bond and a urethane bond (hereinafter also referred to as "crosslinking agent U") is also preferable.
  • the cross-linking agent U may have only one urea bond or urethane bond, may have one or more urea bonds and one or more urethane bonds, or may have two or more urea bonds without urethane bonds.
  • the total number of urea bonds and urethane bonds in the cross-linking agent U is 1 or more, preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 4, even more preferably 1 or 2.
  • the number of urea bonds in the cross-linking agent U is 1 or more, preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 4, 1 or 2 It is even more preferable to have Further, when the cross-linking agent U does not have a urea bond, the number of urethane bonds in the cross-linking agent U is 1 or more, preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 4, 1 or 2 It is even more preferable to have
  • the radically polymerizable group in the cross-linking agent U is not particularly limited, but includes a vinyl group, an allyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a (meth)acryloxy group, a (meth)acrylamide group, a vinylphenyl group, a maleimide group, and the like.
  • a (meth)acryloxy group, a (meth)acrylamide group, a vinylphenyl group, or a maleimide group is preferable, and a (meth)acryloxy group is more preferable.
  • the cross-linking agent U has two or more radically polymerizable groups, the structure of each radically polymerizable group may be the same or different.
  • the number of radically polymerizable groups in the cross-linking agent U may be only one, or may be two or more, preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, and particularly preferably 1 to 4.
  • the radically polymerizable group value (mass of compound per mol of radically polymerizable group) in the cross-linking agent U is preferably 150 to 400 g/mol.
  • the lower limit of the radical polymerizable group value is more preferably 200 g/mol or more, still more preferably 210 g/mol or more, still more preferably 220 g/mol or more, and 230 g/mol or more. is more preferred, 240 g/mol or more is particularly preferred, and 250 g/mol or more is most preferred.
  • the upper limit of the radically polymerizable group value is more preferably 350 g/mol or less, still more preferably 330 g/mol or less, and particularly preferably 300 g/mol or less.
  • the radical polymerizable group value is at least the lower limit, the cured product tends to have good chemical resistance, and when it is at most the upper limit, the developability tends to be good.
  • the polymerizable group value of the cross-linking agent U is preferably 210 to 400 g/mol, more preferably 220 to 400 g/mol.
  • the cross-linking agent U preferably has a structure represented, for example, by the following formula (U-1).
  • R U1 is a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
  • A is —O— or —NR N —
  • R N is a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
  • Z U1 is an m-valent organic group
  • Z U2 is an n+1-valent organic group
  • X is a radically polymerizable group
  • n is an integer of 1 or more
  • m is an integer of 1 or more.
  • R U1 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 3 N is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • hydrocarbon group a hydrocarbon group having 20 or less carbon atoms is preferable, a hydrocarbon group having 18 or less carbon atoms is more preferable, and a hydrocarbon group having 16 or less carbon atoms is even more preferable.
  • examples of the hydrocarbon group include a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group represented by a combination thereof.
  • RN represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, even more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • hydrocarbon group a hydrocarbon group having 20 or less carbon atoms is preferable, a hydrocarbon group having 18 or less carbon atoms is more preferable, and a hydrocarbon group having 16 or less carbon atoms is even more preferable.
  • examples of the hydrocarbon group include a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group represented by a combination thereof.
  • X is not particularly limited, but includes vinyl group, allyl group, (meth)acryloyl group, (meth)acryloxy group, (meth)acrylamide group, vinylphenyl group, maleimide group, etc.
  • a (meth)acryloxy group, a (meth)acrylamide group, a vinylphenyl group, or a maleimide group is preferable, and a (meth)acryloxy group is more preferable.
  • n is preferably an integer of 1 to 10, more preferably an integer of 1 to 4, even more preferably 1 or 2, particularly preferably 1 .
  • m is preferably an integer of 1 to 10, more preferably an integer of 1 to 4, even more preferably 1 or 2.
  • the crosslinker U also preferably has at least one of a hydroxy group, an alkyleneoxy group, an amide group and a cyano group.
  • the hydroxy group may be either an alcoholic hydroxy group or a phenolic hydroxy group, but an alcoholic hydroxy group is preferred.
  • the alkyleneoxy group is preferably an alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and an alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • An oxy group is more preferred, an ethylene group or a propylene group is even more preferred, and an ethylene group is particularly preferred.
  • the alkyleneoxy group may be included in the crosslinker U as a polyalkyleneoxy group.
  • the repeating number of the alkyleneoxy group is preferably 2-10, more preferably 2-6.
  • RN is as described above.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the cross-linking agent U has two or more structures selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy group, an alkyleneoxy group (however, when constituting a polyalkyleneoxy group, a polyalkyleneoxy group), an amide group and a cyano group. Although it may have it, the aspect which has only one in a molecule is also one of the preferable aspects of this invention.
  • the hydroxy group, alkyleneoxy group, amide group and cyano group may be present at any position of the cross-linking agent U, but from the viewpoint of chemical resistance, the cross-linking agent U should be At least one selected from the group consisting of an amide group and a cyano group and at least one radically polymerizable group contained in the cross-linking agent U are a linking group containing a urea bond or a urethane bond (hereinafter referred to as "linking group L2-1 Also referred to as ".”) is also one of the preferred aspects of the present invention.
  • the cross-linking agent U contains only one radically polymerizable group, at least one selected from the group consisting of the radically polymerizable group contained in the cross-linking agent U and a hydroxy group, an alkyleneoxy group, an amide group and a cyano group It is preferable that the two are linked by a linking group containing a urea bond or a urethane bond (hereinafter also referred to as "linking group L2-2").
  • the cross-linking agent U contains an alkyleneoxy group (however, a polyalkyleneoxy group when constituting a polyalkyleneoxy group) and has the linking group L2-1 or the linking group L2-2, the alkyleneoxy group (However, when constituting a polyalkyleneoxy group, the polyalkyleneoxy group)
  • the structure bonded to the side opposite to the connecting group L2-1 or the connecting group L2-2 is not particularly limited, but a hydrocarbon group, Groups represented by radically polymerizable groups or combinations thereof are preferred.
  • hydrocarbon group a hydrocarbon group having 20 or less carbon atoms is preferable, a hydrocarbon group having 18 or less carbon atoms is more preferable, and a hydrocarbon group having 16 or less carbon atoms is even more preferable.
  • examples of the hydrocarbon group include a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group represented by a combination thereof.
  • preferred aspects of the radically polymerizable group are the same as the preferred aspects of the radically polymerizable group in the cross-linking agent U described above.
  • the cross-linking agent U contains an amide group and has the linking group L2-1 or the linking group L2-2, the amide group binds to the side opposite to the linking group L2-1 or the linking group L2-2.
  • a group represented by a hydrocarbon group, a radically polymerizable group, or a combination thereof is preferred.
  • a hydrocarbon group having 20 or less carbon atoms is preferable, a hydrocarbon group having 18 or less carbon atoms is more preferable, and a hydrocarbon group having 16 or less carbon atoms is even more preferable.
  • examples of the hydrocarbon group include a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group represented by a combination thereof.
  • preferred aspects of the radically polymerizable group are the same as the preferred aspects of the radically polymerizable group in the cross-linking agent U described above.
  • the carbon atom side of the amide group may be bonded to the linking group L2-1 or the linking group L2-2, or the nitrogen atom side of the amide group may be linked to the linking group L2-1 or the linking group L2-2.
  • the cross-linking agent U preferably has a hydroxy group from the viewpoint of adhesion to the substrate, chemical resistance, and suppression of Cu voids.
  • the cross-linking agent U preferably contains an aromatic group from the viewpoint of compatibility with the specific resin.
  • the above aromatic group preferably bonds directly to the urea bond or urethane bond contained in the cross-linking agent U.
  • the cross-linking agent U contains two or more urea bonds or urethane bonds, it is preferable that one of the urea bonds or urethane bonds is directly bonded to the aromatic group.
  • the aromatic group may be an aromatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, or a condensed ring structure, but is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • aromatic hydrocarbon group an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms is preferable, and an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable, and two or more hydrogen atoms are removed from the benzene ring structure. groups are more preferred.
  • aromatic heterocyclic group a 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocyclic group is preferable.
  • Aromatic heterocycles in such aromatic heterocyclic groups include pyrrole, imidazole, triazole, tetrazole, pyrazole, furan, thiophene, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, triazine and the like. .
  • the heteroatom contained in the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • the aromatic group connects two or more radically polymerizable groups and is selected from the group consisting of a linking group containing a urea bond or a urethane bond, or the above-described hydroxy group, alkyleneoxy group, amide group and cyano group. and at least one radically polymerizable group contained in the cross-linking agent U.
  • the number of atoms (linked chain length) between the urea bond or urethane bond and the radically polymerizable group in the cross-linking agent U is not particularly limited, but is preferably 30 or less, more preferably 2 to 20, It is more preferably 2-10.
  • the cross-linking agent U contains a total of two or more urea bonds or urethane bonds, when it contains two or more radically polymerizable groups, or when it contains two or more urea bonds or urethane bonds and two or more radically polymerizable groups.
  • the minimum number of atoms (linkage chain length) between the urea bond or urethane bond and the radically polymerizable group may be within the above range.
  • the term “the number of atoms (linked chain length) between the urea bond or urethane bond and the polymerizable group” refers to the number of atoms on the route connecting the two atoms or groups of atoms to be linked. , the shortest (minimum number of atoms) connecting these concatenated objects.
  • the number of atoms (linkage chain length) between the urea bond and the radical polymerizable group (methacryloyloxy group) is 2.
  • the cross-linking agent U is a compound having a structure that does not have an axis of symmetry.
  • the fact that the cross-linking agent U does not have an axis of symmetry means that it is a bilaterally asymmetric compound that does not have an axis that produces the same molecule as the original molecule by rotating the entire compound.
  • the expression that the cross-linking agent U does not have an axis of symmetry means that the structural formula of the cross-linking agent U cannot be written in a form having an axis of symmetry. . Since the cross-linking agent U does not have an axis of symmetry, aggregation of the cross-linking agents U is suppressed in the composition film.
  • the molecular weight of the cross-linking agent U is preferably 100-2,000, preferably 150-1500, more preferably 200-900.
  • the method for producing the cross-linking agent U is not particularly limited, but for example, it can be obtained by reacting a compound having a radically polymerizable compound and an isocyanate group with a compound having at least one of a hydroxy group and an amino group.
  • cross-linking agent U Specific examples of the cross-linking agent U are shown below, but the cross-linking agent U is not limited thereto.
  • the resin composition preferably uses a bifunctional methacrylate or acrylate.
  • Specific compounds include triethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, tetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, PEG (polyethylene glycol) 200 diacrylate, PEG200 dimethacrylate, PEG600 diacrylate, and PEG600 diacrylate.
  • PEG200 diacrylate is a polyethylene glycol diacrylate having a polyethylene glycol chain formula weight of about 200.
  • a monofunctional radical cross-linking agent can be preferably used as the radical cross-linking agent from the viewpoint of suppressing warpage associated with the elastic modulus control of the pattern (cured product).
  • Monofunctional radical cross-linking agents include n-butyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, butoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, carbitol (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, ) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, N-methylol (meth) acrylamide, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, etc.
  • N-vinyl compounds such as N-vinylpyrrolidone and N-vinylcaprolactam
  • allyl glycidyl ether are preferably used.
  • the monofunctional radical cross-linking agent a compound having a boiling point of 100° C. or higher under normal pressure is also preferable in order to suppress volatilization before exposure.
  • Other di- or higher functional radical cross-linking agents include allyl compounds such as diallyl phthalate and triallyl trimellitate.
  • a radical cross-linking agent When a radical cross-linking agent is contained, its content is preferably more than 0% by mass and 60% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. More preferably, the lower limit is 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 50% by mass or less, and even more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • a single radical cross-linking agent may be used alone, or a mixture of two or more may be used. When two or more are used in combination, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains another cross-linking agent different from the radical cross-linking agent described above.
  • the other cross-linking agent refers to a cross-linking agent other than the above-described radical cross-linking agent, and the above-described photoacid generator or photobase generator reacts with other compounds in the composition or reacts with them.
  • the compound has a plurality of groups in the molecule that promote the reaction forming covalent bonds with the product, and covalent bonds are formed with other compounds or reaction products thereof in the composition. Compounds having a plurality of groups in the molecule, the reaction of which is promoted by the action of an acid or base, are preferred.
  • the acid or base is preferably an acid or base generated from a photoacid generator or a photobase generator in the exposure step.
  • a photoacid generator or a photobase generator in the exposure step.
  • cross-linking agents compounds having at least one group selected from the group consisting of an acyloxymethyl group, a methylol group, an ethylol group and an alkoxymethyl group are preferred.
  • a compound having a structure in which at least one group selected from the group consisting of groups is directly bonded to a nitrogen atom is more preferred.
  • cross-linking agents include, for example, amino group-containing compounds such as melamine, glycoluril, urea, alkylene urea, and benzoguanamine, which are reacted with formaldehyde or formaldehyde and alcohol, and the hydrogen atoms of the amino groups are converted into acyloxymethyl groups, methylol groups,
  • a compound having a structure substituted with an ethylol group or an alkoxymethyl group can be mentioned.
  • the method for producing these compounds is not particularly limited as long as they have the same structure as the compounds produced by the above methods. Oligomers formed by self-condensation of methylol groups of these compounds may also be used.
  • a melamine-based crosslinking agent is a melamine-based crosslinking agent
  • a glycoluril, urea or alkyleneurea-based crosslinking agent is a urea-based crosslinking agent
  • an alkyleneurea-based crosslinking agent is an alkyleneurea-based crosslinking agent.
  • a cross-linking agent using benzoguanamine is called a benzoguanamine-based cross-linking agent.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of urea-based cross-linking agents and melamine-based cross-linking agents. More preferably, it contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of agents.
  • an alkoxymethyl group or an acyloxymethyl group is directly substituted on the nitrogen atom of an aromatic group or the following urea structure, or on a triazine.
  • the alkoxymethyl group or acyloxymethyl group of the above compound preferably has 2 to 5 carbon atoms, preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and more preferably 2 carbon atoms.
  • the total number of alkoxymethyl groups and acyloxymethyl groups in the above compound is preferably 1-10, more preferably 2-8, and particularly preferably 3-6.
  • the molecular weight of the compound is preferably 1500 or less, preferably 180-1200.
  • R 100 represents an alkyl group or an acyl group.
  • R 101 and R 102 each independently represent a monovalent organic group and may combine with each other to form a ring.
  • Examples of compounds in which an alkoxymethyl group or an acyloxymethyl group is directly substituted by an aromatic group include compounds represented by the following general formula.
  • X represents a single bond or a divalent organic group
  • each R 104 independently represents an alkyl group or an acyl group
  • R 103 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group , or a group that decomposes under the action of an acid to produce an alkali-soluble group (e.g., a group that leaves under the action of an acid, a group represented by —C(R 4 ) 2 COOR 5 (R 4 is independently It represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 5 represents a group that leaves under the action of an acid.)).
  • R 105 each independently represents an alkyl group or alkenyl group, a, b and c are each independently 1 to 3, d is 0 to 4, e is 0 to 3, f is 0 to 3 , a+d is 5 or less, b+e is 4 or less, and c+f is 4 or less.
  • R 5 in the group represented by —C(R 4 ) 2 COOR 5 a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid to produce an alkali-soluble group, a group that is eliminated by the action of an acid, and —C(R 36 )(R 37 )(R 38 ), —C(R 36 )(R 37 )(OR 39 ), —C(R 01 )(R 02 )(OR 39 ), and the like.
  • R 36 to R 39 each independently represent an alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, aralkyl group or alkenyl group.
  • R 36 and R 37 may combine with each other to form a ring.
  • alkyl group an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
  • a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms is preferable, and a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the cycloalkyl group may have a monocyclic structure or a polycyclic structure such as a condensed ring.
  • the aryl group is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably a phenyl group.
  • an aralkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and an aralkyl group having 7 to 16 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the aralkyl group is intended to be an aryl group substituted with an alkyl group, and preferred embodiments of these alkyl and aryl groups are the same as the preferred embodiments of the alkyl and aryl groups described above.
  • the alkenyl group is preferably an alkenyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkenyl group having 3 to 16 carbon atoms. Moreover, these groups may further have a known substituent within the range in which the effects of the present invention can be obtained.
  • R 01 and R 02 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group or an alkenyl group.
  • the group that is decomposed by the action of an acid to form an alkali-soluble group or the group that is eliminated by the action of an acid is preferably a tertiary alkyl ester group, an acetal group, a cumyl ester group, an enol ester group, or the like. More preferred are tertiary alkyl ester groups and acetal groups.
  • the compound having at least one group selected from the group consisting of acyloxymethyl group, methylol group, ethylol group and alkoxymethyl group includes at least one group selected from the group consisting of urea bond and urethane bond.
  • compounds having A preferred embodiment of the above compound is the above-described crosslinking except that the polymerizable group is not a radically polymerizable group but at least one group selected from the group consisting of an acyloxymethyl group, a methylol group, an ethylol group and an alkoxymethyl group. It is the same as the preferred embodiment of agent U.
  • Specific examples of compounds having at least one group selected from the group consisting of an acyloxymethyl group, a methylol group and an ethylol group include the following structures.
  • Examples of the compound having an acyloxymethyl group include compounds obtained by changing the alkoxymethyl group of the following compounds to an acyloxymethyl group.
  • Compounds having an alkoxymethyl group or acyloxymethyl in the molecule include, but are not limited to, the following compounds.
  • the compound containing at least one of an alkoxymethyl group and an acyloxymethyl group a commercially available one or a compound synthesized by a known method may be used. From the viewpoint of heat resistance, compounds in which an alkoxymethyl group or acyloxymethyl group is directly substituted on an aromatic ring or a triazine ring are preferred.
  • melamine-based cross-linking agents include hexamethoxymethylmelamine, hexaethoxymethylmelamine, hexapropoxymethylmelamine, and hexabutoxybutylmelamine.
  • urea-based cross-linking agents include monohydroxymethylated glycoluril, dihydroxymethylated glycoluril, trihydroxymethylated glycoluril, tetrahydroxymethylated glycoluril, monomethoxymethylated glycoluril, and dimethoxymethylated glycol.
  • Uril trimethoxymethylated glycoluril, tetramethoxymethylated glycoluril, monoethoxymethylated glycoluril, diethoxymethylated glycoluril, triethoxymethylated glycoluril, tetraethoxymethylated glycoluril, monopropoxymethylated glycoluril , dipropoxymethylated glycoluril, tripropoxymethylated glycoluril, tetrapropoxymethylated glycoluril, monobutoxymethylated glycoluril, dibutoxymethylated glycoluril, tributoxymethylated glycoluril, or tetrabutoxymethylated glycoluril glycoluril-based crosslinkers such as uril; urea-based cross-linking agents such as bismethoxymethylurea, bisethoxymethylurea, bispropoxymethylurea, and bisbutoxymethylurea; monohydroxymethylated ethyleneurea or dihydroxymethylated ethyleneurea, monomethoxymethylated ethyleneurea, dimethoxymethylated
  • benzoguanamine-based cross-linking agents include monohydroxymethylated benzoguanamine, dihydroxymethylated benzoguanamine, trihydroxymethylated benzoguanamine, tetrahydroxymethylated benzoguanamine, monomethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, dimethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, and trimethoxymethylated benzoguanamine.
  • tetramethoxymethylated benzoguanamine monoethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, diethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, triethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, tetraethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, monopropoxymethylated benzoguanamine, dipropoxymethylated benzoguanamine, tripropoxymethylated benzoguanamine, tetra propoxymethylated benzoguanamine, monobutoxymethylated benzoguanamine, dibutoxymethylated benzoguanamine, tributoxymethylated benzoguanamine, tetrabutoxymethylated benzoguanamine, and the like.
  • the compound having at least one group selected from the group consisting of a methylol group and an alkoxymethyl group includes at least one group selected from the group consisting of a methylol group and an alkoxymethyl group on an aromatic ring (preferably a benzene ring).
  • Compounds to which a seed group is directly attached are also preferably used. Specific examples of such compounds include benzenedimethanol, bis(hydroxymethyl)cresol, bis(hydroxymethyl)dimethoxybenzene, bis(hydroxymethyl)diphenyl ether, bis(hydroxymethyl)benzophenone, hydroxymethylphenyl hydroxymethylbenzoate.
  • suitable commercial products include 46DMOC, 46DMOEP (manufactured by Asahi Organic Chemicals Industry Co., Ltd.), DML-PC, DML-PEP, DML-OC, and DML-OEP.
  • DML-34X DML-PTBP, DML-PCHP, DML-OCHP, DML-PFP, DML-PSBP, DML-POP, DML-MBOC, DML-MBPC, DML-MTrisPC, DML-BisOC-Z, DML-BisOCHP -Z, DML-BPC, DMLBisOC-P, DMOM-PC, DMOM-PTBP, DMOM-MBPC, TriML-P, TriML-35XL, TML-HQ, TML-BP, TML-pp-BPF, TML-BPE, TML -BPA, TML-BPAF, TML-BPAP, TMOM-BP, TMOM-BPE, TMOM-BPA, TMOM-BPAF, TMOM-BPAP, HML-TPPHBA, HML-TPHAP, HMOM-TPPHBA, HMOM-TPHAP (Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Nikalac (registered
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of epoxy compounds, oxetane compounds, and benzoxazine compounds as another cross-linking agent.
  • Epoxy compound (compound having an epoxy group) -
  • the epoxy compound is preferably a compound having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule.
  • the epoxy group undergoes a cross-linking reaction at 200° C. or less and does not undergo a dehydration reaction resulting from the cross-linking, so film shrinkage does not easily occur. Therefore, containing an epoxy compound is effective for low-temperature curing and suppression of warpage of the resin composition of the present invention.
  • the epoxy compound preferably contains a polyethylene oxide group.
  • the polyethylene oxide group means that the number of repeating units of ethylene oxide is 2 or more, and the number of repeating units is preferably 2-15.
  • epoxy compounds include bisphenol A type epoxy resin; bisphenol F type epoxy resin; propylene glycol diglycidyl ether, neopentyl glycol diglycidyl ether, ethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, butylene glycol diglycidyl ether, hexamethylene glycol diglycidyl ether.
  • alkylene glycol type epoxy resins such as trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether or polyhydric alcohol hydrocarbon type epoxy resins
  • polyalkylene glycol type epoxy resins such as polypropylene glycol diglycidyl ether
  • epoxy groups such as polymethyl (glycidyloxypropyl) siloxane Examples include, but are not limited to, containing silicones and the like.
  • Epiclon (registered trademark) 850-S Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-4032, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-7200, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-820, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-4700, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-4770, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-830LVP, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-8183, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-8169, Epiclon (registered trademark) N-660, Epiclon (registered trademark) N-665-EXP-S, Epiclon (registered trademark) N-740 (trade name, manufactured by DIC Corporation), Ricaresin (registered trademark) BEO-20E, Jamaicaresin (registered trademark) BEO-60E, Ricaresin (registered trademark) ) HBE-100, Ricaresin (registered trademark) DME-100, Ricaresin (registered trademark)
  • n is an integer of 1-5 and m is an integer of 1-20.
  • n 1 to 2 and m is 3 to 7 from the viewpoint of achieving both heat resistance and elongation improvement.
  • oxetane compound compound having an oxetanyl group
  • the oxetane compounds include compounds having two or more oxetane rings in one molecule, 3-ethyl-3-hydroxymethyloxetane, 1,4-bis ⁇ [(3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl)methoxy]methyl ⁇ benzene, 3-ethyl-3-(2-ethylhexylmethyl)oxetane, 1,4-benzenedicarboxylic acid-bis[(3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl)methyl]ester and the like can be mentioned.
  • Aron oxetane series manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. eg, OXT-121, OXT-221
  • OXT-121, OXT-221 can be suitably used, and these can be used alone or in combination of two or more. good.
  • a benzoxazine compound (compound having a benzoxazolyl group)-
  • a benzoxazine compound is preferable because it is a cross-linking reaction derived from a ring-opening addition reaction, so that degassing does not occur during curing, and thermal shrinkage is reduced to suppress the occurrence of warping.
  • benzoxazine compounds include Pd-type benzoxazine, Fa-type benzoxazine (these are trade names, manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.), benzoxazine adducts of polyhydroxystyrene resins, phenol novolac-type dihydrobenzoxazines, oxazine compounds. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the other cross-linking agent is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. It is more preferably 5 to 15% by mass, particularly preferably 1.0 to 10% by mass.
  • Other cross-linking agents may be contained alone, or may be contained in two or more. When two or more other cross-linking agents are contained, the total is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization initiator capable of initiating polymerization by light and/or heat. In particular, it preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator as used herein does not include compounds corresponding to the above-mentioned specific metallocene compounds.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • the radical photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known radical photopolymerization initiators. For example, a photoradical polymerization initiator having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet region to the visible region is preferred. It may also be an activator that produces an active radical by producing some action with a photoexcited sensitizer.
  • the radical photopolymerization initiator contains at least one compound having a molar extinction coefficient of at least about 50 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 within the wavelength range of about 240 to 800 nm (preferably 330 to 500 nm). is preferred.
  • the molar extinction coefficient of a compound can be measured using known methods. For example, it is preferable to measure with an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian) using an ethyl acetate solvent at a concentration of 0.01 g/L.
  • any known compound can be used as the photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, compounds having a trihalomethyl group, etc.
  • acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime derivatives, etc.
  • ketone compounds include compounds described in paragraph 0087 of JP-A-2015-087611, the content of which is incorporated herein.
  • Kayacure-DETX-S manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. is also suitably used.
  • a hydroxyacetophenone compound, an aminoacetophenone compound, and an acylphosphine compound can be suitably used as the radical photopolymerization initiator. More specifically, for example, aminoacetophenone-based initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and acylphosphine oxide-based initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can be used. incorporated.
  • ⁇ - ⁇ Omnirad 184 ⁇ Omnirad 1173 ⁇ Omnirad 2959 ⁇ Omnirad 127( ⁇ IGM Resins B.V. ⁇ ) ⁇ IRGACURE 184(IRGACURE ⁇ ) ⁇ DAROCUR 1173 ⁇ IRGACURE 500 ⁇ IRGACURE -2959 and IRGACURE 127 (trade names: both manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • ⁇ -Aminoketone initiators include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), IRGACURE 907, IRGACURE 369, and IRGACURE 379 (trade names: all BASF company) can be used.
  • acylphosphine oxide-based initiators for example, compounds described in paragraphs 0161 to 0163 of WO2021/112189 can also be preferably used. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the photoradical polymerization initiator is more preferably an oxime compound.
  • an oxime compound By using an oxime compound, the exposure latitude can be improved more effectively.
  • Oxime compounds are particularly preferred because they have a wide exposure latitude (exposure margin) and also act as photocuring accelerators.
  • oxime compound examples include compounds described in JP-A-2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A-2000-080068, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, J. Am. C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.1653-1660); C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.156-162), compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp.202-232), compounds described in JP-A-2000-066385, Compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2017-019766, compounds described in Patent No.
  • Preferred oxime compounds include, for example, compounds having the following structures, 3-(benzoyloxy(imino))butan-2-one, 3-(acetoxy(imino))butan-2-one, 3-(propionyloxy( imino))butan-2-one, 2-(acetoxy(imino))pentan-3-one, 2-(acetoxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-(benzoyloxy(imino)) -1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-((4-toluenesulfonyloxy)imino)butan-2-one, and 2-(ethoxycarbonyloxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one, etc.
  • an oxime compound an oxime-based radical photopolymerization initiator
  • DFI-091 manufactured by Daito Chemix Co., Ltd.
  • SpeedCure PDO manufactured by SARTOMER ARKEMA
  • an oxime compound having the following structure can be used.
  • photoradical polymerization initiators examples include oxime compounds having a fluorene ring described in paragraphs 0169 to 0171 of International Publication No. 2021/112189, and oximes having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring.
  • Compounds, oxime compounds having fluorine atoms can also be used. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • an oxime compound having a nitro group an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton, and a substituent having a hydroxy group on the carbazole skeleton described in paragraphs 0208 to 0210 of International Publication No. 2021/020359 are used. Bound oxime compounds can also be used. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • an oxime compound having an aromatic ring group Ar 2 OX1 in which an electron-withdrawing group is introduced into the aromatic ring (hereinafter also referred to as oxime compound OX) can be used.
  • the electron-withdrawing group of the aromatic ring group Ar OX1 include an acyl group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, an alkylsulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, and a cyano group.
  • a benzoyl group may have a substituent.
  • substituents include halogen atoms, cyano groups, nitro groups, hydroxy groups, alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryl groups, aryloxy groups, heterocyclic groups, heterocyclic oxy groups, alkenyl groups, alkylsulfanyl groups, arylsulfanyl groups, It is preferably an acyl group or an amino group, more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylsulfanyl group, an arylsulfanyl group or an amino group.
  • a sulfanyl group or an amino group is more preferred.
  • the oxime compound OX is preferably at least one selected from the compounds represented by the formula (OX1) and the compounds represented by the formula (OX2), more preferably the compound represented by the formula (OX2). preferable.
  • R X1 is an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkoxy group, aryl group, aryloxy group, heterocyclic group, heterocyclicoxy group, alkylsulfanyl group, arylsulfanyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl a group, an arylsulfonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amino group, a phosphinoyl group, a carbamoyl group or a sulfamoyl group
  • R X2 is an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkoxy group, aryl group, aryloxy group, heterocyclic group,
  • R X12 is an electron-withdrawing group
  • R X10 , R X11 , R X13 and R X14 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • oxime compound OX examples include compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0105 of Japanese Patent No. 4600600, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • oxime compounds having specific substituents shown in JP-A-2007-269779 and oxime compounds having a thioaryl group shown in JP-A-2009-191061. incorporated herein.
  • photoradical polymerization initiators include trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triaryl selected from the group consisting of imidazole dimers, onium salt compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds; are preferred.
  • More preferred radical photopolymerization initiators are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, onium salt compounds, benzophenone compounds, and acetophenone compounds.
  • At least one compound selected from the group consisting of trihalomethyltriazine compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, and benzophenone compounds is more preferred, and metallocene compounds or oxime compounds are even more preferred. .
  • radical photopolymerization initiator compounds described in paragraphs 0175 to 0179 of International Publication No. 2021/020359 can be used. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • radical photopolymerization initiator a difunctional or trifunctional or higher radical photopolymerization initiator may be used.
  • a radical photopolymerization initiator two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the radical photopolymerization initiator, so good sensitivity can be obtained.
  • the crystallinity is lowered, the solubility in a solvent or the like is improved, and precipitation becomes difficult over time, and the stability over time of the resin composition can be improved.
  • Specific examples of bifunctional or trifunctional or higher photoradical polymerization initiators include Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No.
  • a photopolymerization initiator When a photopolymerization initiator is included, its content is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. , more preferably 0.5 to 15% by mass, and still more preferably 1.0 to 10% by mass. Only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be contained, or two or more types may be contained. When two or more photopolymerization initiators are contained, the total amount is preferably within the above range. In addition, since the photopolymerization initiator may also function as a thermal polymerization initiator, the crosslinking by the photopolymerization initiator may be further advanced by heating with an oven, a hot plate, or the like.
  • the resin composition may contain a sensitizer.
  • a sensitizer absorbs specific actinic radiation and enters an electronically excited state.
  • the sensitizer in an electronically excited state comes into contact with a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a photoradical polymerization initiator, or the like, and causes electron transfer, energy transfer, heat generation, or the like.
  • the thermal radical polymerization initiator and the photoradical polymerization initiator undergo chemical changes and are decomposed to generate radicals, acids or bases.
  • Usable sensitizers include benzophenones, Michler's ketones, coumarins, pyrazole azos, anilinoazos, triphenylmethanes, anthraquinones, anthracenes, anthrapyridones, benzylidenes, oxonols, and pyrazolotriazole azos. , pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine, xanthene, phthalocyanine, benzopyran, and indigo compounds.
  • Sensitizers include, for example, Michler's ketone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, 2,5-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)cyclopentane, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal) Cyclohexanone, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)-4-methylcyclohexanone, 4,4'-bis(dimethylamino)chalcone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)chalcone, p-dimethylaminocinnamyl denindanone, p-dimethylaminobenzylideneindanone, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylbiphenylene)-benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)iso naphthothiazole,
  • the content of the sensitizer is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resin composition. more preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass.
  • the sensitizers may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain a chain transfer agent.
  • the chain transfer agent is defined, for example, in Kobunshi Dictionary, 3rd edition (edited by Kobunshi Gakkai, 2005), pp. 683-684.
  • Chain transfer agents include, for example, a group of compounds having —S—S—, —SO 2 —S—, —NO—, SH, PH, SiH, and GeH in the molecule, RAFT (Reversible Addition Fragmentation Chain Transfer )
  • Dithiobenzoate, trithiocarbonate, dithiocarbamate, xanthate compounds and the like having a thiocarbonylthio group used for polymerization are used. They can either donate hydrogen to less active radicals to generate radicals, or they can be oxidized and then deprotonated to generate radicals.
  • thiol compounds can be preferably used.
  • chain transfer agent can also use the compounds described in paragraphs 0152 to 0153 of International Publication No. 2015/199219, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. 1 to 10 parts by mass is more preferable, and 0.5 to 5 parts by mass is even more preferable.
  • One type of chain transfer agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more chain transfer agents are used, the total is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain a base generator.
  • the base generator is a compound capable of generating a base by physical or chemical action.
  • Preferred base generators for the resin composition of the present invention include thermal base generators and photobase generators.
  • the resin composition when the resin composition contains a cyclized resin precursor, the resin composition preferably contains a base generator.
  • the base generator may be an ionic base generator or a non-ionic base generator.
  • bases generated from base generators include secondary amines and tertiary amines. There are no particular restrictions on the base generator used in the present invention, and known base generators can be used. Examples of known base generators include carbamoyloxime compounds, carbamoylhydroxylamine compounds, carbamic acid compounds, formamide compounds, acetamide compounds, carbamate compounds, benzylcarbamate compounds, nitrobenzylcarbamate compounds, sulfonamide compounds, imidazole derivative compounds, and amine imides.
  • nonionic base generators include compounds represented by formula (B1) or formula (B2) described in paragraphs 0275 to 0285 of WO2021/112189, and WO2020/066416.
  • the compound represented by formula (N1) described in paragraphs 0102 to 00162 of No. 1 or the base generator is preferably a thermal base generator described in paragraphs 0013 to 0041 of WO 2020/054226. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • base generators include the following, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
  • the molecular weight of the nonionic base generator is preferably 800 or less, more preferably 600 or less, and even more preferably 500 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 100 or more, more preferably 200 or more, and even more preferably 300 or more.
  • Specific preferred compounds of the ionic base generator include, for example, compounds described in paragraphs 0148 to 0163 of International Publication No. 2018/038002.
  • ammonium salts include the following compounds, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • iminium salts include the following compounds, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the content of the base generator is preferably 0.1 to 50 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin in the resin composition of the present invention.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.3 parts by mass or more, and even more preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30 parts by mass or less, still more preferably 20 parts by mass or less, even more preferably 10 parts by mass or less, and may be 5 parts by mass or less, or may be 4 parts by mass or less.
  • One or two or more base generators can be used. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent. Any known solvent can be used as the solvent.
  • the solvent is preferably an organic solvent.
  • Organic solvents include compounds such as esters, ethers, ketones, cyclic hydrocarbons, sulfoxides, amides, ureas and alcohols.
  • Esters such as ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, hexyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, ⁇ -butyrolactone , ⁇ -caprolactone, ⁇ -valerolactone, alkyl alkyloxyacetates (e.g. methyl alkyloxyacetate, ethyl alkyloxyacetate, butyl alkyloxyacetate (e.g.
  • 3-alkyloxypropionic acid alkyl esters e.g., methyl 3-alkyloxypropionate, ethyl 3-alkyloxypropionate, etc.
  • 2-alkyloxypropionate alkyl esters e.g., methyl 2-alkyloxypropionate, ethyl 2-alkyloxypropionate, 2-alkyl propyl oxypropionate (e.g., methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)
  • 2-alkyloxy- Methyl 2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-alkyloxy-2-methylpropionate e.g., methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.
  • ethers include ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, diethylene glycol butyl methyl ether, triethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, Methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol Preferred examples include monobutyl ether acetate
  • Suitable ketones include, for example, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, levoglucosenone, dihydrolevoglucosenone and the like.
  • Suitable examples of cyclic hydrocarbons include aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene and anisole, and cyclic terpenes such as limonene.
  • Suitable sulfoxides include, for example, dimethyl sulfoxide.
  • Suitable ureas include N,N,N',N'-tetramethylurea, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, and the like.
  • Alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol, 1-pentanol, 1-hexanol, benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-ethoxyethanol, Diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monohexyl ether, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, polypropylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobenzyl ether, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether, methylphenyl carbinol, n-amyl alcohol, methyl amyl alcohol, diacetone alcohol and the like.
  • a combination of dimethyl sulfoxide and ⁇ -butyrolactone or a combination of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and ethyl lactate is particularly
  • the content of the solvent is preferably an amount such that the total solid concentration of the resin composition of the present invention is 5 to 80% by mass, more preferably 5 to 75% by mass. More preferably, the amount is from 10 to 70% by mass, and even more preferably from 20 to 70% by mass.
  • the solvent content may be adjusted according to the desired thickness of the coating and the method of application.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain only one type of solvent, or may contain two or more types. When two or more solvents are contained, the total is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a metal adhesion improver for improving adhesion to metal materials used for electrodes, wiring, and the like.
  • metal adhesion improvers include alkoxysilyl group-containing silane coupling agents, aluminum-based adhesion aids, titanium-based adhesion aids, compounds having a sulfonamide structure and compounds having a thiourea structure, phosphoric acid derivative compounds, and ⁇ -ketoesters. compounds, amino compounds, and the like.
  • silane coupling agent examples include compounds described in paragraph 0316 of International Publication No. 2021/112189 and compounds described in paragraphs 0067 to 0078 of JP-A-2018-173573, the contents of which are herein described. incorporated. It is also preferable to use two or more different silane coupling agents as described in paragraphs 0050 to 0058 of JP-A-2011-128358. Moreover, it is also preferable to use the following compound as a silane coupling agent. In the following formulas, Me represents a methyl group and Et represents an ethyl group.
  • silane coupling agents include, for example, vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, 2-(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-glycid.
  • xypropyltrimethoxysilane 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, p-styryltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane Silane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, N-2-(aminoethyl)-3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, N-2 -(aminoethyl)-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimeth
  • Aluminum-based adhesion promoters include aluminum tris(ethylacetoacetate), aluminum tris(acetylacetonate), ethylacetoacetate aluminum diisopropylate, and the like.
  • the content of the metal adhesion improver is preferably 0.01 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass, and still more preferably 0.01 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the specific resin. It is in the range of 5 to 5 parts by mass. When it is at least the above lower limit value, the adhesiveness between the pattern and the metal layer is improved, and when it is at most the above upper limit value, the heat resistance and mechanical properties of the pattern are improved.
  • One type of metal adhesion improver may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, the total is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably further contains a migration inhibitor.
  • a migration inhibitor By including the migration inhibitor, it becomes possible to effectively suppress the migration of metal ions derived from the metal layer (metal wiring) into the film.
  • Migration inhibitors are not particularly limited, but heterocyclic rings (pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrazole ring, isoxazole ring, isothiazole ring, tetrazole ring, pyridine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, 2H-pyran ring and 6H-pyran ring, triazine ring), compounds having thioureas and sulfanyl groups, hindered phenolic compounds , salicylic acid derivative-based compounds, and hydrazide derivative-based compounds.
  • heterocyclic rings pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring,
  • triazole compounds such as 1,2,4-triazole, benzotriazole, 3-amino-1,2,4-triazole, 3,5-diamino-1,2,4-triazole, 1H-tetrazole, 5- Tetrazole compounds such as phenyltetrazole and 5-amino-1H-tetrazole can be preferably used.
  • an ion trapping agent that traps anions such as halogen ions can be used.
  • migration inhibitors include the following compounds.
  • the content of the migration inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. , more preferably 0.05 to 2.0% by mass, and even more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass.
  • migration inhibitor Only one type of migration inhibitor may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more migration inhibitors are used, the total is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization inhibitor.
  • Polymerization inhibitors include phenol compounds, quinone compounds, amino compounds, N-oxyl free radical compounds, nitro compounds, nitroso compounds, heteroaromatic compounds, metal compounds and the like.
  • Specific compounds of the polymerization inhibitor include compounds described in paragraph 0310 of International Publication No. 2021/112189, p-hydroquinone, o-hydroquinone, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1- Oxyl free radical, phenoxazine, and the like. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. It is more preferably from 0.02 to 15% by mass, and even more preferably from 0.05 to 10% by mass.
  • polymerization inhibitor Only one type of polymerization inhibitor may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more polymerization inhibitors are used, the total is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of urea compounds, carbodiimide compounds and isourea compounds (hereinafter referred to as " (also referred to as "urea compounds, etc.”).
  • the urea compound is a compound represented by the following formula (UR-1)
  • the carbodiimide compound is a compound represented by the following formula (UR-2)
  • the isourea compound is a compound represented by the following formula (UR-3).
  • R 11 and R 12 are each independently an optionally substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon having 1 to 7 carbon atoms group
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an optionally substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a substituted group
  • R 33 represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R 11 and R 12 are each independently an unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, or a primary amine salt structure or secondary amine salt as a substituent.
  • unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 7 carbon atoms are more preferable.
  • the unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms for R 11 and R 12 is preferably an unsubstituted saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, and an unsubstituted A saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group is more preferred, and an ethyl group, isopropyl group, t-butyl group or cyclohexyl group is more preferred.
  • R 11 and R 12 each independently have 2 to 2 carbon atoms having at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a thiol group, and an alkylthio group.
  • 7 may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. Although the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 7 carbon atoms may have two or more substituents, an embodiment having only one substituent is also one of preferred embodiments of the present invention.
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an optionally substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms.
  • R 21 and R 22 are unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, or 1 to 7 carbon atoms having an amino group or a quaternary ammonium group as a substituent. is preferred, and an unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms is more preferred.
  • the unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms in R 21 and R 22 or the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms having the substituent is preferable. Aspects are similar to those shown in the description of R 11 and R 12 respectively.
  • R 31 and R 32 are unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, or 1 to 7 carbon atoms having an amino group or a quaternary ammonium group as a substituent. is preferred, and an unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms is more preferred.
  • R 31 and R 32 are preferably the above unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms or the above substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms. Aspects are similar to those shown in the description of R 11 and R 12 respectively.
  • R 33 represents an optionally substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms and is an unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms. is preferred, an unsubstituted saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms is more preferred, and a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferred.
  • R 33 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group or a t-butyl group, more preferably an ethyl group.
  • urea compounds include, but are not limited to, dicyclohexylurea, diisopropylurea, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, diisopropylcarbodiimide, dicyclohexylisourea, and diisopropylisourea.
  • the total content of urea compounds and the like is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 parts by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 8.0 parts by mass, and 1.0 to 6.0 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the specific resin. Part is more preferred.
  • the urea compounds and the like may be used singly or in combination of two or more. When two or more are used in combination, the total content thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may optionally contain various additives, such as surfactants, higher fatty acid derivatives, thermal polymerization initiators, inorganic particles, ultraviolet absorbers, as long as the effects of the present invention can be obtained.
  • additives such as surfactants, higher fatty acid derivatives, thermal polymerization initiators, inorganic particles, ultraviolet absorbers, as long as the effects of the present invention can be obtained.
  • Organic titanium compounds, antioxidants, anti-agglomerating agents, phenolic compounds, other polymer compounds, plasticizers and other auxiliaries (for example, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, etc.) can be blended. Properties such as film physical properties can be adjusted by appropriately containing these components. These components are described, for example, from paragraph number 0183 of JP-A-2012-003225 (paragraph number 0237 of corresponding US Patent Application Publication No.
  • the total blending amount is preferably 3% by mass or less of the solid content of the resin composition of the present invention.
  • surfactant various surfactants such as fluorine-based surfactants, silicone-based surfactants, and hydrocarbon-based surfactants can be used.
  • the surfactant may be a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, or an anionic surfactant.
  • the liquid properties (especially fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved, and the uniformity of coating thickness and liquid saving are further improved. can do. That is, when a film is formed using a coating liquid to which a composition containing a surfactant is applied, the interfacial tension between the surface to be coated and the coating liquid is reduced, and the wettability to the surface to be coated is improved. , the coatability to the surface to be coated is improved. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably form a film having a uniform thickness with little unevenness in thickness.
  • Fluorinated surfactants include compounds described in paragraph 0328 of WO2021/112189. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the fluorosurfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meta)
  • a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used, and the following compounds are also exemplified as fluorine-based surfactants used in the present invention.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3,000 to 50,000, more preferably 5,000 to 30,000.
  • a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated group in a side chain can also be used as a fluorine-based surfactant. Specific examples include compounds described in paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and paragraphs 0289 to 0295 of JP-A-2010-164965, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Commercially available products include Megafac RS-101, RS-102 and RS-718K manufactured by DIC Corporation.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorine-based surfactant is preferably 3-40% by mass, more preferably 5-30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7-25% by mass.
  • a fluorosurfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of the thickness of the coating film and saving liquid, and has good solubility in the composition.
  • Silicone-based surfactants, hydrocarbon-based surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, and anionic surfactants are described in paragraphs 0329 to 0334 of WO 2021/112189, respectively. compound. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the surfactant content is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • a higher fatty acid derivative such as behenic acid or behenic acid amide is added in order to prevent polymerization inhibition caused by oxygen. may be unevenly distributed on the surface of the resin composition of the present invention
  • the content of the higher fatty acid derivative is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass relative to the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. Only one type of higher fatty acid derivative may be used, or two or more types thereof may be used. When two or more higher fatty acid derivatives are used, the total is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain a thermal polymerization initiator, particularly a thermal radical polymerization initiator.
  • a thermal radical polymerization initiator is a compound that generates radicals by thermal energy and initiates or accelerates the polymerization reaction of a polymerizable compound. By adding a thermal radical polymerization initiator, the polymerization reaction of the resin and the polymerizable compound can be advanced, so that the solvent resistance can be further improved.
  • the photopolymerization initiator described above may also have a function of initiating polymerization by heat, and may be added as a thermal polymerization initiator.
  • thermal radical polymerization initiators include compounds described in paragraphs 0074 to 0118 of JP-A-2008-063554, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • thermal polymerization initiator When a thermal polymerization initiator is included, its content is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. , more preferably 0.5 to 15% by mass.
  • One type of thermal polymerization initiator may be contained, or two or more types may be contained. When two or more thermal polymerization initiators are contained, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain inorganic particles.
  • inorganic particles include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, silica, kaolin, talc, titanium dioxide, alumina, barium sulfate, calcium fluoride, lithium fluoride, zeolite, molybdenum sulfide, and glass.
  • the average particle diameter of the inorganic particles is preferably 0.01 to 2.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.02 to 1.5 ⁇ m, still more preferably 0.03 to 1.0 ⁇ m, and 0.04 to 0.5 ⁇ m. Especially preferred.
  • the average particle size of the inorganic particles is the primary particle size and the volume average particle size.
  • the volume average particle size can be measured by a dynamic light scattering method using Nanotrac WAVE II EX-150 (manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.). If the above measurement is difficult, the centrifugal sedimentation light transmission method, X-ray transmission method, or laser diffraction/scattering method can be used.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain an ultraviolet absorber.
  • an ultraviolet absorber As the ultraviolet absorber, salicylate-based, benzophenone-based, benzotriazole-based, substituted acrylonitrile-based, and triazine-based ultraviolet absorbers can be used. Specific examples of UV absorbers include compounds described in paragraphs 0341 to 0342 of WO2021/112189. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the above various ultraviolet absorbers may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the composition of the present invention may or may not contain an ultraviolet absorber, but when it does, the content of the ultraviolet absorber is 0.001% by mass with respect to the total solid mass of the composition of the present invention. It is preferably at least 1% by mass, more preferably at least 0.01% by mass and not more than 0.1% by mass.
  • the resin composition of this embodiment may contain an organic titanium compound.
  • an organic titanium compound By containing the organic titanium compound in the resin composition, it is possible to form a resin layer having excellent chemical resistance even when cured at a low temperature.
  • Organotitanium compounds that can be used include those in which organic groups are attached to titanium atoms through covalent or ionic bonds. Specific examples of organotitanium compounds are shown below in I) to VII): I) Titanium chelate compound: Among them, a titanium chelate compound having two or more alkoxy groups is more preferable because the storage stability of the resin composition is good and a good curing pattern can be obtained.
  • titanium bis(triethanolamine) diisopropoxide titanium di(n-butoxide) bis(2,4-pentanedionate), titanium diisopropoxide bis(2,4-pentanedionate ), titanium diisopropoxide bis(tetramethylheptanedionate), titanium diisopropoxide bis(ethylacetoacetate), and the like.
  • Tetraalkoxytitanium compounds for example titanium tetra(n-butoxide), titanium tetraethoxide, titanium tetra(2-ethylhexoxide), titanium tetraisobutoxide, titanium tetraisopropoxide, titanium tetramethoxide.
  • titanium tetramethoxypropoxide titanium tetramethylphenoxide, titanium tetra(n-nonyloxide), titanium tetra(n-propoxide), titanium tetrastearyloxide, titanium tetrakis[bis ⁇ 2,2-(allyloxymethyl) butoxide ⁇ ] and the like.
  • Titanocene compounds for example, pentamethylcyclopentadienyltitanium trimethoxide, bis( ⁇ 5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluorophenyl)titanium, bis( ⁇ 5-2, 4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluoro-3-(1H-pyrrol-1-yl)phenyl)titanium and the like.
  • Monoalkoxy titanium compounds for example, titanium tris(dioctylphosphate) isopropoxide, titanium tris(dodecylbenzenesulfonate) isopropoxide and the like.
  • Titanium oxide compounds for example, titanium oxide bis(pentanedionate), titanium oxide bis(tetramethylheptanedionate), phthalocyanine titanium oxide and the like.
  • the organotitanium compound at least one compound selected from the group consisting of I) titanium chelate compounds, II) tetraalkoxytitanium compounds, and III) titanocene compounds provides better chemical resistance. It is preferable from the viewpoint of performance.
  • titanium diisopropoxide bis(ethylacetoacetate), titanium tetra(n-butoxide) and bis( ⁇ 5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluoro-3-(1H) -pyrrol-1-yl)phenyl)titanium is preferred.
  • the blending amount is preferably 0.05 to 10 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 2 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the specific resin.
  • the amount is 0.05 parts by mass or more, the resulting cured pattern exhibits good heat resistance and chemical resistance more effectively. Excellent.
  • compositions of the present invention may contain antioxidants.
  • an antioxidant as an additive, it is possible to improve the elongation properties of the cured film and the adhesion to metal materials.
  • Antioxidants include phenol compounds, phosphite ester compounds, thioether compounds and the like. Specific examples of antioxidants include compounds described in paragraphs 0348 to 0357 of WO2021/112189. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the amount of antioxidant to be added is preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 5 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the specific resin.
  • the addition amount 0.1 parts by mass or more By making the addition amount 0.1 parts by mass or more, the effect of improving elongation characteristics and adhesion to metal materials can be easily obtained even in a high-temperature and high-humidity environment.
  • the interaction with the agent improves the sensitivity of the resin composition.
  • Only one kind of antioxidant may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used. When two or more kinds are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present embodiment may contain an anti-aggregation agent as necessary.
  • Anti-aggregation agents include sodium polyacrylate and the like.
  • the aggregation inhibitor may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the composition of the present invention may or may not contain an anti-aggregating agent, but when it is included, the content of the anti-aggregating agent is 0.01% by mass relative to the total solid mass of the composition of the present invention. It is preferably at least 10% by mass, more preferably at least 0.02% by mass and not more than 5% by mass.
  • the resin composition of the present embodiment may contain a phenolic compound as necessary.
  • phenolic compounds include Bis-Z, BisP-EZ, TekP-4HBPA, TrisP-HAP, TrisP-PA, BisOCHP-Z, BisP-MZ, BisP-PZ, BisP-IPZ, BisOCP-IPZ, BisP-CP, BisRS-2P, BisRS-3P, BisP-OCHP, methylene tris-FR-CR, BisRS-26X (these are trade names, manufactured by Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), BIP-PC, BIR-PC, BIR-PTBP, BIR -BIPC-F (these are trade names, manufactured by Asahi Organic Chemicals Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • one type of phenolic compound may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination.
  • the composition of the present invention may or may not contain a phenolic compound, but if it does, the content of the phenolic compound is 0.01% by mass relative to the total solid mass of the composition of the present invention. It is preferably at least 30% by mass, more preferably at least 0.02% by mass and not more than 20% by mass.
  • Other polymer compounds include siloxane resins, (meth)acrylic polymers obtained by copolymerizing (meth)acrylic acid, novolac resins, resole resins, polyhydroxystyrene resins, and copolymers thereof.
  • Other polymer compounds may be modified products into which cross-linking groups such as methylol groups, alkoxymethyl groups and epoxy groups have been introduced.
  • composition of the present invention may or may not contain other polymer compounds, but when it does, the content of the other polymer compound is 0 relative to the total solid mass of the composition of the present invention. It is preferably 0.01% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less, more preferably 0.02% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less.
  • the viscosity of the resin composition of the present invention can be adjusted by adjusting the solid content concentration of the resin composition. From the viewpoint of coating film thickness, it is preferably 1,000 mm 2 /s to 12,000 mm 2 /s, more preferably 2,000 mm 2 /s to 10,000 mm 2 /s, and 2,500 mm 2 /s to 8,000 mm. 2 /s is more preferred. If it is the said range, it will become easy to obtain a coating film with high uniformity. If it is 1,000 mm 2 /s or more, it is easy to apply the film with a film thickness required, for example, as an insulating film for rewiring . A coating is obtained.
  • the water content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably less than 2.0% by mass, more preferably less than 1.5% by mass, and even more preferably less than 1.0% by mass. If it is less than 2.0%, the storage stability of the resin composition is improved. Methods for maintaining the moisture content include adjusting the humidity in the storage conditions and reducing the porosity of the storage container during storage.
  • the metal content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably less than 5 mass ppm (parts per million), more preferably less than 1 mass ppm, and even more preferably less than 0.5 mass ppm.
  • metals include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, copper, chromium, and nickel, but metals contained as complexes of organic compounds and metals are excluded. When multiple metals are included, the total of these metals is preferably within the above range.
  • a raw material having a low metal content is selected as a raw material constituting the resin composition of the present invention.
  • Examples include a method of performing filter filtration on the raw material constituting the product, and performing distillation under conditions in which contamination is suppressed as much as possible by lining the inside of the apparatus with polytetrafluoroethylene or the like.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably has a halogen atom content of less than 500 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 300 ppm by mass, and less than 200 ppm by mass from the viewpoint of wiring corrosion. is more preferred.
  • those present in the form of halogen ions are preferably less than 5 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 1 ppm by mass, and even more preferably less than 0.5 ppm by mass.
  • Halogen atoms include chlorine and bromine atoms. It is preferable that the total amount of chlorine atoms and bromine atoms or chlorine ions and bromine ions is within the above ranges.
  • ion exchange treatment and the like are preferably mentioned.
  • a conventionally known container can be used as the container for the resin composition of the present invention.
  • the inner wall of the container is a multi-layer bottle composed of 6 types and 6 layers of resin, and 6 types of resin are used. It is also preferred to use bottles with a seven-layer structure. Examples of such a container include the container described in JP-A-2015-123351.
  • the cured product of the present invention is a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition of the present invention.
  • Curing of the resin composition is preferably by heating, and the heating temperature is more preferably in the range of 120°C to 400°C, further preferably in the range of 140°C to 380°C, and 170°C. It is particularly preferred to be in the range of -350°C.
  • the form of the cured product of the resin composition is not particularly limited, and may be selected from film, rod, sphere, pellet, etc. according to the application. In the present invention, the cured product is preferably in the form of a film.
  • pattern processing of the resin composition can be used to form protective films on walls, form via holes for conduction, adjust impedance, capacitance or internal stress, and impart heat dissipation functions. You can also choose the shape.
  • the film thickness of the cured product (film made of the cured product) is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 150 ⁇ m or less.
  • the shrinkage ratio when the resin composition of the present invention is cured is preferably 50% or less, more preferably 45% or less, and even more preferably 40% or less.
  • the imidization reaction rate of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 70% or higher, more preferably 80% or higher, and even more preferably 90% or higher. If it is 70% or more, a cured product having excellent mechanical properties may be obtained.
  • the elongation at break of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 30% or more, more preferably 40% or more, and even more preferably 50% or more.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 180° C. or higher, more preferably 210° C. or higher, and even more preferably 230° C. or higher.
  • the resin composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the components described above.
  • the mixing method is not particularly limited, and conventionally known methods can be used. Mixing can be performed by mixing with a stirring blade, mixing with a ball mill, mixing by rotating the tank itself, or the like.
  • the temperature during mixing is preferably 10-30°C, more preferably 15-25°C.
  • the filter pore size is, for example, 5 ⁇ m or less, preferably 1 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or less.
  • the material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon. HDPE (high density polyethylene) is more preferable when the material of the filter is polyethylene.
  • a filter that has been pre-washed with an organic solvent may be used. In the filter filtration step, multiple types of filters may be connected in series or in parallel for use.
  • filters with different pore sizes or materials may be used in combination.
  • a connection mode for example, a mode in which an HDPE filter with a pore size of 1 ⁇ m is connected in series as a first stage and an HDPE filter with a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m as a second stage are connected in series.
  • various materials may be filtered multiple times.
  • circulation filtration may be used.
  • you may filter by pressurizing.
  • the pressure to be applied is, for example, 0.01 MPa or more and 1.0 MPa or less, preferably 0.03 MPa or more and 0.9 MPa or less, and more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.7 MPa or less.
  • impurities may be removed using an adsorbent.
  • You may combine filter filtration and the impurity removal process using an adsorbent.
  • a known adsorbent can be used as the adsorbent. Examples thereof include inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon.
  • the resin composition filled in the bottle may be subjected to a degassing step under reduced pressure.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a film forming step of applying the resin composition onto a substrate to form a film. Further, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention includes the film forming step, an exposure step of selectively exposing the film formed in the film forming step, and developing the film exposed in the exposure step using a developer. It is more preferable to include a developing step of forming a pattern by The method for producing a cured product of the present invention includes the film forming step, the exposing step, the developing step, and a heating step of heating the pattern obtained by the developing step, and after development of exposing the pattern obtained by the developing step. It is particularly preferred to include at least one of the exposure steps. Moreover, the manufacturing method of the present invention preferably includes the film forming step and the step of heating the film. Details of each step will be described below.
  • the resin composition of the present invention can be used in a film-forming step in which a film is formed by applying it onto a substrate.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a film forming step of applying the resin composition onto a substrate to form a film.
  • the type of base material can be appropriately determined according to the application, and includes semiconductor manufacturing base materials such as silicon, silicon nitride, polysilicon, silicon oxide, and amorphous silicon, quartz, glass, optical films, ceramic materials, vapor deposition films, A magnetic film, a reflective film, a metal substrate such as Ni, Cu, Cr, Fe (for example, a substrate formed of a metal, or a substrate having a metal layer formed by plating, vapor deposition, etc.) ), paper, SOG (Spin On Glass), TFT (Thin Film Transistor) array substrates, mold substrates, plasma display panel (PDP) electrode plates, etc., and are not particularly limited.
  • semiconductor manufacturing base materials such as silicon, silicon nitride, polysilicon, silicon oxide, and amorphous silicon, quartz, glass, optical films, ceramic materials, vapor deposition films, A magnetic film, a reflective film, a metal substrate such as Ni, Cu, Cr, Fe (for example, a substrate formed of a metal, or a substrate having
  • a semiconductor fabrication substrate is particularly preferable, and a silicon substrate, a Cu substrate and a mold substrate are more preferable.
  • these substrates may be provided with a layer such as an adhesion layer or an oxide layer made of hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) or the like on the surface.
  • HMDS hexamethyldisilazane
  • the shape of the substrate is not particularly limited, and may be circular or rectangular.
  • the diameter is, for example, 100 to 450 mm, preferably 200 to 450 mm.
  • the short side length is, for example, 100 to 1000 mm, preferably 200 to 700 mm.
  • the base material for example, a plate-like base material (substrate), preferably a panel-like base material (substrate) is used.
  • the resin layer or metal layer serves as the base material.
  • Specific means to be applied include dip coating, air knife coating, curtain coating, wire bar coating, gravure coating, extrusion coating, spray coating, spin coating, slit coating, An inkjet method and the like are exemplified. From the viewpoint of uniformity of film thickness, spin coating, slit coating, spray coating, or inkjet method is more preferable, and spin coating from the viewpoint of uniformity of film thickness and productivity. and slit coating methods are preferred.
  • a film having a desired thickness can be obtained by adjusting the solid content concentration and application conditions of the resin composition according to the method.
  • the coating method can be appropriately selected depending on the shape of the substrate. Spin coating, spray coating, inkjet method, etc.
  • slit coating and spray coating are preferable for rectangular substrates.
  • method, inkjet method, and the like are preferred.
  • spin coating for example, it can be applied at a rotation speed of 500 to 3,500 rpm for about 10 seconds to 3 minutes.
  • a method of transferring a coating film, which is formed on a temporary support in advance by the above application method, onto a base material can also be applied.
  • the transfer method the production methods described in paragraphs 0023 and 0036 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-023696 and paragraphs 0096-0108 of JP-A-2006-047592 can also be preferably used in the present invention.
  • a step of removing excess film at the edge of the substrate may be performed.
  • processes include edge bead rinsing (EBR), back rinsing, and the like.
  • EBR edge bead rinsing
  • a pre-wetting step may also be employed in which the base material is coated with various solvents before applying the resin composition to the base material to improve the wettability of the base material, and then the resin composition is applied.
  • the film may be subjected to a step of drying the formed film (layer) to remove the solvent (drying step) after the film forming step (layer forming step). That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a drying step of drying the film formed by the film forming step. Moreover, the drying step is preferably performed after the film formation step and before the exposure step.
  • the drying temperature of the film in the drying step is preferably 50 to 150°C, more preferably 70 to 130°C, even more preferably 90 to 110°C. Moreover, you may dry by pressure reduction.
  • the drying time is exemplified from 30 seconds to 20 minutes, preferably from 1 minute to 10 minutes, more preferably from 2 minutes to 7 minutes.
  • the film may be subjected to an exposure step that selectively exposes the film. That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include an exposure step of selectively exposing the film formed in the film forming step. Selectively exposing means exposing a portion of the film. Also, by selectively exposing, the film is formed with exposed regions (exposed portions) and non-exposed regions (non-exposed portions). The amount of exposure is not particularly defined as long as the resin composition of the present invention can be cured . is more preferred.
  • the exposure wavelength can be appropriately determined in the range of 190-1,000 nm, preferably 240-550 nm.
  • the exposure wavelength is as follows: (1) semiconductor laser (wavelength 830 nm, 532 nm, 488 nm, 405 nm, 375 nm, 355 nm etc.), (2) metal halide lamp, (3) high-pressure mercury lamp, g-line (wavelength 436 nm), h-line (wavelength 405 nm), i-line (wavelength 365 nm), broad (three wavelengths of g, h, i-line), (4) excimer laser, KrF excimer laser (wavelength 248 nm), ArF excimer laser (wavelength 193 nm) ), F2 excimer laser (wavelength 157 nm), (5) extreme ultraviolet; EUV (wavelength 13.6 nm), (6) electron beam, (7) YAG laser second harmonic 532 nm, third harmonic 355 nm, etc.
  • the resin composition of the present invention exposure with a high-pressure mercury lamp is particularly preferred, and exposure with i-line is particularly preferred. Thereby, particularly high exposure sensitivity can be obtained.
  • the method of exposure is not particularly limited as long as at least a part of the film made of the resin composition of the present invention is exposed. mentioned.
  • the film may be subjected to a step of heating after exposure (post-exposure heating step). That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a post-exposure heating step of heating the exposed film in the exposure step.
  • the post-exposure heating step can be performed after the exposure step and before the development step.
  • the heating temperature in the post-exposure heating step is preferably 50°C to 140°C, more preferably 60°C to 120°C.
  • the heating time in the post-exposure heating step is preferably 30 seconds to 300 minutes, more preferably 1 minute to 10 minutes.
  • the heating rate in the post-exposure heating step is preferably 1 to 12° C./min, more preferably 2 to 10° C./min, still more preferably 3 to 10° C./min, from the temperature at the start of heating to the maximum heating temperature. Also, the rate of temperature increase may be appropriately changed during heating.
  • the heating means in the post-exposure heating step is not particularly limited, and known hot plates, ovens, infrared heaters and the like can be used. Moreover, it is also preferable to carry out the heating in an atmosphere of low oxygen concentration by, for example, flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium or argon.
  • the film after exposure may be subjected to a development step in which the film is developed using a developer to form a pattern.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a development step of developing a film exposed in the exposure step with a developer to form a pattern. By performing development, one of the exposed and non-exposed portions of the film is removed to form a pattern.
  • development in which the unexposed portion of the film is removed by the development process is called negative development
  • development in which the exposed portion of the film is removed by the development process is called positive development.
  • Examples of the developer used in the development step include a developer containing an alkaline aqueous solution or an organic solvent.
  • basic compounds that the alkaline aqueous solution may contain include inorganic alkalis, primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, and quaternary ammonium salts.
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • potassium hydroxide sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate, ammonia, ethylamine, n-propylamine, diethylamine, di-n-butylamine, triethylamine, methyldiethylamine , dimethylethanolamine, triethanolamine, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, tetrapentylammonium hydroxide, tetrahexylammonium hydroxide, tetraoctylammonium hydroxide, ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, Butyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, methyltriamylammonium hydroxide, dibutyldipentylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis(2-hydroxyethyl)ammoni
  • the content of the basic compound in the developer is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, more preferably 0.3 to 3% by mass, based on the total mass of the developer. is more preferred.
  • the compound described in paragraph 0387 of International Publication No. 2021/112189 can be used as the organic solvent.
  • Alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, pentanol, octanol, diethylene glycol, propylene glycol, methylisobutylcarbinol, and triethylene glycol, and amides such as N-methylpyrrolidone, N-ethylpyrrolidone, Dimethylformamide and the like are also suitable.
  • the organic solvent can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • a developer containing at least one selected from the group consisting of cyclopentanone, ⁇ -butyrolactone, dimethylsulfoxide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, and cyclohexanone is particularly preferred, and cyclopentanone and ⁇ -butyrolactone. and dimethylsulfoxide is more preferred, and a developer containing cyclopentanone is most preferred.
  • the content of the organic solvent relative to the total weight of the developer is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and 80% by mass or more. is more preferable, and 90% by mass or more is particularly preferable. Moreover, the content may be 100% by mass.
  • the developer may further contain other components.
  • Other components include, for example, known surfactants and known antifoaming agents.
  • the method of supplying the developer is not particularly limited as long as the desired pattern can be formed.
  • the type of nozzle is not particularly limited, and straight nozzles, shower nozzles, spray nozzles and the like can be mentioned. From the viewpoint of permeability of the developer, removability of the non-image area, and efficiency in production, a method of supplying the developer with a straight nozzle or a method of continuously supplying the developer with a spray nozzle is preferable.
  • the method of supplying with a spray nozzle is more preferable.
  • the substrate is spun to remove the developer from the substrate.
  • a step of removing from above may be employed, and this step may be repeated multiple times.
  • the method of supplying the developer in the development process includes a process in which the developer is continuously supplied to the base material, a process in which the developer is kept substantially stationary on the base material, and a process in which the developer exceeds the developer on the base material.
  • a process of vibrating with sound waves or the like and a process of combining them can be employed.
  • the development time is preferably 10 seconds to 10 minutes, more preferably 20 seconds to 5 minutes.
  • the temperature of the developer during development is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 45°C, more preferably 18 to 30°C.
  • the pattern may be washed (rinsed) with a rinse.
  • a method of supplying the rinse liquid before the developer in contact with the pattern is completely dried may be employed.
  • Rinse liquid When the developer is an alkaline aqueous solution, water, for example, can be used as the rinse.
  • the developer is a developer containing an organic solvent, for example, a solvent different from the solvent contained in the developer (for example, water, an organic solvent different from the organic solvent contained in the developer) is used as the rinse liquid. be able to.
  • the organic solvent when the rinse liquid contains an organic solvent examples include the same organic solvents as those exemplified when the developer contains an organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent contained in the rinse liquid is preferably an organic solvent different from the organic solvent contained in the developer, and more preferably an organic solvent having a lower pattern solubility than the organic solvent contained in the developer.
  • the organic solvent can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the organic solvent can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • cyclopentanone, ⁇ -butyrolactone, dimethylsulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, cyclohexanone, PGMEA and PGME are particularly preferred, cyclopentanone, ⁇ -butyrolactone, dimethylsulfoxide, PGMEA and PGME are more preferred, and cyclohexanone and PGMEA are more preferred. More preferred.
  • the rinse liquid contains an organic solvent
  • the rinse liquid is preferably 50% by mass or more of the organic solvent, more preferably 70% by mass or more of the organic solvent, and 90% by mass or more of the organic solvent. is more preferred. Further, 100% by mass of the rinse liquid may be an organic solvent.
  • the rinse liquid may contain at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
  • a basic compound an organic base is preferable from the viewpoint of reliability when it remains in the film after curing (adhesion to the substrate when the cured product is further heated).
  • a basic compound having an amino group is preferable, and primary amine, secondary amine, tertiary amine, ammonium salt, tertiary amide, etc. are preferable.
  • the basic compound is preferably one that hardly remains in the cured film (obtained cured product). It is preferable that the remaining amount is not easily reduced before heating. Therefore, the boiling point of the basic compound is preferably 30° C. to 350° C., more preferably 80° C. to 270° C., even more preferably 100° C. to 230° C.
  • the boiling point of the basic compound is preferably higher than the boiling point of the organic solvent contained in the developer minus 20°C, and more preferably higher than the boiling point of the organic solvent contained in the developer.
  • the boiling point of the organic solvent is 100° C.
  • the boiling point of the basic compound used is preferably 80° C. or higher, more preferably 100° C. or higher.
  • the developer may contain only one type of basic compound, or may contain two or more types.
  • basic compounds include ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, ethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, hexylamine, dodecylamine, cyclohexylamine, cyclohexylmethylamine, cyclohexyldimethylamine, aniline, N-methylaniline, N, N-dimethylaniline, diphenylamine, pyridine, butylamine, isobutylamine, dibutylamine, tributylamine, dicyclohexylamine, DBU (diazabicycloundecene), DABCO (1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane), N , N-diisopropylethylamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, ethylenediamine, butanediamine, 1,5-diaminopentane, N-methylhexy
  • the base generator is the same as the preferred embodiments of the base generator contained in the composition described above.
  • the base generator is preferably a thermal base generator.
  • the basic compound and base generator contained in the rinse solution may be selected in consideration of the solubility in the solvent in the rinse solution.
  • the content of the compound corresponding to at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is 10% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the rinse solution. is preferable, and it is more preferably 5% by mass or less. Although the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, it is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, for example.
  • the content of the compound corresponding to at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is equal to the total solid content of the rinse liquid. It is also preferable that it is 70 to 100% by mass.
  • the rinse solution may contain only one kind of at least one of the basic compound and the base generator, or may contain two or more kinds. .
  • the total is preferably within the above range.
  • the rinse solution may further contain other components.
  • Other components include, for example, known surfactants and known antifoaming agents.
  • the method of supplying the rinse solution is not particularly limited as long as the desired pattern can be formed, and includes a method of immersing the base material in the rinse solution, a method of supplying the rinse solution to the base material by piling up the base material, and a method of supplying the rinse solution to the base material by showering. and a method of continuously supplying the rinsing liquid onto the substrate by means of a straight nozzle or the like.
  • the permeability of the rinse liquid From the viewpoint of the permeability of the rinse liquid, the removability of the non-image areas, and the efficiency in manufacturing, there are methods of supplying the rinse liquid using a shower nozzle, a straight nozzle, a spray nozzle, etc., and a continuous supply method using a spray nozzle is preferable. From the viewpoint of the permeability of the rinsing liquid to the image area, the method of supplying the rinsing liquid with a spray nozzle is more preferable.
  • the type of nozzle is not particularly limited, and straight nozzles, shower nozzles, spray nozzles and the like can be mentioned.
  • the rinsing step is preferably a step of supplying the rinse liquid to the film after exposure through a straight nozzle or a step of continuously supplying the same, and more preferably a step of supplying the rinse liquid through a spray nozzle.
  • the method of supplying the rinse liquid in the rinse step includes a process in which the rinse liquid is continuously supplied to the base material, a process in which the rinse liquid is kept substantially stationary on the base material, and a process in which the rinse liquid is kept on the base material in a substantially stationary state. A process of vibrating with sound waves or the like and a process of combining them can be adopted.
  • the rinse time is preferably 10 seconds to 10 minutes, more preferably 20 seconds to 5 minutes.
  • the temperature of the rinsing liquid during rinsing is not particularly specified, but is preferably 10 to 45°C, more preferably 18 to 30°C.
  • the development step may include a step of bringing the pattern into contact with the processing solution after processing with the developer or after washing the pattern with the rinse solution.
  • a method of supplying the processing liquid before the developing liquid or rinsing liquid in contact with the pattern is completely dried may be adopted.
  • the treatment liquid examples include a treatment liquid containing at least one of water and an organic solvent, and at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
  • Preferred embodiments of the organic solvent and at least one of the basic compound and the base generator are the same as the preferred embodiments of the organic solvent and at least one of the basic compound and the base generator used in the rinse solution described above. .
  • the method of supplying the treatment liquid to the pattern the same method as the above-described method of supplying the rinsing liquid can be used, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the content of the compound corresponding to at least one of the basic compound and the base generator in the treatment liquid is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the treatment liquid. preferable. Although the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, it is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, for example. Further, when at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is solid in the environment where the treatment liquid is used, the content of the compound corresponding to at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is the total solid content of the treatment liquid. It is also preferable that it is 70 to 100% by mass.
  • the treatment liquid may contain at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, or may contain two or more of them. .
  • the total is preferably within the above range.
  • the pattern obtained by the development process may be subjected to a heating process for heating the pattern obtained by the development. That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step of heating the pattern obtained by the developing step. Moreover, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step of heating a pattern obtained by another method without performing the developing step or a film obtained by the film forming step. In the heating step, a resin such as a polyimide precursor is cyclized into a resin such as polyimide.
  • the heating temperature (maximum heating temperature) in the heating step is preferably 50 to 450°C, more preferably 150 to 350°C, still more preferably 150 to 250°C, even more preferably 160 to 250°C, particularly 160 to 230°C. preferable.
  • the heating step is preferably a step of promoting the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor in the pattern by the action of the base generated from the base generator by heating.
  • Heating in the heating step is preferably carried out at a temperature rising rate of 1 to 12° C./min from the temperature at the start of heating to the maximum heating temperature.
  • the rate of temperature increase is more preferably 2 to 10°C/min, still more preferably 3 to 10°C/min.
  • By setting the temperature increase rate to 1°C/min or more it is possible to prevent excessive volatilization of the acid or solvent while ensuring productivity.
  • the residual stress of the object can be relaxed.
  • the temperature at the start of heating is preferably 20°C to 150°C, more preferably 20°C to 130°C, and even more preferably 25°C to 120°C.
  • the temperature at the start of heating refers to the temperature at which the process of heating up to the maximum heating temperature is started.
  • the temperature of the film (layer) after drying is, for example, the boiling point of the solvent contained in the resin composition of the present invention.
  • the heating time (heating time at the highest heating temperature) is preferably 5 to 360 minutes, more preferably 10 to 300 minutes, even more preferably 15 to 240 minutes.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 30° C. or higher, more preferably 80° C. or higher, further preferably 100° C. or higher, from the viewpoint of adhesion between layers. 120° C. or higher is particularly preferred.
  • the upper limit of the heating temperature is preferably 350° C. or lower, more preferably 250° C. or lower, and even more preferably 240° C. or lower.
  • Heating may be done in stages. As an example, the temperature is raised from 25° C. to 120° C. at 3° C./min, held at 120° C. for 60 minutes, heated from 120° C. to 180° C. at 2° C./min, and held at 180° C. for 120 minutes. , may be performed. It is also preferable to carry out the treatment while irradiating ultraviolet rays as described in US Pat. No. 9,159,547. Such a pretreatment process can improve the properties of the film.
  • the pretreatment step is preferably performed for a short time of about 10 seconds to 2 hours, more preferably 15 seconds to 30 minutes.
  • the pretreatment may be performed in two or more steps.
  • the first pretreatment step may be performed in the range of 100 to 150°C, and then the second pretreatment step may be performed in the range of 150 to 200°C. good. Further, cooling may be performed after heating, and the cooling rate in this case is preferably 1 to 5°C/min.
  • the heating step is preferably carried out in an atmosphere of low oxygen concentration, such as by flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium or argon, or under reduced pressure, in order to prevent decomposition of the specific resin.
  • the oxygen concentration is preferably 50 ppm (volume ratio) or less, more preferably 20 ppm (volume ratio) or less.
  • a heating means in the heating step is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a hot plate, an infrared furnace, an electric heating oven, a hot air oven, an infrared oven and the like.
  • the pattern obtained by the development step (the pattern after rinsing when the rinsing step is performed) is subjected to a post-development exposure step of exposing the pattern after the development step instead of or in addition to the heating step.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a post-development exposure step of exposing the pattern obtained in the development step.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step and a post-development exposure step, or may include only one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step.
  • the post-development exposure step for example, a reaction in which cyclization of a polyimide precursor or the like proceeds by exposure of a photobase generator, or a reaction in which elimination of an acid-decomposable group proceeds by exposure of a photoacid generator is promoted. can do.
  • the post-development exposure step at least part of the pattern obtained in the development step may be exposed, but it is preferable that the entire pattern be exposed.
  • the exposure amount in the post-development exposure step is preferably 50 to 20,000 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 100 to 15,000 mJ/cm 2 in terms of exposure energy at the wavelength to which the photosensitive compound is sensitive. preferable.
  • the post-development exposure step can be performed using, for example, the light source used in the exposure step described above, and broadband light is preferably used.
  • the pattern obtained by the development step may be subjected to a metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the pattern. That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention includes a metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the pattern obtained by the developing step (preferably subjected to at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step). is preferred.
  • the metal layer is not particularly limited, and existing metal species can be used. Examples include copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, chromium, cobalt, gold, tungsten, tin, silver, and alloys containing these metals. copper and aluminum are more preferred, and copper is even more preferred.
  • the method of forming the metal layer is not particularly limited, and existing methods can be applied.
  • use the methods described in JP-A-2007-157879, JP-A-2001-521288, JP-A-2004-214501, JP-A-2004-101850, US Patent No. 7888181B2, US Patent No. 9177926B2 can do.
  • photolithography, PVD (Physical Vapor Deposition), CVD (Chemical Vapor Deposition), lift-off, electroplating, electroless plating, etching, printing, and a combination thereof can be considered.
  • a patterning method combining sputtering, photolithography and etching, and a patterning method combining photolithography and electroplating can be used.
  • a preferred embodiment of plating is electroplating using a copper sulfate or copper cyanide plating solution.
  • the thickness of the metal layer is preferably 0.01 to 50 ⁇ m, more preferably 1 to 10 ⁇ m, at the thickest part.
  • Fields to which the cured product of the present invention can be applied include insulating films for electronic devices, interlayer insulating films for rewiring layers, and stress buffer films.
  • pattern formation by etching of a sealing film, a substrate material (a base film or coverlay of a flexible printed circuit board, an interlayer insulating film), or an insulating film for mounting purposes as described above can be used.
  • the method for producing the cured product of the present invention or the cured product of the present invention can also be used for the production of plates such as offset plates or screen plates, for etching molded parts, for protective lacquers and dielectrics in electronics, especially microelectronics. It can also be used for the production of layers and the like.
  • the laminate of the present invention refers to a structure having a plurality of layers made of the cured product of the present invention.
  • the laminate of the present invention is a laminate containing two or more layers made of a cured product, and may be a laminate in which three or more layers are laminated. Of the two or more layers of the cured product contained in the laminate, at least one is a layer made of the cured product of the present invention, and the shrinkage of the cured product, or the deformation of the cured product due to the shrinkage, etc. From the viewpoint of suppression, it is also preferable that all the layers made of the cured product contained in the laminate are layers made of the cured product of the present invention.
  • the method for producing the laminate of the present invention preferably includes the method for producing the cured product of the present invention, and more preferably includes repeating the method for producing the cured product of the present invention multiple times.
  • the laminate of the present invention includes two or more layers made of the cured material and a metal layer between any of the layers made of the cured material.
  • the metal layer is preferably formed by the metal layer forming step. That is, it is preferable that the method for producing a laminate of the present invention further includes a metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the layer made of the cured product between the methods for producing the cured product performed multiple times. Preferred aspects of the metal layer forming step are as described above.
  • the laminate for example, a laminate containing at least a layer structure in which three layers of a layer made of the first cured product, a metal layer, and a layer made of the second cured product are laminated in this order is preferable. be done.
  • both the layer comprising the first cured product and the layer comprising the second cured product are layers comprising the cured product of the present invention.
  • the resin composition of the present invention used for forming the layer comprising the first cured product and the resin composition of the present invention used for forming the layer comprising the second cured product have the same composition. It may be a product or a composition having a different composition.
  • the metal layer in the laminate of the present invention is preferably used as a metal wiring such as a rewiring layer.
  • the method for manufacturing the laminate of the present invention includes a lamination step.
  • the lamination step means that the surface of the pattern (resin layer) or metal layer is again subjected to (a) film formation step (layer formation step), (b) exposure step, (c) development step, (d) heating step and development It is a series of steps including performing at least one of the post-exposure steps in this order. However, at least one of (a) the film forming step and (d) the heating step and the post-development exposure step may be repeated. Moreover, after at least one of the (d) heating step and the post-development exposure step, (e) a metal layer forming step may be included. Needless to say, the lamination step may further include the drying step and the like as appropriate.
  • a surface activation treatment process may be further performed.
  • a plasma treatment is exemplified as the surface activation treatment. Details of the surface activation treatment will be described later.
  • the lamination step is preferably performed 2 to 20 times, more preferably 2 to 9 times.
  • Each of the layers described above may have the same composition, shape, film thickness, etc., or may differ from each other.
  • a cured product (resin layer) of the resin composition of the present invention so as to cover the metal layer after providing the metal layer.
  • the film forming step, (b) the exposure step, (c) the developing step, (d) at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step, and (e) the metal layer forming step are repeated in this order.
  • the film forming step, (d) at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step, and (e) the metal layer forming step are repeated in this order.
  • the method for producing a laminate of the present invention preferably includes a surface activation treatment step of subjecting at least part of the metal layer and the resin composition layer to surface activation treatment.
  • the surface activation treatment step is usually performed after the metal layer formation step, but after the development step (preferably after at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step), the resin composition layer is subjected to surface activation treatment.
  • the metal layer forming step may be performed.
  • the surface activation treatment may be performed only on at least part of the metal layer, may be performed only on at least part of the resin composition layer after exposure, or may be performed on the metal layer and the resin composition layer after exposure. Both may be done at least partially, respectively.
  • the surface activation treatment is preferably performed on at least part of the metal layer, and it is preferable to perform the surface activation treatment on part or all of the area of the metal layer on which the resin composition layer is formed.
  • the surface of the metal layer By subjecting the surface of the metal layer to the surface activation treatment in this manner, the adhesiveness to the resin composition layer (film) provided on the surface can be improved.
  • the present invention also discloses a semiconductor device comprising the cured product of the present invention or the laminate of the present invention. Moreover, this invention also discloses the manufacturing method of the semiconductor device containing the manufacturing method of the hardened
  • Specific examples of a semiconductor device using the resin composition of the present invention for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer can refer to the description of paragraphs 0213 to 0218 of JP-A-2016-027357 and the description of FIG. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Resin 2 is presumed to be a structure represented by the following formula (P-2).
  • P-2 weight average molecular weight
  • resin 2 with Mw of 5,000, resin 2 with Mw of 10,000, and resin 2 with Mw of 30,000 can also be obtained by appropriately adjusting the equivalent of 4,4′-diaminodiphenyl ether. Synthesized.
  • a precipitate formed in the reaction mixture was removed by filtration to obtain a reaction liquid.
  • the resulting reaction solution was added to 8 liters of ethyl alcohol to form a precipitate consisting of crude polymer.
  • the resulting crude polymer was separated by filtration and dissolved in 5.0 liters of tetrahydrofuran to obtain a crude polymer solution.
  • the resulting crude polymer solution was dropped into 60 liters of water to precipitate the polymer, and the resulting precipitate was separated by filtration and vacuum dried to obtain a powdery polymer (resin 9).
  • the molecular weight of Resin 9 was measured by gel permeation chromatography (converted to standard polystyrene), the weight average molecular weight (Mw) was 25,000.
  • each resin composition was obtained by mixing the components shown in the table below.
  • the components shown in the table below were mixed to obtain comparative compositions.
  • the content (compounding amount) of each component described in the table other than the solvent was the amount (parts by mass) described in the "parts by mass” column of each column of the table.
  • the content (blending amount) of the solvent is such that the solid content concentration of the composition is the value (% by mass) of "solid content concentration” in the table, and the ratio of the content of each solvent to the total mass of the solvent (mass The ratio) was set to the ratio described in the "ratio" column in the table.
  • the resulting resin composition and comparative composition were filtered under pressure using a polytetrafluoroethylene filter with a pore width of 0.8 ⁇ m.
  • the description of "-" indicates that the composition does not contain the corresponding component.
  • the acid value of each resin was measured by the method described above, and the measurement results are shown in the table.
  • Resins 1 to 12 obtained by the above synthesis examples
  • [Polymerizable compound] ⁇ M-1 to M-3 compounds having the following structures, the subscripts in parentheses represent the number of repetitions.
  • - U-1 to U-3 compounds having the following structures.
  • A-1 to A-21 Compounds having the following structures. All of A-1 to A-21 are compounds corresponding to the specific metallocene compounds described above. • AR-1: a compound having the following structure. AR-1 is a compound that does not correspond to the specific metallocene compounds described above.
  • Viscosity change rate (%)
  • composition -Working stability (composition)-
  • the composition was placed in a transparent bottle under yellow light at 23° C. for 12 hours, and the change in viscosity was measured.
  • the yellow lamp HITACHI, model number: FHF32Y-F, Toshiba Lighting & Technology Co., Ltd., model number: LEEM-40403YY-01, or NEC, model number: FHF32Y-F/LSI is used, and the composition is extracted from the yellow lamp.
  • the distance to the transparent bottle containing the sample was about 1 m.
  • composition film was left under a yellow light for 12 hours, and the pattern shape was evaluated.
  • the details of the evaluation method are as follows.
  • the composition was applied on a silicon wafer by spin coating, dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 5 minutes, and coated on the silicon wafer in the column "Thickness ( ⁇ m)" of the table. A composition film having the thickness described in 1 was formed.
  • the composition film on the silicon wafer was exposed using a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C).
  • the exposure wavelength is the wavelength described in the "Exposure wavelength (nm)" column of the table, and the exposure energy is 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mJ/cm 2 , and the exposure energy is 5 to 25 ⁇ m in increments of 1 ⁇ m. Exposure was performed using a photomask on which a 1:1 line-and-space pattern was formed. In the examples described as “D” in the "Exposure conditions” column of the table, the composition film on the silicon wafer was exposed using a direct exposure apparatus (ADTEC DE-6UH III).
  • ADTEC DE-6UH III direct exposure apparatus
  • the exposure wavelength is the wavelength described in the “Exposure wavelength (nm)” column of the table, and the exposure energy is 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mJ / cm 2 , and the laser direct imaging exposure is 5 to 5.
  • a 1:1 line-and-space pattern was exposed at intervals of 1 ⁇ m up to 25 ⁇ m.
  • the exposed composition film was developed for 60 seconds using the developer described in the "developer” column of the table, and the line width of the resulting pattern was evaluated. A small change in line width with respect to a change in exposure energy indicates a wide exposure latitude, which is a favorable result.
  • the measurement limit is 5 ⁇ m, and evaluation was performed according to the following evaluation criteria. The evaluation results are described in the column of "working stability (composition film)" in the table. ⁇ Evaluation Criteria>> A: Less than 10 ⁇ m B: 10 ⁇ m or more and less than 20 ⁇ m C: 20 ⁇ m or more
  • the prepared resin composition or comparative composition was applied onto a silicon wafer by spin coating.
  • the silicon wafer is dried on a hot plate at 100° C. for 5 minutes, and a resin composition layer having a uniform thickness and having the thickness described in the “Thickness ( ⁇ m)” column of the table is formed on the silicon wafer. formed.
  • the exposure condition was described as "M”
  • the resin composition layer on the silicon wafer was exposed using a stepper.
  • the entire surface of the photosensitive film was exposed without using a photomask using light having a wavelength indicated in "Exposure Wavelength (nm)" in the table.
  • the exposure amount was 500 mJ/cm 2 .
  • the resin film obtained in each example was cured using an infrared lamp heating device (RTP-6, manufactured by Advance Riko Co., Ltd.). In a nitrogen atmosphere, the temperature was raised at a temperature elevation rate of 10°C/min, and after reaching 230°C, the temperature was maintained for the time described in "curing time (min)” to form a cured film. The obtained cured film was immersed in the following chemicals under the following conditions, and the dissolution rate was calculated.
  • RTP-6 infrared lamp heating device
  • the resin composition of the present invention is excellent in working stability under yellow light.
  • the comparative composition according to Comparative Example 1 does not contain a specific metallocene compound. It can be seen that the comparative composition has poor working stability under a yellow light.
  • Example 101 The resin composition used in Example 1 was left under a yellow light for 12 hours, and then applied in a layered form by spin coating to the surface of the thin copper layer of the resin substrate having the thin copper layer formed on the surface. , and dried at 100° C. for 5 minutes to form a photosensitive film having a thickness of 20 ⁇ m, which was then exposed using a stepper (NSR1505 i6 manufactured by Nikon Corporation). Exposure was performed at a wavelength of 365 nm through a mask (a binary mask with a 1:1 line-and-space pattern and a line width of 10 ⁇ m). After the above exposure, the film was developed with cyclohexanone for 2 minutes and rinsed with PGMEA for 30 seconds to obtain a layer pattern.
  • NSR1505 i6 manufactured by Nikon Corporation
  • the temperature was raised at a rate of 10° C./min, reaching 230° C., and then maintained at 230° C. for 180 minutes to form an interlayer insulating film for rewiring layers.
  • This interlayer insulating film for rewiring layer was excellent in insulating properties.
  • a semiconductor device was manufactured using these interlayer insulating films for rewiring layers, it was confirmed that the device operated without any problem.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Inorganic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)
  • Macromolecular Compounds Obtained By Forming Nitrogen-Containing Linkages In General (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides a resin composition which contains a resin and a metallocene compound, wherein: the metallocene compound comprises a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and an aromatic ring that is directly bonded to the metal atom; the aromatic ring has, as a substituent which is directly bonded to the aromatic ring, an electron-withdrawing group that is different from a halogen atom; and the molar absorption coefficient of the metallocene compound at 500 nm is 330 mol-1∙L∙cm-1 or less. The present invention also provides: a cured product; a multilayer body which comprises a cured product; a method for producing a cured product; a method for producing a multilayer body; a method for producing a semiconductor device, the method comprising a method for producing a multilayer body; and a semiconductor device which comprises a cured product or a multilayer body.

Description

樹脂組成物、硬化物、積層体、硬化物の製造方法、積層体の製造方法、半導体デバイスの製造方法、及び、半導体デバイスResin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
 本発明は、樹脂組成物、硬化物、積層体、硬化物の製造方法、積層体の製造方法、半導体デバイスの製造方法、及び、半導体デバイスに関する。 The present invention relates to a resin composition, a cured product, a laminate, a method for producing a cured product, a method for producing a laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device, and a semiconductor device.
 現代では様々な分野において、樹脂を含む樹脂組成物を用いて樹脂材料を活用することが行われている。
 例えば、ポリイミド等の環化樹脂は、耐熱性及び絶縁性等に優れるため、様々な用途に適用されている。上記用途としては、特に限定されないが、実装用の半導体デバイスを例に挙げると、絶縁膜や封止材の材料、又は、保護膜としての利用が挙げられる。また、フレキシブル基板のベースフィルムやカバーレイなどとしても用いられている。
2. Description of the Related Art Nowadays, in various fields, resin materials are being utilized by using resin compositions containing resins.
For example, cyclized resins such as polyimide are used in various applications because of their excellent heat resistance and insulating properties. The above applications are not particularly limited, but in the case of a semiconductor device for mounting, use as a material for an insulating film or a sealing material, or as a protective film can be mentioned. It is also used as a base film or coverlay for flexible substrates.
 例えば上述した用途において、ポリイミド等の環化樹脂は、ポリイミド前駆体等の環化樹脂の前駆体を含む樹脂組成物の形態で用いられる。
 このような樹脂組成物を、例えば塗布等により基材に適用して感光膜を形成し、その後、必要に応じて露光、現像、加熱等を行うことにより、硬化物を基材上に形成することができる。
 ポリイミド前駆体等の上記環化樹脂の前駆体は、例えば加熱により環化され、硬化物中でポリイミド等の環化樹脂となる。
 樹脂組成物は、公知の塗布方法等により適用可能であるため、例えば、適用される樹脂組成物の適用時の形状、大きさ、適用位置等の設計の自由度が高いなど、製造上の適応性に優れるといえる。ポリイミド等の環化樹脂が有する高い性能に加え、このような製造上の適応性に優れる観点から、上述の樹脂組成物の産業上の応用展開がますます期待されている。
For example, in the applications described above, the cyclized resin such as polyimide is used in the form of a resin composition containing a precursor of the cyclized resin such as a polyimide precursor.
Such a resin composition is applied to a substrate, for example, by coating to form a photosensitive film, and then, if necessary, exposure, development, heating, etc. are performed to form a cured product on the substrate. be able to.
A precursor of the cyclized resin such as a polyimide precursor is cyclized, for example, by heating, and becomes a cyclized resin such as polyimide in the cured product.
Since the resin composition can be applied by a known coating method or the like, for example, there is a high degree of freedom in designing the shape, size, application position, etc. of the resin composition to be applied. It can be said that it is excellent in sex. In addition to the high performance possessed by cyclized resins such as polyimide, from the viewpoint of such excellent manufacturing adaptability, industrial application and development of the above-mentioned resin compositions are increasingly expected.
 例えば、特許文献1には、特定の構造のフェノール化合物、特定の構造のチタノセン化合物、特定の構造の3-アミノプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、ポリアミド酸、並びに、化学線により2量化又は重合可能な炭素炭素二重結合及びアミノ基又はその四級化塩を有する化合物を含有してなる感光材料が記載されている。 For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a phenol compound with a specific structure, a titanocene compound with a specific structure, a 3-aminopropyltrialkoxysilane with a specific structure, a polyamic acid, and carbon carbon that can be dimerized or polymerized by actinic radiation. A light-sensitive material containing a compound having a double bond and an amino group or a quaternized salt thereof is disclosed.
特開2004-184755号公報JP-A-2004-184755
 硬化物を得るための樹脂組成物において、黄色灯下でも粘度が変化しにくく、黄色灯下での作業がしやすいことが求められている。以下、本発明において、黄色灯下でも粘度が変化しにくく、黄色灯下での作業がしやすい樹脂組成物を「黄色灯下での作業安定性に優れた樹脂組成物」ともいう。 In the resin composition for obtaining a cured product, it is required that the viscosity does not easily change even under a yellow light and that it is easy to work under a yellow light. Hereinafter, in the present invention, a resin composition whose viscosity does not easily change even under a yellow light and which is easy to work under a yellow light is also referred to as a "resin composition excellent in working stability under a yellow light".
 本発明は、黄色灯下での作業安定性に優れた樹脂組成物、上記樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物、上記硬化物を含む積層体、上記硬化物の製造方法、上記積層体の製造方法、上記積層体の製造方法を含む半導体デバイスの製造方法、及び、上記硬化物又は上記積層体を含む半導体デバイスを提供することを目的とする。 The present invention provides a resin composition excellent in working stability under a yellow light, a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition, a laminate containing the cured product, a method for producing the cured product, and the laminate It aims at providing the semiconductor device manufacturing method including the manufacturing method, the manufacturing method of the said laminated body, and the semiconductor device containing the said hardened|cured material or the said laminated body.
 本発明の代表的な実施態様の例を以下に示す。
<1> 樹脂、及び、
 メタロセン化合物を含み、
 上記メタロセン化合物が、金属原子と、置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子と、上記金属原子に直結する芳香環を有し、
 上記芳香環は、上記芳香環に直結する置換基として、ハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を有し、
 上記メタロセン化合物の500nmにおけるモル吸光係数が330mol-1・L・cm-1以下である
 樹脂組成物。
<2> 樹脂、及び、
 メタロセン化合物を含み、
 上記メタロセン化合物が、金属原子と、置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子と、上記金属原子に直結する芳香環を有し、上記芳香環は、上記芳香環に直結する置換基としてハロゲン原子、及び、ハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を有する
 樹脂組成物。
<3> 上記樹脂が環化樹脂及びその前駆体よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の樹脂である、<1>又は<2>に記載の樹脂組成物。
<4> 上記樹脂がポリイミド又はポリイミド前駆体である、<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<5> 重合性化合物を更に含む、<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<6> 上記メタロセン化合物がチタノセン化合物である、<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<7> 上記メタロセン化合物とは異なる光重合開始剤を更に含む、<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<8> 上記メタロセン化合物が下記式(1-1)又は式(1-2)で表される化合物である、<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。

 式(1-1)中、Mはチタン原子、ジルコニウム原子又はハフニウム原子を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はフッ素原子を表し、Rのうち一方はフッ素原子であり、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、Rはハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はフッ素原子を表し、Rのうち一方はフッ素原子であり、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、Rはハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を表す。
 式(1-2)中、Mはそれぞれ独立に、チタン原子、ジルコニウム原子又はハフニウム原子を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はフッ素原子を表し、Rのうち一方はフッ素原子であり、R10はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、R11はハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を表し、R12はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はフッ素原子を表し、R12のうち一方はフッ素原子であり、R13はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、R14はハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を表し、R15及びR16はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表し、Aは酸素原子又は硫黄原子を表す。
<9> 上記式(1-1)におけるR及びRがそれぞれ独立に、トリフルオロメチル基又はニトロ基であり、上記式(1-2)におけるR11及びR14がそれぞれ独立に、トリフルオロメチル基又はニトロ基である、<8>に記載の樹脂組成物。
<10> 上記樹脂として環化樹脂又はその前駆体を含み、再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いられる、<1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<11> <1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物。
<12> <11>に記載の硬化物からなる層を2層以上含み、上記硬化物からなる層同士のいずれかの間に金属層を含む積層体。
<13> <1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物を基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程を含む、硬化物の製造方法。
<14> 上記膜を選択的に露光する露光工程及び上記膜を現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程を含む、<13>に記載の硬化物の製造方法。
<15> 上記膜を50~450℃で加熱する加熱工程を含む、<13>又は<14>に記載の硬化物の製造方法。
<16> <13>~<15>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化物の製造方法を含む、積層体の製造方法。
<17> <13>~<15>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化物の製造方法、又は、<16>に記載の積層体の製造方法を含む、半導体デバイスの製造方法。
<18> <11>に記載の硬化物又は<12>に記載の積層体を含む、半導体デバイス。
Examples of representative embodiments of the present invention are provided below.
<1> Resin, and
containing a metallocene compound,
The metallocene compound has a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and an aromatic ring directly linked to the metal atom,
The aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom as a substituent directly connected to the aromatic ring,
The resin composition, wherein the metallocene compound has a molar absorption coefficient at 500 nm of 330 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less.
<2> Resin, and
containing a metallocene compound,
The metallocene compound has a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and an aromatic ring directly linked to the metal atom, and the aromatic ring is a substituent directly linked to the aromatic ring. A resin composition having a halogen atom as a group and an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom.
<3> The resin composition according to <1> or <2>, wherein the resin is at least one resin selected from the group consisting of cyclized resins and precursors thereof.
<4> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the resin is a polyimide or a polyimide precursor.
<5> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, further comprising a polymerizable compound.
<6> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the metallocene compound is a titanocene compound.
<7> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, further comprising a photopolymerization initiator different from the metallocene compound.
<8> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <7>, wherein the metallocene compound is a compound represented by the following formula (1-1) or (1-2).

In formula (1-1), M represents a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom, each R 1 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and each R 2 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom. , R 2 is a fluorine atom, R 3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, R 4 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom, R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, one of R 5 is a fluorine atom, each R 6 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and R 7 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom.
In formula (1-2), each M independently represents a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom, each R 8 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, each R 9 independently represents a hydrogen atom or represents a fluorine atom, one of R 9 is a fluorine atom, R 10 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, R 11 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom, and R 12 Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, one of R 12 is a fluorine atom, each R 13 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and R 14 has an electron-withdrawing property different from that of a halogen atom. group, R 15 and R 16 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and A represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
<9> R 4 and R 7 in the above formula (1-1) are each independently a trifluoromethyl group or a nitro group, and R 11 and R 14 in the above formula (1-2) are each independently a trifluoromethyl group. The resin composition according to <8>, which is a fluoromethyl group or a nitro group.
<10> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <9>, which contains a cyclized resin or a precursor thereof as the resin, and is used for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
<11> A cured product obtained by curing the resin composition according to any one of <1> to <10>.
<12> A laminate comprising two or more layers made of the cured product according to <11> and a metal layer between any of the layers made of the cured product.
<13> A method for producing a cured product, comprising a film forming step of applying the resin composition according to any one of <1> to <10> onto a substrate to form a film.
<14> The method for producing a cured product according to <13>, comprising an exposure step of selectively exposing the film and a development step of developing the film with a developer to form a pattern.
<15> The method for producing a cured product according to <13> or <14>, comprising a heating step of heating the film at 50 to 450°C.
<16> A method for producing a laminate, comprising the method for producing a cured product according to any one of <13> to <15>.
<17> A method for producing a semiconductor device, comprising the method for producing a cured product according to any one of <13> to <15> or the method for producing a laminate according to <16>.
<18> A semiconductor device comprising the cured product according to <11> or the laminate according to <12>.
 本発明によれば、黄色灯下での作業安定性に優れた樹脂組成物、上記樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物、上記硬化物を含む積層体、上記硬化物の製造方法、上記積層体の製造方法、上記積層体の製造方法を含む半導体デバイスの製造方法、及び、上記硬化物又は上記積層体を含む半導体デバイスが提供される。 According to the present invention, a resin composition excellent in working stability under a yellow light, a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition, a laminate containing the cured product, a method for producing the cured product, and the laminate A semiconductor device manufacturing method including a method for manufacturing a body, a method for manufacturing a laminate, and a semiconductor device including the cured product or the laminate are provided.
 以下、本発明の主要な実施形態について説明する。しかしながら、本発明は、明示した実施形態に限られるものではない。
 本明細書において「~」という記号を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値をそれぞれ下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、その工程の所期の作用が達成できる限りにおいて、他の工程と明確に区別できない工程も含む意味である。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有しない基(原子団)と共に置換基を有する基(原子団)をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有しないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた露光も含む。また、露光に用いられる光としては、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線又は放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、「アクリレート」及び「メタクリレート」の両方、又は、いずれかを意味し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、「アクリル」及び「メタクリル」の両方、又は、いずれかを意味し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、「アクリロイル」及び「メタクリロイル」の両方、又は、いずれかを意味する。
 本明細書において、構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表す。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、組成物の全成分から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。また本明細書において、固形分濃度とは、組成物の総質量に対する、溶剤を除く他の成分の質量百分率である。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に述べない限り、ゲル浸透クロマトグラフィ(GPC)法を用いて測定した値であり、ポリスチレン換算値として定義される。本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、例えば、HLC-8220GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとしてガードカラムHZ-L、TSKgel Super HZM-M、TSKgel Super HZ4000、TSKgel Super HZ3000、及び、TSKgel Super HZ2000(以上、東ソー(株)製)を直列に連結して用いることによって求めることができる。それらの分子量は特に述べない限り、溶離液としてTHF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いて測定したものとする。ただし、溶解性が低い場合など、溶離液としてTHFが適していない場合にはNMP(N-メチル-2-ピロリドン)を用いることもできる。また、GPC測定における検出は特に述べない限り、UV線(紫外線)の波長254nm検出器を使用したものとする。
 本明細書において、積層体を構成する各層の位置関係について、「上」又は「下」と記載したときには、注目している複数の層のうち基準となる層の上側又は下側に他の層があればよい。すなわち、基準となる層と上記他の層の間に、更に第3の層や要素が介在していてもよく、基準となる層と上記他の層は接している必要はない。また、特に断らない限り、基材に対し層が積み重なっていく方向を「上」と称し、又は、樹脂組成物層がある場合には、基材から樹脂組成物層へ向かう方向を「上」と称し、その反対方向を「下」と称する。なお、このような上下方向の設定は、本明細書中における便宜のためであり、実際の態様においては、本明細書における「上」方向は、鉛直上向きと異なることもありうる。
 本明細書において、特段の記載がない限り、組成物は、組成物に含まれる各成分として、その成分に該当する2種以上の化合物を含んでもよい。また、特段の記載がない限り、組成物における各成分の含有量とは、その成分に該当する全ての化合物の合計含有量を意味する。
 本明細書において、特に述べない限り、温度は23℃、気圧は101,325Pa(1気圧)、相対湿度は50%RHである。
 本明細書において、好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
Principal embodiments of the present invention are described below. However, the invention is not limited to the illustrated embodiments.
In this specification, a numerical range represented by the symbol "to" means a range including the numerical values before and after "to" as lower and upper limits, respectively.
As used herein, the term "process" is meant to include not only independent processes, but also processes that are indistinguishable from other processes as long as the desired effects of the process can be achieved.
In the description of a group (atomic group) in the present specification, a description that does not describe substitution or unsubstituted includes a group (atomic group) having no substituent as well as a group (atomic group) having a substituent. For example, the term “alkyl group” includes not only alkyl groups without substituents (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also alkyl groups with substituents (substituted alkyl groups).
As used herein, "exposure" includes not only exposure using light but also exposure using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified. Light used for exposure includes actinic rays or radiation such as emission line spectra of mercury lamps, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
As used herein, "(meth)acrylate" means both or either of "acrylate" and "methacrylate", and "(meth)acrylic" means both "acrylic" and "methacrylic", or , and “(meth)acryloyl” means either or both of “acryloyl” and “methacryloyl”.
In this specification, Me in the structural formulas represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
As used herein, the term "total solid content" refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent. Further, in this specification, the solid content concentration is the mass percentage of other components excluding the solvent with respect to the total mass of the composition.
In this specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are values measured using a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) method, unless otherwise specified, and are defined as polystyrene conversion values. In the present specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are, for example, HLC-8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), guard column HZ-L, TSKgel Super HZM-M, TSKgel It can be obtained by connecting Super HZ4000, TSKgel Super HZ3000, and TSKgel Super HZ2000 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) in series. Unless otherwise stated, their molecular weights were determined using THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent. However, NMP (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone) can also be used when THF is not suitable as an eluent, such as when the solubility is low. In addition, unless otherwise specified, detection in GPC measurement uses a UV ray (ultraviolet) wavelength detector of 254 nm.
In this specification, when the positional relationship of each layer constituting the laminate is described as "above" or "below", it means that another layer is above or below the reference layer among the layers of interest. It would be nice if there was That is, a third layer or element may be interposed between the reference layer and the other layer, and the reference layer and the other layer need not be in contact with each other. In addition, unless otherwise specified, the direction in which the layers are stacked with respect to the base material is referred to as "upper", or when there is a resin composition layer, the direction from the base material to the resin composition layer is referred to as "upper". and the opposite direction is called "down". It should be noted that such setting of the vertical direction is for the sake of convenience in this specification, and in an actual aspect, the "upward" direction in this specification may differ from the vertically upward direction.
In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the composition may contain two or more compounds corresponding to each component contained in the composition. In addition, unless otherwise specified, the content of each component in the composition means the total content of all compounds corresponding to that component.
In this specification, the temperature is 23° C., the pressure is 101,325 Pa (1 atm), and the relative humidity is 50% RH, unless otherwise stated.
Combinations of preferred aspects are more preferred aspects herein.
(樹脂組成物)
 本発明の第一の態様に係る樹脂組成物は、樹脂、及び、メタロセン化合物を含み、上記メタロセン化合物が、金属原子と、置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子と、上記金属原子に直結する芳香環を有し、上記芳香環は、上記芳香環に直結する置換基として、ハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を有し、上記メタロセン化合物の500nmにおけるモル吸光係数が330mol-1・L・cm-1以下である。
 本明細書において、2つの原子又は構造が直結するとは、2つの原子又は構造の間に間に連結基などが存在せずに結合することをいう。例えば「金属原子に直結する芳香環」とは、金属原子と芳香環とが、金属原子と芳香環との間に連結基を存在せずに結合していることを意味している。
 本発明の第二の態様に係る樹脂組成物は、樹脂、及び、メタロセン化合物を含み、上記メタロセン化合物が、金属原子と、置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子と、上記金属原子に直結する芳香環を有し、上記芳香環は、上記芳香環に直結する置換基としてハロゲン原子、及び、ハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を有する。
 以下、本発明の第一の態様に係る樹脂組成物、又は、本発明の第二の態様に係る樹脂組成物を合わせて「本発明の樹脂組成物」とも記載する。
 本発明の第一の態様に係る樹脂組成物に含まれる、金属原子と、置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子と、上記金属原子に直結する芳香環を有し、上記芳香環は、上記芳香環に直結する置換基として、ハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を有し、500nmにおけるモル吸光係数が330mol-1・L・cm-1以下であるメタロセン化合物を「第一の特定メタロセン化合物」とも記載する。
 本発明の第二の態様に係る樹脂組成物に含まれる、金属原子と、置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子と、上記金属原子に直結する芳香環を有し、上記芳香環は、上記芳香環に直結する置換基としてハロゲン原子、及び、ハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を有するメタロセン化合物を「第二の特定メタロセン化合物」とも記載する。
 また、第一の特定メタロセン化合物と、第二の特定メタロセン化合物との少なくとも一方に該当するメタロセン化合物を、併せて単に「特定メタロセン化合物」とも記載する。
(resin composition)
A resin composition according to a first aspect of the present invention comprises a resin and a metallocene compound, wherein the metallocene compound comprises a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and the It has an aromatic ring directly connected to a metal atom, the aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom as a substituent directly connected to the aromatic ring, and the metallocene compound has a molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm of It is 330 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less.
In the present specification, "two atoms or structures are directly connected" means that two atoms or structures are bonded without a linking group or the like between them. For example, "an aromatic ring directly linked to a metal atom" means that the metal atom and the aromatic ring are linked without a linking group between the metal atom and the aromatic ring.
A resin composition according to a second aspect of the present invention comprises a resin and a metallocene compound, wherein the metallocene compound comprises a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and the It has an aromatic ring directly linked to a metal atom, and the aromatic ring has a halogen atom as a substituent directly linked to the aromatic ring and an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom.
Hereinafter, the resin composition according to the first aspect of the present invention and the resin composition according to the second aspect of the present invention are collectively referred to as "the resin composition of the present invention".
Contained in the resin composition according to the first aspect of the present invention, having a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and an aromatic ring directly connected to the metal atom, The aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom as a substituent directly connected to the aromatic ring, and a metallocene compound having a molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm of 330 mol −1 L cm −1 or less. Also referred to as "the first specific metallocene compound".
Contained in the resin composition according to the second aspect of the present invention, having a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and an aromatic ring directly connected to the metal atom, Regarding the aromatic ring, a metallocene compound having a halogen atom as a substituent directly bonded to the aromatic ring and an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom is also referred to as a “second specific metallocene compound”.
In addition, a metallocene compound corresponding to at least one of the first specific metallocene compound and the second specific metallocene compound is also simply referred to as the "specific metallocene compound".
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、露光及び現像に供される感光膜の形成に用いられることが好ましく、露光及び有機溶剤を含む現像液を用いた現像に供される膜の形成に用いられることが好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、例えば、半導体デバイスの絶縁膜、再配線層用層間絶縁膜、ストレスバッファ膜等の形成に用いることができ、再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いられることが好ましい。
 特に、本発明の樹脂組成物が、樹脂として環化樹脂又はその前駆体を含み、再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いられることも、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物は、ポジ型現像に供される感光膜の形成に用いられてもよいし、ネガ型現像に供される感光膜の形成に用いられてもよい。
 本発明において、ネガ型現像とは、露光及び現像において、現像により非露光部が除去される現像をいい、ポジ型現像とは、現像により露光部が除去される現像をいう。
 上記露光の方法、上記現像液、及び、上記現像の方法としては、例えば、後述する硬化物の製造方法の説明における露光工程において説明された露光方法、現像工程において説明された現像液及び現像方法が使用される。
The resin composition of the present invention is preferably used for forming a photosensitive film subjected to exposure and development, and is preferably used for forming a film subjected to exposure and development using a developer containing an organic solvent. preferable.
INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The resin composition of the present invention can be used, for example, to form an insulating film for semiconductor devices, an interlayer insulating film for rewiring layers, a stress buffer film, and the like, and can be used to form an interlayer insulating film for rewiring layers. preferable.
In particular, it is also one of preferred aspects of the present invention that the resin composition of the present invention contains a cyclized resin or a precursor thereof as a resin and is used for forming an interlayer insulating film for rewiring layers.
Further, the resin composition of the present invention may be used for forming a photosensitive film for positive development, or may be used for forming a photosensitive film for negative development.
In the present invention, negative development refers to development in which non-exposed areas are removed by development in exposure and development, and positive development refers to development in which exposed areas are removed by development.
The exposure method, the developer, and the development method include, for example, the exposure method described in the exposure step, the developer and the development method described in the development step in the description of the method for producing a cured product described later. is used.
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、黄色灯下での作業安定性に優れる。
 上記効果が得られるメカニズムは不明であるが、下記のように推測される。
The resin composition of the present invention is excellent in working stability under yellow light.
Although the mechanism by which the above effects are obtained is unknown, it is presumed as follows.
 従来から様々な分野において、樹脂組成物を硬化して硬化物を得るという作業が行われている。例えば、樹脂組成物から組成物膜を形成し、これを露光、加熱して硬化物を得る、という作業が挙げられる。
 ここで、樹脂組成物において、樹脂と共にメタロセン化合物を使用することで、硬化物のガラス転移温度(Tg)が向上することが報告されている。
 例えば特許文献1では、チタノセン化合物を重合開始剤として、アクリルモノマー、ポリアミド酸との組み合わせで使用している。しかし、このようなチタノセン化合物を用いた場合には、黄色灯下で暗重合が促進され、組成物の粘度が変化してしまうことが予想される。
暗重合には、樹脂とメタロセン化合物との重合、樹脂同士の重合、樹脂と必要に応じて含まれる重合性化合物との重合、重合性化合物同士での重合などが含まれる。
 本発明の第一の態様及び第二の態様における特定メタロセン化合物は、芳香環にハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基が直結した構造を有する。ハロゲン原子以外の電子求引性基を有することにより、特定メタロセン化合物の吸収スペクトルは短波長化し、黄色灯下での暗重合を抑制できると考えられる。以上の技術より、本発明のメタロセン化合物を含む本発明の樹脂組成物は、黄色灯下での作業安定性に優れると考えられる。
 また、本発明の第一の態様における特定メタロセン化合物は、500nmにおけるモル吸光係数が330mol-1・L・cm-1以下である。このような態様によれば、黄色灯下での感光が抑制されるため、黄色灯下での作業安定性に優れると考えられる。
 本発明の第二の態様におけるメタロセン化合物は、芳香環に直結したハロゲン原子を更に有する。このような態様によれば、メタロセン化合物の分極度が増大し、樹脂組成物中でのメタロセン化合物の安定性が向上すると考えられる。その結果、黄色灯下での作業安定性に更に優れると考えられる。
 ここで、上記特許文献1に記載のチタノセン化合物は、芳香環上の置換基がハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基又は複素環基となっており、芳香環にハロゲン以外の電子求引基を有するメタロセン化合物については記載も示唆もない。
 更に、本発明の樹脂組成物における暗重合の抑制と同様の理由から、本発明の樹脂組成物から形成される組成物膜についても、黄色灯下での暗重合が抑制されると考えられる。
 すなわち、本発明の樹脂組成物から形成される組成物膜を黄色灯下で取り扱った場合にも暗重合は抑制され、例えばパターン形成において微細なパターンが得られやすいと考えられる。
Conventionally, in various fields, an operation of curing a resin composition to obtain a cured product has been performed. For example, an operation of forming a composition film from a resin composition and exposing and heating it to obtain a cured product can be mentioned.
Here, it is reported that the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the cured product is improved by using a metallocene compound together with the resin in the resin composition.
For example, in Patent Document 1, a titanocene compound is used as a polymerization initiator in combination with an acrylic monomer and polyamic acid. However, when such a titanocene compound is used, it is expected that dark polymerization will be accelerated under a yellow light and the viscosity of the composition will change.
The dark polymerization includes polymerization of a resin and a metallocene compound, polymerization of resins, polymerization of a resin and an optionally contained polymerizable compound, polymerization of polymerizable compounds, and the like.
The specific metallocene compounds in the first aspect and the second aspect of the present invention have a structure in which an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom is directly linked to an aromatic ring. By having an electron-withdrawing group other than a halogen atom, the wavelength of the absorption spectrum of the specific metallocene compound is shortened, and dark polymerization under a yellow light can be suppressed. Based on the above technology, the resin composition of the present invention containing the metallocene compound of the present invention is considered to have excellent working stability under yellow light.
Further, the specific metallocene compound in the first aspect of the present invention has a molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm of 330 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less. According to such a mode, since the photosensitivity under a yellow light is suppressed, it is considered that the working stability under a yellow light is excellent.
The metallocene compound in the second aspect of the invention further has a halogen atom directly attached to the aromatic ring. According to such an aspect, the degree of polarization of the metallocene compound is increased, and the stability of the metallocene compound in the resin composition is considered to be improved. As a result, it is considered that the working stability under yellow light is further excellent.
Here, the titanocene compound described in Patent Document 1 is a metallocene compound in which the substituent on the aromatic ring is a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, or a heterocyclic group, and the aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group other than halogen. is neither mentioned nor suggested.
Furthermore, for the same reason as the suppression of dark polymerization in the resin composition of the present invention, it is believed that the composition film formed from the resin composition of the present invention also suppresses dark polymerization under a yellow light.
That is, even when a composition film formed from the resin composition of the present invention is handled under a yellow light, dark polymerization is suppressed, and, for example, fine patterns are likely to be obtained in pattern formation.
 ここで、特許文献1には、特定メタロセン化合物を含む樹脂組成物については記載されていない。 Here, Patent Document 1 does not describe a resin composition containing a specific metallocene compound.
 以下、本発明の樹脂組成物に含まれる成分について詳細に説明する。 The components contained in the resin composition of the present invention are described in detail below.
<樹脂>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、樹脂を含む。
 樹脂としては、特に限定されず、例えば従来のパターン形成用組成物において用いられる樹脂が挙げられるが、環化樹脂及びその前駆体よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の樹脂(特定樹脂)を含むことが好ましく、環化樹脂の前駆体を含むことがより好ましい。
 また、樹脂の酸価(特に、環化樹脂及びその前駆体の酸価)は0~0.8mmol/gであることが好ましく、0.03~0.5mmol/gであることがより好ましく、0.1~0.3mmol/gであることが更に好ましい。
 本発明における特定メタロセン化合物は安定性が高いため、このような酸価を有する樹脂と同時に用いた場合でも、黄色灯下での作業安定性に優れると推測される。
 上記酸価は、公知の方法により測定され、例えば、JIS K 0070:1992に記載の方法により測定される。
 また、樹脂に含まれる酸基としては、保存安定性及び現像性の両立の観点から、pKaが0~10である酸基が好ましく、3~8である酸基がより好ましい。
 pKaとは、酸から水素イオンが放出される解離反応を考え、その平衡定数Kaをその負の常用対数pKaによって表したものである。本明細書において、pKaは、特に断らない限り、ACD/ChemSketch(登録商標)による計算値とする。又は、日本化学会編「改定5版 化学便覧 基礎編」に掲載の値を参照してもよい。
 また、酸基が例えばリン酸等の多価の酸である場合、上記pKaは第一解離定数である。
 このような酸基として、樹脂は、カルボキシ基、及び、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、カルボキシ基又はフェノール性ヒドロキシ基を含むことがより好ましい。
<Resin>
The resin composition of the present invention contains a resin.
The resin is not particularly limited, and includes, for example, resins used in conventional pattern-forming compositions. It preferably contains, and more preferably contains a precursor of the cyclized resin.
Further, the acid value of the resin (especially the acid value of the cyclized resin and its precursor) is preferably 0 to 0.8 mmol/g, more preferably 0.03 to 0.5 mmol/g, More preferably 0.1 to 0.3 mmol/g.
Since the specific metallocene compound in the present invention has high stability, it is presumed that even when it is used together with a resin having such an acid value, it has excellent working stability under a yellow light.
The acid value is measured by a known method, for example, by the method described in JIS K 0070:1992.
The acid group contained in the resin preferably has a pKa of 0 to 10, more preferably 3 to 8, from the viewpoint of both storage stability and developability.
Considering the dissociation reaction in which hydrogen ions are released from an acid, the pKa is expressed by the negative common logarithm pKa of the equilibrium constant Ka. In this specification, unless otherwise specified, pKa is a value calculated by ACD/ChemSketch (registered trademark). Alternatively, the values listed in the Chemical Society of Japan, Revised 5th Edition, Basics of Chemistry, may be referred to.
Moreover, when the acid group is a polyvalent acid such as phosphoric acid, the above pKa is the first dissociation constant.
As such an acid group, the resin preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxy group, more preferably a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxy group.
 環化樹脂は、主鎖構造中にイミド環構造又はオキサゾール環構造を含む樹脂であることが好ましい。
 本発明において、主鎖とは、樹脂分子中で相対的に最も長い結合鎖を表す。
 環化樹脂としては、ポリイミド、ポリベンゾオキサゾール、ポリアミドイミド等が挙げられる。
 環化樹脂の前駆体とは、外部刺激により化学構造の変化を生じて環化樹脂となる樹脂をいい、熱により化学構造の変化を生じて環化樹脂となる樹脂が好ましく、熱により閉環反応を生じて環構造が形成されることにより環化樹脂となる樹脂がより好ましい。
 環化樹脂の前駆体としては、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体、ポリアミドイミド前駆体等が挙げられる。
 すなわち、本発明の樹脂組成物は、特定樹脂として、ポリイミド、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリベンゾオキサゾール、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体、ポリアミドイミド、及び、ポリアミドイミド前駆体よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の樹脂(特定樹脂)を含むことが好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、特定樹脂として、ポリイミド又はポリイミド前駆体を含むことが好ましい。
 また、特定樹脂は重合性基を有することが好ましく、ラジカル重合性基を含むことがより好ましい。
 特定樹脂がラジカル重合性基を有する場合、本発明の樹脂組成物は、後述のラジカル重合開始剤を含むことが好ましく、後述のラジカル重合開始剤を含み、かつ、後述のラジカル架橋剤を含むことがより好ましい。さらに必要に応じて、後述の増感剤を含むことができる。このような本発明の樹脂組成物からは、例えば、ネガ型感光膜が形成される。
 また、特定樹脂は、酸分解性基等の極性変換基を有していてもよい。
 特定樹脂が酸分解性基を有する場合、本発明の樹脂組成物は、後述の光酸発生剤を含むことが好ましい。このような本発明の樹脂組成物からは、例えば、化学増幅型であるポジ型感光膜又はネガ型感光膜が形成される。
The cyclized resin is preferably a resin containing an imide ring structure or an oxazole ring structure in its main chain structure.
In the present invention, the main chain represents the relatively longest connecting chain in the resin molecule.
Examples of cyclized resins include polyimide, polybenzoxazole, and polyamideimide.
A precursor of a cyclized resin is a resin that undergoes a change in chemical structure by an external stimulus to become a cyclized resin, preferably a resin that undergoes a change in chemical structure by heat to become a cyclized resin. A resin that becomes a cyclized resin by forming a ring structure is more preferable.
Precursors of the cyclized resin include polyimide precursors, polybenzoxazole precursors, polyamideimide precursors, and the like.
That is, the resin composition of the present invention contains, as a specific resin, at least one selected from the group consisting of polyimides, polyimide precursors, polybenzoxazoles, polybenzoxazole precursors, polyamideimides, and polyamideimide precursors. It preferably contains a resin (specific resin).
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains polyimide or a polyimide precursor as the specific resin.
Moreover, the specific resin preferably has a polymerizable group, and more preferably contains a radically polymerizable group.
When the specific resin has a radically polymerizable group, the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a radical polymerization initiator described later, and contains a radical polymerization initiator described later and a radical cross-linking agent described later. is more preferred. Further, if necessary, a sensitizer described later can be included. For example, a negative photosensitive film is formed from the resin composition of the present invention.
Moreover, the specific resin may have a polarity conversion group such as an acid-decomposable group.
When the specific resin has an acid-decomposable group, the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a photoacid generator, which will be described later. From such a resin composition of the present invention, for example, a chemically amplified positive photosensitive film or negative photosensitive film is formed.
〔ポリイミド前駆体〕
 本発明で用いるポリイミド前駆体は、その種類等特に定めるものではないが、下記式(2)で表される繰返し単位を含むことが好ましい。

 式(2)中、A及びAは、それぞれ独立に、酸素原子又は-NH-を表し、R111は、2価の有機基を表し、R115は、4価の有機基を表し、R113及びR114は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。
[Polyimide precursor]
Although the type of the polyimide precursor used in the present invention is not particularly limited, it preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (2).

In formula (2), A 1 and A 2 each independently represent an oxygen atom or -NH-, R 111 represents a divalent organic group, R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group, R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
 式(2)におけるA及びAは、それぞれ独立に、酸素原子又は-NH-を表し、酸素原子が好ましい。
 式(2)におけるR111は、2価の有機基を表す。2価の有機基としては、直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族基、環状の脂肪族基及び芳香族基を含む基が例示され、炭素数2~20の直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の環状の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の芳香族基、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、炭素数6~20の芳香族基を含む基がより好ましい。上記直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族基は鎖中の炭化水素基がヘテロ原子を含む基で置換されていてもよく、上記環状の脂肪族基および芳香族基は環員の炭化水素基がヘテロ原子を含む基で置換されていてもよい。本発明の好ましい実施形態として、-Ar-および-Ar-L-Ar-で表される基であることが例示され、特に好ましくは-Ar-L-Ar-で表される基である。但し、Arは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基であり、Lは、単結合、又は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-若しくは-NHCO-、あるいは、上記の2つ以上の組み合わせからなる基である。これらの好ましい範囲は、上述のとおりである。
A 1 and A 2 in formula (2) each independently represent an oxygen atom or —NH—, preferably an oxygen atom.
R 111 in formula (2) represents a divalent organic group. Examples of divalent organic groups include groups containing linear or branched aliphatic groups, cyclic aliphatic groups and aromatic groups, linear or branched aliphatic groups having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, A cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group consisting of a combination thereof is preferable, and a group containing an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable. In the straight-chain or branched aliphatic group, the hydrocarbon group in the chain may be substituted with a group containing a hetero atom, and in the cyclic aliphatic group and the aromatic group, the ring member hydrocarbon group is a hetero atom. may be substituted with a group containing Groups represented by -Ar- and -Ar-L-Ar- are exemplified as preferred embodiments of the present invention, and groups represented by -Ar-L-Ar- are particularly preferred. However, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, L is a single bond, or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO -, -S-, -SO 2 - or -NHCO-, or a group consisting of a combination of two or more of the above. Preferred ranges for these are as described above.
 R111は、ジアミンから誘導されることが好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体の製造に用いられるジアミンとしては、直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族、環状の脂肪族又は芳香族ジアミンなどが挙げられる。ジアミンは、1種のみ用いてもよいし、2種以上用いてもよい。
 具体的には、炭素数2~20の直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の環状の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の芳香族基、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基を含むジアミンであることが好ましく、炭素数6~20の芳香族基を含むジアミンであることがより好ましい。上記直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族基は鎖中の炭化水素基がヘテロ原子を含む基で置換されていてもよく上記環状の脂肪族基および芳香族基は環員の炭化水素基がヘテロ原子を含む基で置換されていてもよい。芳香族基を含む基の例としては、下記が挙げられる。
R 111 is preferably derived from a diamine. Diamines used in the production of polyimide precursors include linear or branched aliphatic, cyclic aliphatic or aromatic diamines. Only one type of diamine may be used, or two or more types may be used.
Specifically, a linear or branched aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group consisting of a combination thereof is preferably a diamine containing, more preferably a diamine containing an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. In the straight-chain or branched aliphatic group, the hydrocarbon group in the chain may be substituted with a group containing a heteroatom. may be substituted with a group containing Examples of groups containing aromatic groups include:

 式中、Aは単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、単結合、又は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、-SO-、-NHCO-、又は、これらの組み合わせから選択される基であることが好ましく、単結合、又は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキレン基、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、若しくは、-SO-から選択される基であることがより好ましく、-CH-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-C(CF-、又は、-C(CH-であることが更に好ましい。
 式中、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。

In the formula, A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, a single bond, or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -C (= O)-, -S-, -SO 2 -, -NHCO-, or preferably a group selected from a combination thereof, and has 1 carbon atom optionally substituted with a single bond or a fluorine atom -3 alkylene groups, -O-, -C(=O)-, -S-, or -SO 2 - is more preferred, and -CH 2 -, -O-, - More preferably, it is S-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, or -C(CH 3 ) 2 -.
In the formula, * represents a binding site with other structures.
 ジアミンとしては、具体的には、1,2-ジアミノエタン、1,2-ジアミノプロパン、1,3-ジアミノプロパン、1,4-ジアミノブタン又は1,6-ジアミノヘキサン;1,2-又は1,3-ジアミノシクロペンタン、1,2-、1,3-又は1,4-ジアミノシクロヘキサン、1,2-、1,3-又は1,4-ビス(アミノメチル)シクロヘキサン、ビス-(4-アミノシクロヘキシル)メタン、ビス-(3-アミノシクロヘキシル)メタン、4,4’-ジアミノ-3,3’-ジメチルシクロヘキシルメタン又はイソホロンジアミン;m-又はp-フェニレンジアミン、ジアミノトルエン、4,4’-又は3,3’-ジアミノビフェニル、4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル、3,3-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル、4,4’-又は3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、4,4’-又は3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルスルホン、4,4’-又は3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルスルフィド、4,4’-又は3,3’-ジアミノベンゾフェノン、3,3’-ジメチル-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、2,2’-ジメチル-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、3,3’-ジメトキシ-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、2,2-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス(3-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(3-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)スルホン、ビス(4-アミノ-3-ヒドロキシフェニル)スルホン、4,4’-ジアミノパラテルフェニル、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノフェノキシ)ビフェニル、ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]スルホン、ビス[4-(3-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]スルホン、ビス[4-(2-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]スルホン、1,4-ビス(4-アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、9,10-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)アントラセン、3,3’-ジメチル-4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルスルホン、1,3-ビス(4-アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、1,3-ビス(3-アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、1,3-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)ベンゼン、3,3’-ジエチル-4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、3,3’-ジメチル-4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、4,4’-ジアミノオクタフルオロビフェニル、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]プロパン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、9,9-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)-10-ヒドロアントラセン、3,3’,4,4’-テトラアミノビフェニル、3,3’,4,4’-テトラアミノジフェニルエーテル、1,4-ジアミノアントラキノン、1,5-ジアミノアントラキノン、3,3-ジヒドロキシ-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、9,9’-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)フルオレン、4,4’-ジメチル-3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルスルホン、3,3’,5,5’-テトラメチル-4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、2,4-又は2,5-ジアミノクメン、2,5-ジメチル-p-フェニレンジアミン、アセトグアナミン、2,3,5,6-テトラメチル-p-フェニレンジアミン、2,4,6-トリメチル-m-フェニレンジアミン、ビス(3-アミノプロピル)テトラメチルジシロキサン、ビス(p-アミノフェニル)オクタメチルペンタシロキサン、2,7-ジアミノフルオレン、2,5-ジアミノピリジン、1,2-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)エタン、ジアミノベンズアニリド、ジアミノ安息香酸のエステル、1,5-ジアミノナフタレン、ジアミノベンゾトリフルオライド、1,3-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、1,4-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)オクタフルオロブタン、1,5-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)デカフルオロペンタン、1,7-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)テトラデカフルオロヘプタン、2,2-ビス[4-(3-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス[4-(2-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)-3,5-ジメチルフェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)-3,5-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、p-ビス(4-アミノ-2-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ベンゼン、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノ-2-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ビフェニル、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノ-3-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ビフェニル、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノ-2-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ジフェニルスルホン、4,4’-ビス(3-アミノ-5-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ジフェニルスルホン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノ-3-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、3,3’,5,5’-テトラメチル-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、4,4’-ジアミノ-2,2’-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)ビフェニル、2,2’,5,5’,6,6’-ヘキサフルオロトリジン又は4,4’-ジアミノクアテルフェニルから選ばれる少なくとも1種のジアミンが挙げられる。 Specific examples of diamines include 1,2-diaminoethane, 1,2-diaminopropane, 1,3-diaminopropane, 1,4-diaminobutane or 1,6-diaminohexane; ,3-diaminocyclopentane, 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4-diaminocyclohexane, 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane, bis-(4- aminocyclohexyl)methane, bis-(3-aminocyclohexyl)methane, 4,4′-diamino-3,3′-dimethylcyclohexylmethane or isophoronediamine; m- or p-phenylenediamine, diaminotoluene, 4,4′- or 3,3'-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether, 3,3-diaminodiphenyl ether, 4,4'- or 3,3'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 4,4'- or 3,3'-diamino diphenyl sulfone, 4,4'- or 3,3'-diaminodiphenyl sulfide, 4,4'- or 3,3'-diaminobenzophenone, 3,3'-dimethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2 '-dimethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 3,3'-dimethoxy-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2-bis(4-aminophenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(4-aminophenyl ) hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis(3-amino -4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)sulfone, bis(4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) ) sulfone, 4,4′-diaminoparaterphenyl, 4,4′-bis(4-aminophenoxy)biphenyl, bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)phenyl]sulfone, bis[4-(3-aminophenoxy ) phenyl]sulfone, bis[4-(2-aminophenoxy)phenyl]sulfone, 1,4-bis(4-aminophenoxy)benzene, 9,10-bis(4-aminophenyl)anthracene, 3,3′- dimethyl-4,4'-diaminodiphenylsulfone, 1,3-bis(4-aminophenoxy)benzene, 1,3-bis(3-aminophenoxy)benzene, 1,3-bis(4-aminophenyl)benzene, 3,3′-diethyl-4,4′-diaminodiphenylmethane, 3,3′-dimethyl-4,4′-diaminodiphenylmethane, 4,4′-diaminooctafluorobiphenyl, 2,2-bis[4-(4 -aminophenoxy)phenyl]propane, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 9,9-bis(4-aminophenyl)-10-hydroanthracene, 3,3′, 4,4'-tetraaminobiphenyl, 3,3',4,4'-tetraaminodiphenyl ether, 1,4-diaminoanthraquinone, 1,5-diaminoanthraquinone, 3,3-dihydroxy-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl , 9,9′-bis(4-aminophenyl)fluorene, 4,4′-dimethyl-3,3′-diaminodiphenylsulfone, 3,3′,5,5′-tetramethyl-4,4′-diamino diphenylmethane, 2,4- or 2,5-diaminocumene, 2,5-dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine, acetoguanamine, 2,3,5,6-tetramethyl-p-phenylenediamine, 2,4,6- trimethyl-m-phenylenediamine, bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, bis(p-aminophenyl)octamethylpentasiloxane, 2,7-diaminofluorene, 2,5-diaminopyridine, 1,2-bis (4-aminophenyl)ethane, diaminobenzanilide, esters of diaminobenzoic acid, 1,5-diaminonaphthalene, diaminobenzotrifluoride, 1,3-bis(4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 1,4-bis (4-aminophenyl)octafluorobutane, 1,5-bis(4-aminophenyl)decafluoropentane, 1,7-bis(4-aminophenyl)tetradecafluoroheptane, 2,2-bis[4-( 3-aminophenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis[4-(2-aminophenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)-3,5- dimethylphenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)-3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, p-bis(4-amino-2-trifluoro methylphenoxy)benzene, 4,4'-bis(4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy)biphenyl, 4,4'-bis(4-amino-3-trifluoromethylphenoxy)biphenyl, 4,4'- Bis(4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy)diphenylsulfone, 4,4′-bis(3-amino-5-trifluoromethylphenoxy)diphenylsulfone, 2,2-bis[4-(4-amino- 3-trifluoromethylphenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 3,3′,5,5′-tetramethyl-4,4′-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4′-diamino-2,2′-bis(trifluoro methyl)biphenyl, 2,2',5,5',6,6'-hexafluorotolyzine or at least one diamine selected from 4,4'-diaminoquaterphenyl.
 また、国際公開第2017/038598号の段落0030~0031に記載のジアミン(DA-1)~(DA-18)も好ましい。 Also preferred are the diamines (DA-1) to (DA-18) described in paragraphs 0030 to 0031 of International Publication No. 2017/038598.
 また、国際公開第2017/038598号の段落0032~0034に記載の2つ以上のアルキレングリコール単位を主鎖にもつジアミンも好ましく用いられる。 Also preferably used are diamines having two or more alkylene glycol units in the main chain described in paragraphs 0032 to 0034 of International Publication No. 2017/038598.
 R111は、得られる有機膜の柔軟性の観点から、-Ar-L-Ar-で表されることが好ましい。但し、Arは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基であり、Lは、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-又は-NHCO-、あるいは、上記の2つ以上の組み合わせからなる基である。Arは、フェニレン基が好ましく、Lは、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1又は2の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-又は-SO-が好ましい。ここでの脂肪族炭化水素基は、アルキレン基が好ましい。 R 111 is preferably represented by -Ar-L-Ar- from the viewpoint of the flexibility of the resulting organic film. However, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S- , —SO 2 — or —NHCO—, or a group consisting of a combination of two or more of the above. Ar is preferably a phenylene group, L is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S- or -SO 2 - . The aliphatic hydrocarbon group here is preferably an alkylene group.
 また、R111は、i線透過率の観点から、下記式(51)又は式(61)で表される2価の有機基であることが好ましい。特に、i線透過率、入手のし易さの観点から、式(61)で表される2価の有機基であることがより好ましい。
 式(51)

 式(51)中、R50~R57は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子又は1価の有機基であり、R50~R57の少なくとも1つは、フッ素原子、メチル基又はトリフルオロメチル基であり、*はそれぞれ独立に、式(2)中の窒素原子との結合部位を表す。
 R50~R57の1価の有機基としては、炭素数1~10(好ましくは炭素数1~6)の無置換のアルキル基、炭素数1~10(好ましくは炭素数1~6)のフッ化アルキル基等が挙げられる。

 式(61)中、R58及びR59は、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子、メチル基、又はトリフルオロメチル基であり、*はそれぞれ独立に、式(2)中の窒素原子との結合部位を表す。
 式(51)又は(61)の構造を与えるジアミンとしては、2,2’-ジメチルベンジジン、2,2’-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、2,2’-ビス(フルオロ)-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、4,4’-ジアミノオクタフルオロビフェニル等が挙げられる。これらは1種で又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
From the viewpoint of i-line transmittance, R 111 is preferably a divalent organic group represented by the following formula (51) or (61). In particular, from the viewpoint of i-line transmittance and availability, a divalent organic group represented by Formula (61) is more preferable.
Equation (51)

In formula (51), R 50 to R 57 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or a monovalent organic group, and at least one of R 50 to R 57 is a fluorine atom, a methyl group or a trifluoro It is a methyl group, and each * independently represents a binding site to the nitrogen atom in formula (2).
The monovalent organic groups represented by R 50 to R 57 include unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms), A fluorinated alkyl group and the like can be mentioned.

In formula (61), R 58 and R 59 are each independently a fluorine atom, a methyl group, or a trifluoromethyl group, and * is each independently a binding site to the nitrogen atom in formula (2) represent.
Diamines that give the structure of formula (51) or (61) include 2,2′-dimethylbenzidine, 2,2′-bis(trifluoromethyl)-4,4′-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2′-bis (Fluoro)-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4'-diaminooctafluorobiphenyl and the like. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 式(2)におけるR115は、4価の有機基を表す。4価の有機基としては、芳香環を含む4価の有機基が好ましく、下記式(5)又は式(6)で表される基がより好ましい。
式(5)又は式(6)中、*はそれぞれ独立に、他の構造との結合部位を表す。

 式(5)中、R112は単結合又は2価の連結基であり、単結合、又は、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-、及び-NHCO-、ならびに、これらの組み合わせから選択される基であることが好ましく、単結合、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキレン基、-O-、-CO-、-S-及び-SO-から選択される基であることがより好ましく、-CH-、-C(CF-、-C(CH-、-O-、-CO-、-S-及び-SO-からなる群から選択される2価の基であることが更に好ましい。
R 115 in formula (2) represents a tetravalent organic group. As the tetravalent organic group, a tetravalent organic group containing an aromatic ring is preferable, and a group represented by the following formula (5) or (6) is more preferable.
In formula (5) or (6), each * independently represents a binding site to another structure.

In formula (5), R 112 is a single bond or a divalent linking group, a single bond, or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -, and -NHCO-, and preferably a group selected from combinations thereof, having 1 to 1 carbon atoms optionally substituted by a single bond or a fluorine atom 3 alkylene group, -O-, -CO-, -S- and -SO 2 -, and -CH 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, -C( It is more preferably a divalent group selected from the group consisting of CH 3 ) 2 -, -O-, -CO-, -S- and -SO 2 -.
 R115は、具体的には、テトラカルボン酸二無水物から無水物基の除去後に残存するテトラカルボン酸残基などが挙げられる。ポリイミド前駆体は、R115に該当する構造として、テトラカルボン酸二無水物残基を、1種のみ含んでもよいし、2種以上含んでもよい。
 テトラカルボン酸二無水物は、下記式(O)で表されることが好ましい。

 式(O)中、R115は、4価の有機基を表す。R115の好ましい範囲は式(2)におけるR115と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
R 115 specifically includes a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of an anhydride group from a tetracarboxylic dianhydride. The polyimide precursor may contain only one type of tetracarboxylic dianhydride residue, or may contain two or more types thereof, as the structure corresponding to R115 .
The tetracarboxylic dianhydride is preferably represented by the following formula (O).

In formula (O), R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group. The preferred range of R 115 is synonymous with R 115 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same.
 テトラカルボン酸二無水物の具体例としては、ピロメリット酸二無水物(PMDA)、3,3’,4,4’-ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ジフェニルスルフィドテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ジフェニルスルホンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ジフェニルメタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,2’,3,3’-ジフェニルメタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,3,3’,4’-ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,3,3’,4’-ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、4,4’-オキシジフタル酸二無水物、2,3,6,7-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,4,5,7-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,2-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)プロパン二無水物、2,2-ビス(2,3-ジカルボキシフェニル)プロパン二無水物、2,2-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン二無水物、1,3-ジフェニルヘキサフルオロプロパン-3,3,4,4-テトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,4,5,6-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,2’,3,3’-ジフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,4,9,10-ペリレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,2,4,5-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,4,5,8-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,8,9,10-フェナントレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,1-ビス(2,3-ジカルボキシフェニル)エタン二無水物、1,1-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)エタン二無水物、1,2,3,4-ベンゼンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、ならびに、これらの炭素数1~6のアルキル及び炭素数1~6のアルコキシ誘導体が挙げられる。 Specific examples of tetracarboxylic dianhydrides include pyromellitic dianhydride (PMDA), 3,3′,4,4′-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3′,4,4′- Diphenyl sulfide tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3′,4,4′-diphenylsulfonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3′,4,4′-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3′ ,4,4′-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2′,3,3′-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3′,4′-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3′,4′-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4,4′-oxydiphthalic dianhydride, 2,3,6,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5 ,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)propane dianhydride, 2,2-bis(2,3-dicarboxyphenyl)propane dianhydride, 2 , 2-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane dianhydride, 1,3-diphenylhexafluoropropane-3,3,4,4-tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5, 6-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2′,3,3′-diphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,4,9,10-perylenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,2,4, 5-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5,8-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,8,9,10-phenanthrenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,1-bis(2, 3-dicarboxyphenyl)ethane dianhydride, 1,1-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)ethane dianhydride, 1,2,3,4-benzenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, and these C1-6 alkyl and C1-6 alkoxy derivatives are included.
また、国際公開第2017/038598号の段落0038に記載のテトラカルボン酸二無水物(DAA-1)~(DAA-5)も好ましい例として挙げられる。 Further, tetracarboxylic dianhydrides (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) described in paragraph 0038 of WO 2017/038598 are also preferred examples.
 式(2)において、R111とR115の少なくとも一方がOH基を有することも可能である。より具体的には、R111として、ビスアミノフェノール誘導体の残基が挙げられる。 In formula (2), it is also possible that at least one of R 111 and R 115 has an OH group. More specifically, R 111 includes residues of bisaminophenol derivatives.
 式(2)におけるR113及びR114は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。1価の有機基としては、直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基、環状アルキル基、芳香族基、又はポリアルキレンオキシ基を含むことが好ましい。また、R113及びR114の少なくとも一方が重合性基を含むことが好ましく、両方が重合性基を含むことがより好ましい。R113及びR114の少なくとも一方が2以上の重合性基を含むことも好ましい。重合性基としては、熱、ラジカル等の作用により、架橋反応することが可能な基であって、ラジカル重合性基が好ましい。重合性基の具体例としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基、アルコキシメチル基、ヒドロキシメチル基、アシルオキシメチル基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、ベンゾオキサゾリル基、ブロックイソシアネート基、アミノ基が挙げられる。ポリイミド前駆体が有するラジカル重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基が好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、イソアリル基、2-メチルアリル基、ビニル基と直接結合した芳香環を有する基(例えば、ビニルフェニル基など)、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基、下記式(III)で表される基などが挙げられ、下記式(III)で表される基が好ましい。
R 113 and R 114 in formula (2) each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. The monovalent organic group preferably includes a linear or branched alkyl group, a cyclic alkyl group, an aromatic group, or a polyalkyleneoxy group. At least one of R 113 and R 114 preferably contains a polymerizable group, more preferably both contain a polymerizable group. It is also preferred that at least one of R 113 and R 114 contains two or more polymerizable groups. The polymerizable group is a group capable of undergoing a cross-linking reaction by the action of heat, radicals, or the like, and is preferably a radically polymerizable group. Specific examples of the polymerizable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an alkoxymethyl group, a hydroxymethyl group, an acyloxymethyl group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a benzoxazolyl group, a blocked isocyanate group, and an amino group. be done. As the radically polymerizable group possessed by the polyimide precursor, a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferred.
Groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, an isoallyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, a group having an aromatic ring directly bonded to a vinyl group (e.g., vinylphenyl group), and a (meth)acrylamide group. , a (meth)acryloyloxy group, a group represented by the following formula (III), and the like, and a group represented by the following formula (III) is preferable.
 式(III)において、R200は、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基又はメチロール基を表し、水素原子又はメチル基が好ましい。
 式(III)において、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
 式(III)において、R201は、炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、-CHCH(OH)CH-、シクロアルキレン基又はポリアルキレンオキシ基を表す。
 好適なR201の例は、エチレン基、プロピレン基、トリメチレン基、テトラメチレン基、ペンタメチレン基、ヘキサメチレン基、オクタメチレン基、ドデカメチレン基等のアルキレン基、1,2-ブタンジイル基、1,3-ブタンジイル基、-CHCH(OH)CH-、ポリアルキレンオキシ基が挙げられ、エチレン基、プロピレン基等のアルキレン基、-CHCH(OH)CH-、シクロヘキシル基、ポリアルキレンオキシ基がより好ましく、エチレン基、プロピレン基等のアルキレン基、又はポリアルキレンオキシ基が更に好ましい。
 本発明において、ポリアルキレンオキシ基とは、アルキレンオキシ基が2以上直接結合した基をいう。ポリアルキレンオキシ基に含まれる複数のアルキレンオキシ基におけるアルキレン基は、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 ポリアルキレンオキシ基が、アルキレン基が異なる複数種のアルキレンオキシ基を含む場合、ポリアルキレンオキシ基におけるアルキレンオキシ基の配列は、ランダムな配列であってもよいし、ブロックを有する配列であってもよいし、交互等のパターンを有する配列であってもよい。
 上記アルキレン基の炭素数(アルキレン基が置換基を有する場合、置換基の炭素数を含む)は、2以上であることが好ましく、2~10であることがより好ましく、2~6であることがより好ましく、2~5であることが更に好ましく、2~4であることが一層好ましく、2又は3であることが特に好ましく、2であることが最も好ましい。
 また、上記アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよい。好ましい置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ハロゲン原子等が挙げられる。
 また、ポリアルキレンオキシ基に含まれるアルキレンオキシ基の数(ポリアルキレンオキシ基の繰返し数)は、2~20が好ましく、2~10がより好ましく、2~6が更に好ましい。
 ポリアルキレンオキシ基としては、溶剤溶解性及び耐溶剤性の観点からは、ポリエチレンオキシ基、ポリプロピレンオキシ基、ポリトリメチレンオキシ基、ポリテトラメチレンオキシ基、又は、複数のエチレンオキシ基と複数のプロピレンオキシ基とが結合した基が好ましく、ポリエチレンオキシ基又はポリプロピレンオキシ基がより好ましく、ポリエチレンオキシ基が更に好ましい。上記複数のエチレンオキシ基と複数のプロピレンオキシ基とが結合した基において、エチレンオキシ基とプロピレンオキシ基とはランダムに配列していてもよいし、ブロックを形成して配列していてもよいし、交互等のパターン状に配列していてもよい。これらの基におけるエチレンオキシ基等の繰返し数の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。
In formula (III), R 200 represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group or a methylol group, preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
In formula (III), * represents a binding site with another structure.
In formula (III), R 201 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, a cycloalkylene group or a polyalkyleneoxy group.
Suitable examples of R 201 include ethylene, propylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, pentamethylene, hexamethylene, octamethylene, alkylene groups such as dodecamethylene, 1,2-butanediyl, 1, 3-butanediyl group, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, polyalkyleneoxy group, ethylene group, alkylene group such as propylene group, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, cyclohexyl group, polyalkylene An oxy group is more preferred, and an alkylene group such as an ethylene group, a propylene group, or a polyalkyleneoxy group is even more preferred.
In the present invention, a polyalkyleneoxy group refers to a group in which two or more alkyleneoxy groups are directly bonded. The alkylene groups in the plurality of alkyleneoxy groups contained in the polyalkyleneoxy group may be the same or different.
When the polyalkyleneoxy group contains multiple types of alkyleneoxy groups with different alkylene groups, the arrangement of the alkyleneoxy groups in the polyalkyleneoxy group may be a random arrangement or a block arrangement. Alternatively, it may be arranged in a pattern such as an alternating pattern.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group (when the alkylene group has a substituent, including the number of carbon atoms in the substituent) is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 10, and 2 to 6. is more preferred, 2 to 5 is more preferred, 2 to 4 is even more preferred, 2 or 3 is particularly preferred, and 2 is most preferred.
Moreover, the said alkylene group may have a substituent. Preferred substituents include alkyl groups, aryl groups, and halogen atoms.
The number of alkyleneoxy groups contained in the polyalkyleneoxy group (repeating number of polyalkyleneoxy groups) is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 10, and even more preferably 2 to 6.
As the polyalkyleneoxy group, from the viewpoint of solvent solubility and solvent resistance, a polyethyleneoxy group, a polypropyleneoxy group, a polytrimethyleneoxy group, a polytetramethyleneoxy group, or a plurality of ethyleneoxy groups and a plurality of propylene A group to which an oxy group is bonded is preferable, a polyethyleneoxy group or a polypropyleneoxy group is more preferable, and a polyethyleneoxy group is still more preferable. In the group in which a plurality of ethyleneoxy groups and a plurality of propyleneoxy groups are bonded, the ethyleneoxy groups and the propyleneoxy groups may be arranged randomly, or may be arranged to form blocks. , may be arranged in a pattern such as alternately. Preferred embodiments of the number of repetitions of ethyleneoxy groups and the like in these groups are as described above.
 式(2)において、R113が水素原子である場合、又は、R114が水素原子である場合、ポリイミド前駆体はエチレン性不飽和結合を有する3級アミン化合物と対塩を形成していてもよい。このようなエチレン性不飽和結合を有する3級アミン化合物の例としては、N,N-ジメチルアミノプロピルメタクリレートが挙げられる。 In formula (2), when R 113 is a hydrogen atom, or when R 114 is a hydrogen atom, the polyimide precursor may form a tertiary amine compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond and a counter salt. good. Examples of such tertiary amine compounds having ethylenically unsaturated bonds include N,N-dimethylaminopropyl methacrylate.
 式(2)において、R113及びR114の少なくとも一方が、酸分解性基等の極性変換基であってもよい。酸分解性基としては、酸の作用で分解して、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基等のアルカリ可溶性基を生じるものであれば特に限定されないが、アセタール基、ケタール基、シリル基、シリルエーテル基、第三級アルキルエステル基等が好ましく、露光感度の観点からは、アセタール基又はケタール基がより好ましい。
 酸分解性基の具体例としては、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基、イソプロポキシカルボニル基、テトラヒドロピラニル基、テトラヒドロフラニル基、エトキシエチル基、メトキシエチル基、エトキシメチル基、トリメチルシリル基、tert-ブトキシカルボニルメチル基、トリメチルシリルエーテル基などが挙げられる。露光感度の観点からは、エトキシエチル基、又は、テトラヒドロフラニル基が好ましい。
In formula (2), at least one of R 113 and R 114 may be a polarity conversion group such as an acid-decomposable group. The acid-decomposable group is not particularly limited as long as it is decomposed by the action of an acid to generate an alkali-soluble group such as a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxyl group. , a tertiary alkyl ester group and the like are preferable, and from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, an acetal group or a ketal group is more preferable.
Specific examples of acid-decomposable groups include tert-butoxycarbonyl, isopropoxycarbonyl, tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, ethoxyethyl, methoxyethyl, ethoxymethyl, trimethylsilyl, and tert-butoxycarbonylmethyl. groups, trimethylsilyl ether groups, and the like. From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, an ethoxyethyl group or a tetrahydrofuranyl group is preferred.
 また、ポリイミド前駆体は、構造中にフッ素原子を有することも好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体中のフッ素原子含有量は、10質量%以上が好ましく、また、20質量%以下が好ましい。 Also, the polyimide precursor preferably has a fluorine atom in its structure. The content of fluorine atoms in the polyimide precursor is preferably 10% by mass or more, and preferably 20% by mass or less.
 また、基板との密着性を向上させる目的で、ポリイミド前駆体は、シロキサン構造を有する脂肪族基と共重合していてもよい。具体的には、ジアミンとして、ビス(3-アミノプロピル)テトラメチルジシロキサン、ビス(p-アミノフェニル)オクタメチルペンタシロキサンなどを用いる態様が挙げられる。 In addition, for the purpose of improving adhesion to the substrate, the polyimide precursor may be copolymerized with an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure. Specifically, there is an embodiment using bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, bis(p-aminophenyl)octamethylpentasiloxane, or the like as the diamine.
 式(2)で表される繰返し単位は、式(2-A)で表される繰返し単位であることが好ましい。すなわち、本発明で用いるポリイミド前駆体の少なくとも1種が、式(2-A)で表される繰返し単位を有する前駆体であることが好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体が式(2-A)で表される繰返し単位を含むことにより、露光ラチチュードの幅をより広げることが可能になる。
式(2-A)

 式(2-A)中、A及びAは、酸素原子を表し、R111及びR112は、それぞれ独立に、2価の有機基を表し、R113及びR114は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、R113及びR114の少なくとも一方は、重合性基を含む基であり、両方が重合性基を含む基であることが好ましい。
The repeating unit represented by formula (2) is preferably a repeating unit represented by formula (2-A). That is, at least one polyimide precursor used in the present invention is preferably a precursor having a repeating unit represented by formula (2-A). By including the repeating unit represented by the formula (2-A) in the polyimide precursor, it becomes possible to further widen the width of the exposure latitude.
Formula (2-A)

In formula (2-A), A 1 and A 2 represent an oxygen atom, R 111 and R 112 each independently represent a divalent organic group, R 113 and R 114 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, at least one of R 113 and R 114 is a group containing a polymerizable group, and both are preferably groups containing a polymerizable group.
 A、A、R111、R113及びR114は、それぞれ独立に、式(2)におけるA、A、R111、R113及びR114と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
112は、式(5)におけるR112と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
A 1 , A 2 , R 111 , R 113 and R 114 are each independently synonymous with A 1 , A 2 , R 111 , R 113 and R 114 in formula (2), and preferred ranges are also the same. .
R 112 has the same definition as R 112 in formula (5), and the preferred range is also the same.
 ポリイミド前駆体は、式(2)で表される繰返し単位を1種含んでいてもよいが、2種以上で含んでいてもよい。また、式(2)で表される繰返し単位の構造異性体を含んでいてもよい。また、ポリイミド前駆体は、上記式(2)の繰返し単位のほかに、他の種類の繰返し単位をも含んでよいことはいうまでもない。 The polyimide precursor may contain one type of repeating unit represented by formula (2), but may contain two or more types. It may also contain structural isomers of the repeating unit represented by formula (2). It goes without saying that the polyimide precursor may also contain other types of repeating units in addition to the repeating units of formula (2) above.
 本発明におけるポリイミド前駆体の一実施形態として、式(2)で表される繰返し単位の含有量が、全繰返し単位の50モル%以上である態様が挙げられる。上記合計含有量は、70モル%以上であることがより好ましく、90モル%以上であることが更に好ましく、90モル%超であることが特に好ましい。上記合計含有量の上限は、特に限定されず、末端を除くポリイミド前駆体における全ての繰返し単位が、式(2)で表される繰返し単位であってもよい。 As one embodiment of the polyimide precursor in the present invention, the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (2) is 50 mol% or more of the total repeating units. The total content is more preferably 70 mol % or more, still more preferably 90 mol % or more, and particularly preferably more than 90 mol %. The upper limit of the total content is not particularly limited, and all repeating units in the polyimide precursor excluding terminals may be repeating units represented by formula (2).
 ポリイミド前駆体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、好ましくは5,000~100,000であり、より好ましくは10,000~50,000であり、更に好ましくは15,000~40,000である。また、数平均分子量(Mn)は、好ましくは2,000~40,000であり、より好ましくは3,000~30,000であり、更に好ましくは4,000~20,000である。
 上記ポリイミド前駆体の分子量の分散度は、1.5以上が好ましく、1.8以上がより好ましく、2.0以上であることが更に好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体の分子量の分散度の上限値は特に定めるものではないが、例えば、7.0以下が好ましく、6.5以下がより好ましく、6.0以下が更に好ましい。
 本明細書において、分子量の分散度とは、重量平均分子量/数平均分子量により算出される値である。
 また、樹脂組成物が特定樹脂として複数種のポリイミド前駆体を含む場合、少なくとも1種のポリイミド前駆体の重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が上記範囲であることが好ましい。また、上記複数種のポリイミド前駆体を1つの樹脂として算出した重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が、それぞれ、上記範囲内であることも好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide precursor is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000, still more preferably 15,000 to 40,000. Also, the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 2,000 to 40,000, more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, still more preferably 4,000 to 20,000.
The polyimide precursor preferably has a molecular weight distribution of 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more. Although the upper limit of the polyimide precursor's molecular weight dispersity is not particularly defined, it is preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, and even more preferably 6.0 or less.
In the present specification, the molecular weight dispersity is a value calculated by weight average molecular weight/number average molecular weight.
Moreover, when the resin composition contains a plurality of polyimide precursors as the specific resin, the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion of at least one polyimide precursor are preferably within the above ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, the number-average molecular weight, and the degree of dispersion calculated from the multiple types of polyimide precursors as one resin are within the ranges described above.
〔ポリイミド〕
 本発明に用いられるポリイミドは、アルカリ可溶性ポリイミドであってもよく、有機溶剤を主成分とする現像液に対して可溶なポリイミドであってもよい。
 本明細書において、アルカリ可溶性ポリイミドとは、100gの2.38質量%テトラメチルアンモニウム水溶液に対し、23℃で0.1g以上溶解するポリイミドをいい、パターン形成性の観点からは、0.5g以上溶解するポリイミドであることが好ましく、1.0g以上溶解するポリイミドであることが更に好ましい。上記溶解量の上限は特に限定されないが、100g以下であることが好ましい。
 また、ポリイミドは、得られる有機膜の膜強度及び絶縁性の観点からは、複数個のイミド構造を主鎖に有するポリイミドであることが好ましい。
 本明細書において、「主鎖」とは、樹脂を構成する高分子化合物の分子中で相対的に最も長い結合鎖をいい、「側鎖」とはそれ以外の結合鎖をいう。
[Polyimide]
The polyimide used in the present invention may be an alkali-soluble polyimide or a polyimide soluble in a developer containing an organic solvent as a main component.
In the present specification, the alkali-soluble polyimide refers to a polyimide that dissolves at 23° C. in an amount of 0.1 g or more in 100 g of a 2.38% by mass tetramethylammonium aqueous solution. It is preferably a polyimide that dissolves, and more preferably a polyimide that dissolves 1.0 g or more. Although the upper limit of the dissolved amount is not particularly limited, it is preferably 100 g or less.
Moreover, the polyimide is preferably a polyimide having a plurality of imide structures in its main chain from the viewpoint of the film strength and insulating properties of the resulting organic film.
As used herein, the term "main chain" refers to the relatively longest linking chain in the molecule of the polymer compound that constitutes the resin, and the term "side chain" refers to the other linking chain.
-フッ素原子-
 得られる有機膜の膜強度の観点からは、ポリイミドは、フッ素原子を有することも好ましい。
 フッ素原子は、例えば、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR132、又は、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131に含まれることが好ましく、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR132、又は、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131にフッ化アルキル基として含まれることがより好ましい。
 ポリイミドの全質量に対するフッ素原子の量は、5質量%以上が好ましく、また、20質量%以下が好ましい。
- fluorine atom -
From the viewpoint of the film strength of the organic film to be obtained, the polyimide preferably has a fluorine atom.
A fluorine atom is preferably included in, for example, R 132 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later or R 131 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later, and the formula ( It is more preferably contained as a fluorinated alkyl group in R 132 in the repeating unit represented by 4) or R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later.
The amount of fluorine atoms relative to the total mass of polyimide is preferably 5% by mass or more and preferably 20% by mass or less.
-ケイ素原子-
 得られる有機膜の膜強度の観点からは、ポリイミドは、ケイ素原子を有することも好ましい。
 ケイ素原子は、例えば、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131に含まれることが好ましく、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131に後述する有機変性(ポリ)シロキサン構造として含まれることがより好ましい。
 また、上記ケイ素原子又は上記有機変性(ポリ)シロキサン構造はポリイミドの側鎖に含まれていてもよいが、ポリイミドの主鎖に含まれることが好ましい。
 ポリイミドの全質量に対するケイ素原子の量は、1質量%以上が好ましく、20質量%以下がより好ましい。
-Silicon atom-
From the viewpoint of the film strength of the organic film to be obtained, the polyimide preferably has a silicon atom.
A silicon atom, for example, is preferably contained in R 131 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later, and R 131 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later is an organic modified (poly ) is more preferably contained as a siloxane structure.
The silicon atom or the organically modified (poly)siloxane structure may be contained in the side chain of the polyimide, but is preferably contained in the main chain of the polyimide.
The amount of silicon atoms relative to the total mass of polyimide is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.
-エチレン性不飽和結合-
 得られる有機膜の膜強度の観点からは、ポリイミドは、エチレン性不飽和結合を有することが好ましい。
 ポリイミドは、エチレン性不飽和結合を主鎖末端に有していてもよいし、側鎖に有していてもよいが、側鎖に有することが好ましい。
 上記エチレン性不飽和結合は、ラジカル重合性を有することが好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合は、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR132、又は、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131に含まれることが好ましく、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR132、又は、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131にエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基として含まれることがより好ましい。
 これらの中でも、エチレン性不飽和結合は、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131に含まれることが好ましく、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131にエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基として含まれることがより好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、ビニルフェニル基等の芳香環に直接結合した、置換されていてもよいビニル基を有する基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基、下記式(IV)で表される基などが挙げられる。
- Ethylenically unsaturated bond -
From the viewpoint of the film strength of the resulting organic film, the polyimide preferably has an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
The polyimide may have an ethylenically unsaturated bond at the end of its main chain or in a side chain, preferably in a side chain.
The ethylenically unsaturated bond preferably has radical polymerizability.
The ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably contained in R 132 in a repeating unit represented by the formula (4) described later, or R 131 in a repeating unit represented by the formula (4) described later. It is more preferably included as a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in R 132 in the repeating unit represented by (4) or R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below.
Among these, the ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably contained in R 131 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later, and ethylene It is more preferably included as a group having a polyunsaturated bond.
The group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond includes a group having an optionally substituted vinyl group directly bonded to an aromatic ring such as a vinyl group, an allyl group, a vinylphenyl group, a (meth)acrylamide group, a (meth) Examples include an acryloyloxy group and a group represented by the following formula (IV).
 式(IV)中、R20は、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基又はメチロール基を表し、水素原子又はメチル基が好ましい。 In formula (IV), R 20 represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group or a methylol group, preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
 式(IV)中、R21は、炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、-O-CHCH(OH)CH-、-C(=O)O-、-O(C=O)NH-、炭素数2~30の(ポリ)アルキレンオキシ基(アルキレン基の炭素数は2~12が好ましく、2~6がより好ましく、2又は3が特に好ましい;繰返し数は1~12が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3が特に好ましい)、又はこれらを2以上組み合わせた基を表す。
 また、上記炭素数2~12のアルキレン基としては、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、環状又はこれらの組み合わせにより表されるアルキレン基のいずれであってもよい。
 上記炭素数2~12のアルキレン基としては、炭素数2~8のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数2~4のアルキレン基がより好ましい。
In formula (IV), R 21 is an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, —O—CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, —C(═O)O—, —O(C═O)NH— , a (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms (the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 2 to 12, more preferably 2 to 6, and particularly preferably 2 or 3; the number of repetitions is preferably 1 to 12, 1 to 6 are more preferable, and 1 to 3 are particularly preferable), or a group in which two or more of these are combined.
In addition, the alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms may be a linear, branched, cyclic, or a combination of these alkylene groups.
As the alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferable.
 これらの中でも、R21は下記式(R1)~式(R3)のいずれかで表される基であることが好ましく、式(R1)で表される基であることがより好ましい。

 式(R1)~(R3)中、Lは単結合、又は、炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、炭素数2~30の(ポリ)アルキレンオキシ基若しくはこれらを2以上結合した基を表し、Xは酸素原子又は硫黄原子を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表し、●は式(IV)中のR21が結合する酸素原子との結合部位を表す。
 式(R1)~(R3)中、Lにおける炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、又は、炭素数2~30の(ポリ)アルキレンオキシ基の好ましい態様は、上述のR21における、炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、又は、炭素数2~30の(ポリ)アルキレンオキシ基の好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(R1)中、Xは酸素原子であることが好ましい。
 式(R1)~(R3)中、*は式(IV)中の*と同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 式(R1)で表される構造は、例えば、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基等のヒドロキシ基を有するポリイミドと、イソシアナト基及びエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物(例えば、2-イソシアナトエチルメタクリレート等)とを反応することにより得られる。
 式(R2)で表される構造は、例えば、カルボキシ基を有するポリイミドと、ヒドロキシ基及びエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物(例えば、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート等)とを反応することにより得られる。
 式(R3)で表される構造は、例えば、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基等のヒドロキシ基を有するポリイミドと、グリシジル基及びエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物(例えば、グリシジルメタクリレート等)とを反応することにより得られる。
Among these, R 21 is preferably a group represented by any one of the following formulas (R1) to (R3), more preferably a group represented by formula (R1).

In formulas (R1) to (R3), L represents a single bond, an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, a (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, or a group in which two or more of these are combined, and X represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, * represents a bonding site with another structure, and ● represents a bonding site with the oxygen atom to which R 21 in formula (IV) bonds.
In formulas (R1) to (R3), a preferred embodiment of an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms or a (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms in L is the above-mentioned R 21 having 2 to 12 carbon atoms. It is the same as the preferred embodiment of the 12 alkylene group or the (poly)alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms.
In formula (R1), X is preferably an oxygen atom.
In formulas (R1) to (R3), * has the same meaning as * in formula (IV), and preferred embodiments are also the same.
The structure represented by formula (R1) is, for example, a polyimide having a hydroxy group such as a phenolic hydroxy group, and a compound having an isocyanato group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond (e.g., 2-isocyanatoethyl methacrylate, etc.). Obtained by reaction.
The structure represented by formula (R2) can be obtained, for example, by reacting a polyimide having a carboxy group with a compound having a hydroxy group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond (eg, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, etc.).
The structure represented by formula (R3) can be obtained, for example, by reacting a polyimide having a hydroxy group such as a phenolic hydroxy group with a compound having a glycidyl group and an ethylenically unsaturated bond (e.g., glycidyl methacrylate, etc.) can get.
 式(IV)中、*は他の構造との結合部位を表し、ポリイミドの主鎖との結合部位であることが好ましい。 In formula (IV), * represents a binding site with another structure, preferably a binding site with the main chain of polyimide.
 ポリイミドの全質量に対するエチレン性不飽和結合の量は、0.0001~0.1mol/gであることが好ましく、0.0005~0.05mol/gであることがより好ましい。 The amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds relative to the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 0.0001-0.1 mol/g, more preferably 0.0005-0.05 mol/g.
-エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基以外の重合性基-
 ポリイミドは、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基以外の重合性基を有していてもよい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基以外の重合性基としては、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基等の環状エーテル基、メトキシメチル基等のアルコキシメチル基、メチロール基等が挙げられる。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基以外の重合性基は、例えば、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131に含まれることが好ましい。
 ポリイミドの全質量に対するエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基以外の重合性基の量は、0.0001~0.1mol/gであることが好ましく、0.001~0.05mol/gであることがより好ましい。
-Polymerizable Groups Other than Groups Having Ethylenically Unsaturated Bonds-
Polyimide may have a polymerizable group other than the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
Polymerizable groups other than groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include cyclic ether groups such as an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, alkoxymethyl groups such as a methoxymethyl group, and methylol groups.
A polymerizable group other than a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably included, for example, in R 131 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described below.
The amount of the polymerizable group other than the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond with respect to the total mass of the polyimide is preferably 0.0001 to 0.1 mol / g, preferably 0.001 to 0.05 mol / g. more preferred.
-極性変換基-
 ポリイミドは、酸分解性基等の極性変換基を有していてもよい。ポリイミドにおける酸分解性基は、上述の式(2)におけるR113及びR114において説明した酸分解性基と同様であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 極性変換基は、例えば、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131、R132、ポリイミドの末端などに含まれる。
-Polarity conversion group-
The polyimide may have a polarity conversion group such as an acid-decomposable group. The acid-decomposable group in the polyimide is the same as the acid-decomposable group described for R 113 and R 114 in formula (2) above, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
Polar conversion groups are included, for example, at R 131 and R 132 in the repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later, the terminal of polyimide, and the like.
-酸価-
 ポリイミドがアルカリ現像に供される場合、現像性を向上する観点からは、ポリイミドの酸価は、30mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、50mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上であることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記酸価は500mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、400mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、ポリイミドが有機溶剤を主成分とする現像液を用いた現像(例えば、後述する「溶剤現像」)に供される場合、ポリイミドの酸価は、1~35mgKOH/gが好ましく、2~30mgKOH/gがより好ましく、5~20mgKOH/gが更に好ましい。
 上記酸価は、公知の方法により測定され、例えば、JIS K 0070:1992に記載の方法により測定される。
 また、ポリイミドに含まれる酸基としては、保存安定性及び現像性の両立の観点から、pKaが0~10である酸基が好ましく、3~8である酸基がより好ましい。
 このような酸基として、ポリイミドは、カルボキシ基、及び、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基を含むことがより好ましい。
- Acid value -
When polyimide is subjected to alkali development, the acid value of polyimide is preferably 30 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, and more preferably 70 mgKOH/g or more, from the viewpoint of improving developability. is more preferable.
Also, the acid value is preferably 500 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, and even more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less.
Further, when the polyimide is subjected to development using a developer containing an organic solvent as a main component (for example, "solvent development" described later), the acid value of the polyimide is preferably 1 to 35 mgKOH/g, and 2 to 30 mgKOH. /g is more preferred, and 5 to 20 mgKOH/g is even more preferred.
The acid value is measured by a known method, for example, by the method described in JIS K 0070:1992.
As the acid group contained in the polyimide, an acid group having a pKa of 0 to 10 is preferable, and an acid group having a pKa of 3 to 8 is more preferable from the viewpoint of both storage stability and developability.
As such an acid group, the polyimide preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxy group, more preferably a phenolic hydroxy group.
-フェノール性ヒドロキシ基-
 アルカリ現像液による現像速度を適切なものとする観点からは、ポリイミドは、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基を有することが好ましい。
 ポリイミドは、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基を主鎖末端に有してもよいし、側鎖に有してもよい。
 フェノール性ヒドロキシ基は、例えば、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR132、又は、後述する式(4)で表される繰返し単位におけるR131に含まれることが好ましい。
 ポリイミドの全質量に対するフェノール性ヒドロキシ基の量は、0.1~30mol/gであることが好ましく、1~20mol/gであることがより好ましい。
-Phenolic hydroxy group-
The polyimide preferably has a phenolic hydroxy group from the viewpoint of making the development speed with an alkaline developer appropriate.
The polyimide may have a phenolic hydroxy group at the end of the main chain or in the side chain.
A phenolic hydroxy group is preferably contained in, for example, R 132 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later or R 131 in a repeating unit represented by formula (4) described later.
The amount of phenolic hydroxy groups relative to the total weight of the polyimide is preferably 0.1-30 mol/g, more preferably 1-20 mol/g.
 本発明で用いるポリイミドとしては、イミド構造を有する高分子化合物であれば、特に限定はないが、下記式(4)で表される繰返し単位を含むことが好ましい。

 式(4)中、R131は、2価の有機基を表し、R132は、4価の有機基を表す。
 重合性基を有する場合、重合性基は、R131及びR132の少なくとも一方に位置していてもよいし、下記式(4-1)又は式(4-2)に示すようにポリイミドの末端に位置していてもよい。
式(4-1)

式(4-1)中、R133は重合性基であり、他の基は式(4)と同義である。
式(4-2)

 R134及びR135の少なくとも一方は重合性基であり、重合性基でない場合は有機基であり、他の基は式(4)と同義である。
The polyimide used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having an imide structure, but it preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (4).

In formula (4), R 131 represents a divalent organic group and R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group.
When it has a polymerizable group, the polymerizable group may be located on at least one of R 131 and R 132 , and the terminal of the polyimide as shown in the following formula (4-1) or (4-2) may be located in
Formula (4-1)

In formula (4-1), R 133 is a polymerizable group, and other groups are the same as in formula (4).
Formula (4-2)

At least one of R 134 and R 135 is a polymerizable group, and when it is not a polymerizable group, it is an organic group, and the other groups are as defined in formula (4).
 重合性基としては、上述のエチレン性不飽和結合を含む基、又は、上述のエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基以外の架橋性基が挙げられる。
 R131は、2価の有機基を表す。2価の有機基としては、式(2)におけるR111と同様のものが例示され、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 また、R131としては、ジアミンのアミノ基の除去後に残存するジアミン残基が挙げられる。ジアミンとしては、脂肪族、環式脂肪族又は芳香族ジアミンなどが挙げられる。具体的な例としては、ポリイミド前駆体の式(2)中のR111の例が挙げられる。
Examples of the polymerizable group include the above-described groups containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond and crosslinkable groups other than the above-described groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
R 131 represents a divalent organic group. Examples of the divalent organic group are the same as those of R 111 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same.
R 131 also includes a diamine residue remaining after removal of the amino group of the diamine. Diamines include aliphatic, cycloaliphatic or aromatic diamines. A specific example is the example of R 111 in formula (2) of the polyimide precursor.
 R131は、少なくとも2つのアルキレングリコール単位を主鎖にもつジアミン残基であることが、焼成時における反りの発生をより効果的に抑制する点で好ましい。より好ましくは、エチレングリコール鎖、プロピレングリコール鎖のいずれか又は両方を一分子中にあわせて2つ以上含むジアミン残基であり、更に好ましくは上記ジアミンであって、芳香環を含まないジアミン残基である。 R 131 is preferably a diamine residue having at least two alkylene glycol units in its main chain from the viewpoint of more effectively suppressing warping during baking. More preferably, it is a diamine residue containing two or more ethylene glycol chains, propylene glycol chains, or both in one molecule, and more preferably the above diamine, which does not contain an aromatic ring. is.
 エチレングリコール鎖、プロピレングリコール鎖のいずれか又は両方を一分子中にあわせて2つ以上含むジアミンとしては、ジェファーミン(登録商標)KH-511、ED-600、ED-900、ED-2003、EDR-148、EDR-176、D-200、D-400、D-2000、D-4000(以上商品名、HUNTSMAN(株)製)、1-(2-(2-(2-アミノプロポキシ)エトキシ)プロポキシ)プロパン-2-アミン、1-(1-(1-(2-アミノプロポキシ)プロパン-2-イル)オキシ)プロパン-2-アミンなどが挙げられるが、これらに限定されない。 Diamines containing two or more ethylene glycol chains, propylene glycol chains, or both in one molecule include Jeffamine (registered trademark) KH-511, ED-600, ED-900, ED-2003, and EDR. -148, EDR-176, D-200, D-400, D-2000, D-4000 (trade names, manufactured by HUNTSMAN Co., Ltd.), 1-(2-(2-(2-aminopropoxy)ethoxy) propoxy)propan-2-amine, 1-(1-(1-(2-aminopropoxy)propan-2-yl)oxy)propan-2-amine, and the like.
 R132は、4価の有機基を表す。4価の有機基としては、式(2)におけるR115と同様のものが例示され、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 例えば、R115として例示される4価の有機基の4つの結合子が、上記式(4)中の4つの-C(=O)-の部分と結合して縮合環を形成する。
R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group. Examples of the tetravalent organic group are the same as those for R 115 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same.
For example, four bonds of a tetravalent organic group exemplified as R 115 combine with four —C(═O)— moieties in the above formula (4) to form a condensed ring.
 また、R132は、テトラカルボン酸二無水物から無水物基の除去後に残存するテトラカルボン酸残基などが挙げられる。具体的な例としては、ポリイミド前駆体の式(2)中のR115の例が挙げられる。有機膜の強度の観点から、R132は1~4つの芳香環を有する芳香族ジアミン残基であることが好ましい。 Further, R 132 includes, for example, a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of an anhydride group from a tetracarboxylic dianhydride. A specific example is the example of R 115 in formula (2) of the polyimide precursor. From the viewpoint of strength of the organic film, R 132 is preferably an aromatic diamine residue having 1 to 4 aromatic rings.
 R131とR132の少なくとも一方にOH基を有することも好ましい。より具体的には、R131として、2,2-ビス(3-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(3-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、上記の(DA-1)~(DA-18)が好ましい例として挙げられ、R132として、上記の(DAA-1)~(DAA-5)がより好ましい例として挙げられる。 It is also preferred that at least one of R 131 and R 132 has an OH group. More specifically, R 131 is 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 2,2- Bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, and the above (DA-1) to (DA-18) are preferred examples. and more preferred examples of R 132 are the above (DAA-1) to (DAA-5).
 また、ポリイミドは、構造中にフッ素原子を有することも好ましい。ポリイミド中のフッ素原子の含有量は10質量%以上が好ましく、また、20質量%以下がより好ましい。 Also, the polyimide preferably has a fluorine atom in its structure. The content of fluorine atoms in the polyimide is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.
 また、基板との密着性を向上させる目的で、ポリイミドは、シロキサン構造を有する脂肪族の基を共重合してもよい。具体的には、ジアミン成分として、ビス(3-アミノプロピル)テトラメチルジシロキサン、ビス(p-アミノフェニル)オクタメチルペンタシロキサンなどが挙げられる。 In addition, for the purpose of improving adhesion to the substrate, the polyimide may be copolymerized with an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure. Specific examples of the diamine component include bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane and bis(p-aminophenyl)octamethylpentasiloxane.
 また、樹脂組成物の保存安定性を向上させるため、ポリイミドの主鎖末端はモノアミン、酸無水物、モノカルボン酸、モノ酸クロリド化合物、モノ活性エステル化合物などの末端封止剤により封止されていることが好ましい。これらのうち、モノアミンを用いることがより好ましく、モノアミンの好ましい化合物としては、アニリン、2-エチニルアニリン、3-エチニルアニリン、4-エチニルアニリン、5-アミノ-8-ヒドロキシキノリン、1-ヒドロキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、2-アミノ安息香酸、3-アミノ安息香酸、4-アミノ安息香酸、4-アミノサリチル酸、5-アミノサリチル酸、6-アミノサリチル酸、2-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノ-4,6-ジヒドロキシピリミジン、2-アミノフェノール、3-アミノフェノール、4-アミノフェノール、2-アミノチオフェノール、3-アミノチオフェノール、4-アミノチオフェノールなどが挙げられる。これらを2種以上用いてもよく、複数の末端封止剤を反応させることにより、複数の異なる末端基を導入してもよい。 In order to improve the storage stability of the resin composition, the main chain end of the polyimide is blocked with a terminal blocking agent such as monoamine, acid anhydride, monocarboxylic acid, monoacid chloride compound, monoactive ester compound. preferably. Among these, it is more preferable to use monoamines, and preferred monoamine compounds include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1-hydroxy-7 -aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2 -hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-6- Aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 6-aminosalicylic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfone acid, 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-amino-4,6-dihydroxypyrimidine, 2-aminophenol, 3-aminophenol, 4-aminophenol, 2-aminothiophenol, 3- Aminothiophenol, 4-aminothiophenol and the like can be mentioned. Two or more of these may be used, and a plurality of different terminal groups may be introduced by reacting a plurality of terminal blocking agents.
-イミド化率(閉環率)-
 ポリイミドのイミド化率(「閉環率」ともいう)は、得られる有機膜の膜強度、絶縁性等の観点からは、70%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、90%以上であることがより好ましい。
 上記イミド化率の上限は特に限定されず、100%以下であればよい。
 上記イミド化率は、例えば下記方法により測定される。
 ポリイミドの赤外吸収スペクトルを測定し、イミド構造由来の吸収ピークである1377cm-1付近のピーク強度P1を求める。次に、そのポリイミドを350℃で1時間熱処理した後、再度、赤外吸収スペクトルを測定し、1377cm-1付近のピーク強度P2を求める。得られたピーク強度P1、P2を用い、下記式に基づいて、ポリイミドのイミド化率を求めることができる。
 イミド化率(%)=(ピーク強度P1/ピーク強度P2)×100
-Imidation rate (ring closure rate)-
The imidization rate (also referred to as "ring closure rate") of the polyimide is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, from the viewpoint of the film strength, insulating properties, etc. of the resulting organic film. More preferably, it is 90% or more.
The upper limit of the imidization rate is not particularly limited, and may be 100% or less.
The imidization rate is measured, for example, by the method described below.
The infrared absorption spectrum of the polyimide is measured, and the peak intensity P1 near 1377 cm −1 , which is the absorption peak derived from the imide structure, is obtained. Next, after heat-treating the polyimide at 350° C. for 1 hour, the infrared absorption spectrum is measured again to obtain the peak intensity P2 near 1377 cm −1 . Using the obtained peak intensities P1 and P2, the imidization rate of the polyimide can be determined according to the following formula.
Imidation rate (%) = (peak intensity P1/peak intensity P2) x 100
 ポリイミドは、すべてが1種のR131又はR132を含む上記式(4)で表される繰返し単位を含んでいてもよく、2つ以上の異なる種類のR131又はR132を含む上記式(4)で表される繰返し単位を含んでいてもよい。また、ポリイミドは、上記式(4)で表される繰返し単位のほかに、他の種類の繰返し単位をも含んでいてもよい。他の種類の繰返し単位としては、例えば、上述の式(2)で表される繰返し単位等が挙げられる。 The polyimide may contain repeating units represented by the above formula (4 ) that all contain one type of R 131 or R 132 , and the above formula ( 4) may contain a repeating unit. Moreover, the polyimide may contain other types of repeating units in addition to the repeating units represented by the above formula (4). Other types of repeating units include, for example, repeating units represented by formula (2) above.
 ポリイミドは、例えば、低温中でテトラカルボン酸二無水物とジアミン(一部をモノアミンである末端封止剤に置換)を反応させる方法、低温中でテトラカルボン酸二無水物(一部を酸無水物又はモノ酸クロリド化合物又はモノ活性エステル化合物である末端封止剤に置換)とジアミンを反応させる方法、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とアルコールとによりジエステルを得、その後ジアミン(一部をモノアミンである末端封止剤に置換)と縮合剤の存在下で反応させる方法、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とアルコールとによりジエステルを得、その後残りのジカルボン酸を酸クロリド化し、ジアミン(一部をモノアミンである末端封止剤に置換)と反応させる方法などの方法を利用して、ポリイミド前駆体を得、これを、既知のイミド化反応法を用いて完全イミド化させる方法、又は、途中でイミド化反応を停止し、一部イミド構造を導入する方法、更には、完全イミド化したポリマーと、そのポリイミド前駆体をブレンドする事によって、一部イミド構造を導入する方法を利用して合成することができる。また、その他公知のポリイミドの合成方法を適用することもできる。 For polyimide, for example, a method of reacting a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and a diamine (partially replaced with a monoamine terminal blocker) at a low temperature, a method of reacting a tetracarboxylic dianhydride (partially with an acid anhydride) at a low temperature a monoacid chloride compound or a monoactive ester compound) and a diamine, a diester is obtained by a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, and then a diamine (a part of which is a monoamine A method of reacting in the presence of a condensing agent) with a condensing agent, a diester is obtained by tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride and alcohol, then the remaining dicarboxylic acid is acid chloride, diamine (part of which is a monoamine Using a method such as a method of reacting with a terminal blocking agent) to obtain a polyimide precursor, which is completely imidized using a known imidization reaction method, or an imidization reaction in the middle can be synthesized using a method of partially introducing an imide structure by stopping and further introducing a partially imide structure by blending a completely imidized polymer and its polyimide precursor. . Other known methods for synthesizing polyimide can also be applied.
 ポリイミドの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、好ましくは5,000~100,000であり、より好ましくは10,000~50,000であり、更に好ましくは15,000~40,000である。重量平均分子量を5,000以上とすることにより、硬化後の膜の耐折れ性を向上させることができる。機械特性(例えば、破断伸び)に優れた有機膜を得るため、重量平均分子量は、15,000以上が特に好ましい。
 また、ポリイミドの数平均分子量(Mn)は、好ましくは2,000~40,000であり、より好ましくは3,000~30,000であり、更に好ましくは4,000~20,000である。
 上記ポリイミドの分子量の分散度は、1.5以上が好ましく、1.8以上がより好ましく、2.0以上であることが更に好ましい。ポリイミドの分子量の分散度の上限値は特に定めるものではないが、例えば、7.0以下が好ましく、6.5以下がより好ましく、6.0以下が更に好ましい。
 また、樹脂組成物が特定樹脂として複数種のポリイミドを含む場合、少なくとも1種のポリイミドの重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が上記範囲であることが好ましい。また、上記複数種のポリイミドを1つの樹脂として算出した重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が、それぞれ、上記範囲内であることも好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000, still more preferably 15,000 to 40,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the folding resistance of the cured film can be improved. A weight-average molecular weight of 15,000 or more is particularly preferable in order to obtain an organic film having excellent mechanical properties (e.g., elongation at break).
The number average molecular weight (Mn) of polyimide is preferably 2,000 to 40,000, more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, still more preferably 4,000 to 20,000.
The polyimide has a molecular weight distribution of preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more. Although the upper limit of the polyimide molecular weight dispersion is not particularly defined, it is preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, and even more preferably 6.0 or less.
Moreover, when the resin composition contains a plurality of types of polyimide as the specific resin, the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion of at least one type of polyimide are preferably within the above ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, the number-average molecular weight, and the degree of dispersion calculated using the above plural kinds of polyimides as one resin are within the ranges described above.
〔ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体〕
 本発明で用いるポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は、その構造等について特に定めるものではないが、例えば、国際公開第2021/172420号の段落0049~0074に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Polybenzoxazole precursor]
The polybenzoxazole precursor used in the present invention is not particularly defined for its structure and the like, but includes, for example, compounds described in paragraphs 0049 to 0074 of International Publication No. 2021/172420, and these descriptions are herein. incorporated into the book.
〔ポリベンゾオキサゾール〕
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールとしては、ベンゾオキサゾール環を有する高分子化合物であれば、特に限定はないが、下記式(X)で表される化合物であることが好ましく、下記式(X)で表される化合物であって、重合性基を有する化合物であることがより好ましい。上記重合性基としては、ラジカル重合性基が好ましい。また、下記式(X)で表される化合物であって、酸分解性基等の極性変換基を有する化合物であってもよい。

 式(X)中、R133は、2価の有機基を表し、R134は、4価の有機基を表す。
 重合性基又は酸分解性基等の極性変換基を有する場合、重合性基又は酸分解性基等の極性変換基は、R133及びR134の少なくとも一方に位置していてもよいし、下記式(X-1)又は式(X-2)に示すようにポリベンゾオキサゾールの末端に位置していてもよい。
式(X-1)

 式(X-1)中、R135及びR136の少なくとも一方は、重合性基又は酸分解性基等の極性変換基であり、重合性基又は酸分解性基等の極性変換基でない場合は有機基であり、他の基は式(X)と同義である。
式(X-2)

 式(X-2)中、R137は重合性基又は酸分解性基等の極性変換基であり、他は置換基であり、他の基は式(X)と同義である。
[Polybenzoxazole]
Polybenzoxazole is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having a benzoxazole ring, but it is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (X), and a compound represented by the following formula (X) and more preferably a compound having a polymerizable group. As the polymerizable group, a radically polymerizable group is preferred. Further, it may be a compound represented by the following formula (X) and having a polarity conversion group such as an acid-decomposable group.

In formula (X), R 133 represents a divalent organic group and R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group.
In the case of having a polar conversion group such as a polymerizable group or an acid-decomposable group, the polar conversion group such as a polymerizable group or an acid-decomposable group may be positioned at least one of R 133 and R 134 . It may be positioned at the end of the polybenzoxazole as shown in formula (X-1) or formula (X-2).
Formula (X-1)

In formula (X-1), at least one of R 135 and R 136 is a polar conversion group such as a polymerizable group or an acid-decomposable group. It is an organic group, and other groups are as defined in formula (X).
Formula (X-2)

In formula (X-2), R 137 is a polar conversion group such as a polymerizable group or an acid-decomposable group, the others are substituents, and the other groups are the same as in formula (X).
 重合性基又は酸分解性基等の極性変換基は、上記のポリイミド前駆体が有している重合性基で述べた重合性基と同義である。 The polarity conversion group such as a polymerizable group or an acid-decomposable group is synonymous with the polymerizable group described above for the polymerizable group possessed by the polyimide precursor.
 R133は、2価の有機基を表す。2価の有機基としては、脂肪族基又は芳香族基が挙げられる。具体的な例としては、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の式(3)中のR121の例が挙げられる。また、その好ましい例はR121と同様である。 R 133 represents a divalent organic group. Divalent organic groups include aliphatic groups and aromatic groups. A specific example is the example of R 121 in formula (3) of the polybenzoxazole precursor. Preferred examples thereof are the same as those of R121 .
 R134は、4価の有機基を表す。4価の有機基としては、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の式(3)中のR122の例が挙げられる。また、その好ましい例はR122と同様である。
 例えば、R122として例示される4価の有機基の4つの結合子が、上記式(X)中の窒素原子、酸素原子と結合して縮合環を形成する。例えば、R134が、下記有機基である場合、下記構造を形成する。下記構造中、*はそれぞれ、式(X)中の窒素原子又は酸素原子との結合部位を表す。
R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group. Tetravalent organic groups include examples of R 122 in the polybenzoxazole precursor formula (3). Moreover, the preferred examples thereof are the same as those of R122 .
For example, four bonds of a tetravalent organic group exemplified as R 122 combine with the nitrogen atom and oxygen atom in the above formula (X) to form a condensed ring. For example, when R 134 is the following organic group, it forms the structure below. In the structures below, each * represents a bonding site with a nitrogen atom or an oxygen atom in formula (X).
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールはオキサゾール化率が85%以上であることが好ましく、90%以上であることがより好ましい。上限は特に限定されず、100%であってもよい。オキサゾール化率が85%以上であることにより、加熱によりオキサゾール化される時に起こる閉環に基づく膜収縮が小さくなり、反りの発生をより効果的に抑えることができる。
 上記オキサゾール化率は、例えば下記方法により測定される。
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールの赤外吸収スペクトルを測定し、前駆体のアミド構造に由来する吸収ピークである1650cm-1付近のピーク強度Q1を求める。次に、1490cm-1付近に見られる芳香環の吸収強度で規格化する。そのポリベンゾオキサゾールを350℃で1時間熱処理した後、再度、赤外吸収スペクトルを測定し、1650cm-1付近のピーク強度Q2を求め、1490cm-1付近に見られる芳香環の吸収強度で規格化する。得られたピーク強度Q1、Q2の規格値を用い、下記式に基づいて、ポリベンゾオキサゾールのオキサゾール化率を求めることができる。
 オキサゾール化率(%)=(ピーク強度Q1の規格値/ピーク強度Q2の規格値)×100
Polybenzoxazole preferably has an oxazole conversion rate of 85% or more, more preferably 90% or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, and may be 100%. When the oxazolization rate is 85% or more, film shrinkage due to ring closure that occurs when the film is oxazolized by heating can be reduced, and the occurrence of warpage can be more effectively suppressed.
The oxazolization rate is measured, for example, by the method described below.
An infrared absorption spectrum of polybenzoxazole is measured to obtain a peak intensity Q1 near 1650 cm −1 which is an absorption peak derived from the amide structure of the precursor. Next, normalization is performed by the absorption intensity of the aromatic ring seen around 1490 cm −1 . After heat-treating the polybenzoxazole at 350° C. for 1 hour, the infrared absorption spectrum is measured again, the peak intensity Q2 near 1650 cm −1 is obtained, and the absorption intensity of the aromatic ring seen near 1490 cm −1 is normalized. do. Using the obtained standard values of the peak intensities Q1 and Q2, the oxazole conversion rate of polybenzoxazole can be obtained based on the following formula.
Oxazolization rate (%) = (standardized value of peak intensity Q1/standardized value of peak intensity Q2) x 100
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールは、すべてが1種のR131又はR132を含む上記式(X)の繰返し単位を含んでいてもよく、2つ以上の異なる種類のR131又はR132を含む上記式(X)の繰返し単位を含んでいてもよい。また、ポリベンゾオキサゾールは、上記式(X)の繰返し単位のほかに、他の種類の繰返し単位も含んでいてもよい。 The polybenzoxazole may contain repeating units of the above formula (X) that all contain one type of R 131 or R 132 , or may contain repeating units of the above formula (X) that contain two or more different types of R 131 or R 132 . ) repeating units. The polybenzoxazole may also contain other types of repeating units in addition to the repeating units of formula (X) above.
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールは、例えば、ビスアミノフェノール誘導体と、R133を含むジカルボン酸又は上記ジカルボン酸の、ジカルボン酸ジクロライド及びジカルボン酸誘導体等から選ばれる化合物とを反応させて、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体を得、これを既知のオキサゾール化反応法を用いてオキサゾール化させることで得られる。
 なお、ジカルボン酸の場合には反応収率等を高めるため、1-ヒドロキシ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール等を予め反応させた活性エステル型のジカルボン酸誘導体を用いてもよい。
Polybenzoxazole is obtained by, for example, reacting a bisaminophenol derivative with a dicarboxylic acid containing R 133 or a compound selected from dicarboxylic acid dichlorides and dicarboxylic acid derivatives of the above dicarboxylic acid to obtain a polybenzoxazole precursor. , which is obtained by oxazolating it using a known oxazolating reaction method.
In the case of dicarboxylic acid, in order to increase the reaction yield, etc., an active ester type dicarboxylic acid derivative pre-reacted with 1-hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole or the like may be used.
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、5,000~70,000が好ましく、8,000~50,000がより好ましく、10,000~30,000が更に好ましい。重量平均分子量を5,000以上とすることにより、硬化後の膜の耐折れ性を向上させることができる。機械特性に優れた有機膜を得るため、重量平均分子量は、20,000以上が特に好ましい。また、ポリベンゾオキサゾールを2種以上含有する場合、少なくとも1種のポリベンゾオキサゾールの重量平均分子量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
 また、ポリベンゾオキサゾールの数平均分子量(Mn)は、好ましくは7,200~14,000であり、より好ましくは8,000~12,000であり、更に好ましくは9,200~11,200である。
 上記ポリベンゾオキサゾールの分子量の分散度は、1.4以上であることが好ましく、1.5以上がより好ましく、1.6以上であることが更に好ましい。ポリベンゾオキサゾールの分子量の分散度の上限値は特に定めるものではないが、例えば、2.6以下が好ましく、2.5以下がより好ましく、2.4以下が更に好ましく、2.3以下が一層好ましく、2.2以下がより一層好ましい。
 また、樹脂組成物が特定樹脂として複数種のポリベンゾオキサゾールを含む場合、少なくとも1種のポリベンゾオキサゾールの重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が上記範囲であることが好ましい。また、上記複数種のポリベンゾオキサゾールを1つの樹脂として算出した重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が、それぞれ、上記範囲内であることも好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of polybenzoxazole is preferably from 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably from 8,000 to 50,000, even more preferably from 10,000 to 30,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the folding resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain an organic film having excellent mechanical properties, the weight average molecular weight is particularly preferably 20,000 or more. Moreover, when two or more kinds of polybenzoxazole are contained, it is preferable that the weight average molecular weight of at least one kind of polybenzoxazole is within the above range.
Further, the number average molecular weight (Mn) of polybenzoxazole is preferably 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably 8,000 to 12,000, still more preferably 9,200 to 11,200. be.
The polybenzoxazole has a molecular weight dispersity of preferably 1.4 or more, more preferably 1.5 or more, and even more preferably 1.6 or more. Although the upper limit of the polybenzoxazole molecular weight dispersity is not particularly defined, for example, it is preferably 2.6 or less, more preferably 2.5 or less, further preferably 2.4 or less, and even more preferably 2.3 or less. Preferably, 2.2 or less is even more preferable.
Moreover, when the resin composition contains a plurality of types of polybenzoxazole as the specific resin, the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion of at least one type of polybenzoxazole are preferably within the above ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, the number-average molecular weight, and the degree of dispersion calculated from the plurality of types of polybenzoxazole as one resin are within the ranges described above.
〔ポリアミドイミド前駆体〕
 ポリアミドイミド前駆体は、その構造等について特に定めるものではないが、例えば、国際公開第2021/172420号の段落0075~0093に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Polyamideimide precursor]
Polyamideimide precursors are not particularly defined for their structure and the like, but include, for example, compounds described in paragraphs 0075 to 0093 of WO 2021/172420, and these descriptions are incorporated herein.
〔ポリアミドイミド〕
 本発明に用いられるポリアミドイミドは、アルカリ可溶性ポリアミドイミドであってもよく、有機溶剤を主成分とする現像液に対して可溶なポリアミドイミドであってもよい。
 本明細書において、アルカリ可溶性ポリアミドイミドとは、100gの2.38質量%テトラメチルアンモニウム水溶液に対し、23℃で0.1g以上溶解するポリアミドイミドをいい、パターン形成性の観点からは、0.5g以上溶解するポリアミドイミドであることが好ましく、1.0g以上溶解するポリアミドイミドであることが更に好ましい。上記溶解量の上限は特に限定されないが、100g以下であることが好ましい。
 また、ポリアミドイミドは、得られる有機膜の膜強度及び絶縁性の観点からは、複数個のアミド結合及び複数個のイミド構造を主鎖に有するポリアミドイミドであることが好ましい。
[Polyamideimide]
The polyamideimide used in the present invention may be an alkali-soluble polyamideimide or a polyamideimide soluble in a developer containing an organic solvent as a main component.
In this specification, the alkali-soluble polyamideimide refers to a polyamideimide that dissolves at 23° C. in an amount of 0.1 g or more in 100 g of a 2.38 mass % tetramethylammonium aqueous solution. A polyamideimide that dissolves 5 g or more is preferable, and a polyamideimide that dissolves 1.0 g or more is more preferable. Although the upper limit of the dissolved amount is not particularly limited, it is preferably 100 g or less.
Moreover, the polyamideimide is preferably a polyamideimide having a plurality of amide bonds and a plurality of imide structures in the main chain from the viewpoint of the film strength and insulating properties of the organic film to be obtained.
-フッ素原子-
 得られる有機膜の膜強度の観点からは、ポリアミドイミドは、フッ素原子を有することが好ましい。
 フッ素原子は、例えば、後述する式(PAI-3)で表される繰返し単位におけるR117、又は、R111に含まれることが好ましく、後述する式(PAI-3)で表される繰返し単位におけるR117、又は、R111にフッ化アルキル基として含まれることがより好ましい。
 ポリアミドイミドの全質量に対するフッ素原子の量は、5質量%以上が好ましく、また、20質量%以下が好ましい。
- fluorine atom -
From the viewpoint of the film strength of the organic film to be obtained, the polyamideimide preferably has a fluorine atom.
A fluorine atom is preferably contained in, for example, R 117 or R 111 in a repeating unit represented by formula (PAI-3) described later, and is preferably contained in a repeating unit represented by formula (PAI-3) described later It is more preferably contained in R 117 or R 111 as a fluorinated alkyl group.
The amount of fluorine atoms is preferably 5% by mass or more and preferably 20% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of polyamideimide.
-エチレン性不飽和結合-
 得られる有機膜の膜強度の観点からは、ポリアミドイミドは、エチレン性不飽和結合を有してもよい。
 ポリアミドイミドは、エチレン性不飽和結合を主鎖末端に有していてもよいし、側鎖に有していてもよいが、側鎖に有することが好ましい。
 上記エチレン性不飽和結合は、ラジカル重合性を有することが好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合は、後述する式(PAI-3)で表される繰返し単位におけるR117、又は、R111に含まれることが好ましく、後述する式(PAI-3)で表される繰返し単位におけるR117、又は、R111にエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基として含まれることがより好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基の好ましい態様は、上述のポリイミドにおけるエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基の好ましい態様と同様である。
- Ethylenically unsaturated bond -
From the viewpoint of the film strength of the resulting organic film, the polyamideimide may have an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
The polyamideimide may have an ethylenically unsaturated bond at the end of the main chain or in a side chain, preferably in the side chain.
The ethylenically unsaturated bond preferably has radical polymerizability.
The ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably contained in R 117 or R 111 in the repeating unit represented by formula (PAI-3) described later, and the repeating unit represented by formula (PAI-3) described later. It is more preferably contained as a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in R 117 or R 111 in .
Preferred embodiments of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond are the same as the preferred embodiments of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the polyimide described above.
 ポリアミドイミドの全質量に対するエチレン性不飽和結合の量は、0.0001~0.1mol/gであることが好ましく、0.001~0.05mol/gであることがより好ましい。 The amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds relative to the total mass of polyamideimide is preferably 0.0001 to 0.1 mol/g, more preferably 0.001 to 0.05 mol/g.
-エチレン性不飽和結合以外の重合性基-
 ポリアミドイミドは、エチレン性不飽和結合以外の重合性基を有していてもよい。
 ポリアミドイミドにおけるエチレン性不飽和結合以外の重合性基としては、上述のポリイミドにおけるエチレン性不飽和結合以外の重合性基と同様の基が挙げられる。
 エチレン性不飽和結合以外の重合性基は、例えば、後述する式(PAI-3)で表される繰返し単位におけるR111に含まれることが好ましい。
 ポリアミドイミドの全質量に対するエチレン性不飽和結合以外の重合性基の量は、0.05~10mol/gであることが好ましく、0.1~5mol/gであることがより好ましい。
-Polymerizable group other than ethylenically unsaturated bond-
Polyamideimide may have a polymerizable group other than the ethylenically unsaturated bond.
Examples of the polymerizable groups other than the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the polyamideimide include the same groups as the polymerizable groups other than the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the polyimide described above.
A polymerizable group other than an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably included in R 111 in a repeating unit represented by formula (PAI-3) described later, for example.
The amount of polymerizable groups other than ethylenically unsaturated bonds relative to the total mass of polyamideimide is preferably 0.05 to 10 mol/g, more preferably 0.1 to 5 mol/g.
-極性変換基-
 ポリアミドイミドは、酸分解性基等の極性変換基を有していてもよい。ポリアミドイミドにおける酸分解性基は、上述の式(2)におけるR113及びR114において説明した酸分解性基と同様であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
-Polarity conversion group-
Polyamideimide may have a polarity converting group such as an acid-decomposable group. The acid-decomposable group in polyamideimide is the same as the acid-decomposable group described for R 113 and R 114 in formula (2) above, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
-酸価-
 ポリアミドイミドがアルカリ現像に供される場合、現像性を向上する観点からは、ポリアミドイミドの酸価は、30mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、50mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上であることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記酸価は500mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、400mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、ポリアミドイミドが有機溶剤を主成分とする現像液を用いた現像(例えば、後述する「溶剤現像」)に供される場合、ポリアミドイミドの酸価は、2~35mgKOH/gが好ましく、3~30mgKOH/gがより好ましく、5~20mgKOH/gが更に好ましい。
 上記酸価は、公知の方法により測定され、例えば、JIS K 0070:1992に記載の方法により測定される。
 また、ポリアミドイミドに含まれる酸基としては、上述のポリイミドにおける酸基と同様の基が挙げられ、好ましい態様も同様である。
- Acid value -
When the polyamideimide is subjected to alkali development, the acid value of the polyamideimide is preferably 30 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 70 mgKOH/g, from the viewpoint of improving developability. g or more is more preferable.
Also, the acid value is preferably 500 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, and even more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less.
Further, when the polyamideimide is subjected to development using a developer containing an organic solvent as a main component (for example, "solvent development" described later), the acid value of the polyamideimide is preferably 2 to 35 mgKOH/g, 3 ~30 mg KOH/g is more preferred, and 5 to 20 mg KOH/g is even more preferred.
The acid value is measured by a known method, for example, by the method described in JIS K 0070:1992.
Moreover, as the acid group contained in the polyamideimide, the same groups as the acid group in the polyimide described above can be mentioned, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
-フェノール性ヒドロキシ基-
 アルカリ現像液による現像速度を適切なものとする観点からは、ポリアミドイミドは、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基を有することが好ましい。
 ポリアミドイミドは、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基を主鎖末端に有してもよいし、側鎖に有してもよい。
 フェノール性ヒドロキシ基は、例えば、後述する式(PAI-3)で表される繰返し単位におけるR117、又は、R111に含まれることが好ましい。
 ポリアミドイミドの全質量に対するフェノール性ヒドロキシ基の量は、0.1~30mol/gであることが好ましく、1~20mol/gであることがより好ましい。
-Phenolic hydroxy group-
From the viewpoint of making the development speed with an alkaline developer appropriate, the polyamideimide preferably has a phenolic hydroxy group.
Polyamideimide may have a phenolic hydroxy group at the end of the main chain or in the side chain.
A phenolic hydroxy group is preferably included in, for example, R 117 or R 111 in a repeating unit represented by formula (PAI-3) described later.
The amount of phenolic hydroxy groups relative to the total mass of polyamideimide is preferably 0.1 to 30 mol/g, more preferably 1 to 20 mol/g.
 本発明で用いるポリアミドイミドとしては、イミド構造及びアミド結合を有する高分子化合物であれば、特に限定はないが、下記式(PAI-3)で表される繰返し単位を含むことが好ましい。

 式(PAI-3)中、R111及びR117はそれぞれ、式(PAI-2)中のR111及びR117と同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 重合性基を有する場合、重合性基は、R111及びR117の少なくとも一方に位置していてもよいし、ポリアミドイミドの末端に位置していてもよい。
The polyamideimide used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having an imide structure and an amide bond, but it preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (PAI-3).

In formula (PAI-3), R 111 and R 117 have the same definitions as R 111 and R 117 in formula (PAI-2), and preferred embodiments are also the same.
When having a polymerizable group, the polymerizable group may be located at least one of R 111 and R 117 , or may be located at the end of the polyamideimide.
 また、樹脂組成物の保存安定性を向上させるため、ポリアミドイミドは主鎖末端をモノアミン、酸無水物、モノカルボン酸、モノ酸クロリド化合物、モノ活性エステル化合物などの末端封止剤で封止することが好ましい。末端封止剤の好ましい態様は、上述のポリイミドにおける末端封止剤の好ましい態様と同様である。 In addition, in order to improve the storage stability of the resin composition, the main chain end of the polyamideimide is blocked with a terminal blocker such as a monoamine, an acid anhydride, a monocarboxylic acid, a monoacid chloride compound, or a monoactive ester compound. is preferred. Preferred aspects of the terminal blocker are the same as the preferred aspects of the terminal blocker in the polyimide described above.
-イミド化率(閉環率)-
 ポリアミドイミドのイミド化率(「閉環率」ともいう)は、得られる有機膜の膜強度、絶縁性等の観点からは、70%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、90%以上であることがより好ましい。
 上記イミド化率の上限は特に限定されず、100%以下であればよい。
 上記イミド化率は、上述のポリイミドの閉環率と同様の方法により測定される。
-Imidation rate (ring closure rate)-
The imidization rate (also referred to as "ring closure rate") of polyamideimide is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, from the viewpoint of the film strength, insulating properties, etc. of the resulting organic film. , more preferably 90% or more.
The upper limit of the imidization rate is not particularly limited, and may be 100% or less.
The imidization rate is measured by the same method as the ring closure rate of the polyimide described above.
 ポリアミドイミドは、すべてが1種のR111又はR117を含む上記式(PAI-3)で表される繰返し単位を含んでいてもよく、2つ以上の異なる種類のR131又はR132を含む上記式(PAI-3)で表される繰返し単位を含んでいてもよい。また、ポリアミドイミドは、上記式(PAI-3)で表される繰返し単位のほかに、他の種類の繰返し単位をも含んでいてもよい。他の種類の繰返し単位としては、上述の式(PAI-1)又は式(PAI-2)で表される繰返し単位等が挙げられる。 Polyamideimide may contain repeating units represented by the above formula (PAI-3), all of which contain one type of R 111 or R 117 , and two or more different types of R 131 or R 132 . It may contain a repeating unit represented by the above formula (PAI-3). Moreover, the polyamideimide may contain other types of repeating units in addition to the repeating units represented by the above formula (PAI-3). Other types of repeating units include repeating units represented by the above formula (PAI-1) or formula (PAI-2).
 ポリアミドイミドは、例えば、公知の方法によりポリアミドイミド前駆体を得、これを、既知のイミド化反応法を用いて完全イミド化させる方法、又は、途中でイミド化反応を停止し、一部イミド構造を導入する方法、更には、完全イミド化したポリマーと、そのポリアミドイミド前駆体をブレンドする事によって、一部イミド構造を導入する方法を利用して合成することができる。 Polyamideimide is, for example, a method of obtaining a polyamideimide precursor by a known method and completely imidizing it using a known imidization reaction method, or stopping the imidization reaction in the middle and partially imidizing the imide structure and a method of partially introducing an imide structure by blending a completely imidized polymer with its polyamideimide precursor.
 ポリアミドイミドの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、5,000~70,000が好ましく、8,000~50,000がより好ましく、10,000~30,000が更に好ましい。重量平均分子量を5,000以上とすることにより、硬化後の膜の耐折れ性を向上させることができる。機械特性に優れた有機膜を得るため、重量平均分子量は、20,000以上が特に好ましい。
また、ポリアミドイミドの数平均分子量(Mn)は、好ましくは800~250,000であり、より好ましくは、2,000~50,000であり、更に好ましくは、4,000~25,000である。
 ポリアミドイミドの分子量の分散度は、1.5以上が好ましく、1.8以上がより好ましく、2.0以上であることが更に好ましい。ポリアミドイミドの分子量の分散度の上限値は特に定めるものではないが、例えば、7.0以下が好ましく、6.5以下がより好ましく、6.0以下が更に好ましい。
 また、樹脂組成物が特定樹脂として複数種のポリアミドイミドを含む場合、少なくとも1種のポリアミドイミドの重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が上記範囲であることが好ましい。また、上記複数種のポリアミドイミドを1つの樹脂として算出した重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が、それぞれ、上記範囲内であることも好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of polyamideimide is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, even more preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the folding resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain an organic film having excellent mechanical properties, the weight average molecular weight is particularly preferably 20,000 or more.
Further, the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the polyamideimide is preferably 800 to 250,000, more preferably 2,000 to 50,000, still more preferably 4,000 to 25,000. .
The polyamidoimide has a molecular weight distribution of preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more. Although the upper limit of the polyamidoimide molecular weight dispersity is not particularly defined, it is preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, and even more preferably 6.0 or less.
Moreover, when the resin composition contains a plurality of types of polyamideimide as the specific resin, the weight average molecular weight, number average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion of at least one type of polyamideimide are preferably within the above ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and degree of dispersion calculated from the plurality of types of polyamideimide as one resin are within the above ranges.
〔ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法〕
 ポリイミド前駆体等は、例えば、低温中でテトラカルボン酸二無水物とジアミンを反応させる方法、低温中でテトラカルボン酸二無水物とジアミンを反応させてポリアミック酸を得、縮合剤又はアルキル化剤を用いてエステル化する方法、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とアルコールとによりジエステルを得て、その後ジアミンと縮合剤の存在下で反応させる方法、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とアルコールとによりジエステルを得、その後残りのジカルボン酸をハロゲン化剤を用いて酸ハロゲン化し、ジアミンと反応させる方法、などの方法を利用して得ることができる。上記製造方法のうち、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とアルコールとによりジエステルを得、その後残りのジカルボン酸をハロゲン化剤を用いて酸ハロゲン化し、ジアミンと反応させる方法がより好ましい。
 上記縮合剤としては、例えばジシクロヘキシルカルボジイミド、ジイソプロピルカルボジイミド、1-エトキシカルボニル-2-エトキシ-1,2-ジヒドロキノリン、1,1-カルボニルジオキシ-ジ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、N,N’-ジスクシンイミジルカーボネート、無水トリフルオロ酢酸等が挙げられる。
 上記アルキル化剤としては、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミドジメチルアセタール、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミドジエチルアセタール、N,N-ジアルキルホルムアミドジアルキルアセタール、オルトギ酸トリメチル、オルトギ酸トリエチル等が挙げられる。
 上記ハロゲン化剤としては、塩化チオニル、塩化オキサリル、オキシ塩化リン等が挙げられる。
 ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法では、反応に際し、有機溶剤を用いることが好ましい。有機溶剤は1種でもよいし、2種以上でもよい。
 有機溶剤としては、原料に応じて適宜定めることができるが、ピリジン、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル(ジグリム)、N-メチルピロリドン、N-エチルピロリドン、プロピオン酸エチル、ジメチルアセトアミド、ジメチルホルムアミド、テトラヒドロフラン、γ-ブチロラクトン等が例示される。
 ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法では、反応に際し、塩基性化合物を添加することが好ましい。塩基性化合物は1種でもよいし、2種以上でもよい。
 塩基性化合物は、原料に応じて適宜定めることができるが、トリエチルアミン、ジイソプロピルエチルアミン、ピリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.4.0]ウンデカ-7-エン、N,N-ジメチル-4-アミノピリジン等が例示される。
[Method for producing polyimide precursor, etc.]
Polyimide precursors and the like, for example, a method of reacting a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and a diamine at a low temperature, a method of reacting a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and a diamine at a low temperature to obtain a polyamic acid, a condensing agent or an alkylating agent A method of esterification using a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol to obtain a diester, then a method of reacting in the presence of a diamine and a condensing agent, a method of reacting a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol to obtain a diester, After that, the remaining dicarboxylic acid can be acid-halogenated using a halogenating agent and reacted with a diamine. Among the above production methods, the method of obtaining a diester from a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol, then acid-halogenating the remaining dicarboxylic acid with a halogenating agent, and reacting it with a diamine is more preferred.
Examples of the condensing agent include dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, diisopropylcarbodiimide, 1-ethoxycarbonyl-2-ethoxy-1,2-dihydroquinoline, 1,1-carbonyldioxy-di-1,2,3-benzotriazole, N, N'-disuccinimidyl carbonate, trifluoroacetic anhydride and the like can be mentioned.
Examples of the alkylating agent include N,N-dimethylformamide dimethyl acetal, N,N-dimethylformamide diethyl acetal, N,N-dialkylformamide dialkyl acetal, trimethyl orthoformate and triethyl orthoformate.
Examples of the halogenating agent include thionyl chloride, oxalyl chloride, phosphorus oxychloride and the like.
In the method for producing a polyimide precursor or the like, it is preferable to use an organic solvent in the reaction. One type of organic solvent may be used, or two or more types may be used.
The organic solvent can be appropriately determined according to the raw material, but pyridine, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (diglyme), N-methylpyrrolidone, N-ethylpyrrolidone, ethyl propionate, dimethylacetamide, dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran, γ-butyrolactone, and the like. are exemplified.
In the method for producing a polyimide precursor or the like, it is preferable to add a basic compound during the reaction. One type of basic compound may be used, or two or more types may be used.
The basic compound can be appropriately determined depending on the raw material, but triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, pyridine, 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene, N,N-dimethyl-4-amino Pyridine and the like are exemplified.
-末端封止剤-
 ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法に際し、保存安定性をより向上させるため、ポリイミド前駆体等の樹脂末端に残存するカルボン酸無水物、酸無水物誘導体、或いは、アミノ基を封止することが好ましい。樹脂末端に残存するカルボン酸無水物、及び酸無水物誘導体を封止する際、末端封止剤としては、モノアルコール、フェノール、チオール、チオフェノール、モノアミン等が挙げられ、反応性、膜の安定性から、モノアルコール、フェノール類やモノアミンを用いることがより好ましい。モノアルコールの好ましい化合物としては、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール、ブタノール、ヘキサノール、オクタノール、ドデシノール、ベンジルアルコール、2-フェニルエタノール、2-メトキシエタノール、2-クロロメタノール、フルフリルアルコール等の1級アルコール、イソプロパノール、2-ブタノール、シクロヘキシルアルコール、シクロペンタノール、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール等の2級アルコール、t-ブチルアルコール、アダマンタンアルコール等の3級アルコールが挙げられる。フェノール類の好ましい化合物としては、フェノール、メトキシフェノール、メチルフェノール、ナフタレン-1-オール、ナフタレン-2-オール、ヒドロキシスチレン等のフェノール類などが挙げられる。また、モノアミンの好ましい化合物としては、アニリン、2-エチニルアニリン、3-エチニルアニリン、4-エチニルアニリン、5-アミノ-8-ヒドロキシキノリン、1-ヒドロキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、2-アミノ安息香酸、3-アミノ安息香酸、4-アミノ安息香酸、4-アミノサリチル酸、5-アミノサリチル酸、6-アミノサリチル酸、2-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノ-4,6-ジヒドロキシピリミジン、2-アミノフェノール、3-アミノフェノール、4-アミノフェノール、2-アミノチオフェノール、3-アミノチオフェノール、4-アミノチオフェノールなどが挙げられる。これらを2種以上用いてもよく、複数の末端封止剤を反応させることにより、複数の異なる末端基を導入してもよい。
 また、樹脂末端のアミノ基を封止する際、アミノ基と反応可能な官能基を有する化合物で封止することが可能である。アミノ基に対する好ましい封止剤は、カルボン酸無水物、カルボン酸クロリド、カルボン酸ブロミド、スルホン酸クロリド、無水スルホン酸、スルホン酸カルボン酸無水物などが好ましく、カルボン酸無水物、カルボン酸クロリドがより好ましい。カルボン酸無水物の好ましい化合物としては、無水酢酸、無水プロピオン酸、無水シュウ酸、無水コハク酸、無水マレイン酸、無水フタル酸、無水安息香酸、5-ノルボルネン-2,3-ジカルボン酸無水物などが挙げられる。また、カルボン酸クロリドの好ましい化合物としては、塩化アセチル、アクリル酸クロリド、プロピオニルクロリド、メタクリル酸クロリド、ピバロイルクロリド、シクロヘキサンカルボニルクロリド、2-エチルヘキサノイルクロリド、シンナモイルクロリド、1-アダマンタンカルボニルクロリド、ヘプタフルオロブチリルクロリド、ステアリン酸クロリド、ベンゾイルクロリド、などが挙げられる。
-Terminal blocking agent-
In order to further improve the storage stability, it is preferable to seal the carboxylic acid anhydride, acid anhydride derivative, or amino group remaining at the end of the resin such as the polyimide precursor during the method for producing the polyimide precursor. When blocking carboxylic acid anhydrides and acid anhydride derivatives remaining at the ends of resins, terminal blocking agents include monoalcohols, phenols, thiols, thiophenols, monoamines, and the like. It is more preferable to use monoalcohols, phenols and monoamines from the viewpoint of their properties. Preferred monoalcohol compounds include primary alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, hexanol, octanol, dodecinol, benzyl alcohol, 2-phenylethanol, 2-methoxyethanol, 2-chloromethanol and furfuryl alcohol, and isopropanol. , 2-butanol, cyclohexyl alcohol, cyclopentanol and 1-methoxy-2-propanol, and tertiary alcohols such as t-butyl alcohol and adamantane alcohol. Preferable phenolic compounds include phenols such as phenol, methoxyphenol, methylphenol, naphthalene-1-ol, naphthalene-2-ol, and hydroxystyrene. Preferred monoamine compounds include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6- aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1- Carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-5-amino naphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 6-aminosalicylic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 4 -aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-amino-4,6-dihydroxypyrimidine, 2-aminophenol, 3-aminophenol, 4-aminophenol, 2-aminothiophenol, 3-aminothiophenol, 4-aminothiophenol, etc. are mentioned. Two or more of these may be used, and a plurality of different terminal groups may be introduced by reacting a plurality of terminal blocking agents.
Moreover, when blocking the amino group at the terminal of the resin, it is possible to block with a compound having a functional group capable of reacting with the amino group. Preferred capping agents for amino groups are carboxylic acid anhydrides, carboxylic acid chlorides, carboxylic acid bromide, sulfonic acid chlorides, sulfonic anhydrides, sulfonic acid carboxylic acid anhydrides, etc., more preferably carboxylic acid anhydrides and carboxylic acid chlorides. preferable. Preferred carboxylic anhydride compounds include acetic anhydride, propionic anhydride, oxalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, benzoic anhydride, 5-norbornene-2,3-dicarboxylic anhydride, and the like. are mentioned. Preferred compounds of carboxylic acid chlorides include acetyl chloride, acrylic acid chloride, propionyl chloride, methacrylic acid chloride, pivaloyl chloride, cyclohexanecarbonyl chloride, 2-ethylhexanoyl chloride, cinnamoyl chloride, and 1-adamantanecarbonyl chloride. , heptafluorobutyryl chloride, stearic acid chloride, benzoyl chloride, and the like.
-固体析出-
 ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法に際し、固体を析出する工程を含んでいてもよい。具体的には、反応液中に共存している脱水縮合剤の吸水副生物を必要に応じて濾別した後、水、脂肪族低級アルコール、又はその混合液等の貧溶媒に、得られた重合体成分を投入し、重合体成分を析出させることで、固体として析出させ、乾燥させることでポリイミド前駆体等を得ることができる。精製度を向上させるために、ポリイミド前駆体等を再溶解、再沈析出、乾燥等の操作を繰返してもよい。さらに、イオン交換樹脂を用いてイオン性不純物を除去する工程を含んでいてもよい。
-Solid precipitation-
The method for producing a polyimide precursor or the like may include a step of depositing a solid. Specifically, after filtering off the water absorption by-products of the dehydration condensation agent coexisting in the reaction solution as necessary, water, aliphatic lower alcohol, or a poor solvent such as a mixture thereof, the obtained A polyimide precursor or the like can be obtained by adding a polymer component and depositing the polymer component to precipitate it as a solid and drying it. In order to improve the degree of purification, operations such as redissolution, reprecipitation, drying, etc. of the polyimide precursor may be repeated. Furthermore, a step of removing ionic impurities using an ion exchange resin may be included.
〔含有量〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物における特定樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し20質量%以上であることが好ましく、30質量%以上であることがより好ましく、40質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、50質量%以上であることが一層好ましい。また、本発明の樹脂組成物における樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、99.5質量%以下であることが好ましく、99質量%以下であることがより好ましく、98質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、97質量%以下であることが一層好ましく、95質量%以下であることがより一層好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、特定樹脂を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
〔Content〕
The content of the specific resin in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, and 40% by mass or more with respect to the total solid content of the resin composition. is more preferable, and 50% by mass or more is even more preferable. Further, the content of the resin in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 99.5% by mass or less, more preferably 99% by mass or less, more preferably 98% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resin composition. % or less, more preferably 97 mass % or less, and even more preferably 95 mass % or less.
The resin composition of the present invention may contain only one type of specific resin, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物は、少なくとも2種の樹脂を含むことも好ましい。
 具体的には、本発明の樹脂組成物は、特定樹脂と、後述する他の樹脂とを合計で2種以上含んでもよいし、特定樹脂を2種以上含んでいてもよいが、特定樹脂を2種以上含むことが好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物が特定樹脂を2種以上含む場合、例えば、ポリイミド前駆体であって、二無水物由来の構造(上述の式(2)でいうR115)が異なる2種以上のポリイミド前駆体を含むことが好ましい。
Also, the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains at least two resins.
Specifically, the resin composition of the present invention may contain a total of two or more of the specific resin and other resins described later, or may contain two or more of the specific resins. It is preferable to include two or more kinds.
When the resin composition of the present invention contains two or more specific resins, for example, two or more polyimides that are polyimide precursors and have different dianhydride-derived structures (R 115 in the above formula (2)) It preferably contains a precursor.
<他の樹脂>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、上述した特定樹脂に加えて、又は、上述の特定樹脂に代えて、特定樹脂とは異なる他の樹脂(以下、単に「他の樹脂」ともいう)とを含んでもよい。
 他の樹脂としては、フェノール樹脂、ポリアミド、エポキシ樹脂、ポリシロキサン、シロキサン構造を含む樹脂、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、(メタ)アクリルアミド樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、ブチラール樹脂、スチリル樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂等が挙げられる。
 例えば、(メタ)アクリル樹脂を更に加えることにより、塗布性に優れた樹脂組成物が得られ、また、耐溶剤性に優れたパターン(硬化物)が得られる。
 例えば、後述する重合性化合物に代えて、又は、後述する重合性化合物に加えて、重量平均分子量が20,000以下の重合性基価の高い(例えば、樹脂1gにおける重合性基の含有モル量が1×10-3モル/g以上である)(メタ)アクリル樹脂を樹脂組成物に添加することにより、樹脂組成物の塗布性、パターン(硬化物)の耐溶剤性等を向上させることができる。
<Other resins>
The resin composition of the present invention may contain other resins (hereinafter simply referred to as "other resins") different from the specific resins in addition to or instead of the specific resins described above. good.
Other resins include phenolic resins, polyamides, epoxy resins, polysiloxanes, resins containing siloxane structures, (meth)acrylic resins, (meth)acrylamide resins, urethane resins, butyral resins, styryl resins, polyether resins, and polyester resins. etc.
For example, by further adding a (meth)acrylic resin, a resin composition having excellent applicability can be obtained, and a pattern (cured product) having excellent solvent resistance can be obtained.
For example, instead of the polymerizable compound described later, or in addition to the polymerizable compound described later, a high polymerizable group value having a weight average molecular weight of 20,000 or less (for example, the molar amount of the polymerizable group in 1 g of the resin is 1×10 −3 mol/g or more), the coating properties of the resin composition and the solvent resistance of the pattern (cured product) can be improved. can.
 本発明の樹脂組成物が他の樹脂を含む場合、他の樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、0.01質量%以上であることが好ましく、0.05質量%以上であることがより好ましく、1質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、2質量%以上であることが一層好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより一層好ましく、10質量%以上であることが更に一層好ましい。
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物における、他の樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、80質量%以下であることが好ましく、75質量%以下であることがより好ましく、70質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、60質量%以下であることが一層好ましく、50質量%以下であることがより一層好ましい。
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物の好ましい一態様として、他の樹脂の含有量が低含有量である態様とすることもできる。上記態様において、他の樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、20質量%以下であることが好ましく、15質量%以下であることがより好ましく、10質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、5質量%以下であることが一層好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより一層好ましい。上記含有量の下限は特に限定されず、0質量%以上であればよい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、他の樹脂を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
When the resin composition of the present invention contains other resins, the content of the other resins is preferably 0.01% by mass or more, and 0.05% by mass or more, relative to the total solid content of the resin composition. More preferably, it is more preferably 1% by mass or more, even more preferably 2% by mass or more, even more preferably 5% by mass or more, and further preferably 10% by mass or more. More preferred.
In addition, the content of other resins in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 75% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the resin composition. It is more preferably 60% by mass or less, even more preferably 50% by mass or less.
In addition, as a preferred embodiment of the resin composition of the present invention, the content of other resins may be low. In the above aspect, the content of the other resin is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, and 10% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content of the resin composition. is more preferable, 5% by mass or less is even more preferable, and 1% by mass or less is even more preferable. The lower limit of the content is not particularly limited as long as it is 0% by mass or more.
The resin composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of other resin, or may contain two or more kinds thereof. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<特定メタロセン化合物>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、特定メタロセン化合物を含む。
<Specific metallocene compound>
The resin composition of the present invention contains a specific metallocene compound.
 本発明の第一の態様に係る樹脂組成物に含まれる特定メタロセン化合物(第一の特定メタロセン化合物)は、金属原子と、置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子と、上記金属原子に直結する芳香環を有し、上記芳香環は、上記芳香環に直結する置換基として、ハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を有し、500nmにおけるモル吸光係数が330mol-1・L・cm-1以下である。
 本発明の第二の態様に係る樹脂組成物に含まれる特定メタロセン化合物(第二の特定メタロセン化合物)は、金属原子と、置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子と、上記金属原子に直結する芳香環を有し、上記芳香環は、上記芳香環に直結する置換基としてハロゲン原子、及び、ハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を有する。
The specific metallocene compound (first specific metallocene compound) contained in the resin composition according to the first aspect of the present invention comprises a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and the above It has an aromatic ring directly connected to a metal atom, the aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom as a substituent directly connected to the aromatic ring, and the molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm is 330 mol −1 · L·cm −1 or less.
The specific metallocene compound (second specific metallocene compound) contained in the resin composition according to the second aspect of the present invention comprises a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and the above It has an aromatic ring directly linked to a metal atom, and the aromatic ring has a halogen atom as a substituent directly linked to the aromatic ring and an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom.
〔金属原子〕
 特定メタロセン化合物に含まれる上記金属原子の種類としては、特に限定されないが、第四族金属原子が好ましく、チタン原子、ジルコニウム原子、又は、ハフニウム原子がより好ましく、組成物中の安定性の観点からは、チタン原子が更に好ましい。これは、チタン原子は原子半径が小さいため、化合物の安定性が向上するためであると推測される。
 すなわち、本発明の特定メタロセン化合物は、第四族金属原子を含むメタロセン化合物であることが好ましく、チタノセン化合物、ジルコノセン化合物、又は、ハフノセン化合物であることがより好ましく、チタノセン化合物であることが更に好ましい。
 特定メタロセン化合物に含まれる上記金属原子の数としては、特に限定されないが、1以上であればよく、1~4であることがより好ましく、1又は2であることが更に好ましく、1であることが特に好ましい。
 また、特定メタロセン化合物が上記金属原子を2以上含む場合、上記金属原子の種類は同一であってもよいし、異なっていてもよい。例えば、特定メタロセン化合物が上記金属原子を2つ含む場合、チタン原子を2つ含んでもよいし、チタン原子とジルコニウム原子とを含んでもよい。
[Metal atom]
The type of the metal atom contained in the specific metallocene compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably a Group 4 metal atom, more preferably a titanium atom, a zirconium atom, or a hafnium atom, from the viewpoint of stability in the composition. is more preferably a titanium atom. It is presumed that this is because the titanium atom has a small atomic radius, which improves the stability of the compound.
That is, the specific metallocene compound of the present invention is preferably a metallocene compound containing a Group 4 metal atom, more preferably a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound, or a hafnocene compound, and even more preferably a titanocene compound. .
The number of metal atoms contained in the specific metallocene compound is not particularly limited, but may be 1 or more, more preferably 1 to 4, further preferably 1 or 2, and 1 is particularly preferred.
Moreover, when the specific metallocene compound contains two or more of the above metal atoms, the types of the above metal atoms may be the same or different. For example, when the specific metallocene compound contains two of the above metal atoms, it may contain two titanium atoms, or may contain a titanium atom and a zirconium atom.
〔置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子〕
 特定メタロセン化合物は置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子を有する。
 すなわち、特定メタロセン化合物はシクロペンタジエニル錯体である。
 ここで、上記シクロペンタジエニル配位子は上記金属原子にη型の配位様式で配位することが好ましい。
 シクロペンタジエニル配位子における置換基としては、本発明の効果が得られる限りにおいて特に限定されないが、例えば炭素数1~10のアルキル基等が挙げられる。
 また、シクロペンタジエニル配位子が置換基を有しない態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の一つである。
 特定メタロセン化合物はシクロペンタジエニル配位子を1つのみ有してもよいし、2以上有してもよいが、2つ有することが好ましい。
 ここで、特定メタロセン化合物がシクロペンタジエニル配位子を2以上有する場合、それらの構造は同一であってもよいし、異なっていてもよい。
[Cyclopentadienyl ligand optionally having a substituent]
The specific metallocene compound has an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand.
That is, the specific metallocene compound is a cyclopentadienyl complex.
Here, the cyclopentadienyl ligand preferably coordinates to the metal atom in a η5 -type coordination mode.
The substituent in the cyclopentadienyl ligand is not particularly limited as long as the effects of the present invention can be obtained, and examples thereof include alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
An embodiment in which the cyclopentadienyl ligand has no substituent is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
The specific metallocene compound may have only one cyclopentadienyl ligand, or may have two or more cyclopentadienyl ligands, but preferably has two.
Here, when the specific metallocene compound has two or more cyclopentadienyl ligands, their structures may be the same or different.
〔金属原子に直結する芳香環〕
 金属原子に直結する芳香環としては、芳香族炭化水素環であってもよいし、芳香族複素環であってもよいが、芳香族炭化水素環が好ましい。
 芳香族炭化水素環としては、炭素数6~20の芳香環が好ましく、ベンゼン環又はナフタレン環がより好ましく、ベンゼン環が更に好ましい。
 芳香族複素環としては、5員環、6員環又はこれらの結合により表される環構造が好ましい。芳香族複素環の具体例としては、ピリジン環、イミダゾール環、チオフェン環、ピラジン環、ピロール環、アゼピン環、チエピン環、ピラゾール環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、イミダゾリン環、チアジン環、インドール環、イソインドール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、プリン環、キノリン環、イソキノリン環、キノキサリン環、シンノリン環、プテリジン環、ベンゾフラン環、ピリミジン環、ピリダジン環等が挙げられるが、これに限定されるものではない。
 特定メタロセン化合物は、上記金属原子に直結する芳香環を1つのみ有してもよいし2以上有していてもよいが、1つ又は2つ有することが好ましく、2つ有することがより好ましい。
 特定メタロセン化合物が、上記金属原子に直結する芳香環を2以上有する場合、それらの構造及び置換基の構造は同一であってもよいし異なっていてもよい。
[Aromatic Ring Directly Connected to Metal Atom]
The aromatic ring directly linked to a metal atom may be an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic heterocyclic ring, but an aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferred.
The aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably an aromatic ring having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, and still more preferably a benzene ring.
As the aromatic heterocyclic ring, a ring structure represented by a 5-membered ring, a 6-membered ring, or a combination thereof is preferable. Specific examples of aromatic heterocycles include pyridine ring, imidazole ring, thiophene ring, pyrazine ring, pyrrole ring, azepine ring, thiepine ring, pyrazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, imidazoline ring, thiazine ring, indole ring, iso Indole ring, benzimidazole ring, purine ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, quinoxaline ring, cinnoline ring, pteridine ring, benzofuran ring, pyrimidine ring, pyridazine ring, etc., but not limited thereto.
The specific metallocene compound may have one or more aromatic rings directly connected to the metal atom, but preferably has one or two, more preferably two. .
When the specific metallocene compound has two or more aromatic rings directly connected to the metal atom, their structures and substituent structures may be the same or different.
 上記芳香環は上記芳香環に直結する置換基としてハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を有する。
 上記電子求引性基としては、-CF、-NO、-CCl、-CN、-CHO、-COCH、-COOC,-COOH、-SOCH、-SOH等が挙げられ、-CF又は-NOが好ましい。
 上記芳香環は、上記電子求引性基に加えて、更に置換基を有してもよい、そのような置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基等が挙げられる。
 上記芳香環は、上記電子求引性基を2以上有してもよいが、1つのみ有することも本発明の好ましい態様の一つである。上記電子求引性基を2以上有する場合、それらの電子求引性基の構造は同一であってもよいし異なっていてもよい。
 また、上記芳香環がベンゼン環である場合、上記ベンゼン環は、ベンゼン環における金属原子との結合部位に対してパラ位に上記電子求引性基を有することが好ましい。
The aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom as a substituent directly bonded to the aromatic ring.
Examples of the electron-withdrawing group include -CF 3 , -NO 2 , -CCl 3 , -CN, -CHO, -COCH 3 , -COOC 2 H 5 , -COOH, -SO 2 CH 3 , -SO 3 H etc., and -CF 3 or -NO 2 is preferred.
The aromatic ring may further have a substituent in addition to the electron-withdrawing group. Examples of such substituents include halogen atoms and alkyl groups.
Although the aromatic ring may have two or more electron-withdrawing groups, having only one is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention. When having two or more electron-withdrawing groups, the electron-withdrawing groups may have the same or different structures.
Moreover, when the aromatic ring is a benzene ring, the benzene ring preferably has the electron-withdrawing group at the para-position with respect to the bonding site with the metal atom in the benzene ring.
 また、第一の特定メタロセン化合物において、特定メタロセン化合物の安定性の観点からは、上記芳香環は上述の電子求引性基以外に、ハロゲン原子を更に置換基として有することも好ましい。
 第二の特定メタロセン化合物において、上記芳香環は上述の電子求引性基以外に、ハロゲン原子を更に置換基として有する。
 これらの特定メタロセン化合物における上記ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等が挙げられ、フッ素原子が好ましい。
 また、これらの特定メタロセン化合物における上記芳香環がベンゼン環であり、上記ハロゲン原子を更に置換基として有する場合、上記ベンゼン環は、ベンゼン環における金属原子との結合部位に対してオルト位、又は、オルト位及びメタ位に上記ハロゲン原子を有することが好ましく、上記オルト位に上記ハロゲン原子を有し、上記メタ位に上記ハロゲン原子を有しないことがより好ましい。
 上記ベンゼン環が上記ベンゼン環における金属原子との結合部位に対してオルト位に上記ハロゲン原子を有する場合、上記ベンゼン環は、2つのオルト位のうち両方に上記ハロゲン原子を有してもよいが、一方にのみ上記ハロゲン原子を有することが好ましい。
 上記ベンゼン環が上記ベンゼン環における金属原子との結合部位に対してオルト位及びメタ位に上記ハロゲン原子を有する場合、上記ベンゼン環は、2つのオルト位及び2つのメタ位のそれぞれの両方に上記ハロゲン原子を有してもよいが、2つのオルト位の一方にのみ上記ハロゲン原子を有し、かつ、2つのメタ位の一方にのみ上記ハロゲン原子を有するすることが好ましい。
Moreover, in the first specific metallocene compound, from the viewpoint of stability of the specific metallocene compound, the aromatic ring preferably further has a halogen atom as a substituent in addition to the electron-withdrawing group described above.
In the second specific metallocene compound, the aromatic ring further has a halogen atom as a substituent in addition to the electron-withdrawing group described above.
Examples of the halogen atom in these specific metallocene compounds include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, with a fluorine atom being preferred.
Further, when the aromatic ring in these specific metallocene compounds is a benzene ring and further has the halogen atom as a substituent, the benzene ring is positioned ortho to the bonding site with the metal atom in the benzene ring, or It preferably has the halogen atoms at the ortho-position and the meta-position, and more preferably has the halogen atom at the ortho-position and does not have the halogen atom at the meta-position.
When the benzene ring has the halogen atom at the ortho position with respect to the bonding site with the metal atom in the benzene ring, the benzene ring may have the halogen atom at both of the two ortho positions. , preferably has the above halogen atom only on one side.
When the benzene ring has the halogen atoms at the ortho and meta positions with respect to the bonding site with the metal atom on the benzene ring, the benzene ring has the above at both the two ortho positions and the two meta positions, respectively. Although it may have a halogen atom, it is preferable to have the above halogen atom only at one of the two ortho positions and only at one of the two meta positions.
〔その他の構造〕
 特定メタロセン化合物は、その他の構造を更に有してもよい。
 例えば、第一の特定メタロセン化合物は、置換基を有しない芳香環を更に含んでもよい。上記芳香環の好ましい態様は、置換基を有する芳香環における芳香環の好ましい態様と同様である。
[Other structures]
The specific metallocene compound may further have other structures.
For example, the first specific metallocene compound may further include an unsubstituted aromatic ring. Preferred embodiments of the aromatic ring are the same as the preferred embodiments of the aromatic ring in the aromatic ring having a substituent.
〔500nmにおけるモル吸光係数〕
 第一の特定メタロセン化合物の500nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、330mol-1・L・cm-1以下であり、300mol-1・L・cm-1以下であることが好ましく、250mol-1・L・cm-1以下であることがより好ましく、200mol-1・L・cm-1以下であることが更に好ましく、150mol-1・L・cm-1以下であることが特に好ましい。
 第二の特定メタロセン化合物の500nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、330mol-1・L・cm-1以下であることが好ましく、300mol-1・L・cm-1以下であることがより好ましく、250mol-1・L・cm-1以下であることが更に好ましく、200mol-1・L・cm-1以下であることが特に好ましく、150mol-1・L・cm-1以下であることが最も好ましい。
 また、上記モル吸光係数の下限は特に限定されず、0mol-1・L・cm-1以上であればよい。
 上記モル吸光係数は、実施例に記載の方法により測定することができる。
[Molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm]
The molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm of the first specific metallocene compound is 330 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less, preferably 300 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less, and 250 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less, more preferably 200 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less, and particularly preferably 150 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less.
The molar extinction coefficient at 500 nm of the second specific metallocene compound is preferably 330 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less, more preferably 300 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less, and 250 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less is more preferable, 200 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less is particularly preferable, and 150 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less is most preferable.
Further, the lower limit of the molar extinction coefficient is not particularly limited, and may be 0 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or more.
The molar extinction coefficient can be measured by the method described in Examples.
〔光重合開始能〕
 特定メタロセン化合物は、光重合開始能を有するものを用いることもできる。
 本発明においては、このような特定メタロセン化合物を用いた場合であっても暗重合が抑制されやすく、黄色灯下での作業安定性に優れると考えられる。
 具体的には、例えば、特定メタロセン化合物として、光ラジカル重合開始能を有するものを用いることもできる。
[Photopolymerization initiation ability]
A specific metallocene compound having photopolymerization initiation ability can also be used.
In the present invention, even when such a specific metallocene compound is used, dark polymerization is likely to be suppressed, and it is considered that the working stability under a yellow light is excellent.
Specifically, for example, a compound having photoradical polymerization initiation ability can be used as the specific metallocene compound.
〔式(1-1)又は式(1-2)〕
 特定メタロセン化合物は、下記式(1-1)又は式(1-2)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。

 式(1-1)中、Mはチタン原子、ジルコニウム原子又はハフニウム原子を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はフッ素原子を表し、Rのうち一方はフッ素原子であり、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、Rはハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はフッ素原子を表し、Rのうち一方はフッ素原子であり、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、Rはハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を表す。
 式(1-2)中、Mはそれぞれ独立に、チタン原子、ジルコニウム原子又はハフニウム原子を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はフッ素原子を表し、Rのうち一方はフッ素原子であり、R10はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、R11はハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を表し、R12はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はフッ素原子を表し、R12のうち一方はフッ素原子であり、R13はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、R14はハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を表し、R15及びR16はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表し、Aは酸素原子又は硫黄原子を表す。
[Formula (1-1) or Formula (1-2)]
The specific metallocene compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (1-1) or (1-2).

In formula (1-1), M represents a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom, each R 1 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and each R 2 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom. , R 2 is a fluorine atom, R 3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, R 4 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom, R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, one of R 5 is a fluorine atom, each R 6 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and R 7 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom.
In formula (1-2), each M independently represents a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom, each R 8 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, each R 9 independently represents a hydrogen atom or represents a fluorine atom, one of R 9 is a fluorine atom, R 10 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, R 11 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom, and R 12 Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, one of R 12 is a fluorine atom, each R 13 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and R 14 has an electron-withdrawing property different from that of a halogen atom. group, R 15 and R 16 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and A represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
 式(1-1)中、Mはチタン原子であることが好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Rはいずれも水素原子であることが好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Rは一方がフッ素原子、他方が水素原子であることが好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Rはいずれも水素原子であることが好ましい。Rにおける上記ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等が挙げられ、フッ素原子が好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Rにおけるハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基の好ましい態様は、上述の電子求引性基の好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(1-1)中、R、R及びRの好ましい態様は、式(1-1)中のR、R及びRの好ましい態様と同様である。
In formula (1-1), M is preferably a titanium atom.
In formula (1-1), each R 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula (1-1), one of R 2 is preferably a fluorine atom and the other is preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula (1-1), each R 3 is preferably a hydrogen atom. Examples of the halogen atom for R 3 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, with a fluorine atom being preferred.
Preferred embodiments of the electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom in R 4 in formula (1-1) are the same as the preferred embodiments of the electron-withdrawing group described above.
Preferred embodiments of R 5 , R 6 and R 7 in formula (1-1) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 2 , R 3 and R 4 in formula (1-1).
 式(1-2)中、2つのMはいずれもチタン原子であるか、いずれもジルコニウム原子であるか、又は、いずれもハフニウム原子であることが好ましく、いずれもチタン原子であることがより好ましい。
 式(1-2)中、Rの好ましい態様は、式(1-1)中のRの好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(1-2)中、Rの好ましい態様は、式(1-1)中のRの好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(1-2)中、R10の好ましい態様は、式(1-1)中のRの好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(1-2)中、R11の好ましい態様は、式(1-1)中のRの好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(1-2)中、R12の好ましい態様は、式(1-1)中のRの好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(1-2)中、R13の好ましい態様は、式(1-1)中のRの好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(1-2)中、R14の好ましい態様は、式(1-1)中のRの好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(1-2)中、R15及びR16はそれぞれ独立に、上述の置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子、上述の上記金属原子に直結する芳香環、又は、上述のその他の構造であることが好ましい。これらの構造の好ましい態様及び具体例は、それぞれ上述の通りである。
 式(1-2)中、Aは酸素原子であることが好ましい。
In formula (1-2), both M are titanium atoms, both are zirconium atoms, or both are preferably hafnium atoms, and both are more preferably titanium atoms. .
Preferred embodiments of R 8 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 1 in formula (1-1).
Preferred embodiments of R 9 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 2 in formula (1-1).
Preferred embodiments of R 10 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 3 in formula (1-1).
Preferred embodiments of R 11 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 4 in formula (1-1).
Preferred embodiments of R 12 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 5 in formula (1-1).
Preferred embodiments of R 13 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 6 in formula (1-1).
Preferred embodiments of R 14 in formula (1-2) are the same as preferred embodiments of R 7 in formula (1-1).
In formula (1-2), R 15 and R 16 are each independently a cyclopentadienyl ligand optionally having a substituent as described above, an aromatic ring directly linked to the metal atom described above, or Other structures are preferred. Preferred aspects and specific examples of these structures are respectively as described above.
In formula (1-2), A is preferably an oxygen atom.
 これらの中でも、上記式(1-1)におけるR及びRがそれぞれ独立に、トリフルオロメチル基又はニトロ基であり、上記式(1-2)におけるR11及びR14がそれぞれ独立に、トリフルオロメチル基又はニトロ基であることが好ましい。
 このような態様によれば、特定メタロセン化合物の吸収波長をより短波長化でき、黄色灯下での作業安定性がより向上しやすいと考えられる。
Among these, R 4 and R 7 in the above formula (1-1) are each independently a trifluoromethyl group or a nitro group, and R 11 and R 14 in the above formula (1-2) are each independently A trifluoromethyl group or a nitro group is preferred.
According to such an aspect, the absorption wavelength of the specific metallocene compound can be made shorter, and it is considered that the working stability under a yellow light is more likely to be improved.
〔分子量〕
 特定メタロセン化合物の分子量は、200~2,000であることが好ましく、300~1,500であることがより好ましく、400~1,000であることが更に好ましい。
[Molecular weight]
The molecular weight of the specific metallocene compound is preferably 200 to 2,000, more preferably 300 to 1,500, even more preferably 400 to 1,000.
〔合成方法〕
 特定メタロセン化合物は、例えば、ハロゲン化アリールとn-BuLiを反応させたものに、さらにチタノセンジクロライドを反応させることにより合成することができる。また、その他公知の合成方法を用いて合成してもよく、合成方法は特に限定されるものではない。
 例えば、一般的にチタノセン化合物は下記方法により合成される。
 以下の反応は窒素雰囲気下で実施する。アリールブロマイド(50mmol)のTHF(100mL)溶液に対し、-78℃にてn-BuLiの1.6M(mol/L)ヘキサン溶液(50mmol,31mL)をゆっくり滴下する。反応液を-78℃にて30分~60分撹拌したのちに、チタノセンジクロライド(25mmol)をゆっくり添加する。反応液を徐々に昇温し、室温にて1h撹拌する。
 反応液を減圧濃縮し、溶媒を留去したのちに、塩化メチレン(200mL)を加え、1h撹拌したのちに、濾過にて不溶成分を除去する。ろ液を減圧濃縮したのちに、シリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィー(ヘキサン/塩化メチレン)にて目的物を得る。
 例えば、上記「アリールブロマイド」として、電子求引性基が芳香環と直結した構造を有するハロゲン化アリール化合物を用いることで、特定メタロセン化合物を合成できる。合成条件、溶媒等は適宜変更してよい。
[Synthesis method]
The specific metallocene compound can be synthesized, for example, by reacting an aryl halide with n-BuLi and further reacting it with titanocene dichloride. Moreover, it may be synthesized using other known synthesis methods, and the synthesis method is not particularly limited.
For example, titanocene compounds are generally synthesized by the following method.
The following reactions are carried out under a nitrogen atmosphere. A 1.6 M (mol/L) hexane solution of n-BuLi (50 mmol, 31 mL) is slowly added dropwise to a THF (100 mL) solution of aryl bromide (50 mmol) at -78°C. After stirring the reaction solution at -78°C for 30 to 60 minutes, titanocene dichloride (25 mmol) is slowly added. The temperature of the reaction solution is gradually raised, and the mixture is stirred at room temperature for 1 h.
The reaction solution is concentrated under reduced pressure, the solvent is distilled off, methylene chloride (200 mL) is added, the mixture is stirred for 1 hour, and the insoluble components are removed by filtration. After concentrating the filtrate under reduced pressure, the desired product is obtained by silica gel column chromatography (hexane/methylene chloride).
For example, a specific metallocene compound can be synthesized by using a halogenated aryl compound having a structure in which an electron-withdrawing group is directly linked to an aromatic ring as the "aryl bromide". Synthesis conditions, solvents and the like may be changed as appropriate.
 特定メタロセン化合物の具体例としては、特に限定されないが、実施例で使用されたA-1~A-21が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the specific metallocene compound are not particularly limited, but include A-1 to A-21 used in the examples.
 本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分に対する、特定メタロセン化合物の含有量は、0.1~20質量%であることが好ましい。下限は0.2質量%以上がより好ましく、0.5質量%以上が更に好ましく、1質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、15質量%以下であることがより好ましく、10質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、8質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。
 特定メタロセン化合物は1種を単独で用いてもよいが、2種以上を併用して用いてもよい。2種以上を併用する場合にはその合計量が上記の範囲となることが好ましい。
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物が、特定メタロセン化合物と、後述するラジカル重合開始剤(特定メタロセン化合物とは異なるラジカル重合開始剤)とを含む場合、特定メタロセン化合物とラジカル重合開始剤(特定メタロセン化合物とは異なるラジカル重合開始剤)との合計含有量は、0.1~20質量%であることが好ましい。下限は0.2質量%以上がより好ましく、0.5質量%以上が更に好ましく、1質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、15質量%以下であることがより好ましく、10質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、8質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。
The content of the specific metallocene compound with respect to the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass. The lower limit is more preferably 0.2% by mass or more, still more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 15% by mass or less, even more preferably 10% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 8% by mass or less.
One of the specific metallocene compounds may be used alone, or two or more thereof may be used in combination. When two or more are used in combination, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
Further, when the resin composition of the present invention contains a specific metallocene compound and a radical polymerization initiator described later (radical polymerization initiator different from the specific metallocene compound), the specific metallocene compound and the radical polymerization initiator (specific metallocene compound The total content of the radical polymerization initiator different from the above) is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass. The lower limit is more preferably 0.2% by mass or more, still more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 15% by mass or less, even more preferably 10% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 8% by mass or less.
<有機金属錯体>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、耐薬品性の観点から、有機金属錯体を含んでもよい。
 ここでいう有機金属錯体には、上述の特定メタロセン化合物に該当する化合物は含まないものとする。
 有機金属錯体とは、金属原子を含む有機錯体化合物であればよいが、金属原子及び有機基を含む錯体化合物であることが好ましく、金属原子に対して有機基が配位した化合物であることがより好ましく、メタロセン化合物であることが更に好ましい。
 本発明において、メタロセン化合物とは、置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニルアニオン誘導体2個をη5-配位子として有する有機金属錯体をいう。
 上記有機基としては、特に限定されないが、炭化水素基、又は、炭化水素基とヘテロ原子との組み合わせからなる基が好ましい。ヘテロ原子としては、酸素原子、硫黄原子、窒素原子が好ましい。
 本発明では、有機基の少なくとも1つは環状基であることが好ましく、少なくとも2つは環状基であることがより好ましい。
 上記環状基は、5員環の環状基及び6員環の環状基から選択されることが好ましく、5員環の環状基であることがより好ましい。
 上記環状基は、炭化水素環でも複素環でもよいが、炭化水素環が好ましい。
 5員環の環状基としては、シクロペンタジエニル基が好ましい。
 また、本発明で用いる有機金属錯体は、1分子中に2~4個の環状基を含むことが好ましい。
<Organometallic complex>
The resin composition of the present invention may contain an organometallic complex from the viewpoint of chemical resistance.
The organometallic complex referred to here does not include compounds corresponding to the above-mentioned specific metallocene compounds.
The organometallic complex may be an organic complex compound containing a metal atom, but is preferably a complex compound containing a metal atom and an organic group, and is preferably a compound in which an organic group is coordinated to a metal atom. More preferably, it is a metallocene compound.
In the present invention, the metallocene compound refers to an organometallic complex having two optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl anion derivatives as η5-ligands.
Although the organic group is not particularly limited, a hydrocarbon group or a group composed of a combination of a hydrocarbon group and a hetero atom is preferable. Preferred heteroatoms are oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen atoms.
In the present invention, at least one of the organic groups is preferably a cyclic group, more preferably at least two are cyclic groups.
The cyclic group is preferably selected from a 5-membered cyclic group and a 6-membered cyclic group, more preferably a 5-membered cyclic group.
The cyclic group may be either a hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring, but is preferably a hydrocarbon ring.
As the five-membered cyclic group, a cyclopentadienyl group is preferred.
Moreover, the organometallic complex used in the present invention preferably contains 2 to 4 cyclic groups in one molecule.
 有機金属錯体に含まれる金属としては、特に限定されないが、第4族元素に該当する金属であることが好ましく、チタン、ジルコニウム及びハフニウムよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の金属であることがより好ましく、チタン及びジルコニウムよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の金属であることが更に好ましく、チタンであることが特に好ましい。 The metal contained in the organometallic complex is not particularly limited, but is preferably a metal corresponding to a Group 4 element, and at least one metal selected from the group consisting of titanium, zirconium and hafnium. More preferably, it is at least one metal selected from the group consisting of titanium and zirconium, and particularly preferably titanium.
 有機金属錯体は、金属原子を2つ以上含んでもよいし、金属原子を1つのみ含んでもよいが、金属原子を1つのみ含むことが好ましい。有機金属錯体が金属原子を2つ以上含む場合、1種のみの金属原子を含んでもよいし、2種以上の金属原子を含んでもよい。 The organometallic complex may contain two or more metal atoms or may contain only one metal atom, but preferably contains only one metal atom. When the organometallic complex contains two or more metal atoms, it may contain only one kind of metal atom, or may contain two or more kinds of metal atoms.
 有機金属錯体は、フェロセン化合物、チタノセン化合物、ジルコノセン化合物又はハフノセン化合物であることが好ましく、チタノセン化合物、ジルコノセン化合物又はハフノセン化合物であることがより好ましく、チタノセン化合物、又は、ジルコノセン化合物であることが更に好ましく、チタノセン化合物であることが特に好ましい。 The organometallic complex is preferably a ferrocene compound, a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound or a hafnocene compound, more preferably a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound or a hafnocene compound, and even more preferably a titanocene compound or a zirconocene compound. , titanocene compounds are particularly preferred.
 有機金属錯体が光ラジカル重合開始能を有する態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。
 本発明において、光ラジカル重合開始能を有するとは、光の照射によりラジカル重合を開始させることのできるフリーラジカルを発生させることができることを意味する。例えば、ラジカル架橋剤と有機金属錯体とを含む組成物に対して、有機金属錯体が光を吸収する波長域であって、ラジカル架橋剤が光を吸収しない波長域の光を照射した時に、ラジカル架橋剤の消失の有無を確認することにより光ラジカル重合開始能の有無を確認することができる。消失の有無を確認するには、ラジカル架橋剤の種類に応じて適宜の方法を選択できるが、例えばIR測定(赤外分光測定)又はHPLC測定(高速液体クロマトグラフィ)により確認すればよい。
 有機金属錯体が光ラジカル重合開始能を有する場合、有機金属錯体はメタロセン化合物であることが好ましく、チタノセン化合物、ジルコノセン化合物又はハフノセン化合物であることがより好ましく、チタノセン化合物、又は、ジルコノセン化合物であることが更に好ましく、チタノセン化合物であることが特に好ましい。
 有機金属錯体が光ラジカル重合開始能を有しない場合、有機金属錯体は、チタノセン化合物、テトラアルコキシチタン化合物、チタンアシレート化合物、チタンキレート化合物、ジルコノセン化合物及びハフノセン化合物よりなる群から選択された少なくとも1種の化合物であることが好ましく、チタノセン化合物、ジルコノセン化合物及びハフノセン化合物よりなる群から選択された少なくとも1種の化合物であることがより好ましく、チタノセン化合物及びジルコノセン化合物よりなる群から選択された少なくとも1種の化合物であることが更に好ましく、チタノセン化合物であることが特に好ましい。
An embodiment in which the organometallic complex has photoradical polymerization initiation ability is also one of preferred embodiments of the present invention.
In the present invention, having the ability to initiate radical photopolymerization means being able to generate free radicals capable of initiating radical polymerization upon exposure to light. For example, when a composition containing a radical cross-linking agent and an organometallic complex is irradiated with light in a wavelength range in which the organometallic complex absorbs light and the radical cross-linking agent does not absorb light, radicals By confirming the presence or absence of disappearance of the cross-linking agent, the presence or absence of photoradical polymerization initiation ability can be confirmed. In order to confirm the presence or absence of disappearance, an appropriate method can be selected according to the type of the radical cross-linking agent.
When the organometallic complex has photoradical polymerization initiation ability, the organometallic complex is preferably a metallocene compound, more preferably a titanocene compound, a zirconocene compound or a hafnocene compound, and a titanocene compound or a zirconocene compound. is more preferred, and a titanocene compound is particularly preferred.
When the organometallic complex does not have photoradical polymerization initiation ability, the organometallic complex is at least one selected from the group consisting of titanocene compounds, tetraalkoxytitanium compounds, titanium acylate compounds, titanium chelate compounds, zirconocene compounds and hafnocene compounds. more preferably at least one compound selected from the group consisting of titanocene compounds, zirconocene compounds and hafnocene compounds, and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of titanocene compounds and zirconocene compounds More preferred are compounds of the species, and particularly preferred are titanocene compounds.
 有機金属錯体の分子量は、50~2,000が好ましく、100~1,000がより好ましい。 The molecular weight of the organometallic complex is preferably 50 to 2,000, more preferably 100 to 1,000.
 有機金属錯体としては、下記式(P)で表される化合物が好ましく挙げられる。

 式(P)中、Mは、金属原子であり、Rはそれぞれ独立に、置換基である。
 上記Rは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基、アルキル基、ハロゲン原子及びアルキルスルホニルオキシ基から選択されることが好ましい。
Preferred examples of the organometallic complex include compounds represented by the following formula (P).

In formula (P), M is a metal atom, and each R is independently a substituent.
It is preferable that each R is independently selected from an aromatic group, an alkyl group, a halogen atom and an alkylsulfonyloxy group.
 式(P)中、Mが表す金属原子としては、鉄原子、チタン原子、ジルコニウム原子又はハフニウム原子が好ましく、チタン原子、ジルコニウム原子又はハフニウム原子がより好ましく、チタン原子又はジルコニウム原子が更に好ましく、チタン原子が特に好ましい。
 式(P)中のRにおける芳香族基としては、炭素数6~20の芳香族基が挙げられ、炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基が好ましく、フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、又は、2-ナフチル基等が挙げられる。
 式(P)中のRにおけるアルキル基としては、炭素数1~20のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~10のアルキル基がより好ましく、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、オクチル基、イソプロピル基、t-ブチル基、イソペンチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、2-メチルヘキシル基、シクロペンチル基等が挙げられる。
 上記Rにおけるハロゲン原子としては、F、Cl、Br、Iが挙げられる。
 上記Rにおけるアルキルスルホニルオキシ基を構成するアルキル基としては、炭素数1~20のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~10のアルキル基がより好ましく、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、オクチル基、イソプロピル基、t-ブチル基、イソペンチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、2-メチルヘキシル基、シクロペンチル基等が挙げられる。
 上記Rは、更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子(F、Cl、Br、I)、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アミノ基、シアノ基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、モノアルキルアミノ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、モノアリールアミノ基及びジアリールアミノ基等が挙げられる。
In formula (P), the metal atom represented by M is preferably an iron atom, a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom, more preferably a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom, still more preferably a titanium atom or a zirconium atom, and titanium Atoms are particularly preferred.
The aromatic group for R in formula (P) includes an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, or , 2-naphthyl group and the like.
The alkyl group for R in formula (P) is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and is a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an octyl group, and an isopropyl group. , t-butyl group, isopentyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 2-methylhexyl group, cyclopentyl group and the like.
Halogen atoms for R include F, Cl, Br and I.
The alkyl group constituting the alkylsulfonyloxy group in R above is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an octyl group, isopropyl group, t-butyl group, isopentyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 2-methylhexyl group, cyclopentyl group and the like.
The above R may further have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms (F, Cl, Br, I), hydroxy groups, carboxy groups, amino groups, cyano groups, aryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, aryloxy carbonyl group, acyloxy group, monoalkylamino group, dialkylamino group, monoarylamino group, diarylamino group and the like.
 有機金属錯体の具体例としては、特に限定されるものではないが、テトライソプロポキシチタン、テトラキス(2-エチルヘキシルオキシ)チタン、ジイソプロポキシビス(エチルアセトアセテート)チタン、ジイソプロポキシビス(アセチルアセトナト)チタン、ビス(η5-2,4-シクロペンタジエン-1-イル)ビス(2,6-ジフルオロ-3-(1H-ピロール-1-イル)フェニル)チタニウム、ペンタメチルシクロペンタジエニルチタニウムトリメトキサイド、ビス(η5-2,4-シクロペンタジエン-1-イル)ビス(2,6-ジフルオロフェニル)チタニウム及び、下記化合物が例示される。
Specific examples of the organometallic complex include, but are not limited to, tetraisopropoxytitanium, tetrakis(2-ethylhexyloxy)titanium, diisopropoxybis(ethylacetoacetate)titanium, diisopropoxybis(acetylacetoacetate)titanium, and diisopropoxybis(acetylacetoacetate). nath)titanium, bis(η5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluoro-3-(1H-pyrrol-1-yl)phenyl)titanium, pentamethylcyclopentadienyltitanium tri Examples include methoxide, bis(η5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluorophenyl)titanium, and the following compounds.
 その他、国際公開第2018/025738号の段落0078~0088に記載の化合物も使用することができるが、これに限定されるものではない。 In addition, compounds described in paragraphs 0078 to 0088 of International Publication No. 2018/025738 can also be used, but are not limited thereto.
 有機金属錯体の含有量は、本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、0.1~30質量%が好ましい。下限は、1.0質量%以上がより好ましく、1.5質量%以上が更に好ましく、3.0質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、25質量%以下がより好ましい。
 有機金属錯体は、1種又は2種以上を用いることができる。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
The content of the organometallic complex is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass based on the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. The lower limit is more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, still more preferably 1.5% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 3.0% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 25% by mass or less.
1 type(s) or 2 or more types can be used for an organometallic complex. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<重合性化合物>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、重合性化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 重合性化合物としては、ラジカル架橋剤、又は、他の架橋剤が挙げられる。
<Polymerizable compound>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
Polymerizable compounds include radical cross-linking agents or other cross-linking agents.
〔ラジカル架橋剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、ラジカル架橋剤を含むことが好ましい。
 ラジカル架橋剤は、ラジカル重合性基を有する化合物である。ラジカル重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基が好ましい。上記エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、ビニルフェニル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、マレイミド基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基などのエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基が挙げられる。
 これらの中でも、上記エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、ビニルフェニル基が好ましく、反応性の観点からは、(メタ)アクリロイル基がより好ましい。
[Radical cross-linking agent]
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a radical cross-linking agent.
A radical cross-linking agent is a compound having a radically polymerizable group. As the radically polymerizable group, a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferred. Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include groups containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond such as a vinyl group, an allyl group, a vinylphenyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a maleimide group, and a (meth)acrylamide group.
Among these, the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably a (meth)acryloyl group, a (meth)acrylamide group, or a vinylphenyl group, and more preferably a (meth)acryloyl group from the viewpoint of reactivity.
 ラジカル架橋剤は、エチレン性不飽和結合を1個以上有する化合物であることが好ましいが、2個以上有する化合物であることがより好ましい。ラジカル架橋剤は、エチレン性不飽和結合を3個以上有していてもよい。
 上記エチレン性不飽和結合を2個以上有する化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を2~15個有する化合物が好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合を2~10個有する化合物がより好ましく、2~6個有する化合物が更に好ましい。
 また、得られるパターン(硬化物)の膜強度の観点からは、本発明の樹脂組成物は、エチレン性不飽和結合を2個有する化合物と、上記エチレン性不飽和結合を3個以上有する化合物とを含むことも好ましい。
The radical cross-linking agent is preferably a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds, more preferably a compound having two or more. The radical cross-linking agent may have 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds.
The compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds is preferably a compound having 2 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bonds, more preferably a compound having 2 to 10 ethylenically unsaturated bonds, and 2 to 6. More preferred are compounds having
Further, from the viewpoint of the film strength of the resulting pattern (cured product), the resin composition of the present invention contains a compound having two ethylenically unsaturated bonds and a compound having three or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds. It is also preferred to include
 ラジカル架橋剤の分子量は、2,000以下が好ましく、1,500以下がより好ましく、900以下が更に好ましい。ラジカル架橋剤の分子量の下限は、100以上が好ましい。 The molecular weight of the radical cross-linking agent is preferably 2,000 or less, more preferably 1,500 or less, and even more preferably 900 or less. The lower limit of the molecular weight of the radical cross-linking agent is preferably 100 or more.
 ラジカル架橋剤の具体例としては、不飽和カルボン酸(例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、マレイン酸など)やそのエステル類、アミド類が挙げられ、好ましくは、不飽和カルボン酸と多価アルコール化合物とのエステル、及び不飽和カルボン酸と多価アミン化合物とのアミド類である。また、ヒドロキシ基やアミノ基、スルファニル基等の求核性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル又はアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能イソシアネート類又はエポキシ類との付加反応物や、単官能若しくは多官能のカルボン酸との脱水縮合反応物等も好適に使用される。また、イソシアネート基やエポキシ基等の親電子性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル又はアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との付加反応物、更に、ハロゲノ基やトシルオキシ基等の脱離性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル又はアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との置換反応物も好適である。また、別の例として、上記の不飽和カルボン酸の代わりに、不飽和ホスホン酸、スチレン等のビニルベンゼン誘導体、ビニルエーテル、アリルエーテル等に置き換えた化合物群を使用することも可能である。具体例としては、特開2016-027357号公報の段落0113~0122の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of the radical cross-linking agent include unsaturated carboxylic acids (eg, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), their esters, and amides. They are esters of saturated carboxylic acids and polyhydric alcohol compounds, and amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyhydric amine compounds. In addition, addition reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a nucleophilic substituent such as a hydroxy group, an amino group, or a sulfanyl group with monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies, or monofunctional or polyfunctional A dehydration condensation reaction product with a functional carboxylic acid is also preferably used. In addition, addition reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having electrophilic substituents such as isocyanate groups and epoxy groups with monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines, and thiols, and halogeno groups Also suitable are substitution reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a leaving substituent such as a tosyloxy group and monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines, and thiols. As another example, it is also possible to use a group of compounds in which the unsaturated carboxylic acid is replaced with unsaturated phosphonic acid, a vinylbenzene derivative such as styrene, a vinyl ether, an allyl ether, or the like. As specific examples, paragraphs 0113 to 0122 of JP-A-2016-027357 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
 また、ラジカル架橋剤は、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物も好ましい。常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物としては、国際公開第2021/112189号公報の段落0203に記載の化合物等が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Also, the radical cross-linking agent is preferably a compound having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure. Compounds having a boiling point of 100° C. or higher under normal pressure include compounds described in paragraph 0203 of International Publication No. 2021/112189. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 上述以外の好ましいラジカル架橋剤としては、国際公開第2021/112189号公報の段落0204~0208に記載のラジカル重合性化合物等が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Preferred radical cross-linking agents other than those described above include radically polymerizable compounds described in paragraphs 0204 to 0208 of International Publication No. 2021/112189. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 ラジカル架橋剤としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-330(日本化薬(株)製))、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-320(日本化薬(株)製)、A-TMMT(新中村化学工業(株)製))、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-310(日本化薬(株)製))、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD DPHA(日本化薬(株)製)、A-DPH(新中村化学工業社製))、及びこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール残基又はプロピレングリコール残基を介して結合している構造が好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。 As a radical cross-linking agent, dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD D-330 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD D-320 (Nippon Kayaku ( Ltd.), A-TMMT (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD D-310 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)), dipenta Erythritol hexa(meth)acrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and A-DPH (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)), and their (meth)acryloyl groups are ethylene glycol residues or Structures that are linked via a propylene glycol residue are preferred. These oligomeric types can also be used.
 ラジカル架橋剤の市販品としては、例えばサートマー社製のエチレンオキシ鎖を4個有する4官能アクリレートであるSR-494、エチレンオキシ鎖を4個有する2官能メタクリレートであるサートマー社製のSR-209、231、239、日本化薬(株)製のペンチレンオキシ鎖を6個有する6官能アクリレートであるDPCA-60、イソブチレンオキシ鎖を3個有する3官能アクリレートであるTPA-330、ウレタンオリゴマーUAS-10、UAB-140(日本製紙社製)、NKエステルM-40G、NKエステル4G、NKエステルM-9300、NKエステルA-9300、UA-7200(新中村化学工業社製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬(株)製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600(以上、共栄社化学社製)、ブレンマーPME400(日油(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available radical cross-linking agents include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains, manufactured by Sartomer, SR-209, a bifunctional methacrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains, manufactured by Sartomer. 231, 239, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. DPCA-60, a hexafunctional acrylate having 6 pentyleneoxy chains, TPA-330, a trifunctional acrylate having 3 isobutyleneoxy chains, urethane oligomer UAS-10 , UAB-140 (manufactured by Nippon Paper Industries), NK Ester M-40G, NK Ester 4G, NK Ester M-9300, NK Ester A-9300, UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (Japan Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), Blenmer PME400 (manufactured by NOF Corporation) etc.
 ラジカル架橋剤としては、特公昭48-041708号公報、特開昭51-037193号公報、特公平02-032293号公報、特公平02-016765号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-049860号公報、特公昭56-017654号公報、特公昭62-039417号公報、特公昭62-039418号公報に記載のエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物類も好適である。更に、ラジカル架橋剤として、特開昭63-277653号公報、特開昭63-260909号公報、特開平01-105238号公報に記載される、分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。 Examples of radical cross-linking agents include urethane acrylates such as those described in JP-B-48-041708, JP-A-51-037193, JP-B-02-032293, JP-B-02-016765, Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-049860, JP-B-56-017654, JP-B-62-039417 and JP-B-62-039418 are also suitable. Furthermore, as a radical cross-linking agent, compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-01-105238 are used. can also
 ラジカル架橋剤は、カルボキシ基、リン酸基等の酸基を有するラジカル架橋剤であってもよい。酸基を有するラジカル架橋剤は、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルが好ましく、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシ基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を持たせたラジカル架橋剤がより好ましい。特に好ましくは、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシ基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を持たせたラジカル架橋剤において、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物がペンタエリスリトール又はジペンタエリスリトールである化合物である。市販品としては、例えば、東亞合成(株)製の多塩基酸変性アクリルオリゴマーとして、M-510、M-520などが挙げられる。 The radical cross-linking agent may be a radical cross-linking agent having an acid group such as a carboxy group or a phosphoric acid group. A radical cross-linking agent having an acid group is preferably an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid. is more preferable. Particularly preferably, in a radical cross-linking agent obtained by reacting an unreacted hydroxy group of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound with a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride to give an acid group, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol is a compound. Examples of commercially available products include polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. such as M-510 and M-520.
 酸基を有するラジカル架橋剤の好ましい酸価は、0.1~300mgKOH/gであり、特に好ましくは1~100mgKOH/gである。ラジカル架橋剤の酸価が上記範囲であれば、製造上の取扱性に優れ、更には、現像性に優れる。また、重合性が良好である。上記酸価は、JIS K 0070:1992の記載に準拠して測定される。 The acid value of the radical cross-linking agent having an acid group is preferably 0.1-300 mgKOH/g, particularly preferably 1-100 mgKOH/g. If the acid value of the radical cross-linking agent is within the above range, the handleability in production is excellent, and furthermore the developability is excellent. Moreover, the polymerizability is good. The acid value is measured according to JIS K 0070:1992.
 また、ラジカル架橋剤としては、ウレア結合、及び、ウレタン結合よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも一方を有するラジカル架橋剤(以下、「架橋剤U」ともいう。)も好ましい。
 本発明において、ウレア結合とは、*-NR-C(=O)-NR-*で表される結合であり、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、*はそれぞれ、炭素原子との結合部位を表す。
 本発明において、ウレタン結合とは*-O-C(=O)-NR-*で表される結合であり、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、*はそれぞれ、炭素原子との結合部位を表す。
 樹脂組成物が架橋剤Uを含むことにより、耐薬品性、解像性等が向上する場合が有る。
 上記効果が得られるメカニズムは不明だが、例えば、加熱等による硬化時に架橋剤Uの一部が熱分解することにより、アミンなどが発生し、上記アミン等がポリイミド前駆体等の環化樹脂の前駆体の環化を促進すると考えられる。
 架橋剤Uはウレア結合又はウレタン結合を1つのみ有してもよいし、1以上のウレア結合と1以上のウレタン結合とを有してもよいし、ウレタン結合を有さず2以上のウレア結合を有してもよいし、ウレア結合を有さず2以上のウレタン結合を有してもよい。
 架橋剤Uにおけるウレア結合及びウレタン結合の合計数は、1以上であり、1~10であることが好ましく、1~4であることがより好ましく、1又は2であることが更に好ましい。
 また、架橋剤Uがウレタン結合を有しない場合、架橋剤Uにおけるウレア結合の数は1以上であり、1~10であることが好ましく、1~4であることがより好ましく、1又は2であることが更に好ましい。
 また、架橋剤Uがウレア結合を有しない場合、架橋剤Uにおけるウレタン結合の数は1以上であり、1~10であることが好ましく、1~4であることがより好ましく、1又は2であることが更に好ましい。
As the radical cross-linking agent, a radical cross-linking agent having at least one selected from the group consisting of a urea bond and a urethane bond (hereinafter also referred to as "crosslinking agent U") is also preferable.
In the present invention, the urea bond is a bond represented by *-NR N -C(=O)-NR N -*, each R N independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, Each * represents a bonding site with a carbon atom.
In the present invention, the urethane bond is a bond represented by *-OC(=O)-NR N -*, where R N represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and * is a carbon atom. represents the binding site with
Including the cross-linking agent U in the resin composition may improve chemical resistance, resolution, and the like.
Although the mechanism by which the above effect is obtained is unknown, for example, when part of the cross-linking agent U is thermally decomposed during curing by heating or the like, an amine or the like is generated, and the amine or the like is a precursor of a cyclized resin such as a polyimide precursor. It is thought to promote body cyclization.
The cross-linking agent U may have only one urea bond or urethane bond, may have one or more urea bonds and one or more urethane bonds, or may have two or more urea bonds without urethane bonds. It may have a bond, or it may have two or more urethane bonds without a urea bond.
The total number of urea bonds and urethane bonds in the cross-linking agent U is 1 or more, preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 4, even more preferably 1 or 2.
Further, when the cross-linking agent U does not have a urethane bond, the number of urea bonds in the cross-linking agent U is 1 or more, preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 4, 1 or 2 It is even more preferable to have
Further, when the cross-linking agent U does not have a urea bond, the number of urethane bonds in the cross-linking agent U is 1 or more, preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 4, 1 or 2 It is even more preferable to have
 架橋剤Uにおけるラジカル重合性基は、特に限定されないが、ビニル基、アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、ビニルフェニル基、マレイミド基等が挙げられ、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、ビニルフェニル基、又は、マレイミド基が好ましく、(メタ)アクリロキシ基がより好ましい。
 架橋剤Uがラジカル重合性基を2以上有する場合、それぞれのラジカル重合性基の構造は同一であってもよいし、異なっていてもよい。
 架橋剤Uにおけるラジカル重合性基の数は、1つのみであってもよいし、2以上であってもよく、1~10が好ましく、1~6が更に好ましく、1~4が特に好ましい。
 架橋剤Uにおけるラジカル重合性基価(ラジカル重合性基1モル当たりの化合物の質量)は、150~400g/molであることが好ましい。
 上記ラジカル重合性基価の下限は、200g/mol以上であることがより好ましく、210g/mol以上であることが更に好ましく、220g/mol以上であることが一層好ましく、230g/mol以上であることがより一層好ましく、240g/mol以上であることが特に好ましく、250g/mol以上であることが最も好ましい。
 上記ラジカル重合性基価の上限は、350g/mol以下であることがより好ましく、330g/mol以下であることが更に好ましく、300g/mol以下であることが特に好ましい。
 上記ラジカル重合性基価が上記下限以上であることで、硬化物の耐薬品性が良好性となる傾向にあり、上記上限値以下であることで現像性が良好となる傾向が有る。
 中でも、架橋剤Uの重合性基価は、210~400g/molであることが好ましく、220~400g/molであることがより好ましい。
The radically polymerizable group in the cross-linking agent U is not particularly limited, but includes a vinyl group, an allyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a (meth)acryloxy group, a (meth)acrylamide group, a vinylphenyl group, a maleimide group, and the like. A (meth)acryloxy group, a (meth)acrylamide group, a vinylphenyl group, or a maleimide group is preferable, and a (meth)acryloxy group is more preferable.
When the cross-linking agent U has two or more radically polymerizable groups, the structure of each radically polymerizable group may be the same or different.
The number of radically polymerizable groups in the cross-linking agent U may be only one, or may be two or more, preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, and particularly preferably 1 to 4.
The radically polymerizable group value (mass of compound per mol of radically polymerizable group) in the cross-linking agent U is preferably 150 to 400 g/mol.
The lower limit of the radical polymerizable group value is more preferably 200 g/mol or more, still more preferably 210 g/mol or more, still more preferably 220 g/mol or more, and 230 g/mol or more. is more preferred, 240 g/mol or more is particularly preferred, and 250 g/mol or more is most preferred.
The upper limit of the radically polymerizable group value is more preferably 350 g/mol or less, still more preferably 330 g/mol or less, and particularly preferably 300 g/mol or less.
When the radical polymerizable group value is at least the lower limit, the cured product tends to have good chemical resistance, and when it is at most the upper limit, the developability tends to be good.
Among them, the polymerizable group value of the cross-linking agent U is preferably 210 to 400 g/mol, more preferably 220 to 400 g/mol.
 架橋剤Uは、例えば下記式(U-1)で表される構造であることが好ましい。

 式(U-1)中、RU1は水素原子又は1価の有機基であり、Aは-O-又は-NR-であり、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基であり、ZU1はm価の有機基であり、ZU2はn+1価の有機基であり、Xはラジカル重合性基であり、nは1以上の整数であり、mは1以上の整数である。
The cross-linking agent U preferably has a structure represented, for example, by the following formula (U-1).

In formula (U-1), R U1 is a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, A is —O— or —NR N —, R N is a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, Z U1 is an m-valent organic group, Z U2 is an n+1-valent organic group, X is a radically polymerizable group, n is an integer of 1 or more, and m is an integer of 1 or more.
 式(U-1)中、RU1は水素原子、アルキル基又は芳香族炭化水素基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
 式(U-1)中、Rは水素原子、アルキル基又は芳香族炭化水素基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
 式(U-1)中、ZU1は炭化水素基、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、-S(=O)-、-NR-、若しくは、これらが2以上結合した基が好ましく、炭化水素基、又は、炭化水素基と、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、-S(=O)-、及び、-NR-よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基とが結合した基がより好ましい。
 上記炭化水素基としては、炭素数20以下の炭化水素基が好ましく、18以下の炭化水素基がより好ましく、16以下の炭化水素基が更に好ましい。また、上記炭化水素基としては、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、又は、これらの結合により表される基などが挙げられる。Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、水素原子又は炭化水素基であることが好ましく、水素原子又はアルキル基であることがより好ましく、水素原子又はメチル基であることが更に好ましい。
 式(U-1)中、ZU2は炭化水素基、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、-S(=O)-、-NR-、若しくは、これらが2以上結合した基が好ましく、炭化水素基、又は、炭化水素基と、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、-S(=O)-、及び、-NR-よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基とが結合した基がより好ましい。
 上記炭化水素基としては、炭素数20以下の炭化水素基が好ましく、18以下の炭化水素基がより好ましく、16以下の炭化水素基が更に好ましい。また、上記炭化水素基としては、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、又は、これらの結合により表される基などが挙げられる。
 式(U-1)中、Xは特に限定されないが、ビニル基、アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、ビニルフェニル基、マレイミド基等が挙げられ、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、ビニルフェニル基、又は、マレイミド基が好ましく、(メタ)アクリロキシ基がより好ましい。
 式(U-1)中、nは1~10の整数であることが好ましく、1~4の整数であることがより好ましく、1又は2であることが更に好ましく、1であることが特に好ましい。
 式(U-1)中、mは1~10の整数であることが好ましく、1~4の整数であることがより好ましく、1又は2であることが更に好ましい。
In formula (U-1), R U1 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula (U-1), R 3 N is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula (U-1), Z U1 is a hydrocarbon group, -O-, -C(=O)-, -S-, -S(=O) 2 -, -NR N -, or these are 2 Groups in which the above are bonded are preferable, and from a hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group and -O-, -C(=O)-, -S-, -S(=O) 2 -, and -NR N - A group to which at least one group selected from the group is bonded is more preferred.
As the hydrocarbon group, a hydrocarbon group having 20 or less carbon atoms is preferable, a hydrocarbon group having 18 or less carbon atoms is more preferable, and a hydrocarbon group having 16 or less carbon atoms is even more preferable. Moreover, examples of the hydrocarbon group include a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group represented by a combination thereof. RN represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, even more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
In formula (U-1), Z U2 is a hydrocarbon group, -O-, -C(=O)-, -S-, -S(=O) 2 -, -NR N -, or these are 2 Groups in which the above are bonded are preferable, and from a hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group and -O-, -C(=O)-, -S-, -S(=O) 2 -, and -NR N - A group to which at least one group selected from the group is bonded is more preferred.
As the hydrocarbon group, a hydrocarbon group having 20 or less carbon atoms is preferable, a hydrocarbon group having 18 or less carbon atoms is more preferable, and a hydrocarbon group having 16 or less carbon atoms is even more preferable. Moreover, examples of the hydrocarbon group include a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group represented by a combination thereof.
In formula (U-1), X is not particularly limited, but includes vinyl group, allyl group, (meth)acryloyl group, (meth)acryloxy group, (meth)acrylamide group, vinylphenyl group, maleimide group, etc. A (meth)acryloxy group, a (meth)acrylamide group, a vinylphenyl group, or a maleimide group is preferable, and a (meth)acryloxy group is more preferable.
In formula (U-1), n is preferably an integer of 1 to 10, more preferably an integer of 1 to 4, even more preferably 1 or 2, particularly preferably 1 .
In formula (U-1), m is preferably an integer of 1 to 10, more preferably an integer of 1 to 4, even more preferably 1 or 2.
 架橋剤Uは、ヒドロキシ基、アルキレンオキシ基、アミド基及びシアノ基の少なくとも1つを有することも好ましい。
 得られる硬化膜の耐薬品性の観点から、ヒドロキシ基は、アルコール性ヒドロキシ基であってもフェノール性ヒドロキシ基であってもよいが、アルコール性ヒドロキシ基であることが好ましい。
 得られる硬化膜の耐薬品性の観点から、アルキレンオキシ基としては、炭素数2~20のアルキレンオキシ基が好ましく、炭素数2~10のアルキレンオキシ基がより好ましく、炭素数2~4のアルキレンオキシ基がより好ましく、エチレン基又はプロピレン基が更に好ましく、エチレン基が特に好ましい。
 アルキレンオキシ基は、ポリアルキレンオキシ基として架橋剤Uに含まれてもよい。この場合のアルキレンオキシ基の繰返し数は、2~10であることが好ましく、2~6であることがより好ましい。
 アミド基は、-C(=O)-NR-により表される結合をいう。Rは上述の通りである。架橋剤Uがアミド基を有する場合、架橋剤Uは、例えば、R-C(=O)-NR-*で表される基、又は、*-C(=O)-NR-Rで表される基として含むことができる。Rは水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、水素原子又は炭化水素基であることが好ましく、水素原子、アルキル基又は芳香族炭化水素基であることがより好ましい。
 架橋剤Uは、ヒドロキシ基、アルキレンオキシ基(ただし、ポリアルキレンオキシ基を構成する場合は、ポリアルキレンオキシ基)、アミド基及びシアノ基よりなる群から選ばれた構造を、分子内に2以上有してもよいが、分子内に1つのみ有する態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。
 上記ヒドロキシ基、アルキレンオキシ基、アミド基及びシアノ基は架橋剤Uのいずれの位置に存在してもよいが、耐薬品性の観点からは、架橋剤Uは、上記ヒドロキシ基、アルキレンオキシ基、アミド基及びシアノ基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1つと、架橋剤Uに含まれる少なくとも1つのラジカル重合性基とが、ウレア結合又はウレタン結合を含む連結基(以下、「連結基L2-1」ともいう。)により連結されていることも、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。
 特に、架橋剤Uがラジカル重合性基を1つのみ含む場合、架橋剤Uに含まれるラジカル重合性基と、ヒドロキシ基、アルキレンオキシ基、アミド基及びシアノ基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1つとが、ウレア結合又はウレタン結合を含む連結基(以下、「連結基L2-2」ともいう。)により連結されていることが好ましい。
 架橋剤Uがアルキレンオキシ基(ただし、ポリアルキレンオキシ基を構成する場合は、ポリアルキレンオキシ基)を含み、かつ、上記連結基L2-1又は上記連結基L2-2を有する場合、アルキレンオキシ基(ただし、ポリアルキレンオキシ基を構成する場合は、ポリアルキレンオキシ基)の連結基L2-1又は連結基L2-2とは反対の側に結合する構造は、特に限定されないが、炭化水素基、ラジカル重合性基又はこれらの組み合わせにより表される基が好ましい。上記炭化水素基としては、炭素数20以下の炭化水素基が好ましく、18以下の炭化水素基がより好ましく、16以下の炭化水素基が更に好ましい。また、上記炭化水素基としては、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、又は、これらの結合により表される基などが挙げられる。また、ラジカル重合性基の好ましい態様は上述の架橋剤Uにおけるラジカル重合性基の好ましい態様と同様である。
 架橋剤Uがアミド基を含み、かつ、上記連結基L2-1又は上記連結基L2-2を有する場合、アミド基の連結基L2-1又は連結基L2-2とは反対の側に結合する構造は、特に限定されないが、炭化水素基、ラジカル重合性基又はこれらの組み合わせにより表される基が好ましい。上記炭化水素基としては、炭素数20以下の炭化水素基が好ましく、18以下の炭化水素基がより好ましく、16以下の炭化水素基が更に好ましい。また、上記炭化水素基としては、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、又は、これらの結合により表される基などが挙げられる。また、ラジカル重合性基の好ましい態様は上述の架橋剤Uにおけるラジカル重合性基の好ましい態様と同様である。また、上記態様において、アミド基の炭素原子側が連結基L2-1又は連結基L2-2と結合してもよいし、アミド基の窒素原子側が連結基L2-1又は連結基L2-2と結合してもよい。
 これらの中でも、基材との密着性、耐薬品性、及び、Cuボイド抑制の観点からは、架橋剤Uはヒドロキシ基を有することが好ましい。
The crosslinker U also preferably has at least one of a hydroxy group, an alkyleneoxy group, an amide group and a cyano group.
From the viewpoint of the chemical resistance of the resulting cured film, the hydroxy group may be either an alcoholic hydroxy group or a phenolic hydroxy group, but an alcoholic hydroxy group is preferred.
From the viewpoint of chemical resistance of the resulting cured film, the alkyleneoxy group is preferably an alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and an alkyleneoxy group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms. An oxy group is more preferred, an ethylene group or a propylene group is even more preferred, and an ethylene group is particularly preferred.
The alkyleneoxy group may be included in the crosslinker U as a polyalkyleneoxy group. In this case, the repeating number of the alkyleneoxy group is preferably 2-10, more preferably 2-6.
An amido group refers to a bond represented by -C(=O)-NR N -. RN is as described above. When the cross-linking agent U has an amide group, the cross-linking agent U is, for example, a group represented by R—C(=O)—NR N —*, or *—C(=O)—NR N —R can be included as a group represented. R represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
The cross-linking agent U has two or more structures selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy group, an alkyleneoxy group (however, when constituting a polyalkyleneoxy group, a polyalkyleneoxy group), an amide group and a cyano group. Although it may have it, the aspect which has only one in a molecule is also one of the preferable aspects of this invention.
The hydroxy group, alkyleneoxy group, amide group and cyano group may be present at any position of the cross-linking agent U, but from the viewpoint of chemical resistance, the cross-linking agent U should be At least one selected from the group consisting of an amide group and a cyano group and at least one radically polymerizable group contained in the cross-linking agent U are a linking group containing a urea bond or a urethane bond (hereinafter referred to as "linking group L2-1 Also referred to as ".") is also one of the preferred aspects of the present invention.
In particular, when the cross-linking agent U contains only one radically polymerizable group, at least one selected from the group consisting of the radically polymerizable group contained in the cross-linking agent U and a hydroxy group, an alkyleneoxy group, an amide group and a cyano group It is preferable that the two are linked by a linking group containing a urea bond or a urethane bond (hereinafter also referred to as "linking group L2-2").
If the cross-linking agent U contains an alkyleneoxy group (however, a polyalkyleneoxy group when constituting a polyalkyleneoxy group) and has the linking group L2-1 or the linking group L2-2, the alkyleneoxy group (However, when constituting a polyalkyleneoxy group, the polyalkyleneoxy group) The structure bonded to the side opposite to the connecting group L2-1 or the connecting group L2-2 is not particularly limited, but a hydrocarbon group, Groups represented by radically polymerizable groups or combinations thereof are preferred. As the hydrocarbon group, a hydrocarbon group having 20 or less carbon atoms is preferable, a hydrocarbon group having 18 or less carbon atoms is more preferable, and a hydrocarbon group having 16 or less carbon atoms is even more preferable. Moreover, examples of the hydrocarbon group include a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group represented by a combination thereof. In addition, preferred aspects of the radically polymerizable group are the same as the preferred aspects of the radically polymerizable group in the cross-linking agent U described above.
When the cross-linking agent U contains an amide group and has the linking group L2-1 or the linking group L2-2, the amide group binds to the side opposite to the linking group L2-1 or the linking group L2-2. Although the structure is not particularly limited, a group represented by a hydrocarbon group, a radically polymerizable group, or a combination thereof is preferred. As the hydrocarbon group, a hydrocarbon group having 20 or less carbon atoms is preferable, a hydrocarbon group having 18 or less carbon atoms is more preferable, and a hydrocarbon group having 16 or less carbon atoms is even more preferable. Moreover, examples of the hydrocarbon group include a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group represented by a combination thereof. In addition, preferred aspects of the radically polymerizable group are the same as the preferred aspects of the radically polymerizable group in the cross-linking agent U described above. In the above embodiment, the carbon atom side of the amide group may be bonded to the linking group L2-1 or the linking group L2-2, or the nitrogen atom side of the amide group may be linked to the linking group L2-1 or the linking group L2-2. You may
Among these, the cross-linking agent U preferably has a hydroxy group from the viewpoint of adhesion to the substrate, chemical resistance, and suppression of Cu voids.
 架橋剤Uは、特定樹脂との相溶性等の観点からは、芳香族基を含むことが好ましい。
 上記芳香族基は、架橋剤Uに含まれるウレア結合又はウレタン結合と直接結合することが好ましい。架橋剤Uがウレア結合又はウレタン結合を2以上含む場合、ウレア結合又はウレタン結合のうち1つと、芳香族基とが直接結合することが好ましい。
 芳香族基は、芳香族炭化水素基であっても、芳香族ヘテロ環基であってもよく、これらが縮合環を形成した構造でもよいが、芳香族炭化水素基であることが好ましい。
 上記芳香族炭化水素基としては、炭素数6~30の芳香族炭化水素基が好ましく、炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基がより好ましく、ベンゼン環構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた基が更に好ましい。
 上記芳香族ヘテロ環基としては、5員環又は6員環の芳香族ヘテロ環基が好ましい。このような芳香族ヘテロ環基における芳香族ヘテロ環としては、ピロール、イミダゾール、トリアゾール、テトラゾール、ピラゾール、フラン、チオフェン、オキサゾール、イソオキサゾール、チアゾール、ピリジン、ピラジン、ピリミジン、ピリダジン、トリアジン等が挙げられる。これらの環は、例えば、インドール、ベンゾイミダゾールのように更に他の環と縮合していてもよい。
 また、上記芳香族ヘテロ環基に含まれるヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子又は硫黄原子が好ましい。
 上記芳香族基は、例えば、2以上のラジカル重合性基を連結し、ウレア結合又はウレタン結合を含む連結基、又は、上述のヒドロキシ基、アルキレンオキシ基、アミド基及びシアノ基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1つと、架橋剤Uに含まれる少なくとも1つのラジカル重合性基とを連結する連結基に含まれることが好ましい。
The cross-linking agent U preferably contains an aromatic group from the viewpoint of compatibility with the specific resin.
The above aromatic group preferably bonds directly to the urea bond or urethane bond contained in the cross-linking agent U. When the cross-linking agent U contains two or more urea bonds or urethane bonds, it is preferable that one of the urea bonds or urethane bonds is directly bonded to the aromatic group.
The aromatic group may be an aromatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, or a condensed ring structure, but is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
As the aromatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms is preferable, and an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable, and two or more hydrogen atoms are removed from the benzene ring structure. groups are more preferred.
As the aromatic heterocyclic group, a 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocyclic group is preferable. Aromatic heterocycles in such aromatic heterocyclic groups include pyrrole, imidazole, triazole, tetrazole, pyrazole, furan, thiophene, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, triazine and the like. . These rings may be condensed with other rings such as indole and benzimidazole.
Moreover, the heteroatom contained in the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
The aromatic group, for example, connects two or more radically polymerizable groups and is selected from the group consisting of a linking group containing a urea bond or a urethane bond, or the above-described hydroxy group, alkyleneoxy group, amide group and cyano group. and at least one radically polymerizable group contained in the cross-linking agent U.
 架橋剤Uにおけるウレア結合又はウレタン結合とラジカル重合性基との間の原子数(連結鎖長)は、特に限定されないが、30以下であることが好ましく、2~20であることがより好ましく、2~10であることが更に好ましい。
 架橋剤Uがウレア結合又はウレタン結合を計2以上含む場合、ラジカル重合性基を2以上含む場合、又は、ウレア結合若しくはウレタン結合を2以上含み、かつ、ラジカル重合性基を2以上含む場合、ウレア結合又はウレタン結合とラジカル重合性基の間の原子数(連結鎖長)のうち、最小のものが上記範囲内であればよい。
 本明細書において、「ウレア結合又はウレタン結合と重合性基との間の原子数(連結鎖長)」とは、連結対象の2つの原子または原子群の間を結ぶ経路上の原子鎖のうち、これらの連結対象を最短(最小原子数)で結ぶものをいう。例えば、下記式で表される構造において、ウレア結合とラジカル重合性基(メタクリロイルオキシ基)との間の原子数(連結鎖長)は2である。
The number of atoms (linked chain length) between the urea bond or urethane bond and the radically polymerizable group in the cross-linking agent U is not particularly limited, but is preferably 30 or less, more preferably 2 to 20, It is more preferably 2-10.
When the cross-linking agent U contains a total of two or more urea bonds or urethane bonds, when it contains two or more radically polymerizable groups, or when it contains two or more urea bonds or urethane bonds and two or more radically polymerizable groups, The minimum number of atoms (linkage chain length) between the urea bond or urethane bond and the radically polymerizable group may be within the above range.
As used herein, the term “the number of atoms (linked chain length) between the urea bond or urethane bond and the polymerizable group” refers to the number of atoms on the route connecting the two atoms or groups of atoms to be linked. , the shortest (minimum number of atoms) connecting these concatenated objects. For example, in the structure represented by the following formula, the number of atoms (linkage chain length) between the urea bond and the radical polymerizable group (methacryloyloxy group) is 2.
〔対称軸〕
 架橋剤Uは対称軸を有しない構造の化合物であることも好ましい。
 架橋剤Uが対称軸を有しないとは、化合物全体を回転させることにより元の分子と同一の分子を生じる軸を有さず、左右非対称の化合物である事をいう。また、架橋剤Uの構造式を紙面上に表記した場合において、架橋剤Uが対称軸を有しないとは、架橋剤Uの構造式を対称軸を有する形に表記することができないことをいう。
 架橋剤Uが対称軸を有しないことにより、組成物膜中では架橋剤U同士の凝集が抑制されると考えられる。
[Axis of symmetry]
It is also preferable that the cross-linking agent U is a compound having a structure that does not have an axis of symmetry.
The fact that the cross-linking agent U does not have an axis of symmetry means that it is a bilaterally asymmetric compound that does not have an axis that produces the same molecule as the original molecule by rotating the entire compound. Further, when the structural formula of the cross-linking agent U is written on the paper surface, the expression that the cross-linking agent U does not have an axis of symmetry means that the structural formula of the cross-linking agent U cannot be written in a form having an axis of symmetry. .
Since the cross-linking agent U does not have an axis of symmetry, aggregation of the cross-linking agents U is suppressed in the composition film.
〔分子量〕
 架橋剤Uの分子量は、100~2,000であることが好ましく、150~1500であることが好ましく、200~900であることがより好ましい。
[Molecular weight]
The molecular weight of the cross-linking agent U is preferably 100-2,000, preferably 150-1500, more preferably 200-900.
 架橋剤Uの製造方法は特に限定されないが、例えば、ラジカル重合性化合物とイソシアネート基とを有する化合物と、ヒドロキシ基又はアミノ基の少なくとも一方を有する化合物とを反応することにより得ることができる。 The method for producing the cross-linking agent U is not particularly limited, but for example, it can be obtained by reacting a compound having a radically polymerizable compound and an isocyanate group with a compound having at least one of a hydroxy group and an amino group.
 架橋剤Uの具体例を以下に示すが、架橋剤Uはこれに限定されるものではない。
 
 
Specific examples of the cross-linking agent U are shown below, but the cross-linking agent U is not limited thereto.


 樹脂組成物は、パターンの解像性と膜の伸縮性の観点から、2官能のメタアクリレート又はアクリレートを用いることが好ましい。
 具体的な化合物としては、トリエチレングリコールジアクリレート、トリエチレングリコールジメタクリレート、テトラエチレングリコールジメタクリレート、テトラエチレングリコールジアクリレート、PEG(ポリエチレングリコール)200ジアクリレート、PEG200ジメタクリレート、PEG600ジアクリレート、PEG600ジメタクリレート、ポリテトラエチレングリコールジアクリレート、ポリテトラエチレングリコールジメタクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジアクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジメタクリレート、3-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジオールジアクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート、1,6ヘキサンジオールジメタクリレート、ジメチロール-トリシクロデカンジアクリレート、ジメチロール-トリシクロデカンジメタクリレート、ビスフェノールAのEO(エチレンオキシド)付加物ジアクリレート、ビスフェノールAのEO付加物ジメタクリレート、ビスフェノールAのPO(プロピレンオキシド)付加物ジアクリレート、ビスフェノールAのPO付加物ジメタクリレート、2-ヒドロキシー3-アクリロイロキシプロピルメタクリレート、イソシアヌル酸EO変性ジアクリレート、イソシアヌル酸変性ジメタクリレート、その他ウレタン結合を有する2官能アクリレート、ウレタン結合を有する2官能メタクリレートを使用することができる。これらは必要に応じ、2種以上を混合し使用することができる。
 なお、例えばPEG200ジアクリレートとは、ポリエチレングリコールジアクリレートであって、ポリエチレングリコール鎖の式量が200程度のものをいう。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、パターン(硬化物)の弾性率制御に伴う反り抑制の観点から、ラジカル架橋剤として、単官能ラジカル架橋剤を好ましく用いることができる。単官能ラジカル架橋剤としては、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ブトキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、カルビトール(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、N-メチロール(メタ)アクリルアミド、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート等の(メタ)アクリル酸誘導体、N-ビニルピロリドン、N-ビニルカプロラクタム等のN-ビニル化合物類、アリルグリシジルエーテル等が好ましく用いられる。単官能ラジカル架橋剤としては、露光前の揮発を抑制するため、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物も好ましい。
 その他、2官能以上のラジカル架橋剤としては、ジアリルフタレート、トリアリルトリメリテート等のアリル化合物類が挙げられる。
From the viewpoint of pattern resolution and film stretchability, the resin composition preferably uses a bifunctional methacrylate or acrylate.
Specific compounds include triethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, tetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, PEG (polyethylene glycol) 200 diacrylate, PEG200 dimethacrylate, PEG600 diacrylate, and PEG600 diacrylate. methacrylate, polytetraethylene glycol diacrylate, polytetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol dimethacrylate, 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediol diacrylate, 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate, 1,6 hexanediol dimethacrylate, dimethylol-tricyclodecane diacrylate, dimethylol-tricyclodecane dimethacrylate, bisphenol A EO (ethylene oxide) adduct diacrylate, bisphenol A EO adduct dimethacrylate, bisphenol A PO ( Propylene oxide) adduct diacrylate, PO adduct dimethacrylate of bisphenol A, 2-hydroxy-3-acryloyloxypropyl methacrylate, isocyanuric acid EO-modified diacrylate, isocyanuric acid-modified dimethacrylate, other bifunctional acrylates having urethane bonds, Bifunctional methacrylates with urethane bonds can be used. These can be used in combination of two or more as needed.
For example, PEG200 diacrylate is a polyethylene glycol diacrylate having a polyethylene glycol chain formula weight of about 200.
In the resin composition of the present invention, a monofunctional radical cross-linking agent can be preferably used as the radical cross-linking agent from the viewpoint of suppressing warpage associated with the elastic modulus control of the pattern (cured product). Monofunctional radical cross-linking agents include n-butyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, butoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, carbitol (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, ) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, N-methylol (meth) acrylamide, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, etc. (meth) Acrylic acid derivatives, N-vinyl compounds such as N-vinylpyrrolidone and N-vinylcaprolactam, and allyl glycidyl ether are preferably used. As the monofunctional radical cross-linking agent, a compound having a boiling point of 100° C. or higher under normal pressure is also preferable in order to suppress volatilization before exposure.
Other di- or higher functional radical cross-linking agents include allyl compounds such as diallyl phthalate and triallyl trimellitate.
 ラジカル架橋剤を含有する場合、その含有量は、本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0質量%超60質量%以下であることが好ましい。下限は5質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、50質量%以下であることがより好ましく、30質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 When a radical cross-linking agent is contained, its content is preferably more than 0% by mass and 60% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. More preferably, the lower limit is 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 50% by mass or less, and even more preferably 30% by mass or less.
 ラジカル架橋剤は1種を単独で用いてもよいが、2種以上を混合して用いてもよい。2種以上を併用する場合にはその合計量が上記の範囲となることが好ましい。 A single radical cross-linking agent may be used alone, or a mixture of two or more may be used. When two or more are used in combination, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
〔他の架橋剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、上述したラジカル架橋剤とは異なる、他の架橋剤を含むことも好ましい。
 本発明において、他の架橋剤とは、上述したラジカル架橋剤以外の架橋剤をいい、上述の光酸発生剤、又は、光塩基発生剤の感光により、組成物中の他の化合物又はその反応生成物との間で共有結合を形成する反応が促進される基を分子内に複数個有する化合物であることが好ましく、組成物中の他の化合物又はその反応生成物との間で共有結合を形成する反応が酸又は塩基の作用によって促進される基を分子内に複数個有する化合物が好ましい。
 上記酸又は塩基は、露光工程において、光酸発生剤又は光塩基発生剤から発生する酸又は塩基であることが好ましい。
 他の架橋剤としては、アシルオキシメチル基、メチロール基、エチロール基及びアルコキシメチル基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有する化合物が好ましく、アシルオキシメチル基、メチロール基、エチロール基及びアルコキシメチル基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基が窒素原子に直接結合した構造を有する化合物がより好ましい。
 他の架橋剤としては、例えば、メラミン、グリコールウリル、尿素、アルキレン尿素、ベンゾグアナミンなどのアミノ基含有化合物にホルムアルデヒド又はホルムアルデヒドとアルコールを反応させ、上記アミノ基の水素原子をアシルオキシメチル基、メチロール基、エチロール基又はアルコキシメチル基で置換した構造を有する化合物が挙げられる。これらの化合物の製造方法は特に限定されず、上記方法により製造された化合物と同様の構造を有する化合物であればよい。また、これらの化合物のメチロール基同士が自己縮合してなるオリゴマーであってもよい。
 上記のアミノ基含有化合物として、メラミンを用いた架橋剤をメラミン系架橋剤、グリコールウリル、尿素又はアルキレン尿素を用いた架橋剤を尿素系架橋剤、アルキレン尿素を用いた架橋剤をアルキレン尿素系架橋剤、ベンゾグアナミンを用いた架橋剤をベンゾグアナミン系架橋剤という。
 これらの中でも、本発明の樹脂組成物は、尿素系架橋剤及びメラミン系架橋剤よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましく、後述するグリコールウリル系架橋剤及びメラミン系架橋剤よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
[Other cross-linking agents]
It is also preferable that the resin composition of the present invention contains another cross-linking agent different from the radical cross-linking agent described above.
In the present invention, the other cross-linking agent refers to a cross-linking agent other than the above-described radical cross-linking agent, and the above-described photoacid generator or photobase generator reacts with other compounds in the composition or reacts with them. It is preferable that the compound has a plurality of groups in the molecule that promote the reaction forming covalent bonds with the product, and covalent bonds are formed with other compounds or reaction products thereof in the composition. Compounds having a plurality of groups in the molecule, the reaction of which is promoted by the action of an acid or base, are preferred.
The acid or base is preferably an acid or base generated from a photoacid generator or a photobase generator in the exposure step.
As other cross-linking agents, compounds having at least one group selected from the group consisting of an acyloxymethyl group, a methylol group, an ethylol group and an alkoxymethyl group are preferred. A compound having a structure in which at least one group selected from the group consisting of groups is directly bonded to a nitrogen atom is more preferred.
Other cross-linking agents include, for example, amino group-containing compounds such as melamine, glycoluril, urea, alkylene urea, and benzoguanamine, which are reacted with formaldehyde or formaldehyde and alcohol, and the hydrogen atoms of the amino groups are converted into acyloxymethyl groups, methylol groups, A compound having a structure substituted with an ethylol group or an alkoxymethyl group can be mentioned. The method for producing these compounds is not particularly limited as long as they have the same structure as the compounds produced by the above methods. Oligomers formed by self-condensation of methylol groups of these compounds may also be used.
As the amino group-containing compound, a melamine-based crosslinking agent is a melamine-based crosslinking agent, a glycoluril, urea or alkyleneurea-based crosslinking agent is a urea-based crosslinking agent, and an alkyleneurea-based crosslinking agent is an alkyleneurea-based crosslinking agent. A cross-linking agent using benzoguanamine is called a benzoguanamine-based cross-linking agent.
Among these, the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of urea-based cross-linking agents and melamine-based cross-linking agents. More preferably, it contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of agents.
 本発明におけるアルコキシメチル基及びアシルオキシメチル基の少なくとも1つを含有する化合物としては、アルコキシメチル基又はアシルオキシメチル基が、直接芳香族基や下記ウレア構造の窒素原子上に、又は、トリアジン上に置換した化合物を構造例として挙げることができる。
 上記化合物が有するアルコキシメチル基又はアシルオキシメチル基は、炭素数2~5が好ましく、炭素数2又は3が好ましく、炭素数2がより好ましい。
 上記化合物が有するアルコキシメチル基及びアシルオキシメチル基の総数は1~10が好ましく、より好ましくは2~8、特に好ましくは3~6である。
 上記化合物の分子量は好ましくは1500以下であり、180~1200が好ましい。
As a compound containing at least one of an alkoxymethyl group and an acyloxymethyl group in the present invention, an alkoxymethyl group or an acyloxymethyl group is directly substituted on the nitrogen atom of an aromatic group or the following urea structure, or on a triazine. can be given as structural examples.
The alkoxymethyl group or acyloxymethyl group of the above compound preferably has 2 to 5 carbon atoms, preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and more preferably 2 carbon atoms.
The total number of alkoxymethyl groups and acyloxymethyl groups in the above compound is preferably 1-10, more preferably 2-8, and particularly preferably 3-6.
The molecular weight of the compound is preferably 1500 or less, preferably 180-1200.
 R100は、アルキル基又はアシル基を表す。
 R101及びR102は、それぞれ独立に、一価の有機基を表し、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
R 100 represents an alkyl group or an acyl group.
R 101 and R 102 each independently represent a monovalent organic group and may combine with each other to form a ring.
 アルコキシメチル基又はアシルオキシメチル基が直接芳香族基に置換した化合物としては、例えば下記一般式の様な化合物を挙げることができる。 Examples of compounds in which an alkoxymethyl group or an acyloxymethyl group is directly substituted by an aromatic group include compounds represented by the following general formula.
 式中、Xは単結合又は2価の有機基を示し、個々のR104はそれぞれ独立にアルキル基又はアシル基を示し、R103は、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、又は、酸の作用により分解し、アルカリ可溶性基を生じる基(例えば、酸の作用により脱離する基、-C(RCOORで表される基(Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、Rは酸の作用により脱離する基を表す。))を示す。
 R105は各々独立にアルキル基又はアルケニル基を示し、a、b及びcは各々独立に1~3であり、dは0~4であり、eは0~3であり、fは0~3であり、a+dは5以下であり、b+eは4以下であり、c+fは4以下である。
 酸の作用により分解し、アルカリ可溶性基を生じる基、酸の作用により脱離する基、-C(RCOORで表される基におけるRについては、例えば、-C(R36)(R37)(R38)、-C(R36)(R37)(OR39)、-C(R01)(R02)(OR39)等を挙げることができる。
 式中、R36~R39は、各々独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基又はアルケニル基を表す。R36とR37とは、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 上記アルキル基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~5のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 上記アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。
 上記シクロアルキル基としては、炭素数3~12のシクロアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数3~8のシクロアルキル基がより好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキル基は単環構造であってもよいし、縮合環等の多環構造であってもよい。
 上記アリール基は炭素数6~30の芳香族炭化水素基であることが好ましく、フェニル基であることがより好ましい。
 上記アラルキル基としては、炭素数7~20のアラルキル基が好ましく、炭素数7~16のアラルキル基がより好ましい。
 上記アラルキル基はアルキル基により置換されたアリール基を意図しており、これらのアルキル基及びアリール基の好ましい態様は、上述のアルキル基及びアリール基の好ましい態様と同様である。
 上記アルケニル基は炭素数3~20のアルケニル基が好ましく、炭素数3~16のアルケニル基がより好ましい。
 また、これらの基は本発明の効果が得られる範囲内で、公知の置換基を更に有していてもよい。
In the formula, X represents a single bond or a divalent organic group, each R 104 independently represents an alkyl group or an acyl group, R 103 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group , or a group that decomposes under the action of an acid to produce an alkali-soluble group (e.g., a group that leaves under the action of an acid, a group represented by —C(R 4 ) 2 COOR 5 (R 4 is independently It represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 5 represents a group that leaves under the action of an acid.)).
R 105 each independently represents an alkyl group or alkenyl group, a, b and c are each independently 1 to 3, d is 0 to 4, e is 0 to 3, f is 0 to 3 , a+d is 5 or less, b+e is 4 or less, and c+f is 4 or less.
For R 5 in the group represented by —C(R 4 ) 2 COOR 5 , a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid to produce an alkali-soluble group, a group that is eliminated by the action of an acid, and —C(R 36 )(R 37 )(R 38 ), —C(R 36 )(R 37 )(OR 39 ), —C(R 01 )(R 02 )(OR 39 ), and the like.
In the formula, R 36 to R 39 each independently represent an alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, aralkyl group or alkenyl group. R 36 and R 37 may combine with each other to form a ring.
As the alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched.
As the cycloalkyl group, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms is preferable, and a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms is more preferable.
The cycloalkyl group may have a monocyclic structure or a polycyclic structure such as a condensed ring.
The aryl group is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably a phenyl group.
As the aralkyl group, an aralkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and an aralkyl group having 7 to 16 carbon atoms is more preferable.
The aralkyl group is intended to be an aryl group substituted with an alkyl group, and preferred embodiments of these alkyl and aryl groups are the same as the preferred embodiments of the alkyl and aryl groups described above.
The alkenyl group is preferably an alkenyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkenyl group having 3 to 16 carbon atoms.
Moreover, these groups may further have a known substituent within the range in which the effects of the present invention can be obtained.
 R01及びR02は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基又はアルケニル基を表す。 R 01 and R 02 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group or an alkenyl group.
 酸の作用により分解し、アルカリ可溶性基を生じる基、または酸の作用により脱離する基としては好ましくは、第3級アルキルエステル基、アセタール基、クミルエステル基、エノールエステル基等である。更に好ましくは、第3級アルキルエステル基、アセタール基である。 The group that is decomposed by the action of an acid to form an alkali-soluble group or the group that is eliminated by the action of an acid is preferably a tertiary alkyl ester group, an acetal group, a cumyl ester group, an enol ester group, or the like. More preferred are tertiary alkyl ester groups and acetal groups.
 また、アシルオキシメチル基、メチロール基、エチロール基及びアルコキシメチル基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有する化合物としては、ウレア結合及びウレタン結合よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも一方の基を有する化合物も好ましい。上記化合物の好ましい態様は、重合性基がラジカル重合性基ではなくアシルオキシメチル基、メチロール基、エチロール基及びアルコキシメチル基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基である以外は、上述の架橋剤Uの好ましい態様と同様である。 Further, the compound having at least one group selected from the group consisting of acyloxymethyl group, methylol group, ethylol group and alkoxymethyl group includes at least one group selected from the group consisting of urea bond and urethane bond. Also preferred are compounds having A preferred embodiment of the above compound is the above-described crosslinking except that the polymerizable group is not a radically polymerizable group but at least one group selected from the group consisting of an acyloxymethyl group, a methylol group, an ethylol group and an alkoxymethyl group. It is the same as the preferred embodiment of agent U.
 アシルオキシメチル基、メチロール基及びエチロール基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有する化合物としては具体的に以下の構造を挙げることができる。アシルオキシメチル基を有する化合物は下記化合物のアルコキシメチル基をアシルオキシメチル基に変更した化合物を挙げることができる。アルコキシメチル基又はアシルオキシメチルを分子内に有する化合物としては以下の様な化合物を挙げることができるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of compounds having at least one group selected from the group consisting of an acyloxymethyl group, a methylol group and an ethylol group include the following structures. Examples of the compound having an acyloxymethyl group include compounds obtained by changing the alkoxymethyl group of the following compounds to an acyloxymethyl group. Compounds having an alkoxymethyl group or acyloxymethyl in the molecule include, but are not limited to, the following compounds.
 アルコキシメチル基及びアシルオキシメチル基の少なくとも1つを含有する化合物は、市販のものを用いても、公知の方法により合成したものを用いてもよい。
 耐熱性の観点で、アルコキシメチル基又はアシルオキシメチル基が、直接芳香環やトリアジン環上に置換した化合物が好ましい。
As the compound containing at least one of an alkoxymethyl group and an acyloxymethyl group, a commercially available one or a compound synthesized by a known method may be used.
From the viewpoint of heat resistance, compounds in which an alkoxymethyl group or acyloxymethyl group is directly substituted on an aromatic ring or a triazine ring are preferred.
 メラミン系架橋剤の具体例としては、ヘキサメトキシメチルメラミン、ヘキサエトキシメチルメラミン、ヘキサプロポキシメチルメラミン、ヘキサブトキシブチルメラミンなどが挙げられる。 Specific examples of melamine-based cross-linking agents include hexamethoxymethylmelamine, hexaethoxymethylmelamine, hexapropoxymethylmelamine, and hexabutoxybutylmelamine.
 尿素系架橋剤の具体例としては、例えば、モノヒドロキシメチル化グリコールウリル、ジヒドロキシメチル化グリコールウリル、トリヒドロキシメチル化グリコールウリル、テトラヒドロキシメチル化グリコールウリル、モノメトキシメチル化グリコールウリル、ジメトキシメチル化グリコールウリル、トリメトキシメチル化グリコールウリル、テトラメトキシメチル化グリコールウリル、モノエトキシメチル化グリコールウリル、ジエトキシメチル化グリコールウリル、トリエトキシメチル化グリコールウリル、テトラエトキシメチル化グリコールウリル、モノプロポキシメチル化グリコールウリル、ジプロポキシメチル化グリコールウリル、トリプロポキシメチル化グリコールウリル、テトラプロポキシメチル化グリコールウリル、モノブトキシメチル化グリコールウリル、ジブトキシメチル化グリコールウリル、トリブトキシメチル化グリコールウリル、又は、テトラブトキシメチル化グリコールウリルなどのグリコールウリル系架橋剤;
 ビスメトキシメチル尿素、ビスエトキシメチル尿素、ビスプロポキシメチル尿素、ビスブトキシメチル尿素等の尿素系架橋剤、
 モノヒドロキシメチル化エチレン尿素又はジヒドロキシメチル化エチレン尿素、モノメトキシメチル化エチレン尿素、ジメトキシメチル化エチレン尿素、モノエトキシメチル化エチレン尿素、ジエトキシメチル化エチレン尿素、モノプロポキシメチル化エチレン尿素、ジプロポキシメチル化エチレン尿素、モノブトキシメチル化エチレン尿素、又は、ジブトキシメチル化エチレン尿素などのエチレン尿素系架橋剤、
 モノヒドロキシメチル化プロピレン尿素、ジヒドロキシメチル化プロピレン尿素、モノメトキシメチル化プロピレン尿素、ジメトキシメチル化プロピレン尿素、モノエトキシメチル化プロピレン尿素、ジエトキシメチル化プロピレン尿素、モノプロポキシメチル化プロピレン尿素、ジプロポキシメチル化プロピレン尿素、モノブトキシメチル化プロピレン尿素、又は、ジブトキシメチル化プロピレン尿素などのプロピレン尿素系架橋剤、
 1,3-ジ(メトキシメチル)4,5-ジヒドロキシ-2-イミダゾリジノン、1,3-ジ(メトキシメチル)-4,5-ジメトキシ-2-イミダゾリジノンなどが挙げられる。
Specific examples of urea-based cross-linking agents include monohydroxymethylated glycoluril, dihydroxymethylated glycoluril, trihydroxymethylated glycoluril, tetrahydroxymethylated glycoluril, monomethoxymethylated glycoluril, and dimethoxymethylated glycol. Uril, trimethoxymethylated glycoluril, tetramethoxymethylated glycoluril, monoethoxymethylated glycoluril, diethoxymethylated glycoluril, triethoxymethylated glycoluril, tetraethoxymethylated glycoluril, monopropoxymethylated glycoluril , dipropoxymethylated glycoluril, tripropoxymethylated glycoluril, tetrapropoxymethylated glycoluril, monobutoxymethylated glycoluril, dibutoxymethylated glycoluril, tributoxymethylated glycoluril, or tetrabutoxymethylated glycoluril glycoluril-based crosslinkers such as uril;
urea-based cross-linking agents such as bismethoxymethylurea, bisethoxymethylurea, bispropoxymethylurea, and bisbutoxymethylurea;
monohydroxymethylated ethyleneurea or dihydroxymethylated ethyleneurea, monomethoxymethylated ethyleneurea, dimethoxymethylated ethyleneurea, monoethoxymethylated ethyleneurea, diethoxymethylated ethyleneurea, monopropoxymethylated ethyleneurea, dipropoxymethyl ethylene urea-based cross-linking agents such as ethylene urea, monobutoxymethyl ethylene urea, or dibutoxymethyl ethylene urea;
Monohydroxymethylated propylene urea, dihydroxymethylated propylene urea, monomethoxymethylated propylene urea, dimethoxymethylated propylene urea, monoethoxymethylated propylene urea, diethoxymethylated propylene urea, monopropoxymethylated propylene urea, dipropoxymethyl propylene urea-based cross-linking agents such as propylene urea, monobutoxymethylated propylene urea, or dibutoxymethylated propylene urea;
1,3-di(methoxymethyl)4,5-dihydroxy-2-imidazolidinone, 1,3-di(methoxymethyl)-4,5-dimethoxy-2-imidazolidinone and the like.
 ベンゾグアナミン系架橋剤の具体例としては、例えばモノヒドロキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、ジヒドロキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、トリヒドロキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、テトラヒドロキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、モノメトキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、ジメトキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、トリメトキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、テトラメトキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、モノエトキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、ジエトキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、トリエトキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、テトラエトキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、モノプロポキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、ジプロポキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、トリプロポキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、テトラプロポキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、モノブトキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、ジブトキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、トリブトキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、テトラブトキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミンなどが挙げられる。 Specific examples of benzoguanamine-based cross-linking agents include monohydroxymethylated benzoguanamine, dihydroxymethylated benzoguanamine, trihydroxymethylated benzoguanamine, tetrahydroxymethylated benzoguanamine, monomethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, dimethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, and trimethoxymethylated benzoguanamine. , tetramethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, monoethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, diethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, triethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, tetraethoxymethylated benzoguanamine, monopropoxymethylated benzoguanamine, dipropoxymethylated benzoguanamine, tripropoxymethylated benzoguanamine, tetra propoxymethylated benzoguanamine, monobutoxymethylated benzoguanamine, dibutoxymethylated benzoguanamine, tributoxymethylated benzoguanamine, tetrabutoxymethylated benzoguanamine, and the like.
 その他、メチロール基及びアルコキシメチル基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有する化合物としては、芳香環(好ましくはベンゼン環)にメチロール基及びアルコキシメチル基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基が直接結合した化合物も好適に用いられる。
 このような化合物の具体例としては、ベンゼンジメタノール、ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)クレゾール、ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)ジメトキシベンゼン、ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)ジフェニルエーテル、ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)ベンゾフェノン、ヒドロキシメチル安息香酸ヒドロキシメチルフェニル、ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)ビフェニル、ジメチルビス(ヒドロキシメチル)ビフェニル、ビス(メトキシメチル)ベンゼン、ビス(メトキシメチル)クレゾール、ビス(メトキシメチル)ジメトキシベンゼン、ビス(メトキシメチル)ジフェニルエーテル、ビス(メトキシメチル)ベンゾフェノン、メトキシメチル安息香酸メトキシメチルフェニル、ビス(メトキシメチル)ビフェニル、ジメチルビス(メトキシメチル)ビフェニル、4,4’,4’’-エチリデントリス[2,6-ビス(メトキシメチル)フェノール]、5,5’-[2,2,2‐トリフルオロ‐1‐(トリフルオロメチル)エチリデン]ビス[2‐ヒドロキシ‐1,3‐ベンゼンジメタノール]、3,3’,5,5’-テトラキス(メトキシメチル)-1,1’-ビフェニル-4,4’-ジオール等が挙げられる。
In addition, the compound having at least one group selected from the group consisting of a methylol group and an alkoxymethyl group includes at least one group selected from the group consisting of a methylol group and an alkoxymethyl group on an aromatic ring (preferably a benzene ring). Compounds to which a seed group is directly attached are also preferably used.
Specific examples of such compounds include benzenedimethanol, bis(hydroxymethyl)cresol, bis(hydroxymethyl)dimethoxybenzene, bis(hydroxymethyl)diphenyl ether, bis(hydroxymethyl)benzophenone, hydroxymethylphenyl hydroxymethylbenzoate. , bis(hydroxymethyl)biphenyl, dimethylbis(hydroxymethyl)biphenyl, bis(methoxymethyl)benzene, bis(methoxymethyl)cresol, bis(methoxymethyl)dimethoxybenzene, bis(methoxymethyl)diphenyl ether, bis(methoxymethyl) Benzophenone, methoxymethylphenyl methoxymethylbenzoate, bis(methoxymethyl)biphenyl, dimethylbis(methoxymethyl)biphenyl, 4,4′,4″-ethylidene tris[2,6-bis(methoxymethyl)phenol], 5 ,5′-[2,2,2-trifluoro-1-(trifluoromethyl)ethylidene]bis[2-hydroxy-1,3-benzenedimethanol], 3,3′,5,5′-tetrakis ( methoxymethyl)-1,1'-biphenyl-4,4'-diol and the like.
 他の架橋剤としては市販品を用いてもよく、好適な市販品としては、46DMOC、46DMOEP(以上、旭有機材工業社製)、DML-PC、DML-PEP、DML-OC、DML-OEP、DML-34X、DML-PTBP、DML-PCHP、DML-OCHP、DML-PFP、DML-PSBP、DML-POP、DML-MBOC、DML-MBPC、DML-MTrisPC、DML-BisOC-Z、DML-BisOCHP-Z、DML-BPC、DMLBisOC-P、DMOM-PC、DMOM-PTBP、DMOM-MBPC、TriML-P、TriML-35XL、TML-HQ、TML-BP、TML-pp-BPF、TML-BPE、TML-BPA、TML-BPAF、TML-BPAP、TMOM-BP、TMOM-BPE、TMOM-BPA、TMOM-BPAF、TMOM-BPAP、HML-TPPHBA、HML-TPHAP、HMOM-TPPHBA、HMOM-TPHAP(以上、本州化学工業社製)、ニカラック(登録商標、以下同様)MX-290、ニカラックMX-280、ニカラックMX-270、ニカラックMX-279、ニカラックMW-100LM、ニカラックMX-750LM(以上、三和ケミカル社製)などが挙げられる。 Commercial products may be used as other cross-linking agents, and suitable commercial products include 46DMOC, 46DMOEP (manufactured by Asahi Organic Chemicals Industry Co., Ltd.), DML-PC, DML-PEP, DML-OC, and DML-OEP. , DML-34X, DML-PTBP, DML-PCHP, DML-OCHP, DML-PFP, DML-PSBP, DML-POP, DML-MBOC, DML-MBPC, DML-MTrisPC, DML-BisOC-Z, DML-BisOCHP -Z, DML-BPC, DMLBisOC-P, DMOM-PC, DMOM-PTBP, DMOM-MBPC, TriML-P, TriML-35XL, TML-HQ, TML-BP, TML-pp-BPF, TML-BPE, TML -BPA, TML-BPAF, TML-BPAP, TMOM-BP, TMOM-BPE, TMOM-BPA, TMOM-BPAF, TMOM-BPAP, HML-TPPHBA, HML-TPHAP, HMOM-TPPHBA, HMOM-TPHAP (Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Nikalac (registered trademark, hereinafter the same) MX-290, Nikalac MX-280, Nikalac MX-270, Nikalac MX-279, Nikalac MW-100LM, Nikalac MX-750LM (manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.) ) and the like.
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物は、他の架橋剤として、エポキシ化合物、オキセタン化合物、及び、ベンゾオキサジン化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことも好ましい。 In addition, the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of epoxy compounds, oxetane compounds, and benzoxazine compounds as another cross-linking agent.
-エポキシ化合物(エポキシ基を有する化合物)-
 エポキシ化合物としては、一分子中にエポキシ基を2以上有する化合物であることが好ましい。エポキシ基は、200℃以下で架橋反応し、かつ、架橋に由来する脱水反応が起こらないため膜収縮が起きにくい。このため、エポキシ化合物を含有することは、本発明の樹脂組成物の低温硬化及び反りの抑制に効果的である。
- Epoxy compound (compound having an epoxy group) -
The epoxy compound is preferably a compound having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule. The epoxy group undergoes a cross-linking reaction at 200° C. or less and does not undergo a dehydration reaction resulting from the cross-linking, so film shrinkage does not easily occur. Therefore, containing an epoxy compound is effective for low-temperature curing and suppression of warpage of the resin composition of the present invention.
 エポキシ化合物は、ポリエチレンオキサイド基を含有することが好ましい。これにより、より弾性率が低下し、また反りを抑制することができる。ポリエチレンオキサイド基は、エチレンオキサイドの繰返し単位数が2以上のものを意味し、繰返し単位数が2~15であることが好ましい。  The epoxy compound preferably contains a polyethylene oxide group. As a result, the elastic modulus is further lowered, and warping can be suppressed. The polyethylene oxide group means that the number of repeating units of ethylene oxide is 2 or more, and the number of repeating units is preferably 2-15.
 エポキシ化合物の例としては、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂;ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂;プロピレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、ネオペンチルグリコールジグリシジルエーテル、エチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、ブチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、ヘキサメチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、トリメチロールプロパントリグリシジルエーテル等のアルキレングリコール型エポキシ樹脂又は多価アルコール炭化水素型エポキシ樹脂;ポリプロピレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル等のポリアルキレングリコール型エポキシ樹脂;ポリメチル(グリシジロキシプロピル)シロキサン等のエポキシ基含有シリコーンなどを挙げることができるが、これらに限定されない。具体的には、エピクロン(登録商標)850-S、エピクロン(登録商標)HP-4032、エピクロン(登録商標)HP-7200、エピクロン(登録商標)HP-820、エピクロン(登録商標)HP-4700、エピクロン(登録商標)HP-4770、エピクロン(登録商標)EXA-830LVP、エピクロン(登録商標)EXA-8183、エピクロン(登録商標)EXA-8169、エピクロン(登録商標)N-660、エピクロン(登録商標)N-665-EXP-S、エピクロン(登録商標)N-740(以上商品名、DIC(株)製)、リカレジン(登録商標)BEO-20E、リカレジン(登録商標)BEO-60E、リカレジン(登録商標)HBE-100、リカレジン(登録商標)DME-100、リカレジン(登録商標)L-200(商品名、新日本理化(株)製)、EP-4003S、EP-4000S、EP-4088S、EP-3950S(以上商品名、(株)ADEKA製)、セロキサイド(登録商標)2021P、セロキサイド(登録商標)2081、セロキサイド(登録商標)2000、EHPE3150、エポリード(登録商標)GT401、エポリード(登録商標)PB4700、エポリード(登録商標)PB3600(以上商品名、(株)ダイセル製)、NC-3000、NC-3000-L、NC-3000-H、NC-3000-FH-75M、NC-3100、CER-3000-L、NC-2000-L、XD-1000、NC-7000L、NC-7300L、EPPN-501H、EPPN-501HY、EPPN-502H、EOCN-1020、EOCN-102S、EOCN-103S、EOCN-104S、CER-1020、EPPN-201、BREN-S、BREN-10S(以上商品名、日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。また以下の化合物も好適に用いられる。 Examples of epoxy compounds include bisphenol A type epoxy resin; bisphenol F type epoxy resin; propylene glycol diglycidyl ether, neopentyl glycol diglycidyl ether, ethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, butylene glycol diglycidyl ether, hexamethylene glycol diglycidyl ether. , alkylene glycol type epoxy resins such as trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether or polyhydric alcohol hydrocarbon type epoxy resins; polyalkylene glycol type epoxy resins such as polypropylene glycol diglycidyl ether; epoxy groups such as polymethyl (glycidyloxypropyl) siloxane Examples include, but are not limited to, containing silicones and the like. Specifically, Epiclon (registered trademark) 850-S, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-4032, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-7200, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-820, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-4700, Epiclon (registered trademark) HP-4770, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-830LVP, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-8183, Epiclon (registered trademark) EXA-8169, Epiclon (registered trademark) N-660, Epiclon (registered trademark) N-665-EXP-S, Epiclon (registered trademark) N-740 (trade name, manufactured by DIC Corporation), Ricaresin (registered trademark) BEO-20E, Ricaresin (registered trademark) BEO-60E, Ricaresin (registered trademark) ) HBE-100, Ricaresin (registered trademark) DME-100, Ricaresin (registered trademark) L-200 (trade name, manufactured by Shin Nippon Chemical Co., Ltd.), EP-4003S, EP-4000S, EP-4088S, EP-3950S (Trade names above, manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.), Celoxide (registered trademark) 2021P, Celoxide (registered trademark) 2081, Celoxide (registered trademark) 2000, EHPE3150, Epolead (registered trademark) GT401, Epolead (registered trademark) PB4700, Epolead (registered trademark) PB3600 (trade name, manufactured by Daicel Corporation), NC-3000, NC-3000-L, NC-3000-H, NC-3000-FH-75M, NC-3100, CER-3000-L , NC-2000-L, XD-1000, NC-7000L, NC-7300L, EPPN-501H, EPPN-501HY, EPPN-502H, EOCN-1020, EOCN-102S, EOCN-103S, EOCN-104S, CER-1020 , EPPN-201, BREN-S, and BREN-10S (these are trade names, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.). The following compounds are also preferably used.
 式中nは1~5の整数、mは1~20の整数である。 where n is an integer of 1-5 and m is an integer of 1-20.
 上記構造の中でも、耐熱性と伸度向上を両立する点から、nは1~2、mは3~7であることが好ましい。 Among the above structures, it is preferable that n is 1 to 2 and m is 3 to 7 from the viewpoint of achieving both heat resistance and elongation improvement.
-オキセタン化合物(オキセタニル基を有する化合物)-
 オキセタン化合物としては、一分子中にオキセタン環を2つ以上有する化合物、3-エチル-3-ヒドロキシメチルオキセタン、1,4-ビス{[(3-エチル-3-オキセタニル)メトキシ]メチル}ベンゼン、3-エチル-3-(2-エチルヘキシルメチル)オキセタン、1,4-ベンゼンジカルボン酸-ビス[(3-エチル-3-オキセタニル)メチル]エステル等を挙げることができる。具体的な例としては、東亞合成(株)製のアロンオキセタンシリーズ(例えば、OXT-121、OXT-221)が好適に使用することができ、これらは単独で、又は2種以上混合してもよい。
-Oxetane compound (compound having an oxetanyl group)-
The oxetane compounds include compounds having two or more oxetane rings in one molecule, 3-ethyl-3-hydroxymethyloxetane, 1,4-bis{[(3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl)methoxy]methyl}benzene, 3-ethyl-3-(2-ethylhexylmethyl)oxetane, 1,4-benzenedicarboxylic acid-bis[(3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl)methyl]ester and the like can be mentioned. As a specific example, Aron oxetane series manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. (eg, OXT-121, OXT-221) can be suitably used, and these can be used alone or in combination of two or more. good.
-ベンゾオキサジン化合物(ベンゾオキサゾリル基を有する化合物)-
 ベンゾオキサジン化合物は、開環付加反応に由来する架橋反応のため、硬化時に脱ガスが発生せず、更に熱収縮を小さくして反りの発生が抑えられることから好ましい。
-Benzoxazine compound (compound having a benzoxazolyl group)-
A benzoxazine compound is preferable because it is a cross-linking reaction derived from a ring-opening addition reaction, so that degassing does not occur during curing, and thermal shrinkage is reduced to suppress the occurrence of warping.
 ベンゾオキサジン化合物の好ましい例としては、P-d型ベンゾオキサジン、F-a型ベンゾオキサジン(以上、商品名、四国化成工業社製)、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂のベンゾオキサジン付加物、フェノールノボラック型ジヒドロベンゾオキサジン化合物が挙げられる。これらは単独で用いるか、又は2種以上混合してもよい。 Preferable examples of benzoxazine compounds include Pd-type benzoxazine, Fa-type benzoxazine (these are trade names, manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.), benzoxazine adducts of polyhydroxystyrene resins, phenol novolac-type dihydrobenzoxazines, oxazine compounds. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 他の架橋剤の含有量は、本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し0.1~30質量%であることが好ましく、0.1~20質量%であることがより好ましく、0.5~15質量%であることが更に好ましく、1.0~10質量%であることが特に好ましい。他の架橋剤は1種のみ含有していてもよいし、2種以上含有していてもよい。他の架橋剤を2種以上含有する場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The content of the other cross-linking agent is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. It is more preferably 5 to 15% by mass, particularly preferably 1.0 to 10% by mass. Other cross-linking agents may be contained alone, or may be contained in two or more. When two or more other cross-linking agents are contained, the total is preferably within the above range.
〔重合開始剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、光及び/又は熱により重合を開始させることができる重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。特に光重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。
 ここでいう光重合開始剤には、上述の特定メタロセン化合物に該当する化合物は含まれないものとする。
 光重合開始剤は、光ラジカル重合開始剤であることが好ましい。光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、公知の光ラジカル重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有する光ラジカル重合開始剤が好ましい。また、光励起された増感剤と何らかの作用を生じ、活性ラジカルを生成する活性剤であってもよい。
[Polymerization initiator]
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization initiator capable of initiating polymerization by light and/or heat. In particular, it preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
The photopolymerization initiator as used herein does not include compounds corresponding to the above-mentioned specific metallocene compounds.
The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator. The radical photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known radical photopolymerization initiators. For example, a photoradical polymerization initiator having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet region to the visible region is preferred. It may also be an activator that produces an active radical by producing some action with a photoexcited sensitizer.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤は、波長約240~800nm(好ましくは330~500nm)の範囲内で少なくとも約50L・mol-1・cm-1のモル吸光係数を有する化合物を、少なくとも1種含有していることが好ましい。化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いて測定することができる。例えば、紫外可視分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spectrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶剤を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。 The radical photopolymerization initiator contains at least one compound having a molar extinction coefficient of at least about 50 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 within the wavelength range of about 240 to 800 nm (preferably 330 to 500 nm). is preferred. The molar extinction coefficient of a compound can be measured using known methods. For example, it is preferable to measure with an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian) using an ethyl acetate solvent at a concentration of 0.01 g/L.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、公知の化合物を任意に使用できる。例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物、トリハロメチル基を有する化合物など)、アシルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ケトオキシムエーテル、アミノアセトフェノンなどのα-アミノケトン化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノンなどのα-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、アゾ系化合物、アジド化合物、メタロセン化合物、有機ホウ素化合物、鉄アレーン錯体などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、特開2016-027357号公報の段落0165~0182、国際公開第2015/199219号の段落0138~0151の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、特開2014-130173号公報の段落0065~0111、特許第6301489号公報に記載された化合物、MATERIAL STAGE 37~60p,vol.19,No.3,2019に記載されたパーオキサイド系光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/221177号に記載の光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/110179号に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-043864号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-044030号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-167313号公報に記載の過酸化物系開始剤が挙げられ、これらの内容も本明細書に組み込まれる。 Any known compound can be used as the photoradical polymerization initiator. For example, halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, compounds having a trihalomethyl group, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime derivatives, etc. oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, α-aminoketone compounds such as aminoacetophenone, α-hydroxyketone compounds such as hydroxyacetophenone, azo compounds, azide compounds, metallocene compounds, organic boron compounds, iron arene complexes, and the like. For details of these, paragraphs 0165 to 0182 of JP-A-2016-027357 and paragraphs 0138 to 0151 of WO 2015/199219 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein. In addition, paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-130173, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6301489, MATERIAL STAGE 37-60p, vol. 19, No. 3, the peroxide photopolymerization initiator described in 2019, the photopolymerization initiator described in International Publication No. 2018/221177, the photopolymerization initiator described in International Publication No. 2018/110179, JP 2019-043864 The photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2019-044030, the photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2019-167313, and the peroxide-based initiator described in JP-A-2019-167313. incorporated into the specification.
 ケトン化合物としては、例えば、特開2015-087611号公報の段落0087に記載の化合物が例示され、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。市販品では、カヤキュア-DETX-S(日本化薬(株)製)も好適に用いられる。 Examples of ketone compounds include compounds described in paragraph 0087 of JP-A-2015-087611, the content of which is incorporated herein. As a commercial product, Kayacure-DETX-S (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) is also suitably used.
 本発明の一実施態様において、光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン化合物、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、及び、アシルホスフィン化合物を好適に用いることができる。より具体的には、例えば、特開平10-291969号公報に記載のアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、特許第4225898号に記載のアシルホスフィンオキシド系開始剤を用いることができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In one embodiment of the present invention, a hydroxyacetophenone compound, an aminoacetophenone compound, and an acylphosphine compound can be suitably used as the radical photopolymerization initiator. More specifically, for example, aminoacetophenone-based initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and acylphosphine oxide-based initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can be used. incorporated.
 α-ヒドロキシケトン系開始剤としては、Omnirad 184、Omnirad 1173、Omnirad 2959、Omnirad 127(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、IRGACURE 184(IRGACUREは登録商標)、DAROCUR 1173、IRGACURE 500、IRGACURE-2959、IRGACURE 127(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。 α-ヒドロキシケトン系開始剤としては、Omnirad 184、Omnirad 1173、Omnirad 2959、Omnirad 127(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、IRGACURE 184(IRGACUREは登録商標)、DAROCUR 1173、IRGACURE 500、IRGACURE -2959 and IRGACURE 127 (trade names: both manufactured by BASF) can be used.
 α-アミノケトン系開始剤としては、Omnirad 907、Omnirad 369、Omnirad 369E、Omnirad 379EG(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、IRGACURE 907、IRGACURE 369、及び、IRGACURE 379(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。 α-Aminoketone initiators include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), IRGACURE 907, IRGACURE 369, and IRGACURE 379 (trade names: all BASF company) can be used.
アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、アシルホスフィンオキシド系開始剤、メタロセン化合物としては、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0161~0163に記載の化合物も好適に使用することができる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As aminoacetophenone-based initiators, acylphosphine oxide-based initiators, and metallocene compounds, for example, compounds described in paragraphs 0161 to 0163 of WO2021/112189 can also be preferably used. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤として、より好ましくはオキシム化合物が挙げられる。オキシム化合物を用いることにより、露光ラチチュードをより効果的に向上させることが可能になる。オキシム化合物は、露光ラチチュード(露光マージン)が広く、かつ、光硬化促進剤としても働くため、特に好ましい。 The photoradical polymerization initiator is more preferably an oxime compound. By using an oxime compound, the exposure latitude can be improved more effectively. Oxime compounds are particularly preferred because they have a wide exposure latitude (exposure margin) and also act as photocuring accelerators.
 オキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2001-233842号公報に記載の化合物、特開2000-080068号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.1653-1660)に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.156-162)に記載の化合物、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年、pp.202-232)に記載の化合物、特開2000-066385号公報に記載の化合物、特表2004-534797号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-019766号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6065596号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/152153号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/051680号に記載の化合物、特開2017-198865号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/164127号の段落番号0025~0038に記載の化合物、国際公開第2013/167515号に記載の化合物などが挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of the oxime compound include compounds described in JP-A-2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A-2000-080068, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, J. Am. C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.1653-1660); C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.156-162), compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp.202-232), compounds described in JP-A-2000-066385, Compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2017-019766, compounds described in Patent No. 6065596, compounds described in WO 2015/152153, WO 2017 / 051680, compounds described in JP-A-2017-198865, compounds described in paragraphs 0025 to 0038 of WO 2017/164127, compounds described in WO 2013/167515, etc. , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 好ましいオキシム化合物としては、例えば、下記の構造の化合物や、3-(ベンゾイルオキシ(イミノ))ブタン-2-オン、3-(アセトキシ(イミノ))ブタン-2-オン、3-(プロピオニルオキシ(イミノ))ブタン-2-オン、2-(アセトキシ(イミノ))ペンタン-3-オン、2-(アセトキシ(イミノ))-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-(ベンゾイルオキシ(イミノ))-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-((4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノ)ブタン-2-オン、及び2-(エトキシカルボニルオキシ(イミノ))-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オンなどが挙げられる。樹脂組成物においては、特に光ラジカル重合開始剤としてオキシム化合物(オキシム系の光ラジカル重合開始剤)を用いることが好ましい。オキシム系の光ラジカル重合開始剤は、分子内に >C=N-O-C(=O)- の連結基を有する。 Preferred oxime compounds include, for example, compounds having the following structures, 3-(benzoyloxy(imino))butan-2-one, 3-(acetoxy(imino))butan-2-one, 3-(propionyloxy( imino))butan-2-one, 2-(acetoxy(imino))pentan-3-one, 2-(acetoxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-(benzoyloxy(imino)) -1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-((4-toluenesulfonyloxy)imino)butan-2-one, and 2-(ethoxycarbonyloxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one, etc. mentioned. In the resin composition, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound (an oxime-based radical photopolymerization initiator) as the radical photopolymerization initiator. The oxime-based radical photopolymerization initiator has a >C=N-O-C(=O)- linking group in the molecule.
 市販品ではIRGACURE OXE 01、IRGACURE OXE 02、IRGACURE OXE 03、IRGACURE OXE 04(以上、BASF社製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919((株)ADEKA製、特開2012-014052号公報に記載の光ラジカル重合開始剤2)も好適に用いられる。また、TR-PBG-304、TR-PBG-305(常州強力電子新材料有限公司製)、アデカアークルズNCI-730、NCI-831及びアデカアークルズNCI-930((株)ADEKA製)も用いることができる。また、DFI-091(ダイトーケミックス(株)製)、SpeedCure PDO(SARTOMER ARKEMA製)を用いることができる。また、下記の構造のオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。
Commercially available products include IRGACURE OXE 01, IRGACURE OXE 02, IRGACURE OXE 03, IRGACURE OXE 04 (manufactured by BASF), Adeka Optomer N-1919 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd., the light described in JP 2012-014052 A radical polymerization initiator 2) is also preferably used. In addition, TR-PBG-304, TR-PBG-305 (manufactured by Changzhou Tenryu Electric New Materials Co., Ltd.), Adeka Arkles NCI-730, NCI-831 and Adeka Arkles NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.) are also used. be able to. Also, DFI-091 (manufactured by Daito Chemix Co., Ltd.) and SpeedCure PDO (manufactured by SARTOMER ARKEMA) can be used. Also, an oxime compound having the following structure can be used.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0169~0171に記載のフルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物、カルバゾール環の少なくとも1つのベンゼン環がナフタレン環となった骨格を有するオキシム化合物、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of photoradical polymerization initiators include oxime compounds having a fluorene ring described in paragraphs 0169 to 0171 of International Publication No. 2021/112189, and oximes having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring. Compounds, oxime compounds having fluorine atoms can also be used. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 また、光重合開始剤としては、国際公開第2021/020359号に記載の段落0208~0210に記載のニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物、カルバゾール骨格にヒドロキシ基を有する置換基が結合したオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Further, as the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a nitro group, an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton, and a substituent having a hydroxy group on the carbazole skeleton described in paragraphs 0208 to 0210 of International Publication No. 2021/020359 are used. Bound oxime compounds can also be used. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 光重合開始剤としては、芳香族環に電子求引性基が導入された芳香族環基ArOX1を有するオキシム化合物(以下、オキシム化合物OXともいう)を用いることもできる。上記芳香族環基ArOX1が有する電子求引性基としては、アシル基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、シアノ基が挙げられ、アシル基およびニトロ基が好ましく、耐光性に優れた膜を形成しやすいという理由からアシル基であることがより好ましく、ベンゾイル基であることが更に好ましい。ベンゾイル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、複素環基、複素環オキシ基、アルケニル基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基、アシル基またはアミノ基であることが好ましく、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基またはアミノ基であることがより好ましく、アルコキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基またはアミノ基であることが更に好ましい。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having an aromatic ring group Ar 2 OX1 in which an electron-withdrawing group is introduced into the aromatic ring (hereinafter also referred to as oxime compound OX) can be used. Examples of the electron-withdrawing group of the aromatic ring group Ar OX1 include an acyl group, a nitro group, a trifluoromethyl group, an alkylsulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, and a cyano group. An acyl group and a nitro group are preferred, an acyl group is more preferred, and a benzoyl group is even more preferred because a film having excellent light resistance can be easily formed. A benzoyl group may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, cyano groups, nitro groups, hydroxy groups, alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryl groups, aryloxy groups, heterocyclic groups, heterocyclic oxy groups, alkenyl groups, alkylsulfanyl groups, arylsulfanyl groups, It is preferably an acyl group or an amino group, more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylsulfanyl group, an arylsulfanyl group or an amino group. A sulfanyl group or an amino group is more preferred.
 オキシム化合物OXは、式(OX1)で表される化合物および式(OX2)で表される化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、式(OX2)で表される化合物であることがより好ましい。

 式中、RX1は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、複素環基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アシルオキシ基、アミノ基、ホスフィノイル基、カルバモイル基またはスルファモイル基を表し、
 RX2は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、複素環基、複素環オキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシルオキシ基またはアミノ基を表し、
 RX3~RX14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表す。
 ただし、RX10~RX14のうち少なくとも一つは、電子求引性基である。
The oxime compound OX is preferably at least one selected from the compounds represented by the formula (OX1) and the compounds represented by the formula (OX2), more preferably the compound represented by the formula (OX2). preferable.

In the formula, R X1 is an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkoxy group, aryl group, aryloxy group, heterocyclic group, heterocyclicoxy group, alkylsulfanyl group, arylsulfanyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl a group, an arylsulfonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amino group, a phosphinoyl group, a carbamoyl group or a sulfamoyl group,
R X2 is an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkoxy group, aryl group, aryloxy group, heterocyclic group, heterocyclicoxy group, alkylsulfanyl group, arylsulfanyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, aryl represents a sulfonyl group, an acyloxy group or an amino group,
R X3 to R X14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
However, at least one of R X10 to R X14 is an electron-withdrawing group.
 上記式において、RX12が電子求引性基であり、RX10、RX11、RX13、RX14は水素原子であることが好ましい。 In the above formula, R X12 is an electron-withdrawing group, and R X10 , R X11 , R X13 and R X14 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
 オキシム化合物OXの具体例としては、特許第4600600号公報の段落番号0083~0105に記載の化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of the oxime compound OX include compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0105 of Japanese Patent No. 4600600, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 最も好ましいオキシム化合物としては、特開2007-269779号公報に示される特定置換基を有するオキシム化合物や、特開2009-191061号公報に示されるチオアリール基を有するオキシム化合物などが挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The most preferable oxime compounds include oxime compounds having specific substituents shown in JP-A-2007-269779 and oxime compounds having a thioaryl group shown in JP-A-2009-191061. incorporated herein.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤は、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、ホスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム塩化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物及びその誘導体、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体及びその塩、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物、3-アリール置換クマリン化合物よりなる群から選択される化合物が好ましい。 From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, photoradical polymerization initiators include trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triaryl selected from the group consisting of imidazole dimers, onium salt compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds; are preferred.
 更に好ましい光ラジカル重合開始剤は、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、ホスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム塩化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物であり、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、ベンゾフェノン化合物よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の化合物が一層好ましく、メタロセン化合物又はオキシム化合物を用いるのがより一層好ましい。 More preferred radical photopolymerization initiators are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, onium salt compounds, benzophenone compounds, and acetophenone compounds. At least one compound selected from the group consisting of trihalomethyltriazine compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, and benzophenone compounds is more preferred, and metallocene compounds or oxime compounds are even more preferred. .
 また、光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、国際公開第2021/020359号に記載の段落0175~0179に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Also, as the radical photopolymerization initiator, compounds described in paragraphs 0175 to 0179 of International Publication No. 2021/020359 can be used. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 また、光ラジカル重合開始剤は、国際公開第2015/125469号の段落0048~0055に記載の化合物を用いることもでき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In addition, as the photoradical polymerization initiator, the compounds described in paragraphs 0048 to 0055 of WO 2015/125469 can also be used, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、2官能あるいは3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いてもよい。そのような光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いることにより、光ラジカル重合開始剤の1分子から2つ以上のラジカルが発生するため、良好な感度が得られる。また、非対称構造の化合物を用いた場合においては、結晶性が低下して溶剤などへの溶解性が向上して、経時で析出しにくくなり、樹脂組成物の経時安定性を向上させることができる。2官能あるいは3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤の具体例としては、特表2010-527339号公報、特表2011-524436号公報、国際公開第2015/004565号、特表2016-532675号公報の段落番号0407~0412、国際公開第2017/033680号の段落番号0039~0055に記載されているオキシム化合物の2量体、特表2013-522445号公報に記載されている化合物(E)および化合物(G)、国際公開第2016/034963号に記載されているCmpd1~7、特表2017-523465号公報の段落番号0007に記載されているオキシムエステル類光開始剤、特開2017-167399号公報の段落番号0020~0033に記載されている光開始剤、特開2017-151342号公報の段落番号0017~0026に記載されている光重合開始剤(A)、特許第6469669号公報に記載されているオキシムエステル光開始剤などが挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As the radical photopolymerization initiator, a difunctional or trifunctional or higher radical photopolymerization initiator may be used. By using such a radical photopolymerization initiator, two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the radical photopolymerization initiator, so good sensitivity can be obtained. In addition, when a compound having an asymmetric structure is used, the crystallinity is lowered, the solubility in a solvent or the like is improved, and precipitation becomes difficult over time, and the stability over time of the resin composition can be improved. . Specific examples of bifunctional or trifunctional or higher photoradical polymerization initiators include Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No. 2015/004565, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-532675. Paragraph numbers 0407 to 0412, dimers of oxime compounds described in paragraph numbers 0039 to 0055 of International Publication No. 2017/033680, compound (E) and compounds described in JP-A-2013-522445 ( G), Cmpd1 to 7 described in International Publication No. 2016/034963, oxime ester photoinitiators described in paragraph number 0007 of JP 2017-523465, JP 2017-167399 Photoinitiators described in paragraph numbers 0020 to 0033, photoinitiators (A) described in paragraph numbers 0017 to 0026 of JP-A-2017-151342, described in Japanese Patent No. 6469669 and oxime ester photoinitiators, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 光重合開始剤を含む場合、その含有量は、本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し0.1~30質量%であることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.1~20質量%であり、更に好ましくは0.5~15質量%であり、一層好ましくは1.0~10質量%である。光重合開始剤は1種のみ含有していてもよいし、2種以上含有していてもよい。光重合開始剤を2種以上含有する場合は、合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
 なお、光重合開始剤は熱重合開始剤としても機能する場合があるため、オーブンやホットプレート等の加熱によって光重合開始剤による架橋を更に進行させられる場合がある。
When a photopolymerization initiator is included, its content is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. , more preferably 0.5 to 15% by mass, and still more preferably 1.0 to 10% by mass. Only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be contained, or two or more types may be contained. When two or more photopolymerization initiators are contained, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
In addition, since the photopolymerization initiator may also function as a thermal polymerization initiator, the crosslinking by the photopolymerization initiator may be further advanced by heating with an oven, a hot plate, or the like.
〔増感剤〕
 樹脂組成物は、増感剤を含んでいてもよい。増感剤は、特定の活性放射線を吸収して電子励起状態となる。電子励起状態となった増感剤は、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、光ラジカル重合開始剤などと接触して、電子移動、エネルギー移動、発熱などの作用が生じる。これにより、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、光ラジカル重合開始剤は化学変化を起こして分解し、ラジカル、酸又は塩基を生成する。
 使用可能な増感剤として、ベンゾフェノン系、ミヒラーズケトン系、クマリン系、ピラゾールアゾ系、アニリノアゾ系、トリフェニルメタン系、アントラキノン系、アントラセン系、アントラピリドン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系、キサンテン系、フタロシアニン系、ベンゾピラン系、インジゴ系等の化合物を使用することができる。
 増感剤としては、例えば、ミヒラーズケトン、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、2,5-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)シクロペンタン、2,6-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)シクロヘキサノン、2,6-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)-4-メチルシクロヘキサノン、4,4’-ビス(ジメチルアミノ)カルコン、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)カルコン、p-ジメチルアミノシンナミリデンインダノン、p-ジメチルアミノベンジリデンインダノン、2-(p-ジメチルアミノフェニルビフェニレン)-ベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノフェニルビニレン)ベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノフェニルビニレン)イソナフトチアゾール、1,3-ビス(4’-ジメチルアミノベンザル)アセトン、1,3-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)アセトン、3,3’-カルボニル-ビス(7-ジエチルアミノクマリン)、3-アセチル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-エトキシカルボニル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-ベンジロキシカルボニル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-メトキシカルボニル-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、3-エトキシカルボニル-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン(7-(ジエチルアミノ)クマリン-3-カルボン酸エチル)、N-フェニル-N’-エチルエタノールアミン、N-フェニルジエタノールアミン、N-p-トリルジエタノールアミン、N-フェニルエタノールアミン、4-モルホリノベンゾフェノン、ジメチルアミノ安息香酸イソアミル、ジエチルアミノ安息香酸イソアミル、2-メルカプトベンズイミダゾール、1-フェニル-5-メルカプトテトラゾール、2-メルカプトベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノスチリル)ベンズオキサゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノスチリル)ベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノスチリル)ナフト(1,2-d)チアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノベンゾイル)スチレン、ジフェニルアセトアミド、ベンズアニリド、N-メチルアセトアニリド、3‘,4’-ジメチルアセトアニリド等が挙げられる。
 また、他の増感色素を用いてもよい。
 増感色素の詳細については、特開2016-027357号公報の段落0161~0163の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Sensitizer]
The resin composition may contain a sensitizer. A sensitizer absorbs specific actinic radiation and enters an electronically excited state. The sensitizer in an electronically excited state comes into contact with a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a photoradical polymerization initiator, or the like, and causes electron transfer, energy transfer, heat generation, or the like. As a result, the thermal radical polymerization initiator and the photoradical polymerization initiator undergo chemical changes and are decomposed to generate radicals, acids or bases.
Usable sensitizers include benzophenones, Michler's ketones, coumarins, pyrazole azos, anilinoazos, triphenylmethanes, anthraquinones, anthracenes, anthrapyridones, benzylidenes, oxonols, and pyrazolotriazole azos. , pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine, xanthene, phthalocyanine, benzopyran, and indigo compounds.
Sensitizers include, for example, Michler's ketone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, 2,5-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)cyclopentane, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal) Cyclohexanone, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)-4-methylcyclohexanone, 4,4'-bis(dimethylamino)chalcone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)chalcone, p-dimethylaminocinnamyl denindanone, p-dimethylaminobenzylideneindanone, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylbiphenylene)-benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)iso naphthothiazole, 1,3-bis(4′-dimethylaminobenzal)acetone, 1,3-bis(4′-diethylaminobenzal)acetone, 3,3′-carbonyl-bis(7-diethylaminocoumarin), 3 -acetyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-ethoxycarbonyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-benzyloxycarbonyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-methoxycarbonyl-7-diethylaminocoumarin, 3-ethoxycarbonyl-7-diethylamino coumarin (ethyl 7-(diethylamino)coumarin-3-carboxylate), N-phenyl-N'-ethylethanolamine, N-phenyldiethanolamine, Np-tolyldiethanolamine, N-phenylethanolamine, 4-morpholinobenzophenone, isoamyl dimethylaminobenzoate, isoamyl diethylaminobenzoate, 2-mercaptobenzimidazole, 1-phenyl-5-mercaptotetrazole, 2-mercaptobenzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminostyryl)benzoxazole, 2-(p-dimethyl) aminostyryl)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminostyryl)naphtho(1,2-d)thiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminobenzoyl)styrene, diphenylacetamide, benzanilide, N-methylacetanilide, 3',4 '-dimethylacetanilide and the like.
Other sensitizing dyes may also be used.
For details of the sensitizing dye, the description in paragraphs 0161 to 0163 of JP-A-2016-027357 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 樹脂組成物が増感剤を含む場合、増感剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、0.01~20質量%であることが好ましく、0.1~15質量%であることがより好ましく、0.5~10質量%であることが更に好ましい。増感剤は、1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。 When the resin composition contains a sensitizer, the content of the sensitizer is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resin composition. more preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass. The sensitizers may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
〔連鎖移動剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、連鎖移動剤を含有してもよい。連鎖移動剤は、例えば高分子辞典第三版(高分子学会編、2005年)683-684頁に定義されている。連鎖移動剤としては、例えば、分子内に-S-S-、-SO-S-、-N-O-、SH、PH、SiH、及びGeHを有する化合物群、RAFT(Reversible Addition Fragmentation chain Transfer)重合に用いられるチオカルボニルチオ基を有するジチオベンゾアート、トリチオカルボナート、ジチオカルバマート、キサンタート化合物等が用いられる。これらは、低活性のラジカルに水素を供与して、ラジカルを生成するか、若しくは、酸化された後、脱プロトンすることによりラジカルを生成しうる。特に、チオール化合物を好ましく用いることができる。
[Chain transfer agent]
The resin composition of the present invention may contain a chain transfer agent. The chain transfer agent is defined, for example, in Kobunshi Dictionary, 3rd edition (edited by Kobunshi Gakkai, 2005), pp. 683-684. Chain transfer agents include, for example, a group of compounds having —S—S—, —SO 2 —S—, —NO—, SH, PH, SiH, and GeH in the molecule, RAFT (Reversible Addition Fragmentation Chain Transfer ) Dithiobenzoate, trithiocarbonate, dithiocarbamate, xanthate compounds and the like having a thiocarbonylthio group used for polymerization are used. They can either donate hydrogen to less active radicals to generate radicals, or they can be oxidized and then deprotonated to generate radicals. In particular, thiol compounds can be preferably used.
 また、連鎖移動剤は、国際公開第2015/199219号の段落0152~0153に記載の化合物を用いることもでき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In addition, the chain transfer agent can also use the compounds described in paragraphs 0152 to 0153 of International Publication No. 2015/199219, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 本発明の樹脂組成物が連鎖移動剤を有する場合、連鎖移動剤の含有量は、本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分100質量部に対し、0.01~20質量部が好ましく、0.1~10質量部がより好ましく、0.5~5質量部が更に好ましい。連鎖移動剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。連鎖移動剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 When the resin composition of the present invention contains a chain transfer agent, the content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. 1 to 10 parts by mass is more preferable, and 0.5 to 5 parts by mass is even more preferable. One type of chain transfer agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more chain transfer agents are used, the total is preferably within the above range.
<塩基発生剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、塩基発生剤を含んでもよい。ここで、塩基発生剤とは、物理的または化学的な作用によって塩基を発生することができる化合物である。本発明の樹脂組成物にとって好ましい塩基発生剤としては、熱塩基発生剤および光塩基発生剤が挙げられる。
 特に、樹脂組成物が環化樹脂の前駆体を含む場合、樹脂組成物は塩基発生剤を含むことが好ましい。樹脂組成物が熱塩基発生剤を含有することによって、例えば加熱により前駆体の環化反応を促進でき、硬化物の機械特性や耐薬品性が良好なものとなり、例えば半導体パッケージ中に含まれる再配線層用層間絶縁膜としての性能が良好となる。
 塩基発生剤としては、イオン型塩基発生剤でもよく、非イオン型塩基発生剤でもよい。塩基発生剤から発生する塩基としては、例えば、2級アミン、3級アミンが挙げられる。
 本発明に係る塩基発生剤について特に制限はなく、公知の塩基発生剤を用いることができる。公知の塩基発生剤としては、例えば、カルバモイルオキシム化合物、カルバモイルヒドロキシルアミン化合物、カルバミン酸化合物、ホルムアミド化合物、アセトアミド化合物、カルバメート化合物、ベンジルカルバメート化合物、ニトロベンジルカルバメート化合物、スルホンアミド化合物、イミダゾール誘導体化合物、アミンイミド化合物、ピリジン誘導体化合物、α-アミノアセトフェノン誘導体化合物、4級アンモニウム塩誘導体化合物、ピリジニウム塩、α-ラクトン環誘導体化合物、アミンイミド化合物、フタルイミド誘導体化合物、アシルオキシイミノ化合物、などを用いることができる。
 非イオン型塩基発生剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号公報の段落0275~0285に記載の式(B1)若しくは式(B2)で表される化合物、国際公開第2020/066416号公報の段落0102~00162に記載の式(N1)で表される化合物、又は、塩基発生剤は国際公開第2020/054226号の段落0013~0041に記載の熱塩基発生剤が好ましい。
これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Base generator>
The resin composition of the present invention may contain a base generator. Here, the base generator is a compound capable of generating a base by physical or chemical action. Preferred base generators for the resin composition of the present invention include thermal base generators and photobase generators.
In particular, when the resin composition contains a cyclized resin precursor, the resin composition preferably contains a base generator. By containing a thermal base generator in the resin composition, the cyclization reaction of the precursor can be promoted, for example, by heating, and the cured product has good mechanical properties and chemical resistance. Performance as an interlayer insulating film for wiring layers is improved.
The base generator may be an ionic base generator or a non-ionic base generator. Examples of bases generated from base generators include secondary amines and tertiary amines.
There are no particular restrictions on the base generator used in the present invention, and known base generators can be used. Examples of known base generators include carbamoyloxime compounds, carbamoylhydroxylamine compounds, carbamic acid compounds, formamide compounds, acetamide compounds, carbamate compounds, benzylcarbamate compounds, nitrobenzylcarbamate compounds, sulfonamide compounds, imidazole derivative compounds, and amine imides. compounds, pyridine derivative compounds, α-aminoacetophenone derivative compounds, quaternary ammonium salt derivative compounds, pyridinium salts, α-lactone ring derivative compounds, amineimide compounds, phthalimide derivative compounds, acyloxyimino compounds, and the like can be used.
Examples of nonionic base generators include compounds represented by formula (B1) or formula (B2) described in paragraphs 0275 to 0285 of WO2021/112189, and WO2020/066416. The compound represented by formula (N1) described in paragraphs 0102 to 00162 of No. 1 or the base generator is preferably a thermal base generator described in paragraphs 0013 to 0041 of WO 2020/054226.
The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 塩基発生剤としては、下記の例が挙げられるが、本発明がこれにより限定して解釈されるものではない。 Examples of base generators include the following, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
 非イオン型塩基発生剤の分子量は、800以下であることが好ましく、600以下であることがより好ましく、500以下であることが更に好ましい。下限としては、100以上であることが好ましく、200以上であることがより好ましく、300以上であることが更に好ましい。 The molecular weight of the nonionic base generator is preferably 800 or less, more preferably 600 or less, and even more preferably 500 or less. The lower limit is preferably 100 or more, more preferably 200 or more, and even more preferably 300 or more.
 イオン型塩基発生剤の具体的な好ましい化合物としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/038002号の段落番号0148~0163に記載の化合物も挙げられる。 Specific preferred compounds of the ionic base generator include, for example, compounds described in paragraphs 0148 to 0163 of International Publication No. 2018/038002.
 アンモニウム塩の具体例としては、以下の化合物を挙げることができるが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
Specific examples of ammonium salts include the following compounds, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
 イミニウム塩の具体例としては、以下の化合物を挙げることができるが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
Specific examples of iminium salts include the following compounds, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
 本発明の樹脂組成物が塩基発生剤を含む場合、塩基発生剤の含有量は、本発明の樹脂組成物中の樹脂100質量部に対し、0.1~50質量部が好ましい。下限は、0.3質量部以上がより好ましく、0.5質量部以上が更に好ましい。上限は、30質量部以下がより好ましく、20質量部以下が更に好ましく、10質量部以下が一層好ましく、5質量部以下であってもよく、4質量部以下であってもよい。
 塩基発生剤は、1種又は2種以上を用いることができる。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the resin composition of the present invention contains a base generator, the content of the base generator is preferably 0.1 to 50 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin in the resin composition of the present invention. The lower limit is more preferably 0.3 parts by mass or more, and even more preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30 parts by mass or less, still more preferably 20 parts by mass or less, even more preferably 10 parts by mass or less, and may be 5 parts by mass or less, or may be 4 parts by mass or less.
One or two or more base generators can be used. When two or more kinds are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<溶剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、溶剤を含むことが好ましい。
 溶剤は、公知の溶剤を任意に使用できる。溶剤は有機溶剤が好ましい。有機溶剤としては、エステル類、エーテル類、ケトン類、環状炭化水素類、スルホキシド類、アミド類、ウレア類、アルコール類などの化合物が挙げられる。
<Solvent>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent.
Any known solvent can be used as the solvent. The solvent is preferably an organic solvent. Organic solvents include compounds such as esters, ethers, ketones, cyclic hydrocarbons, sulfoxides, amides, ureas and alcohols.
 エステル類として、例えば、酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、酢酸へキシル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、γ-ブチロラクトン、ε-カプロラクトン、δ-バレロラクトン、アルキルオキシ酢酸アルキル(例えば、アルキルオキシ酢酸メチル、アルキルオキシ酢酸エチル、アルキルオキシ酢酸ブチル(例えば、メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル等))、3-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、3-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸エチル等(例えば、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等))、2-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、2-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸プロピル等(例えば、2-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル))、2-アルキルオキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル及び2-アルキルオキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル(例えば、2-メトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル等)、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、2-オキソブタン酸メチル、2-オキソブタン酸エチル、ヘキサン酸エチル、ヘプタン酸エチル、マロン酸ジメチル、マロン酸ジエチル等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Esters such as ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, hexyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, γ-butyrolactone , ε-caprolactone, δ-valerolactone, alkyl alkyloxyacetates (e.g. methyl alkyloxyacetate, ethyl alkyloxyacetate, butyl alkyloxyacetate (e.g. methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, etc.)), 3-alkyloxypropionic acid alkyl esters (e.g., methyl 3-alkyloxypropionate, ethyl 3-alkyloxypropionate, etc. (e.g., methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 3-methoxypropionic acid ethyl, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, etc.), 2-alkyloxypropionate alkyl esters (e.g., methyl 2-alkyloxypropionate, ethyl 2-alkyloxypropionate, 2-alkyl propyl oxypropionate (e.g., methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), 2-alkyloxy- Methyl 2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-alkyloxy-2-methylpropionate (e.g., methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.), methyl pyruvate, pyruvate Ethyl acetate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl hexanoate, ethyl heptanoate, dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate and the like are preferred. .
 エーテル類として、例えば、エチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールエチルメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールブチルメチルエーテル、トリエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールエチルメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテルアセテート、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Examples of ethers include ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, diethylene glycol butyl methyl ether, triethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, Methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol Preferred examples include monobutyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether, and the like.
 ケトン類として、例えば、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン、3-メチルシクロヘキサノン、レボグルコセノン、ジヒドロレボグルコセノン等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Suitable ketones include, for example, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, levoglucosenone, dihydrolevoglucosenone and the like.
 環状炭化水素類として、例えば、トルエン、キシレン、アニソール等の芳香族炭化水素類、リモネン等の環式テルペン類が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Suitable examples of cyclic hydrocarbons include aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene and anisole, and cyclic terpenes such as limonene.
 スルホキシド類として、例えば、ジメチルスルホキシドが好適なものとして挙げられる。 Suitable sulfoxides include, for example, dimethyl sulfoxide.
 アミド類として、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、N-エチル-2-ピロリドン、N-シクロヘキシル-2-ピロリドン、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルイソブチルアミド、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロピオンアミド、3-ブトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロピオンアミド、N-ホルミルモルホリン、N-アセチルモルホリン等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 As amides, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-ethyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-cyclohexyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylisobutyramide, Suitable examples include 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, 3-butoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, N-formylmorpholine, N-acetylmorpholine and the like.
 ウレア類として、N,N,N’,N’-テトラメチルウレア、1,3-ジメチル-2-イミダゾリジノン等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Suitable ureas include N,N,N',N'-tetramethylurea, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, and the like.
 アルコール類として、メタノール、エタノール、1-プロパノール、2-プロパノール、1-ブタノール、1-ペンタノール、1-ヘキサノール、ベンジルアルコール、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール、2-エトキシエタノール、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノヘキシルエーテル、トリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ポリプロピレングリコール、テトラエチレングリコール、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノベンジルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノフェニルエーテル、メチルフェニルカルビノール、n-アミルアルコール、メチルアミルアルコール、および、ダイアセトンアルコール等が挙げられる。 Alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol, 1-pentanol, 1-hexanol, benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-ethoxyethanol, Diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monohexyl ether, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, polypropylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobenzyl ether, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether, methylphenyl carbinol, n-amyl alcohol, methyl amyl alcohol, diacetone alcohol and the like.
 溶剤は、塗布面性状の改良などの観点から、2種以上を混合する形態も好ましい。 From the viewpoint of improving the properties of the coating surface, it is also preferable to mix two or more solvents.
 本発明では、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルスルホキシド、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテル、及びプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート、レボグルコセノン、ジヒドロレボグルコセノンから選択される1種の溶剤、又は、2種以上で構成される混合溶剤が好ましい。ジメチルスルホキシドとγ-ブチロラクトンとの併用、又は、N-メチル-2-ピロリドンと乳酸エチルとの併用が特に好ましい。 In the present invention, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, γ- one solvent selected from butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, propylene glycol methyl ether and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate, levoglucosenone, dihydrolevoglucosenone; Alternatively, a mixed solvent composed of two or more kinds is preferable. A combination of dimethyl sulfoxide and γ-butyrolactone or a combination of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and ethyl lactate is particularly preferred.
 溶剤の含有量は、塗布性の観点から、本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分濃度が5~80質量%になる量とすることが好ましく、5~75質量%となる量にすることがより好ましく、10~70質量%となる量にすることが更に好ましく、20~70質量%となるようにすることが一層好ましい。溶剤含有量は、塗膜の所望の厚さと塗布方法に応じて調節すればよい。 From the viewpoint of coating properties, the content of the solvent is preferably an amount such that the total solid concentration of the resin composition of the present invention is 5 to 80% by mass, more preferably 5 to 75% by mass. More preferably, the amount is from 10 to 70% by mass, and even more preferably from 20 to 70% by mass. The solvent content may be adjusted according to the desired thickness of the coating and the method of application.
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、溶剤を1種のみ含有していてもよいし、2種以上含有していてもよい。溶剤を2種以上含有する場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The resin composition of the present invention may contain only one type of solvent, or may contain two or more types. When two or more solvents are contained, the total is preferably within the above range.
<金属接着性改良剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、電極や配線などに用いられる金属材料との接着性を向上させるための金属接着性改良剤を含んでいることが好ましい。金属接着性改良剤としては、アルコキシシリル基を有するシランカップリング剤、アルミニウム系接着助剤、チタン系接着助剤、スルホンアミド構造を有する化合物及びチオウレア構造を有する化合物、リン酸誘導体化合物、βケトエステル化合物、アミノ化合物等が挙げられる。
<Metal adhesion improver>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a metal adhesion improver for improving adhesion to metal materials used for electrodes, wiring, and the like. Examples of metal adhesion improvers include alkoxysilyl group-containing silane coupling agents, aluminum-based adhesion aids, titanium-based adhesion aids, compounds having a sulfonamide structure and compounds having a thiourea structure, phosphoric acid derivative compounds, and β-ketoesters. compounds, amino compounds, and the like.
〔シランカップリング剤〕
 シランカップリング剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0316に記載の化合物、特開2018-173573の段落0067~0078に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、特開2011-128358号公報の段落0050~0058に記載のように異なる2種以上のシランカップリング剤を用いることも好ましい。また、シランカップリング剤は、下記化合物を用いることも好ましい。以下の式中、Meはメチル基を、Etはエチル基を表す。
〔Silane coupling agent〕
Examples of the silane coupling agent include compounds described in paragraph 0316 of International Publication No. 2021/112189 and compounds described in paragraphs 0067 to 0078 of JP-A-2018-173573, the contents of which are herein described. incorporated. It is also preferable to use two or more different silane coupling agents as described in paragraphs 0050 to 0058 of JP-A-2011-128358. Moreover, it is also preferable to use the following compound as a silane coupling agent. In the following formulas, Me represents a methyl group and Et represents an ethyl group.
 他のシランカップリング剤としては、例えば、ビニルトリメトキシシラン、ビニルトリエトキシシラン、2-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、p-スチリルトリメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-アクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-トリエトキシシリル-N-(1,3-ジメチル-ブチリデン)プロピルアミン、N-フェニル-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、トリス-(トリメトキシシリルプロピル)イソシアヌレート、3-ウレイドプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、3-メルカプトプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-メルカプトプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-イソシアネートプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-トリメトキシシリルプロピルコハク酸無水物が挙げられる。これらは1種単独または2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。 Other silane coupling agents include, for example, vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, 2-(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-glycid. xypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, p-styryltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane Silane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, N-2-(aminoethyl)-3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, N-2 -(aminoethyl)-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3-triethoxysilyl-N-(1,3-dimethyl-butylidene)propylamine, N-phenyl-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, tris-(trimethoxysilylpropyl)isocyanurate, 3-ureidopropyltrialkoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-isocyanate propyltriethoxysilane, 3-trimethoxysilylpropylsuccinic anhydride. These can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
〔アルミニウム系接着助剤〕
 アルミニウム系接着助剤としては、例えば、アルミニウムトリス(エチルアセトアセテート)、アルミニウムトリス(アセチルアセトネート)、エチルアセトアセテートアルミニウムジイソプロピレート等を挙げることができる。
[Aluminum Adhesion Aid]
Examples of aluminum-based adhesion promoters include aluminum tris(ethylacetoacetate), aluminum tris(acetylacetonate), ethylacetoacetate aluminum diisopropylate, and the like.
 また、その他の金属接着性改良剤としては、特開2014-186186号公報の段落0046~0049に記載の化合物、特開2013-072935号公報の段落0032~0043に記載のスルフィド系化合物を用いることもでき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Further, as other metal adhesion improvers, compounds described in paragraphs 0046 to 0049 of JP-A-2014-186186, and sulfide compounds described in paragraphs 0032-0043 of JP-A-2013-072935 can be used. can also be used, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 金属接着性改良剤の含有量は特定樹脂100質量部に対して、好ましくは0.01~30質量部であり、より好ましくは0.1~10質量部の範囲であり、更に好ましくは0.5~5質量部の範囲である。上記下限値以上とすることでパターンと金属層との接着性が良好となり、上記上限値以下とすることでパターンの耐熱性、機械特性が良好となる。金属接着性改良剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。2種以上用いる場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The content of the metal adhesion improver is preferably 0.01 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass, and still more preferably 0.01 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the specific resin. It is in the range of 5 to 5 parts by mass. When it is at least the above lower limit value, the adhesiveness between the pattern and the metal layer is improved, and when it is at most the above upper limit value, the heat resistance and mechanical properties of the pattern are improved. One type of metal adhesion improver may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, the total is preferably within the above range.
<マイグレーション抑制剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、マイグレーション抑制剤を更に含むことが好ましい。マイグレーション抑制剤を含むことにより、金属層(金属配線)由来の金属イオンが膜内へ移動することを効果的に抑制可能となる。
<Migration inhibitor>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably further contains a migration inhibitor. By including the migration inhibitor, it becomes possible to effectively suppress the migration of metal ions derived from the metal layer (metal wiring) into the film.
 マイグレーション抑制剤としては、特に制限はないが、複素環(ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、イミダゾール環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピラゾール環、イソオキサゾール環、イソチアゾール環、テトラゾール環、ピリジン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環、ピペリジン環、ピペラジン環、モルホリン環、2H-ピラン環及び6H-ピラン環、トリアジン環)を有する化合物、チオ尿素類及びスルファニル基を有する化合物、ヒンダードフェノール系化合物、サリチル酸誘導体系化合物、ヒドラジド誘導体系化合物が挙げられる。特に、1,2,4-トリアゾール、ベンゾトリアゾール、3-アミノ-1,2,4-トリアゾール、3,5-ジアミノ-1,2,4-トリアゾール等のトリアゾール系化合物、1H-テトラゾール、5-フェニルテトラゾール、5-アミノ―1H-テトラゾール等のテトラゾール系化合物が好ましく使用できる。 Migration inhibitors are not particularly limited, but heterocyclic rings (pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrazole ring, isoxazole ring, isothiazole ring, tetrazole ring, pyridine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, 2H-pyran ring and 6H-pyran ring, triazine ring), compounds having thioureas and sulfanyl groups, hindered phenolic compounds , salicylic acid derivative-based compounds, and hydrazide derivative-based compounds. In particular, triazole compounds such as 1,2,4-triazole, benzotriazole, 3-amino-1,2,4-triazole, 3,5-diamino-1,2,4-triazole, 1H-tetrazole, 5- Tetrazole compounds such as phenyltetrazole and 5-amino-1H-tetrazole can be preferably used.
 又はハロゲンイオンなどの陰イオンを捕捉するイオントラップ剤を使用することもできる。 Alternatively, an ion trapping agent that traps anions such as halogen ions can be used.
 その他のマイグレーション抑制剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0304に記載の化合物が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Other migration inhibitors include, for example, compounds described in paragraph 0304 of International Publication No. 2021/112189. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 マイグレーション抑制剤の具体例としては、下記化合物を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of migration inhibitors include the following compounds.
 本発明の樹脂組成物がマイグレーション抑制剤を有する場合、マイグレーション抑制剤の含有量は、本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~5.0質量%であることが好ましく、0.05~2.0質量%であることがより好ましく、0.1~1.0質量%であることが更に好ましい。 When the resin composition of the present invention has a migration inhibitor, the content of the migration inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. , more preferably 0.05 to 2.0% by mass, and even more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass.
 マイグレーション抑制剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。マイグレーション抑制剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 Only one type of migration inhibitor may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more migration inhibitors are used, the total is preferably within the above range.
<重合禁止剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、重合禁止剤を含むことが好ましい。重合禁止剤としてはフェノール系化合物、キノン系化合物、アミノ系化合物、N-オキシルフリーラジカル化合物系化合物、ニトロ系化合物、ニトロソ系化合物、ヘテロ芳香環系化合物、金属化合物などが挙げられる。
<Polymerization inhibitor>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization inhibitor. Polymerization inhibitors include phenol compounds, quinone compounds, amino compounds, N-oxyl free radical compounds, nitro compounds, nitroso compounds, heteroaromatic compounds, metal compounds and the like.
 重合禁止剤の具体的な化合物としては、国際公開第2021/112189の段落0310に記載の化合物、p-ヒドロキノン、o-ヒドロキノン、4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、フェノキサジン等が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific compounds of the polymerization inhibitor include compounds described in paragraph 0310 of International Publication No. 2021/112189, p-hydroquinone, o-hydroquinone, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1- Oxyl free radical, phenoxazine, and the like. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 本発明の樹脂組成物が重合禁止剤を有する場合、重合禁止剤の含有量は、本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~20質量%であることが好ましく、0.02~15質量%であることがより好ましく、0.05~10質量%であることが更に好ましい。 When the resin composition of the present invention has a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. It is more preferably from 0.02 to 15% by mass, and even more preferably from 0.05 to 10% by mass.
 重合禁止剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。重合禁止剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 Only one type of polymerization inhibitor may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more polymerization inhibitors are used, the total is preferably within the above range.
〔ウレア化合物、カルボジイミド化合物、イソウレア化合物〕
 破断伸び、及び、金属又は樹脂層との密着性の観点からは、本発明の樹脂組成物は、ウレア化合物、カルボジイミド化合物及びイソウレア化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物(以下、「ウレア化合物等」ともいう)を含んでもよい。
 ウレア化合物としては、下記式(UR-1)で表される化合物が、カルボジイミド化合物としては、下記(UR-2)で表される化合物が、イソウレア化合物としては、下記式(UR-3)で表される化合物が挙げられる。
[Urea compound, carbodiimide compound, isourea compound]
From the viewpoint of elongation at break and adhesion to a metal or resin layer, the resin composition of the present invention contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of urea compounds, carbodiimide compounds and isourea compounds (hereinafter referred to as " (also referred to as "urea compounds, etc.").
The urea compound is a compound represented by the following formula (UR-1), the carbodiimide compound is a compound represented by the following formula (UR-2), and the isourea compound is a compound represented by the following formula (UR-3). compounds represented.
 式(UR-1)、式(UR-2)又は式(UR-3)中、R11及びR12はそれぞれ独立に、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基を表し、R21及びR22はそれぞれ独立に、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基を表し、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基を表し、R33は置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基を表す。
 式(UR-1)中、R11及びR12はそれぞれ独立に、無置換の炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基、又は、置換基として第一級アミン塩構造、第二級アミン塩構造、第三級アミノ基、第三級アミン塩構造、及び、第四級アンモニウム基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の置換基を有する炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基が好ましく、無置換の炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基がより好ましい。
 R11及びR12における無置換の炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基としては、無置換の炭素数1~7の飽和脂肪族炭化水素基が好ましく、無置換の炭素数2~7の飽和脂肪族炭化水素基がより好ましく、エチル基、イソプロピル基、t-ブチル基又はシクロへキシル基がより好ましい。
In formula (UR-1), formula (UR-2) or formula (UR-3), R 11 and R 12 are each independently an optionally substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon having 1 to 7 carbon atoms group, R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an optionally substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a substituted group R 33 represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
In formula (UR-1), R 11 and R 12 are each independently an unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, or a primary amine salt structure or secondary amine salt as a substituent. structure, a tertiary amino group, a tertiary amine salt structure, and a quaternary ammonium group. , and unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 7 carbon atoms are more preferable.
The unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms for R 11 and R 12 is preferably an unsubstituted saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, and an unsubstituted A saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group is more preferred, and an ethyl group, isopropyl group, t-butyl group or cyclohexyl group is more preferred.
 式(UR-1)中、R11及びR12はそれぞれ独立に、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基、チオール基、及び、アルキルチオ基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の置換基を有する炭素数2~7の脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよい。
 上記炭素数2~7の脂肪族炭化水素基は、上記置換基を2以上有してもよいが、上記置換基を1つのみ有する態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。
In formula (UR-1), R 11 and R 12 each independently have 2 to 2 carbon atoms having at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, a thiol group, and an alkylthio group. 7 may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
Although the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 7 carbon atoms may have two or more substituents, an embodiment having only one substituent is also one of preferred embodiments of the present invention.
 式(UR-2)中、R21及びR22はそれぞれ独立に、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基を表す。
 式(UR-2)中、R21及びR22は、無置換の炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基、又は、置換基としてアミノ基又は第四級アンモニウム基を有する炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基が好ましく、無置換の炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基がより好ましい。
 式(UR-2)中、R21及びR22における上記無置換の炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基、又は、上記置換基を有する炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基の好ましい態様は、それぞれ、R11及びR12の説明において示したものと同様である。
In formula (UR-2), R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an optionally substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms.
In formula (UR-2), R 21 and R 22 are unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, or 1 to 7 carbon atoms having an amino group or a quaternary ammonium group as a substituent. is preferred, and an unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms is more preferred.
In formula (UR-2), the unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms in R 21 and R 22 or the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms having the substituent is preferable. Aspects are similar to those shown in the description of R 11 and R 12 respectively.
 式(UR-3)中、R31及びR32は、無置換の炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基、又は、置換基としてアミノ基又は第四級アンモニウム基を有する炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基が好ましく、無置換の炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基がより好ましい。
 式(UR-3)中、R31及びR32における上記無置換の炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基、又は、上記置換基を有する炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基の好ましい態様は、それぞれ、R11及びR12の説明において示したものと同様である。
In formula (UR-3), R 31 and R 32 are unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, or 1 to 7 carbon atoms having an amino group or a quaternary ammonium group as a substituent. is preferred, and an unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms is more preferred.
In formula (UR-3), R 31 and R 32 are preferably the above unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms or the above substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms. Aspects are similar to those shown in the description of R 11 and R 12 respectively.
 式(UR-3)中、R33は置換基を有してもよい炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基を表し、無置換の炭素数1~7の脂肪族炭化水素基であることが好ましく、無置換の炭素数1~7の飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~4の飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であることがより好ましい。
 式(UR-3)中、R33としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基又はt-ブチル基が好ましく、エチル基がより好ましい。
In formula (UR-3), R 33 represents an optionally substituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms and is an unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms. is preferred, an unsubstituted saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms is more preferred, and a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferred.
In formula (UR-3), R 33 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group or a t-butyl group, more preferably an ethyl group.
 ウレア化合物等の具体例としては、ジシクロへキシルウレア、ジイソプロピルウレア、ジシクロへキシルカルボジイミド、ジイソプロピルカルボジイミド、ジシクロへキシルイソウレア、ジイソプロピルイソウレア等が挙げられるが、これに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of urea compounds include, but are not limited to, dicyclohexylurea, diisopropylurea, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, diisopropylcarbodiimide, dicyclohexylisourea, and diisopropylisourea.
 ウレア化合物等の合計含有量は、特定樹脂100質量部に対して0.1~10.0質量部が好ましく、0.5~8.0質量部がより好ましく、1.0~6.0質量部が更に好ましい。
 ウレア化合物等は、1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合、それらの合計含有量が上述の範囲内であることが好ましい。
The total content of urea compounds and the like is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 parts by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 8.0 parts by mass, and 1.0 to 6.0 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the specific resin. Part is more preferred.
The urea compounds and the like may be used singly or in combination of two or more. When two or more are used in combination, the total content thereof is preferably within the above range.
<その他の添加剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、本発明の効果が得られる範囲で、必要に応じて、各種の添加物、例えば、界面活性剤、高級脂肪酸誘導体、熱重合開始剤、無機粒子、紫外線吸収剤、有機チタン化合物、酸化防止剤、凝集防止剤、フェノール系化合物、他の高分子化合物、可塑剤及びその他の助剤類(例えば、消泡剤、難燃剤など)等を配合することができる。これらの成分を適宜含有させることにより、膜物性などの性質を調整することができる。これらの成分は、例えば、特開2012-003225号公報の段落番号0183以降(対応する米国特許出願公開第2013/0034812号明細書の段落番号0237)の記載、特開2008-250074号公報の段落番号0101~0104、0107~0109等の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。これらの添加剤を配合する場合、その合計配合量は本発明の樹脂組成物の固形分の3質量%以下とすることが好ましい。
<Other additives>
The resin composition of the present invention may optionally contain various additives, such as surfactants, higher fatty acid derivatives, thermal polymerization initiators, inorganic particles, ultraviolet absorbers, as long as the effects of the present invention can be obtained. Organic titanium compounds, antioxidants, anti-agglomerating agents, phenolic compounds, other polymer compounds, plasticizers and other auxiliaries (for example, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, etc.) can be blended. Properties such as film physical properties can be adjusted by appropriately containing these components. These components are described, for example, from paragraph number 0183 of JP-A-2012-003225 (paragraph number 0237 of corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812), paragraph of JP-A-2008-250074 The descriptions of numbers 0101 to 0104, 0107 to 0109, etc. can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein. When these additives are blended, the total blending amount is preferably 3% by mass or less of the solid content of the resin composition of the present invention.
〔界面活性剤〕
 界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤、炭化水素系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。界面活性剤はノニオン型界面活性剤であってもよく、カチオン型界面活性剤であってもよく、アニオン型界面活性剤であってもよい。
[Surfactant]
As the surfactant, various surfactants such as fluorine-based surfactants, silicone-based surfactants, and hydrocarbon-based surfactants can be used. The surfactant may be a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, or an anionic surfactant.
 本発明の感光性樹脂組成物に界面活性剤を含有させることで、塗布液として調製したときの液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上し、塗布厚の均一性や省液性をより改善することができる。即ち、界面活性剤を含有する組成物を適用した塗布液を用いて膜形成する場合においては、被塗布面と塗布液との界面張力が低下して、被塗布面への濡れ性が改善され、被塗布面への塗布性が向上する。このため、厚みムラの小さい均一厚の膜形成をより好適に行うことができる。 By including a surfactant in the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, the liquid properties (especially fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved, and the uniformity of coating thickness and liquid saving are further improved. can do. That is, when a film is formed using a coating liquid to which a composition containing a surfactant is applied, the interfacial tension between the surface to be coated and the coating liquid is reduced, and the wettability to the surface to be coated is improved. , the coatability to the surface to be coated is improved. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably form a film having a uniform thickness with little unevenness in thickness.
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0328に記載の化合物が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができ、下記化合物も本発明で用いられるフッ素系界面活性剤として例示される。
Fluorinated surfactants include compounds described in paragraph 0328 of WO2021/112189. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
The fluorosurfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meta) A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used, and the following compounds are also exemplified as fluorine-based surfactants used in the present invention.
 上記の化合物の重量平均分子量は、好ましくは3,000~50,000であり、5,000~30,000であることがより好ましい。
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、エチレン性不飽和基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体をフッ素系界面活性剤として用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2010-164965号公報の段落0050~0090および段落0289~0295に記載された化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、市販品としては、例えばDIC(株)製のメガファックRS-101、RS-102、RS-718K等が挙げられる。
The weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3,000 to 50,000, more preferably 5,000 to 30,000.
A fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated group in a side chain can also be used as a fluorine-based surfactant. Specific examples include compounds described in paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and paragraphs 0289 to 0295 of JP-A-2010-164965, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Commercially available products include Megafac RS-101, RS-102 and RS-718K manufactured by DIC Corporation.
 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3~40質量%が好適であり、より好ましくは5~30質量%であり、特に好ましくは7~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorine-based surfactant is preferably 3-40% by mass, more preferably 5-30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7-25% by mass. A fluorosurfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of the thickness of the coating film and saving liquid, and has good solubility in the composition.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤、炭化水素系界面活性剤、ノニオン型界面活性剤、カチオン型界面活性剤、アニオン型界面活性剤としては、それぞれ、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0329~0334に記載の化合物が挙げられる。これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Silicone-based surfactants, hydrocarbon-based surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, and anionic surfactants are described in paragraphs 0329 to 0334 of WO 2021/112189, respectively. compound. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 界面活性剤は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種類以上を組み合わせてもよい。
界面活性剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.001~2.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~1.0質量%がより好ましい。
Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination.
The surfactant content is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
〔高級脂肪酸誘導体〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、酸素に起因する重合阻害を防止するために、ベヘン酸やベヘン酸アミドのような高級脂肪酸誘導体を添加して、塗布後の乾燥の過程で本発明の樹脂組成物の表面に偏在させてもよい。
[Higher Fatty Acid Derivative]
In the resin composition of the present invention, a higher fatty acid derivative such as behenic acid or behenic acid amide is added in order to prevent polymerization inhibition caused by oxygen. may be unevenly distributed on the surface of the
 また、高級脂肪酸誘導体は、国際公開第2015/199219号の段落0155に記載の化合物を用いることもでき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In addition, the compound described in paragraph 0155 of International Publication No. 2015/199219 can also be used as the higher fatty acid derivative, the content of which is incorporated herein.
 本発明の樹脂組成物が高級脂肪酸誘導体を有する場合、高級脂肪酸誘導体の含有量は、本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~10質量%であることが好ましい。高級脂肪酸誘導体は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。高級脂肪酸誘導体が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 When the resin composition of the present invention contains a higher fatty acid derivative, the content of the higher fatty acid derivative is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass relative to the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. Only one type of higher fatty acid derivative may be used, or two or more types thereof may be used. When two or more higher fatty acid derivatives are used, the total is preferably within the above range.
〔熱重合開始剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、熱重合開始剤を含んでもよく、特に熱ラジカル重合開始剤を含んでもよい。熱ラジカル重合開始剤は、熱のエネルギーによってラジカルを発生し、重合性を有する化合物の重合反応を開始又は促進させる化合物である。熱ラジカル重合開始剤を添加することによって樹脂及び重合性化合物の重合反応を進行させることもできるので、より耐溶剤性を向上できる。また、上述した光重合開始剤も熱により重合を開始する機能を有する場合があり、熱重合開始剤として添加することができる場合がある。
[Thermal polymerization initiator]
The resin composition of the present invention may contain a thermal polymerization initiator, particularly a thermal radical polymerization initiator. A thermal radical polymerization initiator is a compound that generates radicals by thermal energy and initiates or accelerates the polymerization reaction of a polymerizable compound. By adding a thermal radical polymerization initiator, the polymerization reaction of the resin and the polymerizable compound can be advanced, so that the solvent resistance can be further improved. Moreover, the photopolymerization initiator described above may also have a function of initiating polymerization by heat, and may be added as a thermal polymerization initiator.
 熱ラジカル重合開始剤として、具体的には、特開2008-063554号公報の段落0074~0118に記載されている化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of thermal radical polymerization initiators include compounds described in paragraphs 0074 to 0118 of JP-A-2008-063554, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 熱重合開始剤を含む場合、その含有量は、本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し0.1~30質量%であることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.1~20質量%であり、更に好ましくは0.5~15質量%である。熱重合開始剤は1種のみ含有していてもよいし、2種以上含有していてもよい。熱重合開始剤を2種以上含有する場合は、合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 When a thermal polymerization initiator is included, its content is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resin composition of the present invention. , more preferably 0.5 to 15% by mass. One type of thermal polymerization initiator may be contained, or two or more types may be contained. When two or more thermal polymerization initiators are contained, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
〔無機粒子〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、無機粒子を含んでもよい。無機粒子として、具体的には、炭酸カルシウム、リン酸カルシウム、シリカ、カオリン、タルク、二酸化チタン、アルミナ、硫酸バリウム、フッ化カルシウム、フッ化リチウム、ゼオライト、硫化モリブデン、ガラス等を含むことができる。
[Inorganic particles]
The resin composition of the present invention may contain inorganic particles. Specific examples of inorganic particles include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, silica, kaolin, talc, titanium dioxide, alumina, barium sulfate, calcium fluoride, lithium fluoride, zeolite, molybdenum sulfide, and glass.
 上記無機粒子の平均粒子径としては、0.01~2.0μmが好ましく、0.02~1.5μmがより好ましく、0.03~1.0μmがさらに好ましく、0.04~0.5μmが特に好ましい。
 無機粒子の上記平均粒子径は、一次粒子径であり、また体積平均粒子径である。体積平均粒子径は、Nanotrac WAVE II   EX-150(日機装社製)による動的光散乱法で測定できる。
上記測定が困難である場合は、遠心沈降光透過法、X線透過法、レーザー回折・散乱法で測定することもできる。
The average particle diameter of the inorganic particles is preferably 0.01 to 2.0 μm, more preferably 0.02 to 1.5 μm, still more preferably 0.03 to 1.0 μm, and 0.04 to 0.5 μm. Especially preferred.
The average particle size of the inorganic particles is the primary particle size and the volume average particle size. The volume average particle size can be measured by a dynamic light scattering method using Nanotrac WAVE II EX-150 (manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.).
If the above measurement is difficult, the centrifugal sedimentation light transmission method, X-ray transmission method, or laser diffraction/scattering method can be used.
〔紫外線吸収剤〕
 本発明の組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含んでいてもよい。紫外線吸収剤としては、サリシレート系、ベンゾフェノン系、ベンゾトリアゾール系、置換アクリロニトリル系、トリアジン系などの紫外線吸収剤を使用することができる。
 紫外線吸収剤の具体例としては、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0341~0342に記載の化合物が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Ultraviolet absorber]
The composition of the present invention may contain an ultraviolet absorber. As the ultraviolet absorber, salicylate-based, benzophenone-based, benzotriazole-based, substituted acrylonitrile-based, and triazine-based ultraviolet absorbers can be used.
Specific examples of UV absorbers include compounds described in paragraphs 0341 to 0342 of WO2021/112189. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 本発明においては、上記各種の紫外線吸収剤は一種を単独で用いてもよく、二種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 本発明の組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含んでも含まなくてもよいが、含む場合、紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分質量に対して、0.001質量%以上1質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.01質量%以上0.1質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
In the present invention, the above various ultraviolet absorbers may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
The composition of the present invention may or may not contain an ultraviolet absorber, but when it does, the content of the ultraviolet absorber is 0.001% by mass with respect to the total solid mass of the composition of the present invention. It is preferably at least 1% by mass, more preferably at least 0.01% by mass and not more than 0.1% by mass.
〔有機チタン化合物〕
 本実施形態の樹脂組成物は、有機チタン化合物を含有してもよい。樹脂組成物が有機チタン化合物を含有することにより、低温で硬化した場合であっても耐薬品性に優れる樹脂層を形成できる。
[Organic titanium compound]
The resin composition of this embodiment may contain an organic titanium compound. By containing the organic titanium compound in the resin composition, it is possible to form a resin layer having excellent chemical resistance even when cured at a low temperature.
 使用可能な有機チタン化合物としては、チタン原子に有機基が共有結合又はイオン結合を介して結合しているものが挙げられる。
 有機チタン化合物の具体例を、以下のI)~VII)に示す:
 I)チタンキレート化合物:中でも、樹脂組成物の保存安定性がよく、良好な硬化パターンが得られることから、アルコキシ基を2個以上有するチタンキレート化合物がより好ましい。具体的な例は、チタニウムビス(トリエタノールアミン)ジイソプロポキサイド、チタニウムジ(n-ブトキサイド)ビス(2,4-ペンタンジオネート)、チタニウムジイソプロポキサイドビス(2,4-ペンタンジオネート)、チタニウムジイソプロポキサイドビス(テトラメチルヘプタンジオネート)、チタニウムジイソプロポキサイドビス(エチルアセトアセテート)等である。
 II)テトラアルコキシチタン化合物:例えば、チタニウムテトラ(n-ブトキサイド)、チタニウムテトラエトキサイド、チタニウムテトラ(2-エチルヘキソキサイド)、チタニウムテトライソブトキサイド、チタニウムテトライソプロポキサイド、チタニウムテトラメトキサイド、チタニウムテトラメトキシプロポキサイド、チタニウムテトラメチルフェノキサイド、チタニウムテトラ(n-ノニロキサイド)、チタニウムテトラ(n-プロポキサイド)、チタニウムテトラステアリロキサイド、チタニウムテトラキス[ビス{2,2-(アリロキシメチル)ブトキサイド}]等である。
 III)チタノセン化合物:例えば、ペンタメチルシクロペンタジエニルチタニウムトリメトキサイド、ビス(η5-2,4-シクロペンタジエン-1-イル)ビス(2,6-ジフルオロフェニル)チタニウム、ビス(η5-2,4-シクロペンタジエン-1-イル)ビス(2,6-ジフルオロ-3-(1H-ピロール-1-イル)フェニル)チタニウム等である。
 IV)モノアルコキシチタン化合物:例えば、チタニウムトリス(ジオクチルホスフェート)イソプロポキサイド、チタニウムトリス(ドデシルベンゼンスルホネート)イソプロポキサイド等である。
 V)チタニウムオキサイド化合物:例えば、チタニウムオキサイドビス(ペンタンジオネート)、チタニウムオキサイドビス(テトラメチルヘプタンジオネート)、フタロシアニンチタニウムオキサイド等である。
 VI)チタニウムテトラアセチルアセトネート化合物:例えば、チタニウムテトラアセチルアセトネート等である。
VII)チタネートカップリング剤:例えば、イソプロピルトリドデシルベンゼンスルホニルチタネート等である。
Organotitanium compounds that can be used include those in which organic groups are attached to titanium atoms through covalent or ionic bonds.
Specific examples of organotitanium compounds are shown below in I) to VII):
I) Titanium chelate compound: Among them, a titanium chelate compound having two or more alkoxy groups is more preferable because the storage stability of the resin composition is good and a good curing pattern can be obtained. Specific examples are titanium bis(triethanolamine) diisopropoxide, titanium di(n-butoxide) bis(2,4-pentanedionate), titanium diisopropoxide bis(2,4-pentanedionate ), titanium diisopropoxide bis(tetramethylheptanedionate), titanium diisopropoxide bis(ethylacetoacetate), and the like.
II) Tetraalkoxytitanium compounds: for example titanium tetra(n-butoxide), titanium tetraethoxide, titanium tetra(2-ethylhexoxide), titanium tetraisobutoxide, titanium tetraisopropoxide, titanium tetramethoxide. , titanium tetramethoxypropoxide, titanium tetramethylphenoxide, titanium tetra(n-nonyloxide), titanium tetra(n-propoxide), titanium tetrastearyloxide, titanium tetrakis[bis{2,2-(allyloxymethyl) butoxide}] and the like.
III) Titanocene compounds: for example, pentamethylcyclopentadienyltitanium trimethoxide, bis(η5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluorophenyl)titanium, bis(η5-2, 4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluoro-3-(1H-pyrrol-1-yl)phenyl)titanium and the like.
IV) Monoalkoxy titanium compounds: for example, titanium tris(dioctylphosphate) isopropoxide, titanium tris(dodecylbenzenesulfonate) isopropoxide and the like.
V) Titanium oxide compounds: for example, titanium oxide bis(pentanedionate), titanium oxide bis(tetramethylheptanedionate), phthalocyanine titanium oxide and the like.
VI) Titanium tetraacetylacetonate compounds: such as titanium tetraacetylacetonate.
VII) Titanate coupling agent: For example, isopropyltridodecylbenzenesulfonyl titanate and the like.
 中でも、有機チタン化合物としては、上記I)チタンキレート化合物、II)テトラアルコキシチタン化合物、及びIII)チタノセン化合物から成る群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の化合物であることが、より良好な耐薬品性を奏するという観点から好ましい。特に、チタニウムジイソプロポキサイドビス(エチルアセトアセテート)、チタニウムテトラ(n-ブトキサイド)、及びビス(η5-2,4-シクロペンタジエン-1-イル)ビス(2,6-ジフルオロ-3-(1H-ピロール-1-イル)フェニル)チタニウムが好ましい。 Among them, as the organotitanium compound, at least one compound selected from the group consisting of I) titanium chelate compounds, II) tetraalkoxytitanium compounds, and III) titanocene compounds provides better chemical resistance. It is preferable from the viewpoint of performance. In particular, titanium diisopropoxide bis(ethylacetoacetate), titanium tetra(n-butoxide) and bis(η5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluoro-3-(1H) -pyrrol-1-yl)phenyl)titanium is preferred.
 有機チタン化合物を配合する場合、その配合量は、特定樹脂100質量部に対し、0.05~10質量部であることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.1~2質量部である。配合量が0.05質量部以上である場合、得られる硬化パターンに良好な耐熱性及び耐薬品性がより効果的に発現し、一方10質量部以下である場合、組成物の保存安定性により優れる。 When the organic titanium compound is blended, the blending amount is preferably 0.05 to 10 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 2 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the specific resin. When the amount is 0.05 parts by mass or more, the resulting cured pattern exhibits good heat resistance and chemical resistance more effectively. Excellent.
〔酸化防止剤〕
本発明の組成物は、酸化防止剤を含んでいてもよい。添加剤として酸化防止剤を含有することで、硬化後の膜の伸度特性や、金属材料との密着性を向上させることができる。酸化防止剤としては、フェノール化合物、亜リン酸エステル化合物、チオエーテル化合物などが挙げられる。酸化防止剤の具体例としては、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0348~0357に記載の化合物が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
〔Antioxidant〕
The compositions of the present invention may contain antioxidants. By containing an antioxidant as an additive, it is possible to improve the elongation properties of the cured film and the adhesion to metal materials. Antioxidants include phenol compounds, phosphite ester compounds, thioether compounds and the like. Specific examples of antioxidants include compounds described in paragraphs 0348 to 0357 of WO2021/112189. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 酸化防止剤の添加量は、特定樹脂100質量部に対し、0.1~10質量部が好ましく、0.5~5質量部がより好ましい。添加量を0.1質量部以上とすることにより、高温高湿環境下においても伸度特性や金属材料に対する密着性向上の効果が得られやすく、また10質量部以下とすることにより、例えば感光剤との相互作用により、樹脂組成物の感度が向上する。酸化防止剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The amount of antioxidant to be added is preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 5 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the specific resin. By making the addition amount 0.1 parts by mass or more, the effect of improving elongation characteristics and adhesion to metal materials can be easily obtained even in a high-temperature and high-humidity environment. The interaction with the agent improves the sensitivity of the resin composition. Only one kind of antioxidant may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used. When two or more kinds are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
〔凝集防止剤〕
 本実施形態の樹脂組成物は、必要に応じて凝集防止剤を含有してもよい。凝集防止剤としては、ポリアクリル酸ナトリウム等が挙げられる。
[Anti-aggregation agent]
The resin composition of the present embodiment may contain an anti-aggregation agent as necessary. Anti-aggregation agents include sodium polyacrylate and the like.
 本発明においては、凝集防止剤は一種を単独で用いてもよく、二種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 本発明の組成物は、凝集防止剤を含んでも含まなくてもよいが、含む場合、凝集防止剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分質量に対して、0.01質量%以上10質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.02質量%以上5質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
In the present invention, the aggregation inhibitor may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The composition of the present invention may or may not contain an anti-aggregating agent, but when it is included, the content of the anti-aggregating agent is 0.01% by mass relative to the total solid mass of the composition of the present invention. It is preferably at least 10% by mass, more preferably at least 0.02% by mass and not more than 5% by mass.
〔フェノール系化合物〕
 本実施形態の樹脂組成物は、必要に応じてフェノール系化合物を含有してもよい。フェノール系化合物としては、Bis-Z、BisP-EZ、TekP-4HBPA、TrisP-HAP、TrisP-PA、BisOCHP-Z、BisP-MZ、BisP-PZ、BisP-IPZ、BisOCP-IPZ、BisP-CP、BisRS-2P、BisRS-3P、BisP-OCHP、メチレントリス-FR-CR、BisRS-26X(以上、商品名、本州化学工業(株)製)、BIP-PC、BIR-PC、BIR-PTBP、BIR-BIPC-F(以上、商品名、旭有機材工業(株)製)等が挙げられる。
[Phenolic compound]
The resin composition of the present embodiment may contain a phenolic compound as necessary. Examples of phenolic compounds include Bis-Z, BisP-EZ, TekP-4HBPA, TrisP-HAP, TrisP-PA, BisOCHP-Z, BisP-MZ, BisP-PZ, BisP-IPZ, BisOCP-IPZ, BisP-CP, BisRS-2P, BisRS-3P, BisP-OCHP, methylene tris-FR-CR, BisRS-26X (these are trade names, manufactured by Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), BIP-PC, BIR-PC, BIR-PTBP, BIR -BIPC-F (these are trade names, manufactured by Asahi Organic Chemicals Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 本発明においては、フェノール系化合物は一種を単独で用いてもよく、二種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 本発明の組成物は、フェノール系化合物を含んでも含まなくてもよいが、含む場合、フェノール系化合物の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分質量に対して、0.01質量%以上30質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.02質量%以上20質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
In the present invention, one type of phenolic compound may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination.
The composition of the present invention may or may not contain a phenolic compound, but if it does, the content of the phenolic compound is 0.01% by mass relative to the total solid mass of the composition of the present invention. It is preferably at least 30% by mass, more preferably at least 0.02% by mass and not more than 20% by mass.
〔他の高分子化合物〕
 他の高分子化合物としては、シロキサン樹脂、(メタ)アクリル酸を共重合した(メタ)アクリルポリマー、ノボラック樹脂、レゾール樹脂、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂およびそれらの共重合体などが挙げられる。他の高分子化合物はメチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、エポキシ基などの架橋基が導入された変性体であってもよい。
[Other polymer compounds]
Other polymer compounds include siloxane resins, (meth)acrylic polymers obtained by copolymerizing (meth)acrylic acid, novolac resins, resole resins, polyhydroxystyrene resins, and copolymers thereof. Other polymer compounds may be modified products into which cross-linking groups such as methylol groups, alkoxymethyl groups and epoxy groups have been introduced.
 本発明においては、他の高分子化合物は一種を単独で用いてもよく、二種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 本発明の組成物は、他の高分子化合物を含んでも含まなくてもよいが、含む場合、他の高分子化合物の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分質量に対して、0.01質量%以上30質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.02質量%以上20質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
In the present invention, other polymer compounds may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
The composition of the present invention may or may not contain other polymer compounds, but when it does, the content of the other polymer compound is 0 relative to the total solid mass of the composition of the present invention. It is preferably 0.01% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less, more preferably 0.02% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less.
<樹脂組成物の特性>
 本発明の樹脂組成物の粘度は、樹脂組成物の固形分濃度により調整できる。塗布膜厚の観点から、1,000mm/s~12,000mm/sが好ましく、2,000mm/s~10,000mm/sがより好ましく、2,500mm/s~8,000mm/sが更に好ましい。上記範囲であれば、均一性の高い塗布膜を得ることが容易になる。1,000mm/s以上であれば、例えば再配線用絶縁膜として必要とされる膜厚で塗布することが容易であり、12,000mm/s以下であれば、塗布面状に優れた塗膜が得られる。
<Characteristics of resin composition>
The viscosity of the resin composition of the present invention can be adjusted by adjusting the solid content concentration of the resin composition. From the viewpoint of coating film thickness, it is preferably 1,000 mm 2 /s to 12,000 mm 2 /s, more preferably 2,000 mm 2 /s to 10,000 mm 2 /s, and 2,500 mm 2 /s to 8,000 mm. 2 /s is more preferred. If it is the said range, it will become easy to obtain a coating film with high uniformity. If it is 1,000 mm 2 /s or more, it is easy to apply the film with a film thickness required, for example, as an insulating film for rewiring . A coating is obtained.
<樹脂組成物の含有物質についての制限>
 本発明の樹脂組成物の含水率は、2.0質量%未満であることが好ましく、1.5質量%未満であることがより好ましく、1.0質量%未満であることが更に好ましい。2.0%未満であれば、樹脂組成物の保存安定性が向上する。
 水分の含有量を維持する方法としては、保管条件における湿度の調整、保管時の収容容器の空隙率低減などが挙げられる。
<Restrictions on Substances Contained in Resin Composition>
The water content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably less than 2.0% by mass, more preferably less than 1.5% by mass, and even more preferably less than 1.0% by mass. If it is less than 2.0%, the storage stability of the resin composition is improved.
Methods for maintaining the moisture content include adjusting the humidity in the storage conditions and reducing the porosity of the storage container during storage.
 本発明の樹脂組成物の金属含有量は、絶縁性の観点から、5質量ppm(parts per million)未満が好ましく、1質量ppm未満がより好ましく、0.5質量ppm未満が更に好ましい。金属としては、ナトリウム、カリウム、マグネシウム、カルシウム、鉄、銅、クロム、ニッケルなどが挙げられるが、有機化合物と金属との錯体として含まれる金属は除く。金属を複数含む場合は、これらの金属の合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 From the viewpoint of insulation, the metal content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably less than 5 mass ppm (parts per million), more preferably less than 1 mass ppm, and even more preferably less than 0.5 mass ppm. Examples of metals include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, copper, chromium, and nickel, but metals contained as complexes of organic compounds and metals are excluded. When multiple metals are included, the total of these metals is preferably within the above range.
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物に意図せずに含まれる金属不純物を低減する方法としては、本発明の樹脂組成物を構成する原料として金属含有量が少ない原料を選択する、本発明の樹脂組成物を構成する原料に対してフィルターろ過を行う、装置内をポリテトラフルオロエチレン等でライニングしてコンタミネーションを可能な限り抑制した条件下で蒸留を行う等の方法を挙げることができる。 In addition, as a method for reducing metal impurities unintentionally contained in the resin composition of the present invention, a raw material having a low metal content is selected as a raw material constituting the resin composition of the present invention. Examples include a method of performing filter filtration on the raw material constituting the product, and performing distillation under conditions in which contamination is suppressed as much as possible by lining the inside of the apparatus with polytetrafluoroethylene or the like.
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、半導体材料としての用途を考慮すると、ハロゲン原子の含有量が、配線腐食性の観点から、500質量ppm未満が好ましく、300質量ppm未満がより好ましく、200質量ppm未満が更に好ましい。中でも、ハロゲンイオンの状態で存在するものは、5質量ppm未満が好ましく、1質量ppm未満がより好ましく、0.5質量ppm未満が更に好ましい。ハロゲン原子としては、塩素原子及び臭素原子が挙げられる。塩素原子及び臭素原子、又は塩素イオン及び臭素イオンの合計がそれぞれ上記範囲であることが好ましい。
 ハロゲン原子の含有量を調節する方法としては、イオン交換処理などが好ましく挙げられる。
Considering the use as a semiconductor material, the resin composition of the present invention preferably has a halogen atom content of less than 500 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 300 ppm by mass, and less than 200 ppm by mass from the viewpoint of wiring corrosion. is more preferred. Among them, those present in the form of halogen ions are preferably less than 5 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 1 ppm by mass, and even more preferably less than 0.5 ppm by mass. Halogen atoms include chlorine and bromine atoms. It is preferable that the total amount of chlorine atoms and bromine atoms or chlorine ions and bromine ions is within the above ranges.
As a method for adjusting the content of halogen atoms, ion exchange treatment and the like are preferably mentioned.
 本発明の樹脂組成物の収容容器としては従来公知の収容容器を用いることができる。また、収容容器としては、原材料や本発明の樹脂組成物中への不純物混入を抑制することを目的に、容器内壁を6種6層の樹脂で構成された多層ボトルや、6種の樹脂を7層構造にしたボトルを使用することも好ましい。このような容器としては例えば特開2015-123351号公報に記載の容器が挙げられる。 A conventionally known container can be used as the container for the resin composition of the present invention. In addition, as the storage container, for the purpose of suppressing the contamination of the raw materials and the resin composition of the present invention, the inner wall of the container is a multi-layer bottle composed of 6 types and 6 layers of resin, and 6 types of resin are used. It is also preferred to use bottles with a seven-layer structure. Examples of such a container include the container described in JP-A-2015-123351.
<樹脂組成物の硬化物>
 本発明の樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、この樹脂組成物の硬化物を得ることができる。
 本発明の硬化物は、本発明の樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物である。
 樹脂組成物の硬化は加熱によるものであることが好ましく、加熱温度が120℃~400℃の範囲内であることがより好ましく、140℃~380℃の範囲内にあることが更に好ましく、170℃~350℃の範囲内にあることが特に好ましい。樹脂組成物の硬化物の形態は、特に限定されず、フィルム状、棒状、球状、ペレット状など、用途に合わせて選択することができる。本発明において、この硬化物は、フィルム状であることが好ましい。また、樹脂組成物のパターン加工によって、壁面への保護膜の形成、導通のためのビアホール形成、インピーダンスや静電容量あるいは内部応力の調整、放熱機能付与など、用途にあわせて、この硬化物の形状を選択することもできる。この硬化物(硬化物からなる膜)の膜厚は、0.5μm以上150μm以下であることが好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物を硬化した際の収縮率は、50%以下が好ましく、45%以下がより好ましく、40%以下が更に好ましい。ここで、収縮率は、樹脂組成物の硬化前後の体積変化の百分率を指し、下記の式より算出することができる。
 収縮率[%]=100-(硬化後の体積÷硬化前の体積)×100
<Cured product of resin composition>
By curing the resin composition of the present invention, a cured product of this resin composition can be obtained.
The cured product of the present invention is a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition of the present invention.
Curing of the resin composition is preferably by heating, and the heating temperature is more preferably in the range of 120°C to 400°C, further preferably in the range of 140°C to 380°C, and 170°C. It is particularly preferred to be in the range of -350°C. The form of the cured product of the resin composition is not particularly limited, and may be selected from film, rod, sphere, pellet, etc. according to the application. In the present invention, the cured product is preferably in the form of a film. In addition, pattern processing of the resin composition can be used to form protective films on walls, form via holes for conduction, adjust impedance, capacitance or internal stress, and impart heat dissipation functions. You can also choose the shape. The film thickness of the cured product (film made of the cured product) is preferably 0.5 μm or more and 150 μm or less.
The shrinkage ratio when the resin composition of the present invention is cured is preferably 50% or less, more preferably 45% or less, and even more preferably 40% or less. Here, the shrinkage ratio refers to the percentage change in volume of the resin composition before and after curing, and can be calculated from the following formula.
Shrinkage rate [%] = 100 - (volume after curing / volume before curing) x 100
<樹脂組成物の硬化物の特性>
 本発明の樹脂組成物の硬化物のイミド化反応率は、70%以上が好ましく、80%以上がより好ましく、90%以上が更に好ましい。70%以上であれば、機械特性に優れた硬化物となる場合がある。
 本発明の樹脂組成物の硬化物の破断伸びは、30%以上が好ましく、40%以上がより好ましく、50%以上が更に好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物の硬化物のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、180℃以上であることが好ましく、210℃以上であることがより好ましく、230℃以上であることがさらに好ましい。
<Characteristics of Cured Product of Resin Composition>
The imidization reaction rate of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 70% or higher, more preferably 80% or higher, and even more preferably 90% or higher. If it is 70% or more, a cured product having excellent mechanical properties may be obtained.
The elongation at break of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 30% or more, more preferably 40% or more, and even more preferably 50% or more.
The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 180° C. or higher, more preferably 210° C. or higher, and even more preferably 230° C. or higher.
<樹脂組成物の調製>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、上記各成分を混合して調製することができる。混合方法は特に限定はなく、従来公知の方法で行うことができる。
 混合は撹拌羽による混合、ボールミルによる混合、タンク自身を回転させる混合などを採用することができる。
 混合中の温度は10~30℃が好ましく、15~25℃がより好ましい。
<Preparation of resin composition>
The resin composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the components described above. The mixing method is not particularly limited, and conventionally known methods can be used.
Mixing can be performed by mixing with a stirring blade, mixing with a ball mill, mixing by rotating the tank itself, or the like.
The temperature during mixing is preferably 10-30°C, more preferably 15-25°C.
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物中のゴミや微粒子等の異物を除去する目的で、フィルターを用いたろ過を行うことが好ましい。フィルター孔径は、例えば5μm以下である態様が挙げられ、1μm以下が好ましく、0.5μm以下がより好ましく、0.1μm以下が更に好ましい。フィルターの材質は、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、ポリエチレン又はナイロンが好ましい。フィルターの材質がポリエチレンである場合はHDPE(高密度ポリエチレン)であることがより好ましい。フィルターは、有機溶剤であらかじめ洗浄したものを用いてもよい。フィルターろ過工程では、複数種のフィルターを直列又は並列に接続して用いてもよい。複数種のフィルターを使用する場合は、孔径又は材質が異なるフィルターを組み合わせて使用してもよい。接続態様としては、例えば、1段目として孔径1μmのHDPEフィルターを、2段目として孔径0.2μmのHDPEフィルターを、直列に接続した態様が挙げられる。また、各種材料を複数回ろ過してもよい。複数回ろ過する場合は、循環ろ過であってもよい。また、加圧してろ過を行ってもよい。加圧してろ過を行う場合、加圧する圧力は例えば0.01MPa以上1.0MPa以下である態様が挙げられ、0.03MPa以上0.9MPa以下が好ましく、0.05MPa以上0.7MPa以下がより好ましく、0.05MPa以上0.5MPa以下が更に好ましい。
 フィルターを用いたろ過の他、吸着材を用いた不純物の除去処理を行ってもよい。フィルターろ過と吸着材を用いた不純物除去処理とを組み合わせてもよい。吸着材としては、公知の吸着材を用いることができる。例えば、シリカゲル、ゼオライトなどの無機系吸着材、活性炭などの有機系吸着材が挙げられる。
 更にフィルターを用いたろ過後、ボトルに充填した樹脂組成物を減圧下に置き、脱気する工程を施しても良い。
Moreover, it is preferable to perform filtration using a filter for the purpose of removing foreign matters such as dust and fine particles in the resin composition of the present invention. The filter pore size is, for example, 5 μm or less, preferably 1 μm or less, more preferably 0.5 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.1 μm or less. The material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon. HDPE (high density polyethylene) is more preferable when the material of the filter is polyethylene. A filter that has been pre-washed with an organic solvent may be used. In the filter filtration step, multiple types of filters may be connected in series or in parallel for use. When multiple types of filters are used, filters with different pore sizes or materials may be used in combination. As a connection mode, for example, a mode in which an HDPE filter with a pore size of 1 μm is connected in series as a first stage and an HDPE filter with a pore size of 0.2 μm as a second stage are connected in series. Also, various materials may be filtered multiple times. When filtering multiple times, circulation filtration may be used. Moreover, you may filter by pressurizing. When performing filtration by pressurization, the pressure to be applied is, for example, 0.01 MPa or more and 1.0 MPa or less, preferably 0.03 MPa or more and 0.9 MPa or less, and more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.7 MPa or less. , more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.5 MPa or less.
In addition to filtration using a filter, impurities may be removed using an adsorbent. You may combine filter filtration and the impurity removal process using an adsorbent. A known adsorbent can be used as the adsorbent. Examples thereof include inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon.
Furthermore, after filtration using a filter, the resin composition filled in the bottle may be subjected to a degassing step under reduced pressure.
(硬化物の製造方法)
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、樹脂組成物を基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程を含むことが好ましい。
 また、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、上記膜形成工程、膜形成工程により形成された膜を選択的に露光する露光工程、及び、露光工程により露光された膜を現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程を含むことがより好ましい。
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、上記膜形成工程、上記露光工程、上記現像工程、並びに、現像工程により得られたパターンを加熱する加熱工程及び現像工程により得られたパターンを露光する現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方を含むことが特に好ましい。
 また、本発明の製造方法は、上記膜形成工程、及び、上記膜を加熱する工程を含むことも好ましい。
 以下、各工程の詳細について説明する。
(Method for producing cured product)
The method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a film forming step of applying the resin composition onto a substrate to form a film.
Further, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention includes the film forming step, an exposure step of selectively exposing the film formed in the film forming step, and developing the film exposed in the exposure step using a developer. It is more preferable to include a developing step of forming a pattern by
The method for producing a cured product of the present invention includes the film forming step, the exposing step, the developing step, and a heating step of heating the pattern obtained by the developing step, and after development of exposing the pattern obtained by the developing step. It is particularly preferred to include at least one of the exposure steps.
Moreover, the manufacturing method of the present invention preferably includes the film forming step and the step of heating the film.
Details of each step will be described below.
<膜形成工程>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程に用いることができる。
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、樹脂組成物を基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程を含むことが好ましい。
<Film forming process>
The resin composition of the present invention can be used in a film-forming step in which a film is formed by applying it onto a substrate.
The method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a film forming step of applying the resin composition onto a substrate to form a film.
〔基材〕
 基材の種類は、用途に応じて適宜定めることができるが、シリコン、窒化シリコン、ポリシリコン、酸化シリコン、アモルファスシリコンなどの半導体作製基材、石英、ガラス、光学フィルム、セラミック材料、蒸着膜、磁性膜、反射膜、Ni、Cu、Cr、Feなどの金属基材(例えば、金属から形成された基材、及び、金属層が例えばめっきや蒸着等により形成された基材のいずれであってもよい)、紙、SOG(Spin On Glass)、TFT(薄膜トランジスタ)アレイ基材、モールド基材、プラズマディスプレイパネル(PDP)の電極板などが挙げられ、特に制約されない。本発明では、特に、半導体作製基材が好ましく、シリコン基材、Cu基材およびモールド基材がより好ましい。
 また、これらの基材にはヘキサメチルジシラザン(HMDS)等による密着層や酸化層などの層が表面に設けられていてもよい。
 また、基材の形状は特に限定されず、円形状であってもよく、矩形状であってもよい。
 基材のサイズとしては、円形状であれば、例えば直径が100~450mmであり、好ましくは200~450mmである。矩形状であれば、例えば短辺の長さが100~1000mmであり、好ましくは200~700mmである。
 また、基材としては、例えば板状、好ましくはパネル状の基材(基板)が用いられる。
〔Base material〕
The type of base material can be appropriately determined according to the application, and includes semiconductor manufacturing base materials such as silicon, silicon nitride, polysilicon, silicon oxide, and amorphous silicon, quartz, glass, optical films, ceramic materials, vapor deposition films, A magnetic film, a reflective film, a metal substrate such as Ni, Cu, Cr, Fe (for example, a substrate formed of a metal, or a substrate having a metal layer formed by plating, vapor deposition, etc.) ), paper, SOG (Spin On Glass), TFT (Thin Film Transistor) array substrates, mold substrates, plasma display panel (PDP) electrode plates, etc., and are not particularly limited. In the present invention, a semiconductor fabrication substrate is particularly preferable, and a silicon substrate, a Cu substrate and a mold substrate are more preferable.
In addition, these substrates may be provided with a layer such as an adhesion layer or an oxide layer made of hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) or the like on the surface.
Moreover, the shape of the substrate is not particularly limited, and may be circular or rectangular.
As for the size of the substrate, if it is circular, the diameter is, for example, 100 to 450 mm, preferably 200 to 450 mm. In the case of a rectangular shape, the short side length is, for example, 100 to 1000 mm, preferably 200 to 700 mm.
As the base material, for example, a plate-like base material (substrate), preferably a panel-like base material (substrate) is used.
 また、樹脂層(例えば、硬化物からなる層)の表面や金属層の表面に樹脂組成物を適用して膜を形成する場合は、樹脂層や金属層が基材となる。 In addition, when a film is formed by applying a resin composition to the surface of a resin layer (for example, a layer made of a cured product) or the surface of a metal layer, the resin layer or metal layer serves as the base material.
 本発明の樹脂組成物を基材上に適用する手段としては、塗布が好ましい。 As a means for applying the resin composition of the present invention onto a substrate, coating is preferred.
 適用する手段としては、具体的には、ディップコート法、エアーナイフコート法、カーテンコート法、ワイヤーバーコート法、グラビアコート法、エクストルージョンコート法、スプレーコート法、スピンコート法、スリットコート法、インクジェット法などが例示される。膜の厚さの均一性の観点から、より好ましくはスピンコート法、スリットコート法、スプレーコート法、又は、インクジェット法であり、膜の厚さの均一性の観点および生産性の観点からスピンコート法およびスリットコート法が好ましい。方法に応じて樹脂組成物の固形分濃度や塗布条件を調整することで、所望の厚さの膜を得ることができる。また、基材の形状によっても塗布方法を適宜選択でき、ウエハ等の円形基材であればスピンコート法、スプレーコート法、インクジェット法等が好ましく、矩形基材であればスリットコート法やスプレーコート法、インクジェット法等が好ましい。スピンコート法の場合は、例えば、500~3,500rpmの回転数で、10秒~3分程度適用することができる。
 また、あらかじめ仮支持体上に上記付与方法によって付与して形成した塗膜を、基材上に転写する方法を適用することもできる。
 転写方法に関しては特開2006-023696号公報の段落0023、0036~0051や、特開2006-047592号公報の段落0096~0108に記載の作製方法を本発明においても好適に用いることができる。
 また、基材の端部において余分な膜の除去を行なう工程を行なってもよい。このような工程の例には、エッジビードリンス(EBR)、バックリンスなどが挙げられる。
 また樹脂組成物を基材に塗布する前に基材を種々の溶剤を塗布し、基材の濡れ性を向上させた後に樹脂組成物を塗布するプリウェット工程を採用しても良い。
Specific means to be applied include dip coating, air knife coating, curtain coating, wire bar coating, gravure coating, extrusion coating, spray coating, spin coating, slit coating, An inkjet method and the like are exemplified. From the viewpoint of uniformity of film thickness, spin coating, slit coating, spray coating, or inkjet method is more preferable, and spin coating from the viewpoint of uniformity of film thickness and productivity. and slit coating methods are preferred. A film having a desired thickness can be obtained by adjusting the solid content concentration and application conditions of the resin composition according to the method. In addition, the coating method can be appropriately selected depending on the shape of the substrate. Spin coating, spray coating, inkjet method, etc. are preferable for circular substrates such as wafers, and slit coating and spray coating are preferable for rectangular substrates. method, inkjet method, and the like are preferred. In the case of spin coating, for example, it can be applied at a rotation speed of 500 to 3,500 rpm for about 10 seconds to 3 minutes.
Alternatively, a method of transferring a coating film, which is formed on a temporary support in advance by the above application method, onto a base material can also be applied.
As for the transfer method, the production methods described in paragraphs 0023 and 0036 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-023696 and paragraphs 0096-0108 of JP-A-2006-047592 can also be preferably used in the present invention.
Also, a step of removing excess film at the edge of the substrate may be performed. Examples of such processes include edge bead rinsing (EBR), back rinsing, and the like.
A pre-wetting step may also be employed in which the base material is coated with various solvents before applying the resin composition to the base material to improve the wettability of the base material, and then the resin composition is applied.
<乾燥工程>
 上記膜は、膜形成工程(層形成工程)の後に、溶剤を除去するために形成された膜(層)を乾燥する工程(乾燥工程)に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、膜形成工程により形成された膜を乾燥する乾燥工程を含んでもよい。
 また、上記乾燥工程は膜形成工程の後、露光工程の前に行われることが好ましい。
 乾燥工程における膜の乾燥温度は50~150℃であることが好ましく、70℃~130℃がより好ましく、90℃~110℃が更に好ましい。また、減圧により乾燥を行っても良い。乾燥時間としては、30秒~20分が例示され、1分~10分が好ましく、2分~7分がより好ましい。
<Drying process>
The film may be subjected to a step of drying the formed film (layer) to remove the solvent (drying step) after the film forming step (layer forming step).
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a drying step of drying the film formed by the film forming step.
Moreover, the drying step is preferably performed after the film formation step and before the exposure step.
The drying temperature of the film in the drying step is preferably 50 to 150°C, more preferably 70 to 130°C, even more preferably 90 to 110°C. Moreover, you may dry by pressure reduction. The drying time is exemplified from 30 seconds to 20 minutes, preferably from 1 minute to 10 minutes, more preferably from 2 minutes to 7 minutes.
<露光工程>
 上記膜は、膜を選択的に露光する露光工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、膜形成工程により形成された膜を選択的に露光する露光工程を含んでもよい。
 選択的に露光するとは、膜の一部を露光することを意味している。また、選択的に露光することにより、膜には露光された領域(露光部)と露光されていない領域(非露光部)が形成される。
 露光量は、本発明の樹脂組成物を硬化できる限り特に定めるものではないが、例えば、波長365nmでの露光エネルギー換算で50~10,000mJ/cmが好ましく、200~8,000mJ/cmがより好ましい。
<Exposure process>
The film may be subjected to an exposure step that selectively exposes the film.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include an exposure step of selectively exposing the film formed in the film forming step.
Selectively exposing means exposing a portion of the film. Also, by selectively exposing, the film is formed with exposed regions (exposed portions) and non-exposed regions (non-exposed portions).
The amount of exposure is not particularly defined as long as the resin composition of the present invention can be cured . is more preferred.
 露光波長は、190~1,000nmの範囲で適宜定めることができ、240~550nmが好ましい。 The exposure wavelength can be appropriately determined in the range of 190-1,000 nm, preferably 240-550 nm.
 露光波長は、光源との関係でいうと、(1)半導体レーザー(波長 830nm、532nm、488nm、405nm、375nm、355nm etc.)、(2)メタルハライドランプ、(3)高圧水銀灯、g線(波長 436nm)、h線(波長 405nm)、i線(波長 365nm)、ブロード(g,h,i線の3波長)、(4)エキシマレーザー、KrFエキシマレーザー(波長 248nm)、ArFエキシマレーザー(波長 193nm)、Fエキシマレーザー(波長 157nm)、(5)極端紫外線;EUV(波長 13.6nm)、(6)電子線、(7)YAGレーザーの第二高調波532nm、第三高調波355nm等が挙げられる。本発明の樹脂組成物については、特に高圧水銀灯による露光が好ましく、中でも、i線による露光が好ましい。これにより、特に高い露光感度が得られうる。
 また、露光の方式は特に限定されず、本発明の樹脂組成物からなる膜の少なくとも一部が露光される方式であればよいが、フォトマスクを使用した露光、レーザーダイレクトイメージング法による露光等が挙げられる。
In relation to the light source, the exposure wavelength is as follows: (1) semiconductor laser (wavelength 830 nm, 532 nm, 488 nm, 405 nm, 375 nm, 355 nm etc.), (2) metal halide lamp, (3) high-pressure mercury lamp, g-line (wavelength 436 nm), h-line (wavelength 405 nm), i-line (wavelength 365 nm), broad (three wavelengths of g, h, i-line), (4) excimer laser, KrF excimer laser (wavelength 248 nm), ArF excimer laser (wavelength 193 nm) ), F2 excimer laser (wavelength 157 nm), (5) extreme ultraviolet; EUV (wavelength 13.6 nm), (6) electron beam, (7) YAG laser second harmonic 532 nm, third harmonic 355 nm, etc. mentioned. For the resin composition of the present invention, exposure with a high-pressure mercury lamp is particularly preferred, and exposure with i-line is particularly preferred. Thereby, particularly high exposure sensitivity can be obtained.
The method of exposure is not particularly limited as long as at least a part of the film made of the resin composition of the present invention is exposed. mentioned.
<露光後加熱工程>
 上記膜は、露光後に加熱する工程(露光後加熱工程)に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、露光工程により露光された膜を加熱する露光後加熱工程を含んでもよい。
 露光後加熱工程は、露光工程後、現像工程前に行うことができる。
 露光後加熱工程における加熱温度は、50℃~140℃であることが好ましく、60℃~120℃であることがより好ましい。
 露光後加熱工程における加熱時間は、30秒間~300分間が好ましく、1分間~10分間がより好ましい。
 露光後加熱工程における昇温速度は、加熱開始時の温度から最高加熱温度まで1~12℃/分が好ましく、2~10℃/分がより好ましく、3~10℃/分が更に好ましい。
 また、昇温速度は加熱途中で適宜変更してもよい。
 露光後加熱工程における加熱手段としては、特に限定されず、公知のホットプレート、オーブン、赤外線ヒーター等を用いることができる。
 また、加熱に際し、窒素、ヘリウム、アルゴンなどの不活性ガスを流す等により、低酸素濃度の雰囲気で行うことも好ましい。
<Post-exposure heating process>
The film may be subjected to a step of heating after exposure (post-exposure heating step).
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a post-exposure heating step of heating the exposed film in the exposure step.
The post-exposure heating step can be performed after the exposure step and before the development step.
The heating temperature in the post-exposure heating step is preferably 50°C to 140°C, more preferably 60°C to 120°C.
The heating time in the post-exposure heating step is preferably 30 seconds to 300 minutes, more preferably 1 minute to 10 minutes.
The heating rate in the post-exposure heating step is preferably 1 to 12° C./min, more preferably 2 to 10° C./min, still more preferably 3 to 10° C./min, from the temperature at the start of heating to the maximum heating temperature.
Also, the rate of temperature increase may be appropriately changed during heating.
The heating means in the post-exposure heating step is not particularly limited, and known hot plates, ovens, infrared heaters and the like can be used.
Moreover, it is also preferable to carry out the heating in an atmosphere of low oxygen concentration by, for example, flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium or argon.
<現像工程>
 露光後の上記膜は、現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、露光工程により露光された膜を現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程を含んでもよい。
 現像を行うことにより、膜の露光部及び非露光部のうち一方が除去され、パターンが形成される。
 ここで、膜の非露光部が現像工程により除去される現像をネガ型現像といい、膜の露光部が現像工程により除去される現像をポジ型現像という。
<Development process>
The film after exposure may be subjected to a development step in which the film is developed using a developer to form a pattern.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a development step of developing a film exposed in the exposure step with a developer to form a pattern.
By performing development, one of the exposed and non-exposed portions of the film is removed to form a pattern.
Here, development in which the unexposed portion of the film is removed by the development process is called negative development, and development in which the exposed portion of the film is removed by the development process is called positive development.
〔現像液〕
 現像工程において用いられる現像液としては、アルカリ水溶液、又は、有機溶剤を含む現像液が挙げられる。
[Developer]
Examples of the developer used in the development step include a developer containing an alkaline aqueous solution or an organic solvent.
 現像液がアルカリ水溶液である場合、アルカリ水溶液が含みうる塩基性化合物としては、無機アルカリ類、第一級アミン類、第二級アミン類、第三級アミン類、第四級アンモニウム塩が挙げられ、TMAH(テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド)、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、水酸化ナトリウム、ケイ酸ナトリウム、メタケイ酸ナトリウム、アンモニア、エチルアミン、n-プロピルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジ-n-ブチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、メチルジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラペンチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラヘキシルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラオクチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、エチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ブチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、メチルトリアミルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジブチルジペンチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジメチルビス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリメチルフェニルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリメチルベンジルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリエチルベンジルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ピロール、ピペリジンが好ましく、より好ましくはTMAHである。現像液における塩基性化合物の含有量は、例えばTMAHを用いる場合、現像液全質量中0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.1~5質量%がより好ましく、0.3~3質量%が更に好ましい。 When the developer is an alkaline aqueous solution, basic compounds that the alkaline aqueous solution may contain include inorganic alkalis, primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, and quaternary ammonium salts. , TMAH (tetramethylammonium hydroxide), potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate, ammonia, ethylamine, n-propylamine, diethylamine, di-n-butylamine, triethylamine, methyldiethylamine , dimethylethanolamine, triethanolamine, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, tetrapentylammonium hydroxide, tetrahexylammonium hydroxide, tetraoctylammonium hydroxide, ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, Butyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, methyltriamylammonium hydroxide, dibutyldipentylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis(2-hydroxyethyl)ammonium hydroxide, trimethylphenylammonium hydroxide, trimethylbenzylammonium hydroxide, triethylbenzylammonium hydroxide, pyrrole , piperidine, more preferably TMAH. The content of the basic compound in the developer, for example, when TMAH is used, is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, more preferably 0.3 to 3% by mass, based on the total mass of the developer. is more preferred.
 現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、有機溶剤としては、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0387に記載の化合物を用いることができる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、アルコール類として、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール、イソプロパノール、ブタノール、ペンタノール、オクタノール、ジエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール、メチルイソブチルカルビノール、トリエチレングリコール等、アミド類として、N-メチルピロリドン、N-エチルピロリドン、ジメチルホルムアミド等も好適に挙げられる。 When the developer contains an organic solvent, the compound described in paragraph 0387 of International Publication No. 2021/112189 can be used as the organic solvent. The contents of which are incorporated herein. Alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, pentanol, octanol, diethylene glycol, propylene glycol, methylisobutylcarbinol, and triethylene glycol, and amides such as N-methylpyrrolidone, N-ethylpyrrolidone, Dimethylformamide and the like are also suitable.
 現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、有機溶剤は1種又は、2種以上を混合して使用することができる。本発明では特にシクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、及び、シクロヘキサノンよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種を含む現像液が好ましく、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン及びジメチルスルホキシドよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種を含む現像液がより好ましく、シクロペンタノンを含む現像液が最も好ましい。 When the developer contains an organic solvent, the organic solvent can be used singly or in combination of two or more. In the present invention, a developer containing at least one selected from the group consisting of cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, dimethylsulfoxide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, and cyclohexanone is particularly preferred, and cyclopentanone and γ-butyrolactone. and dimethylsulfoxide is more preferred, and a developer containing cyclopentanone is most preferred.
 現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、現像液の全質量に対する有機溶剤の含有量は、50質量%以上であることが好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましく、80質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、90質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。また、上記含有量は、100質量%であってもよい。 When the developer contains an organic solvent, the content of the organic solvent relative to the total weight of the developer is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and 80% by mass or more. is more preferable, and 90% by mass or more is particularly preferable. Moreover, the content may be 100% by mass.
 現像液は、他の成分を更に含んでもよい。
 他の成分としては、例えば、公知の界面活性剤や公知の消泡剤等が挙げられる。
The developer may further contain other components.
Other components include, for example, known surfactants and known antifoaming agents.
〔現像液の供給方法〕
 現像液の供給方法は、所望のパターンを形成できれば特に制限は無く、膜が形成された基材を現像液に浸漬する方法、基材上に形成された膜にノズルを用いて現像液を供給するパドル現像、または、現像液を連続供給する方法がある。ノズルの種類は特に制限は無く、ストレートノズル、シャワーノズル、スプレーノズル等が挙げられる。
 現像液の浸透性、非画像部の除去性、製造上の効率の観点から、現像液をストレートノズルで供給する方法、又はスプレーノズルにて連続供給する方法が好ましく、画像部への現像液の浸透性の観点からは、スプレーノズルで供給する方法がより好ましい。
 また、現像液をストレートノズルにて連続供給後、基材をスピンし現像液を基材上から除去し、スピン乾燥後に再度ストレートノズルにて連続供給後、基材をスピンし現像液を基材上から除去する工程を採用してもよく、この工程を複数回繰り返しても良い。
 また現像工程における現像液の供給方法としては、現像液が連続的に基材に供給され続ける工程、基材上で現像液が略静止状態で保たれる工程、基材上で現像液を超音波等で振動させる工程及びそれらを組み合わせた工程などが採用可能である。
[Method of supplying developer]
The method of supplying the developer is not particularly limited as long as the desired pattern can be formed. A method of immersing the base material with the film formed in the developer, and a method of supplying the developer to the film formed on the base material using a nozzle. There is a method of puddle development or a method of continuously supplying developer. The type of nozzle is not particularly limited, and straight nozzles, shower nozzles, spray nozzles and the like can be mentioned.
From the viewpoint of permeability of the developer, removability of the non-image area, and efficiency in production, a method of supplying the developer with a straight nozzle or a method of continuously supplying the developer with a spray nozzle is preferable. From the viewpoint of permeability, the method of supplying with a spray nozzle is more preferable.
In addition, after continuously supplying the developer with a straight nozzle, the substrate is spun to remove the developer from the substrate. A step of removing from above may be employed, and this step may be repeated multiple times.
The method of supplying the developer in the development process includes a process in which the developer is continuously supplied to the base material, a process in which the developer is kept substantially stationary on the base material, and a process in which the developer exceeds the developer on the base material. A process of vibrating with sound waves or the like and a process of combining them can be employed.
 現像時間としては、10秒~10分間が好ましく、20秒~5分間がより好ましい。現像時の現像液の温度は、特に定めるものではないが、好ましくは、10~45℃、より好ましくは、18℃~30℃で行うことができる。 The development time is preferably 10 seconds to 10 minutes, more preferably 20 seconds to 5 minutes. The temperature of the developer during development is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 45°C, more preferably 18 to 30°C.
 現像工程において、現像液を用いた処理の後、更に、リンス液によるパターンの洗浄(リンス)を行ってもよい。また、パターン上に接する現像液が乾燥しきらないうちにリンス液を供給するなどの方法を採用しても良い。 In the development process, after processing using the developer, the pattern may be washed (rinsed) with a rinse. Alternatively, a method of supplying the rinse liquid before the developer in contact with the pattern is completely dried may be employed.
〔リンス液〕
 現像液がアルカリ水溶液である場合、リンス液としては、例えば水を用いることができる。現像液が有機溶剤を含む現像液である場合、リンス液としては、例えば、現像液に含まれる溶剤とは異なる溶剤(例えば、水、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤とは異なる有機溶剤)を用いることができる。
[Rinse liquid]
When the developer is an alkaline aqueous solution, water, for example, can be used as the rinse. When the developer is a developer containing an organic solvent, for example, a solvent different from the solvent contained in the developer (for example, water, an organic solvent different from the organic solvent contained in the developer) is used as the rinse liquid. be able to.
 リンス液が有機溶剤を含む場合の有機溶剤としては、上述の現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合において例示した有機溶剤と同様の有機溶剤が挙げられる。
 また、リンス液に含まれる有機溶剤は、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤とは異なる有機溶剤であることが好ましく、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤よりも、パターンの溶解度が小さい有機溶剤がより好ましい。
Examples of the organic solvent when the rinse liquid contains an organic solvent include the same organic solvents as those exemplified when the developer contains an organic solvent.
Also, the organic solvent contained in the rinse liquid is preferably an organic solvent different from the organic solvent contained in the developer, and more preferably an organic solvent having a lower pattern solubility than the organic solvent contained in the developer.
 リンス液が有機溶剤を含む場合、有機溶剤は1種又は、2種以上を混合して使用することができる。本発明では特にシクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン、シクロヘキサノン、PGMEA、PGMEが好ましく、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルスルホキシド、PGMEA、PGMEがより好ましく、シクロヘキサノン、PGMEAがさらに好ましい。 When the rinse liquid contains an organic solvent, the organic solvent can be used singly or in combination of two or more. In the present invention, cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, dimethylsulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, cyclohexanone, PGMEA and PGME are particularly preferred, cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, dimethylsulfoxide, PGMEA and PGME are more preferred, and cyclohexanone and PGMEA are more preferred. More preferred.
 リンス液が有機溶剤を含む場合、リンス液は、50質量%以上が有機溶剤であることが好ましく、70質量%以上が有機溶剤であることがより好ましく、90質量%以上が有機溶剤であることが更に好ましい。また、リンス液は、100質量%が有機溶剤であってもよい。 When the rinse liquid contains an organic solvent, the rinse liquid is preferably 50% by mass or more of the organic solvent, more preferably 70% by mass or more of the organic solvent, and 90% by mass or more of the organic solvent. is more preferred. Further, 100% by mass of the rinse liquid may be an organic solvent.
 また、リンス液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含んでもよい。
 塩基性化合物としては、硬化後の膜に残存した場合の信頼性(硬化物を更に加熱した場合の基材との密着性)の観点からは、有機塩基が好ましい。
 また、塩基性化合物としては、アミノ基を有する塩基性化合物が好ましく、1級アミン、2級アミン、3級アミン、アンモニウム塩、3級アミドなどが好ましいが、イミド化反応を促進する為には、1級アミン、2級アミン、3級アミン又はアンモニウム塩が好ましく、2級アミン、3級アミン又はアンモニウム塩がより好ましく、2級アミン又は3級アミンが更に好ましく、3級アミンが特に好ましい。
 塩基性化合物としては、硬化物の機械特性(破断伸び)の観点からは、硬化膜(得られる硬化物)中に残存しにくいものが好ましく、環化の促進の観点からは、気化等により、加熱前に残存量が減少しにくいものであることが好ましい。
 したがって、塩基性化合物の沸点は、常圧(101,325Pa)で30℃から350℃であることが好ましく、80℃~270℃であることがより好ましく、100℃~230℃であることが更に好ましい。
 また、塩基性化合物の沸点は、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤の沸点から20℃を減算した温度よりも高いことが好ましく、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤の沸点よりも高いことがより好ましい。
 例えば、有機溶剤の沸点が100℃である場合、使用される塩基性化合物は、沸点が80℃以上であることが好ましく、沸点が100℃以上であることがより好ましい。
 現像液は塩基性化合物を1種のみ含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。
Also, the rinse liquid may contain at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
As the basic compound, an organic base is preferable from the viewpoint of reliability when it remains in the film after curing (adhesion to the substrate when the cured product is further heated).
As the basic compound, a basic compound having an amino group is preferable, and primary amine, secondary amine, tertiary amine, ammonium salt, tertiary amide, etc. are preferable. , primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines or ammonium salts are preferred, secondary amines, tertiary amines or ammonium salts are more preferred, secondary amines or tertiary amines are even more preferred, and tertiary amines are particularly preferred.
From the viewpoint of the mechanical properties (elongation at break) of the cured product, the basic compound is preferably one that hardly remains in the cured film (obtained cured product). It is preferable that the remaining amount is not easily reduced before heating.
Therefore, the boiling point of the basic compound is preferably 30° C. to 350° C., more preferably 80° C. to 270° C., even more preferably 100° C. to 230° C. at normal pressure (101,325 Pa). preferable.
The boiling point of the basic compound is preferably higher than the boiling point of the organic solvent contained in the developer minus 20°C, and more preferably higher than the boiling point of the organic solvent contained in the developer.
For example, when the boiling point of the organic solvent is 100° C., the boiling point of the basic compound used is preferably 80° C. or higher, more preferably 100° C. or higher.
The developer may contain only one type of basic compound, or may contain two or more types.
 塩基性化合物の具体例としては、エタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、ヘキシルアミン、ドデシルアミン、シクロヘキシルアミン、シクロヘキシルメチルアミン、シクロヘキシルジメチルアミン、アニリン、N-メチルアニリン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、ジフェニルアミン、ピリジン、ブチルアミン、イソブチルアミン、ジブチルアミン、トリブチルアミン、ジシクロヘキシルアミン、DBU(ジアザビシクロウンデセン)、DABCO(1,4-ジアザビシクロ[2.2.2]オクタン)、N,N-ジイソプロピルエチルアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、エチレンジアミン、ブタンジアミン、1,5-ジアミノペンタン、N-メチルヘキシルアミン、N-メチルジシクロヘキシルアミン、トリオクチルアミン、N-エチルエチレンジアミン、N,N―ジエチルエチレンジアミン、N,N,N’,N’-テトラブチルー1,6-ヘキサンジアミン、スペルミジン、ジアミノシクロヘキサン、ビス(2-メトキシエチル)アミン、ピペリジン、メチルピペリジン、ジメチルピペリジン、ピペラジン、トロパン、N-フェニルベンジルアミン、1,2-ジアニリノエタン、2-アミノエタノール、トルイジン、アミノフェノール、ヘキシルアニリン、フェニレンジアミン、フェニルエチルアミン、ジベンジルアミン、ピロール、N-メチルピロール、N,N,N,Nテトラメチルエチレンジアミン、N,N,N,N-テトラメチルー1,3-プロパンジアミン等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of basic compounds include ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, ethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, hexylamine, dodecylamine, cyclohexylamine, cyclohexylmethylamine, cyclohexyldimethylamine, aniline, N-methylaniline, N, N-dimethylaniline, diphenylamine, pyridine, butylamine, isobutylamine, dibutylamine, tributylamine, dicyclohexylamine, DBU (diazabicycloundecene), DABCO (1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane), N , N-diisopropylethylamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, ethylenediamine, butanediamine, 1,5-diaminopentane, N-methylhexylamine, N-methyldicyclohexylamine, trioctylamine, N-ethylethylenediamine , N,N-diethylethylenediamine, N,N,N',N'-tetrabutyl-1,6-hexanediamine, spermidine, diaminocyclohexane, bis(2-methoxyethyl)amine, piperidine, methylpiperidine, dimethylpiperidine, piperazine, Tropane, N-phenylbenzylamine, 1,2-dianilinoethane, 2-aminoethanol, toluidine, aminophenol, hexylaniline, phenylenediamine, phenylethylamine, dibenzylamine, pyrrole, N-methylpyrrole, N,N,N, Examples include N-tetramethylethylenediamine, N,N,N,N-tetramethyl-1,3-propanediamine, and the like.
 塩基発生剤の好ましい態様は、上述の組成物に含まれる塩基発生剤の好ましい態様と同様である。特に、塩基発生剤は熱塩基発生剤であることが好ましい。
 リンス液に含まれる塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤は、リンス液における溶剤への溶解度等を考慮して選択すればよい。
Preferred embodiments of the base generator are the same as the preferred embodiments of the base generator contained in the composition described above. In particular, the base generator is preferably a thermal base generator.
The basic compound and base generator contained in the rinse solution may be selected in consideration of the solubility in the solvent in the rinse solution.
 リンス液が塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含む場合、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方に該当する化合物の含有量はリンス液の全質量に対して、10質量%以下であることが好ましく、5質量%以下であることがより好ましい。上記含有量の下限は特に限定されないが、例えば0.1質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 また、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方がリンス液が用いられる環境で固体である場合、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方に該当する化合物の含有量は、リンス液の全固形分に対して、70~100質量%であることも好ましい。
 リンス液が塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含む場合、リンス液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を1種のみ含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方が2種以上である場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the rinse solution contains at least one of the basic compound and the base generator, the content of the compound corresponding to at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is 10% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the rinse solution. is preferable, and it is more preferably 5% by mass or less. Although the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, it is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, for example.
In addition, when at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is solid in the environment where the rinse liquid is used, the content of the compound corresponding to at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is equal to the total solid content of the rinse liquid. It is also preferable that it is 70 to 100% by mass.
When the rinse solution contains at least one of the basic compound and the base generator, the rinse solution may contain only one kind of at least one of the basic compound and the base generator, or may contain two or more kinds. . When at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is two or more, the total is preferably within the above range.
 リンス液は、他の成分を更に含んでもよい。
 他の成分としては、例えば、公知の界面活性剤や公知の消泡剤等が挙げられる。
The rinse solution may further contain other components.
Other components include, for example, known surfactants and known antifoaming agents.
〔リンス液の供給方法〕
 リンス液の供給方法は、所望のパターンを形成できれば特に制限は無く、基材をリンス液に浸漬する方法、基材に液盛りによりリンス液を供給する方法、基材にリンス液をシャワーで供給する方法、基材上にストレートノズル等の手段によりリンス液を連続供給する方法がある。
 リンス液の浸透性、非画像部の除去性、製造上の効率の観点から、リンス液をシャワーノズル、ストレートノズル、スプレーノズルなどで供給する方法があり、スプレーノズルにて連続供給する方法が好ましく、画像部へのリンス液の浸透性の観点からは、スプレーノズルで供給する方法がより好ましい。ノズルの種類は特に制限は無く、ストレートノズル、シャワーノズル、スプレーノズル等が挙げられる。
 すなわち、リンス工程は、リンス液を上記露光後の膜に対してストレートノズルにより供給、又は、連続供給する工程であることが好ましく、リンス液をスプレーノズルにより供給する工程であることがより好ましい。
 またリンス工程におけるリンス液の供給方法としては、リンス液が連続的に基材に供給され続ける工程、基材上でリンス液が略静止状態で保たれる工程、基材上でリンス液を超音波等で振動させる工程及びそれらを組み合わせた工程などが採用可能である。
[Method of supplying rinse solution]
The method of supplying the rinse solution is not particularly limited as long as the desired pattern can be formed, and includes a method of immersing the base material in the rinse solution, a method of supplying the rinse solution to the base material by piling up the base material, and a method of supplying the rinse solution to the base material by showering. and a method of continuously supplying the rinsing liquid onto the substrate by means of a straight nozzle or the like.
From the viewpoint of the permeability of the rinse liquid, the removability of the non-image areas, and the efficiency in manufacturing, there are methods of supplying the rinse liquid using a shower nozzle, a straight nozzle, a spray nozzle, etc., and a continuous supply method using a spray nozzle is preferable. From the viewpoint of the permeability of the rinsing liquid to the image area, the method of supplying the rinsing liquid with a spray nozzle is more preferable. The type of nozzle is not particularly limited, and straight nozzles, shower nozzles, spray nozzles and the like can be mentioned.
That is, the rinsing step is preferably a step of supplying the rinse liquid to the film after exposure through a straight nozzle or a step of continuously supplying the same, and more preferably a step of supplying the rinse liquid through a spray nozzle.
The method of supplying the rinse liquid in the rinse step includes a process in which the rinse liquid is continuously supplied to the base material, a process in which the rinse liquid is kept substantially stationary on the base material, and a process in which the rinse liquid is kept on the base material in a substantially stationary state. A process of vibrating with sound waves or the like and a process of combining them can be adopted.
 リンス時間としては、10秒~10分間が好ましく、20秒~5分間がより好ましい。リンス時のリンス液の温度は、特に定めるものではないが、好ましくは、10~45℃、より好ましくは、18℃~30℃で行うことができる。 The rinse time is preferably 10 seconds to 10 minutes, more preferably 20 seconds to 5 minutes. The temperature of the rinsing liquid during rinsing is not particularly specified, but is preferably 10 to 45°C, more preferably 18 to 30°C.
 現像工程において、現像液を用いた処理の後、又は、リンス液によるパターンの洗浄の後に、処理液とパターンとを接触させる工程を含んでもよい。また、パターン上に接する現像液又はリンス液が乾燥しきらないうちに処理液を供給するなどの方法を採用しても良い。 The development step may include a step of bringing the pattern into contact with the processing solution after processing with the developer or after washing the pattern with the rinse solution. Alternatively, a method of supplying the processing liquid before the developing liquid or rinsing liquid in contact with the pattern is completely dried may be adopted.
 上記処理液としては、水及び有機溶剤の少なくとも一方と、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方とを含む処理液が挙げられる。
 上記有機溶剤、及び、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方の好ましい態様は、上述のリンス液において用いられる有機溶剤、及び、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方の好ましい態様と同様である。
 また、処理液のパターンへの供給方法は、上述のリンス液の供給方法と同様の方法を用いることができ、好ましい態様も同様である。
Examples of the treatment liquid include a treatment liquid containing at least one of water and an organic solvent, and at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
Preferred embodiments of the organic solvent and at least one of the basic compound and the base generator are the same as the preferred embodiments of the organic solvent and at least one of the basic compound and the base generator used in the rinse solution described above. .
Moreover, as the method of supplying the treatment liquid to the pattern, the same method as the above-described method of supplying the rinsing liquid can be used, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
 処理液における塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方に該当する化合物の含有量は、処理液の全質量に対して、10質量%以下であることが好ましく、5質量%以下であることがより好ましい。上記含有量の下限は特に限定されないが、例えば0.1質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 また、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方が処理液が用いられる環境で固体である場合、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方に該当する化合物の含有量は、処理液の全固形分に対して、70~100質量%であることも好ましい。
 処理液が塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含む場合、処理液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を1種のみ含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方が2種以上である場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
The content of the compound corresponding to at least one of the basic compound and the base generator in the treatment liquid is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the treatment liquid. preferable. Although the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, it is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, for example.
Further, when at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is solid in the environment where the treatment liquid is used, the content of the compound corresponding to at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is the total solid content of the treatment liquid. It is also preferable that it is 70 to 100% by mass.
When the treatment liquid contains at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, the treatment liquid may contain at least one of the basic compound and the base generator, or may contain two or more of them. . When at least one of the basic compound and the base generator is two or more, the total is preferably within the above range.
<加熱工程>
 現像工程により得られたパターン(リンス工程を行う場合は、リンス後のパターン)は、上記現像により得られたパターンを加熱する加熱工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、現像工程により得られたパターンを加熱する加熱工程を含んでもよい。
 また、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、現像工程を行わずに他の方法で得られたパターン、又は、膜形成工程により得られた膜を加熱する加熱工程を含んでもよい。
 加熱工程において、ポリイミド前駆体等の樹脂は環化してポリイミド等の樹脂となる。
 また、特定樹脂、又は特定樹脂以外の架橋剤における未反応の架橋性基の架橋なども進行する。
 加熱工程における加熱温度(最高加熱温度)としては、50~450℃が好ましく、150~350℃がより好ましく、150~250℃が更に好ましく、160~250℃が一層好ましく、160~230℃が特に好ましい。
<Heating process>
The pattern obtained by the development process (the pattern after rinsing when the rinsing process is performed) may be subjected to a heating process for heating the pattern obtained by the development.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step of heating the pattern obtained by the developing step.
Moreover, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step of heating a pattern obtained by another method without performing the developing step or a film obtained by the film forming step.
In the heating step, a resin such as a polyimide precursor is cyclized into a resin such as polyimide.
In addition, cross-linking of unreacted cross-linkable groups in the specific resin or a cross-linking agent other than the specific resin also progresses.
The heating temperature (maximum heating temperature) in the heating step is preferably 50 to 450°C, more preferably 150 to 350°C, still more preferably 150 to 250°C, even more preferably 160 to 250°C, particularly 160 to 230°C. preferable.
 加熱工程は、加熱により、上記塩基発生剤から発生した塩基等の作用により、上記パターン内で上記ポリイミド前駆体の環化反応を促進する工程であることが好ましい。 The heating step is preferably a step of promoting the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor in the pattern by the action of the base generated from the base generator by heating.
 加熱工程における加熱は、加熱開始時の温度から最高加熱温度まで1~12℃/分の昇温速度で行うことが好ましい。上記昇温速度は2~10℃/分がより好ましく、3~10℃/分が更に好ましい。昇温速度を1℃/分以上とすることにより、生産性を確保しつつ、酸又は溶剤の過剰な揮発を防止することができ、昇温速度を12℃/分以下とすることにより、硬化物の残存応力を緩和することができる。
 加えて、急速加熱可能なオーブンの場合、加熱開始時の温度から最高加熱温度まで1~8℃/秒の昇温速度で行うことが好ましく、2~7℃/秒がより好ましく、3~6℃/秒が更に好ましい。
Heating in the heating step is preferably carried out at a temperature rising rate of 1 to 12° C./min from the temperature at the start of heating to the maximum heating temperature. The rate of temperature increase is more preferably 2 to 10°C/min, still more preferably 3 to 10°C/min. By setting the temperature increase rate to 1°C/min or more, it is possible to prevent excessive volatilization of the acid or solvent while ensuring productivity. The residual stress of the object can be relaxed.
In addition, in the case of an oven capable of rapid heating, it is preferable to increase the temperature from the temperature at the start of heating to the maximum heating temperature at a rate of 1 to 8 ° C./sec, more preferably 2 to 7 ° C./sec, and 3 to 6 °C/sec is more preferred.
 加熱開始時の温度は、20℃~150℃が好ましく、20℃~130℃がより好ましく、25℃~120℃が更に好ましい。加熱開始時の温度は、最高加熱温度まで加熱する工程を開始する際の温度のことをいう。例えば、本発明の樹脂組成物を基材の上に適用した後、乾燥させる場合、この乾燥後の膜(層)の温度であり、例えば、本発明の樹脂組成物に含まれる溶剤の沸点よりも、30~200℃低い温度から昇温させることが好ましい。 The temperature at the start of heating is preferably 20°C to 150°C, more preferably 20°C to 130°C, and even more preferably 25°C to 120°C. The temperature at the start of heating refers to the temperature at which the process of heating up to the maximum heating temperature is started. For example, when the resin composition of the present invention is applied onto a substrate and then dried, the temperature of the film (layer) after drying is, for example, the boiling point of the solvent contained in the resin composition of the present invention. Also, it is preferable to raise the temperature from a temperature lower by 30 to 200°C.
 加熱時間(最高加熱温度での加熱時間)は、5~360分であることが好ましく、10~300分であることがより好ましく、15~240分であることが更に好ましい。 The heating time (heating time at the highest heating temperature) is preferably 5 to 360 minutes, more preferably 10 to 300 minutes, even more preferably 15 to 240 minutes.
 特に多層の積層体を形成する場合、層間の密着性の観点から、加熱温度は30℃以上であることが好ましく、80℃以上であることがより好ましく、100℃以上であることが更に好ましく、120℃以上であることが特に好ましい。
 上記加熱温度の上限は、350℃以下であることが好ましく、250℃以下であることがより好ましく、240℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
Especially when forming a multilayer laminate, the heating temperature is preferably 30° C. or higher, more preferably 80° C. or higher, further preferably 100° C. or higher, from the viewpoint of adhesion between layers. 120° C. or higher is particularly preferred.
The upper limit of the heating temperature is preferably 350° C. or lower, more preferably 250° C. or lower, and even more preferably 240° C. or lower.
 加熱は段階的に行ってもよい。例として、25℃から120℃まで3℃/分で昇温し、120℃にて60分保持し、120℃から180℃まで2℃/分で昇温し、180℃にて120分保持する、といった工程を行ってもよい。また、米国特許第9159547号明細書に記載のように紫外線を照射しながら処理することも好ましい。このような前処理工程により膜の特性を向上させることが可能である。前処理工程は10秒間~2時間程度の短い時間で行うとよく、15秒~30分間がより好ましい。前処理は2段階以上のステップとしてもよく、例えば100~150℃の範囲で1段階目の前処理工程を行い、その後に150~200℃の範囲で2段階目の前処理工程を行ってもよい。
 更に、加熱後冷却してもよく、この場合の冷却速度としては、1~5℃/分であることが好ましい。
Heating may be done in stages. As an example, the temperature is raised from 25° C. to 120° C. at 3° C./min, held at 120° C. for 60 minutes, heated from 120° C. to 180° C. at 2° C./min, and held at 180° C. for 120 minutes. , may be performed. It is also preferable to carry out the treatment while irradiating ultraviolet rays as described in US Pat. No. 9,159,547. Such a pretreatment process can improve the properties of the film. The pretreatment step is preferably performed for a short time of about 10 seconds to 2 hours, more preferably 15 seconds to 30 minutes. The pretreatment may be performed in two or more steps. For example, the first pretreatment step may be performed in the range of 100 to 150°C, and then the second pretreatment step may be performed in the range of 150 to 200°C. good.
Further, cooling may be performed after heating, and the cooling rate in this case is preferably 1 to 5°C/min.
 加熱工程は、窒素、ヘリウム、アルゴンなどの不活性ガスを流す、減圧下で行う等により、低酸素濃度の雰囲気で行うことが特定樹脂の分解を防ぐ点で好ましい。酸素濃度は、50ppm(体積比)以下が好ましく、20ppm(体積比)以下がより好ましい。
 加熱工程における加熱手段としては、特に限定されないが、例えばホットプレート、赤外炉、電熱式オーブン、熱風式オーブン、赤外線オーブンなどが挙げられる。
The heating step is preferably carried out in an atmosphere of low oxygen concentration, such as by flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium or argon, or under reduced pressure, in order to prevent decomposition of the specific resin. The oxygen concentration is preferably 50 ppm (volume ratio) or less, more preferably 20 ppm (volume ratio) or less.
A heating means in the heating step is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a hot plate, an infrared furnace, an electric heating oven, a hot air oven, an infrared oven and the like.
<現像後露光工程>
 現像工程により得られた(リンス工程を行う場合は、リンス後のパターン)は、上記加熱工程に代えて、又は、上記加熱工程に加えて、現像工程後のパターンを露光する現像後露光工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、現像工程により得られたパターンを露光する現像後露光工程を含んでもよい。本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、加熱工程及び現像後露光工程を含んでもよいし、加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の一方のみを含んでもよい。
 現像後露光工程においては、例えば、光塩基発生剤の感光によってポリイミド前駆体等の環化が進行する反応や、光酸発生剤の感光によって酸分解性基の脱離が進行する反応などを促進することができる。
 現像後露光工程においては、現像工程において得られたパターンの少なくとも一部が露光されればよいが、上記パターンの全部が露光されることが好ましい。
 現像後露光工程における露光量は、感光性化合物が感度を有する波長における露光エネルギー換算で、50~20,000mJ/cmであることが好ましく、100~15,000mJ/cmであることがより好ましい。
 現像後露光工程は、例えば、上述の露光工程における光源を用いて行うことができ、ブロードバンド光を用いることが好ましい。
<Post-development exposure process>
The pattern obtained by the development step (the pattern after rinsing when the rinsing step is performed) is subjected to a post-development exposure step of exposing the pattern after the development step instead of or in addition to the heating step. may be provided.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a post-development exposure step of exposing the pattern obtained in the development step. The method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step and a post-development exposure step, or may include only one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step.
In the post-development exposure step, for example, a reaction in which cyclization of a polyimide precursor or the like proceeds by exposure of a photobase generator, or a reaction in which elimination of an acid-decomposable group proceeds by exposure of a photoacid generator is promoted. can do.
In the post-development exposure step, at least part of the pattern obtained in the development step may be exposed, but it is preferable that the entire pattern be exposed.
The exposure amount in the post-development exposure step is preferably 50 to 20,000 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 100 to 15,000 mJ/cm 2 in terms of exposure energy at the wavelength to which the photosensitive compound is sensitive. preferable.
The post-development exposure step can be performed using, for example, the light source used in the exposure step described above, and broadband light is preferably used.
<金属層形成工程>
 現像工程により得られたパターン(加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方に供されたものが好ましい)は、パターン上に金属層を形成する金属層形成工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、現像工程により得られたパターン(加熱工程及び現像後露光工程少なくとも一方に供されたものが好ましい)上に金属層を形成する金属層形成工程を含むことが好ましい。
<Metal layer forming step>
The pattern obtained by the development step (preferably subjected to at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step) may be subjected to a metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the pattern.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention includes a metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the pattern obtained by the developing step (preferably subjected to at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step). is preferred.
 金属層としては、特に限定なく、既存の金属種を使用することができ、銅、アルミニウム、ニッケル、バナジウム、チタン、クロム、コバルト、金、タングステン、錫、銀及びこれらの金属を含む合金が例示され、銅及びアルミニウムがより好ましく、銅が更に好ましい。 The metal layer is not particularly limited, and existing metal species can be used. Examples include copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, chromium, cobalt, gold, tungsten, tin, silver, and alloys containing these metals. copper and aluminum are more preferred, and copper is even more preferred.
 金属層の形成方法は、特に限定なく、既存の方法を適用することができる。例えば、特開2007-157879号公報、特表2001-521288号公報、特開2004-214501号公報、特開2004-101850号公報、米国特許第7888181B2、米国特許第9177926B2に記載された方法を使用することができる。例えば、フォトリソグラフィ、PVD(物理蒸着法)、CVD(化学気相成長法)、リフトオフ、電解めっき、無電解めっき、エッチング、印刷、及びこれらを組み合わせた方法などが考えられる。より具体的には、スパッタリング、フォトリソグラフィ及びエッチングを組み合わせたパターニング方法、フォトリソグラフィと電解めっきを組み合わせたパターニング方法が挙げられる。めっきの好ましい態様としては、硫酸銅やシアン化銅めっき液を用いた電解めっきが挙げられる。 The method of forming the metal layer is not particularly limited, and existing methods can be applied. For example, use the methods described in JP-A-2007-157879, JP-A-2001-521288, JP-A-2004-214501, JP-A-2004-101850, US Patent No. 7888181B2, US Patent No. 9177926B2 can do. For example, photolithography, PVD (Physical Vapor Deposition), CVD (Chemical Vapor Deposition), lift-off, electroplating, electroless plating, etching, printing, and a combination thereof can be considered. More specifically, a patterning method combining sputtering, photolithography and etching, and a patterning method combining photolithography and electroplating can be used. A preferred embodiment of plating is electroplating using a copper sulfate or copper cyanide plating solution.
 金属層の厚さとしては、最も厚肉の部分で、0.01~50μmが好ましく、1~10μmがより好ましい。 The thickness of the metal layer is preferably 0.01 to 50 μm, more preferably 1 to 10 μm, at the thickest part.
<用途>
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法、又は、本発明の硬化物の適用可能な分野としては、電子デバイスの絶縁膜、再配線層用層間絶縁膜、ストレスバッファ膜などが挙げられる。そのほか、封止フィルム、基板材料(フレキシブルプリント基板のベースフィルムやカバーレイ、層間絶縁膜)、又は上記のような実装用途の絶縁膜をエッチングでパターン形成することなどが挙げられる。これらの用途については、例えば、サイエンス&テクノロジー(株)「ポリイミドの高機能化と応用技術」2008年4月、柿本雅明/監修、CMCテクニカルライブラリー「ポリイミド材料の基礎と開発」2011年11月発行、日本ポリイミド・芳香族系高分子研究会/編「最新ポリイミド 基礎と応用」エヌ・ティー・エス,2010年8月等を参照することができる。
<Application>
Fields to which the cured product of the present invention can be applied include insulating films for electronic devices, interlayer insulating films for rewiring layers, and stress buffer films. In addition, pattern formation by etching of a sealing film, a substrate material (a base film or coverlay of a flexible printed circuit board, an interlayer insulating film), or an insulating film for mounting purposes as described above can be used. For these applications, for example, Science & Technology Co., Ltd. "High Functionality and Application Technology of Polyimide" April 2008, Masaaki Kakimoto / supervised, CMC Technical Library "Basics and Development of Polyimide Materials" November 2011 Published by the Japan Polyimide and Aromatic Polymer Research Group/Edited, "Latest Polyimide Fundamentals and Applications", NTS, August 2010, etc. can be referred to.
 また、本発明の硬化物の製造方法、又は、本発明の硬化物は、オフセット版面又はスクリーン版面などの版面の製造、成形部品のエッチングへの使用、エレクトロニクス、特に、マイクロエレクトロニクスにおける保護ラッカー及び誘電層の製造などにも用いることもできる。 The method for producing the cured product of the present invention or the cured product of the present invention can also be used for the production of plates such as offset plates or screen plates, for etching molded parts, for protective lacquers and dielectrics in electronics, especially microelectronics. It can also be used for the production of layers and the like.
(積層体、及び、積層体の製造方法)
 本発明の積層体とは、本発明の硬化物からなる層を複数層有する構造体をいう。
 本発明の積層体は、硬化物からなる層を2層以上含む積層体であり、3層以上積層した積層体としてもよい。
 上記積層体に含まれる2層以上の上記硬化物からなる層のうち、少なくとも1つが本発明の硬化物からなる層であり、硬化物の収縮、又は、上記収縮に伴う硬化物の変形等を抑制する観点からは、上記積層体に含まれる全ての硬化物からなる層が本発明の硬化物からなる層であることも好ましい。
(Laminate and method for manufacturing the laminate)
The laminate of the present invention refers to a structure having a plurality of layers made of the cured product of the present invention.
The laminate of the present invention is a laminate containing two or more layers made of a cured product, and may be a laminate in which three or more layers are laminated.
Of the two or more layers of the cured product contained in the laminate, at least one is a layer made of the cured product of the present invention, and the shrinkage of the cured product, or the deformation of the cured product due to the shrinkage, etc. From the viewpoint of suppression, it is also preferable that all the layers made of the cured product contained in the laminate are layers made of the cured product of the present invention.
 すなわち、本発明の積層体の製造方法は、本発明の硬化物の製造方法を含むことが好ましく、本発明の硬化物の製造方法を複数回繰り返すことを含むことがより好ましい。 That is, the method for producing the laminate of the present invention preferably includes the method for producing the cured product of the present invention, and more preferably includes repeating the method for producing the cured product of the present invention multiple times.
 本発明の積層体は、硬化物からなる層を2層以上含み、上記硬化物からなる層同士のいずれかの間に金属層を含む態様が好ましい。上記金属層は、上記金属層形成工程により形成されることが好ましい。
 すなわち、本発明の積層体の製造方法は、複数回行われる硬化物の製造方法の間に、硬化物からなる層上に金属層を形成する金属層形成工程を更に含むことが好ましい。金属層形成工程の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。
 上記積層体としては、例えば、第一の硬化物からなる層、金属層、第二の硬化物からなる層の3つの層がこの順に積層された層構造を少なくとも含む積層体が好ましいものとして挙げられる。
 上記第一の硬化物からなる層及び上記第二の硬化物からなる層は、いずれも本発明の硬化物からなる層であることが好ましい。上記第一の硬化物からなる層の形成に用いられる本発明の樹脂組成物と、上記第二の硬化物からなる層の形成に用いられる本発明の樹脂組成物とは、組成が同一の組成物であってもよいし、組成が異なる組成物であってもよい。本発明の積層体における金属層は、再配線層などの金属配線として好ましく用いられる。
It is preferable that the laminate of the present invention includes two or more layers made of the cured material and a metal layer between any of the layers made of the cured material. The metal layer is preferably formed by the metal layer forming step.
That is, it is preferable that the method for producing a laminate of the present invention further includes a metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the layer made of the cured product between the methods for producing the cured product performed multiple times. Preferred aspects of the metal layer forming step are as described above.
As the laminate, for example, a laminate containing at least a layer structure in which three layers of a layer made of the first cured product, a metal layer, and a layer made of the second cured product are laminated in this order is preferable. be done.
It is preferable that both the layer comprising the first cured product and the layer comprising the second cured product are layers comprising the cured product of the present invention. The resin composition of the present invention used for forming the layer comprising the first cured product and the resin composition of the present invention used for forming the layer comprising the second cured product have the same composition. It may be a product or a composition having a different composition. The metal layer in the laminate of the present invention is preferably used as a metal wiring such as a rewiring layer.
<積層工程>
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、積層工程を含むことが好ましい。
 積層工程とは、パターン(樹脂層)又は金属層の表面に、再度、(a)膜形成工程(層形成工程)、(b)露光工程、(c)現像工程、(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方を、この順に行うことを含む一連の工程である。ただし、(a)の膜形成工程および(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方を繰り返す態様であってもよい。また、(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方の後には(e)金属層形成工程を含んでもよい。積層工程には、更に、上記乾燥工程等を適宜含んでいてもよいことは言うまでもない。
<Lamination process>
It is preferable that the method for manufacturing the laminate of the present invention includes a lamination step.
The lamination step means that the surface of the pattern (resin layer) or metal layer is again subjected to (a) film formation step (layer formation step), (b) exposure step, (c) development step, (d) heating step and development It is a series of steps including performing at least one of the post-exposure steps in this order. However, at least one of (a) the film forming step and (d) the heating step and the post-development exposure step may be repeated. Moreover, after at least one of the (d) heating step and the post-development exposure step, (e) a metal layer forming step may be included. Needless to say, the lamination step may further include the drying step and the like as appropriate.
 積層工程後、更に積層工程を行う場合には、上記露光工程後、上記加熱工程の後、又は、上記金属層形成工程後に、更に、表面活性化処理工程を行ってもよい。表面活性化処理としては、プラズマ処理が例示される。表面活性化処理の詳細については後述する。 After the lamination process, when the lamination process is further performed, after the exposure process, after the heating process, or after the metal layer forming process, a surface activation treatment process may be further performed. A plasma treatment is exemplified as the surface activation treatment. Details of the surface activation treatment will be described later.
 上記積層工程は、2~20回行うことが好ましく、2~9回行うことがより好ましい。
 例えば、樹脂層/金属層/樹脂層/金属層/樹脂層/金属層のように、樹脂層を2層以上20層以下とする構成が好ましく、2層以上9層以下とする構成が更に好ましい。
 上記各層はそれぞれ、組成、形状、膜厚等が同一であってもよいし、異なっていてもよい。
The lamination step is preferably performed 2 to 20 times, more preferably 2 to 9 times.
For example, a structure in which the number of resin layers is 2 or more and 20 or less, such as resin layer/metal layer/resin layer/metal layer/resin layer/metal layer, is preferable, and a structure of 2 or more and 9 or less is more preferable. .
Each of the layers described above may have the same composition, shape, film thickness, etc., or may differ from each other.
 本発明では特に、金属層を設けた後、更に、上記金属層を覆うように、上記本発明の樹脂組成物の硬化物(樹脂層)を形成する態様が好ましい。具体的には、(a)膜形成工程、(b)露光工程、(c)現像工程、(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方(e)金属層形成工程、の順序で繰り返す態様、又は、(a)膜形成工程、(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方、(e)金属層形成工程の順序で繰り返す態様が挙げられる。本発明の樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)を積層する積層工程と、金属層形成工程を交互に行うことにより、本発明の樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)と金属層を交互に積層することができる。 In the present invention, it is particularly preferable to form a cured product (resin layer) of the resin composition of the present invention so as to cover the metal layer after providing the metal layer. Specifically, (a) the film forming step, (b) the exposure step, (c) the developing step, (d) at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step, and (e) the metal layer forming step are repeated in this order. Alternatively, (a) the film forming step, (d) at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step, and (e) the metal layer forming step are repeated in this order. By alternately performing the lamination step of laminating the resin composition layer (resin layer) of the present invention and the metal layer forming step, it is possible to alternately laminate the resin composition layer (resin layer) of the present invention and the metal layer. can.
(表面活性化処理工程)
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、上記金属層および樹脂組成物層の少なくとも一部を表面活性化処理する、表面活性化処理工程を含むことが好ましい。
 表面活性化処理工程は、通常、金属層形成工程の後に行うが、上記現像工程の後(好ましくは、加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方の後)、樹脂組成物層に表面活性化処理工程を行ってから、金属層形成工程を行ってもよい。
 表面活性化処理は、金属層の少なくとも一部のみに行ってもよいし、露光後の樹脂組成物層の少なくとも一部のみに行ってもよいし、金属層および露光後の樹脂組成物層の両方について、それぞれ、少なくとも一部に行ってもよい。表面活性化処理は、金属層の少なくとも一部について行うことが好ましく、金属層のうち、表面に樹脂組成物層を形成する領域の一部または全部に表面活性化処理を行うことが好ましい。このように、金属層の表面に表面活性化処理を行うことにより、その表面に設けられる樹脂組成物層(膜)との密着性を向上させることができる。
 また、表面活性化処理は、露光後の樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)の一部または全部についても行うことが好ましい。このように、樹脂組成物層の表面に表面活性化処理を行うことにより、表面活性化処理した表面に設けられる金属層や樹脂層との密着性を向上させることができる。特にネガ型現像を行う場合など、樹脂組成物層が硬化されている場合には、表面処理によるダメージを受けにくく、密着性が向上しやすい。
 表面活性化処理は、例えば、国際公開第第2021/112189号の段落0415に記載の方法により実施することができる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
(Surface activation treatment step)
The method for producing a laminate of the present invention preferably includes a surface activation treatment step of subjecting at least part of the metal layer and the resin composition layer to surface activation treatment.
The surface activation treatment step is usually performed after the metal layer formation step, but after the development step (preferably after at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step), the resin composition layer is subjected to surface activation treatment. After performing the steps, the metal layer forming step may be performed.
The surface activation treatment may be performed only on at least part of the metal layer, may be performed only on at least part of the resin composition layer after exposure, or may be performed on the metal layer and the resin composition layer after exposure. Both may be done at least partially, respectively. The surface activation treatment is preferably performed on at least part of the metal layer, and it is preferable to perform the surface activation treatment on part or all of the area of the metal layer on which the resin composition layer is formed. By subjecting the surface of the metal layer to the surface activation treatment in this manner, the adhesiveness to the resin composition layer (film) provided on the surface can be improved.
In addition, it is preferable to perform the surface activation treatment on a part or the whole of the resin composition layer (resin layer) after exposure. By subjecting the surface of the resin composition layer to the surface activation treatment in this way, it is possible to improve the adhesion with the metal layer or the resin layer provided on the surface that has been subjected to the surface activation treatment. In particular, when the resin composition layer is cured, such as in the case of negative development, it is less likely to be damaged by surface treatment, and the adhesion is likely to be improved.
Surface activation treatment can be carried out, for example, by the method described in paragraph 0415 of WO2021/112189. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
(半導体デバイス及びその製造方法)
 また、本発明は、本発明の硬化物、又は、本発明の積層体を含む半導体デバイスも開示する。
 また、本発明は、本発明の硬化物の製造方法、又は、本発明の積層体の製造方法を含む半導体デバイスの製造方法も開示する。
 本発明の樹脂組成物を再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いた半導体デバイスの具体例としては、特開2016-027357号公報の段落0213~0218の記載及び図1の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
(Semiconductor device and its manufacturing method)
The present invention also discloses a semiconductor device comprising the cured product of the present invention or the laminate of the present invention.
Moreover, this invention also discloses the manufacturing method of the semiconductor device containing the manufacturing method of the hardened|cured material of this invention, or the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention.
Specific examples of a semiconductor device using the resin composition of the present invention for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer can refer to the description of paragraphs 0213 to 0218 of JP-A-2016-027357 and the description of FIG. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明を更に具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。「部」、「%」は特に述べない限り、質量基準である。 The present invention will be described more specifically below with reference to examples. The materials, usage amounts, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. Accordingly, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. "Parts" and "%" are based on mass unless otherwise specified.
<環化樹脂の前駆体の製造方法>
〔合成例1:環化樹脂の前駆体(樹脂1)の合成〕
 4,4’-オキシジフタル酸二無水物(ODPA)23.48gとビスフタル酸二無水物(BPDA)22.27gをセパラブルフラスコに入れ、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート(HEMA)39.69gとテトラヒドロフラン136.83gを入れて室温(25℃)下で撹拌し、撹拌しながらピリジン24.66gを加えて反応混合物を得た。反応による発熱の終了後に室温まで放冷し、16時間放置した。
 次に、氷冷下において、ジシクロヘキシルカルボジイミド(DCC)62.46gをテトラヒドロフラン61.57gに溶解した溶液を撹拌しながら40分かけて反応混合物に加え、続いて4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル(DADPE)27.42gをテトラヒドロフラン119.73gに懸濁したものを撹拌しながら60分かけて加えた。更に室温で2時間撹拌した後、エチルアルコール7.17gを加えて1時間撹拌し、次に、テトラヒドロフラン136.83gを加えた。反応混合物に生じた沈殿物をろ過により取り除き、反応液を得た。
 得られた反応液を716.21gのエチルアルコールに加えて粗ポリマーから成る沈殿物を生成した。生成した粗ポリマーを濾別し、テトラヒドロフラン403.49gに溶解して粗ポリマー溶液を得た。得られた粗ポリマー溶液を8470.26gの水に滴下してポリマーを沈殿させ、得られた沈殿物を濾別した後、真空乾燥して粉末状の樹脂1を80.3g得た。樹脂1の分子量をゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(標準ポリスチレン換算)で測定したところ、重量平均分子量(Mw)は20,000であった。樹脂1の構造は、下記式(P-1)で表される構造であると推測される。
<Method for producing precursor of cyclized resin>
[Synthesis Example 1: Synthesis of precursor (resin 1) of cyclized resin]
23.48 g of 4,4′-oxydiphthalic dianhydride (ODPA) and 22.27 g of bisphthalic dianhydride (BPDA) were placed in a separable flask, and 39.69 g of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate (HEMA) and 136 g of tetrahydrofuran were added. 83 g was added and stirred at room temperature (25° C.), and 24.66 g of pyridine was added while stirring to obtain a reaction mixture. After the end of heat generation due to the reaction, the mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and allowed to stand for 16 hours.
Next, under ice cooling, a solution of 62.46 g of dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) dissolved in 61.57 g of tetrahydrofuran was added to the reaction mixture with stirring over 40 minutes, followed by 4,4′-diaminodiphenyl ether (DADPE). A suspension of 27.42 g in 119.73 g of tetrahydrofuran was added with stirring over 60 minutes. After further stirring at room temperature for 2 hours, 7.17 g of ethyl alcohol was added and stirred for 1 hour, then 136.83 g of tetrahydrofuran was added. A precipitate formed in the reaction mixture was removed by filtration to obtain a reaction liquid.
The resulting reaction solution was added to 716.21 g of ethyl alcohol to produce a precipitate consisting of crude polymer. The resulting crude polymer was separated by filtration and dissolved in 403.49 g of tetrahydrofuran to obtain a crude polymer solution. The resulting crude polymer solution was dropped into 8470.26 g of water to precipitate the polymer. The obtained precipitate was separated by filtration and dried under vacuum to obtain 80.3 g of resin 1 in powder form. When the molecular weight of Resin 1 was measured by gel permeation chromatography (converted to standard polystyrene), the weight average molecular weight (Mw) was 20,000. The structure of Resin 1 is presumed to be a structure represented by the following formula (P-1).
〔合成例2:環化樹脂の前駆体(樹脂2)の合成〕
 21.2gの4,4’-オキシジフタル酸無水物と、18.0gの2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートと、23.9gのピリジンと、250mLのジグリム(ダイグライム、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル)とを混合し、60℃の温度で4時間撹拌して、4,4’-オキシジフタル酸と2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートとのジエステルを合成した。次いで、反応混合物を-10℃に冷却し、温度を-10±5℃に保ちながら、17.0gの塩化チオニルを60分かけて加えた。50mLのN-メチルピロリドンで希釈した後、100mLのN-メチルピロリドンに12.6gの4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテルを溶解させた溶液を、-10±5℃で60分かけて反応混合物に滴下して、混合物を室温で2時間撹拌した。その後、エタノール10.0gを添加して室温で1時間撹拌した。
 次いで、6000gの水を加えてポリイミド前駆体を沈殿させ、沈殿物(水-ポリイミド前駆体混合物)を15分間撹拌した。撹拌後の沈殿物(ポリイミド前駆体の固体)をろ取し、テトラヒドロフラン500gに溶解させた。得られた溶液に6000gの水(貧溶媒)を加えてポリイミド前駆体を沈殿させ、沈殿物(水-ポリイミド前駆体混合物)を15分間撹拌した。撹拌後の沈殿物(ポリイミド前駆体の固体)を再びろ過して減圧下で、45℃で3日間乾燥した。
 乾燥後の粉体46.6gをテトラヒドロフラン419.6gに溶解させた後に、2.3gのトリエチルアミンを添加して室温で35分間撹拌した。その後、エタノール3000gを添加して、沈殿物をろ取した。得られた沈殿物をテトラヒドロフラン281.8gに溶解した。そこに水17.1gとイオン交換樹脂UP6040(AmberTec社製)46.6gを添加して、4時間撹拌した。その後、イオン交換樹脂をろ過で取り除き、得られたポリマー溶液を5,600gの水に加えて沈殿物を得た。沈殿物をろ取し、減圧下45℃で24時間乾燥させることで、樹脂2を45.1g得た。
 樹脂2の構造は、下記式(P-2)で表される構造であると推測される。樹脂2の分子量をゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(標準ポリスチレン換算)で測定したところ、重量平均分子量(Mw)は20,000であった。また、4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテルの当量を適宜調整することにより、Mwが5,000である樹脂2、Mwが10,000である樹脂2、Mwが30,000である樹脂2についてもそれぞれ合成した。
[Synthesis Example 2: Synthesis of precursor (resin 2) of cyclized resin]
21.2 g of 4,4'-oxydiphthalic anhydride, 18.0 g of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 23.9 g of pyridine, and 250 mL of diglyme (diglyme, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether) were mixed and heated to 60°C. The diester of 4,4'-oxydiphthalic acid and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate was synthesized by stirring at temperature for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was then cooled to -10°C and 17.0 g of thionyl chloride was added over 60 minutes while maintaining the temperature at -10±5°C. After diluting with 50 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone, a solution of 12.6 g of 4,4′-diaminodiphenyl ether dissolved in 100 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone was added dropwise to the reaction mixture at −10±5° C. over 60 minutes. and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. After that, 10.0 g of ethanol was added and stirred at room temperature for 1 hour.
Then, 6000 g of water was added to precipitate the polyimide precursor, and the precipitate (water-polyimide precursor mixture) was stirred for 15 minutes. A precipitate (polyimide precursor solid) after stirring was collected by filtration and dissolved in 500 g of tetrahydrofuran. 6000 g of water (poor solvent) was added to the obtained solution to precipitate the polyimide precursor, and the precipitate (water-polyimide precursor mixture) was stirred for 15 minutes. The precipitate (polyimide precursor solid) after stirring was filtered again and dried under reduced pressure at 45° C. for 3 days.
After 46.6 g of the dried powder was dissolved in 419.6 g of tetrahydrofuran, 2.3 g of triethylamine was added and stirred at room temperature for 35 minutes. After that, 3000 g of ethanol was added and the precipitate was collected by filtration. The resulting precipitate was dissolved in 281.8 g of tetrahydrofuran. 17.1 g of water and 46.6 g of ion exchange resin UP6040 (manufactured by AmberTec) were added thereto and stirred for 4 hours. Thereafter, the ion exchange resin was removed by filtration, and the resulting polymer solution was added to 5,600 g of water to obtain a precipitate. The precipitate was collected by filtration and dried under reduced pressure at 45° C. for 24 hours to obtain 45.1 g of Resin 2.
The structure of Resin 2 is presumed to be a structure represented by the following formula (P-2). When the molecular weight of Resin 2 was measured by gel permeation chromatography (converted to standard polystyrene), the weight average molecular weight (Mw) was 20,000. Further, resin 2 with Mw of 5,000, resin 2 with Mw of 10,000, and resin 2 with Mw of 30,000 can also be obtained by appropriately adjusting the equivalent of 4,4′-diaminodiphenyl ether. Synthesized.
〔合成例3~8:環化樹脂の前駆体(樹脂3~樹脂8)の合成〕
 使用する化合物を適宜変更した以外は、合成例2と同様の方法により下記式(P-3)~式(P-8)のいずれかで表される構造の樹脂3~樹脂8を合成した。
 樹脂3のMwは20,000、樹脂4のMwは20,000、樹脂5のMwは20,000、樹脂6のMwは20,000、樹脂7のMwは20,000、樹脂8のMwは20,000であった。
[Synthesis Examples 3 to 8: Synthesis of precursors of cyclized resins (resin 3 to resin 8)]
Resins 3 to 8 having structures represented by any of the following formulas (P-3) to (P-8) were synthesized in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 2, except that the compounds used were appropriately changed.
Mw of resin 3 is 20,000, Mw of resin 4 is 20,000, Mw of resin 5 is 20,000, Mw of resin 6 is 20,000, Mw of resin 7 is 20,000, Mw of resin 8 is 20,000.
〔合成例9:樹脂9の合成〕
3,3’,4,4’-ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物(BPDA)294g(1.0mol)を4リットル容量のセパラブルフラスコに入れ、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタ クリレート(HEMA)270g(0.4mol)とγ―ブチロラクトン800mlを入れて室温下で撹拌し、撹拌しながらピリジン158.2gを加え反応混合物を得た。反応による発熱の終了後に室温まで放置し、16時間放置した。
 次に、氷冷下において、ジシクロヘキシルカルボジイミド(DCC)406gをγ-ブ チロラクトン400mlに溶解した溶液を撹拌しながら40分かけて反応混合物に加え、 続いて2,2’-ジメチル-4,4-ジアミノビフェニル(mTB:m-トリジン)188 g(0.88mol)をγ-ブチロラクトン560mlに懸濁したものを撹拌しながら6 0分かけて加えた。更に室温で4時間撹拌した後、エチルアルコール80mlを加えて1時間撹拌し、次に、γ-ブチロラクトン2リットルを加えた。反応混合物に生じた沈殿物 をろ過により取り除き、反応液を得た。
 得られた反応液を8リットルのエチルアルコールに加えて粗ポリマーから成る沈殿物を生成した。生成した粗ポリマーを濾別し、テトラヒドロフラン5.0リットルに溶解して粗ポリマー溶液を得た。得られた粗ポリマー溶液を60リットルの水に滴下してポリマーを沈殿させ、得られた沈殿物を濾別した後、真空乾燥して粉末状のポリマー(樹脂9)を得た。樹脂9の分子量をゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(標準ポリスチレン換算)で測定したところ、重量平均分子量(Mw)は25,000であった。
[Synthesis Example 9: Synthesis of Resin 9]
294 g (1.0 mol) of 3,3′,4,4′-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride (BPDA) was placed in a 4-liter separable flask, and 270 g (0.0 mol) of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate (HEMA) was added. 4 mol) and 800 ml of γ-butyrolactone were added and stirred at room temperature, and 158.2 g of pyridine was added while stirring to obtain a reaction mixture. After the end of the heat generation due to the reaction, the mixture was left to stand at room temperature for 16 hours.
Next, under ice-cooling, a solution of 406 g of dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) dissolved in 400 ml of γ-butyrolactone was added to the reaction mixture over 40 minutes with stirring, followed by 2,2′-dimethyl-4,4- A suspension of 188 g (0.88 mol) of diaminobiphenyl (mTB: m-tolidine) in 560 ml of γ-butyrolactone was added with stirring over 60 minutes. After further stirring at room temperature for 4 hours, 80 ml of ethyl alcohol was added and stirred for 1 hour, then 2 liters of γ-butyrolactone was added. A precipitate formed in the reaction mixture was removed by filtration to obtain a reaction liquid.
The resulting reaction solution was added to 8 liters of ethyl alcohol to form a precipitate consisting of crude polymer. The resulting crude polymer was separated by filtration and dissolved in 5.0 liters of tetrahydrofuran to obtain a crude polymer solution. The resulting crude polymer solution was dropped into 60 liters of water to precipitate the polymer, and the resulting precipitate was separated by filtration and vacuum dried to obtain a powdery polymer (resin 9). When the molecular weight of Resin 9 was measured by gel permeation chromatography (converted to standard polystyrene), the weight average molecular weight (Mw) was 25,000.

〔合成例10:樹脂10の合成〕
 合成例9のBPDA294gに代えてピロメリット酸無水物(PMDA)164g(0.70mol)、4,4’-オキシジフタル酸二無水物(ODPA)78gを用い、mTB188gに代えてmTB142g(0.66mol)、2,2’-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)-4,4-ジアミノビフェニル(TFMB)72g(0.22mol)を用いた以外は、前述の合成例9に記載の方法と同様にして反応を行い、樹脂10を得た。樹脂10の分子量をゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(標準ポリスチレン換算)で測定したところ、重量平均分子量(Mw)は32,000であった。樹脂10の構造は、下記式(P-10)で表される4つの繰返し単位の組み合わせにより表される構造であると推測される。
[Synthesis Example 10: Synthesis of Resin 10]
164 g (0.70 mol) of pyromellitic anhydride (PMDA) and 78 g of 4,4'-oxydiphthalic dianhydride (ODPA) were used instead of 294 g of BPDA in Synthesis Example 9, and 142 g (0.66 mol) of mTB was used instead of 188 g of mTB. , 2,2′-bis(trifluoromethyl)-4,4-diaminobiphenyl (TFMB) 72 g (0.22 mol) was used, but the reaction was carried out in the same manner as described in Synthesis Example 9 above. , to obtain resin 10. When the molecular weight of Resin 10 was measured by gel permeation chromatography (converted to standard polystyrene), the weight average molecular weight (Mw) was 32,000. The structure of resin 10 is presumed to be a structure represented by a combination of four repeating units represented by the following formula (P-10).
〔合成例11~12:環化樹脂の前駆体(樹脂11~樹脂12)の合成〕
 使用する化合物を適宜変更した以外は、合成例2と同様の方法により下記式(P-11)~式(P-12)のいずれかで表される構造の樹脂11~樹脂12を合成した。
 樹脂11のMwは20,000、樹脂12のMwは20,000であった。
[Synthesis Examples 11 to 12: Synthesis of precursors of cyclized resins (resins 11 to 12)]
Resins 11 to 12 having structures represented by any of the following formulas (P-11) to (P-12) were synthesized in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 2, except that the compounds used were appropriately changed.
The Mw of Resin 11 was 20,000 and the Mw of Resin 12 was 20,000.
<実施例及び比較例>
 各実施例において、それぞれ、下記表に記載の成分を混合し、各樹脂組成物を得た。また、比較例において、それぞれ、下記表に記載の成分を混合し、比較用組成物を得た。
 具体的には、溶剤以外の表に記載の各成分の含有量(配合量)は、表の各欄の「質量部」の欄に記載の量(質量部)とした。
 溶剤の含有量(配合量)は、組成物の固形分濃度が表中の「固形分濃度」の値(質量%)となるようにし、溶剤の全質量に対する各溶剤の含有量の比率(質量比)は、表中の「比率」の欄に記載の比率となるようにした。
 得られた樹脂組成物及び比較用組成物を、細孔の幅が0.8μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターを用いて加圧ろ過した。
 また、表中、「-」の記載は該当する成分を組成物が含有していないことを示している。
 また、各樹脂の酸価を上述の方法により測定し、測定結果を表中に記載した。
<Examples and Comparative Examples>
In each example, each resin composition was obtained by mixing the components shown in the table below. In addition, in Comparative Examples, the components shown in the table below were mixed to obtain comparative compositions.
Specifically, the content (compounding amount) of each component described in the table other than the solvent was the amount (parts by mass) described in the "parts by mass" column of each column of the table.
The content (blending amount) of the solvent is such that the solid content concentration of the composition is the value (% by mass) of "solid content concentration" in the table, and the ratio of the content of each solvent to the total mass of the solvent (mass The ratio) was set to the ratio described in the "ratio" column in the table.
The resulting resin composition and comparative composition were filtered under pressure using a polytetrafluoroethylene filter with a pore width of 0.8 μm.
In the table, the description of "-" indicates that the composition does not contain the corresponding component.
In addition, the acid value of each resin was measured by the method described above, and the measurement results are shown in the table.
 表に記載した各成分の詳細は下記の通りである。 Details of each component listed in the table are as follows.
〔樹脂〕
・樹脂1~樹脂12:上記合成例により得られた樹脂1~樹脂12
〔resin〕
・ Resin 1 to Resin 12: Resins 1 to 12 obtained by the above synthesis examples
〔重合性化合物〕
・M-1~M-3:下記構造の化合物、括弧の添え字は繰返し数を表す。
・U-1~U-3:下記構造の化合物。
[Polymerizable compound]
·M-1 to M-3: compounds having the following structures, the subscripts in parentheses represent the number of repetitions.
- U-1 to U-3: compounds having the following structures.
〔特定メタロセン化合物〕
・A-1~A-21:下記構造の化合物。A-1~A-21はいずれも、上述の特定メタロセン化合物に該当する化合物である。
・AR-1:下記構造の化合物。AR-1は上述の特定メタロセン化合物には該当しない化合物である。
[Specific metallocene compound]
· A-1 to A-21: Compounds having the following structures. All of A-1 to A-21 are compounds corresponding to the specific metallocene compounds described above.
• AR-1: a compound having the following structure. AR-1 is a compound that does not correspond to the specific metallocene compounds described above.
〔重合開始剤〕
・G-1~G-3:下記構造の化合物
[Polymerization initiator]
- G-1 to G-3: compounds having the following structures
〔重合禁止剤〕
・B-1~B-5:下記構造の化合物
[Polymerization inhibitor]
- B-1 to B-5: compounds having the following structures
〔シランカップリング剤(金属接着性改良剤)〕
・C-1~C-5:下記構造の化合物。本明細書において、特に断りがない限りMeはメチル基を、Etはエチル基を表す。
[Silane coupling agent (metal adhesion improver)]
· C-1 to C-5: compounds having the following structures. In this specification, Me represents a methyl group and Et represents an ethyl group unless otherwise specified.
〔マイグレーション抑制剤〕
・D-1~D-4:下記構造の化合物
[Migration inhibitor]
- D-1 to D-4: compounds having the following structures
〔添加剤〕
・E-1~E-2:下記構造の化合物
・F-1:下記構造の化合物
・T-1~T-3:下記構造の化合物
〔Additive〕
- E-1 to E-2: compounds of the following structure - F-1: compounds of the following structure - T-1 to T-3: compounds of the following structure
〔溶剤〕
・NMP:N-メチル-2-ピロリドン
・EL:乳酸エチル
・DMSO:ジメチルスルホキシド
・GBL:γ-ブチロラクトン
〔solvent〕
・NMP: N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone ・EL: ethyl lactate ・DMSO: dimethyl sulfoxide ・GBL: γ-butyrolactone
<評価>
〔特定メタロセン化合物のモル吸光係数〕
 各実施例又は比較例において調製した組成物に用いた特定メタロセン化合物0.8mmolをTHF(テトラヒドロフラン)1,000mLに溶解し、紫外可視赤外分光光度計(日立ハイテクサイエンス UH4150)を用いて測定した。測定結果は表の「特定メタロセン化合物のモル吸光係数」の欄に記載した。表中の数値の単位は「L・mol-1・cm-1」である。
<Evaluation>
[Molar extinction coefficient of specific metallocene compound]
0.8 mmol of the specific metallocene compound used in the composition prepared in each example or comparative example was dissolved in 1,000 mL of THF (tetrahydrofuran), and measured using an ultraviolet-visible-infrared spectrophotometer (Hitachi High-Tech Science UH4150). . The measurement results are shown in the column of "Molar extinction coefficient of specific metallocene compound" in the table. The unit of numerical values in the table is “L·mol −1 ·cm −1 ”.
〔保存安定性〕
 各実施例又は比較例において調製した組成物に対し、加速試験を実施した(加速試験の条件は、遮光状態で38℃、3日間引き置きとした)。上記引き置きの完了後、粘度計(東機産業 RE-85L)を用いて、粘度を測定し、初期状態(上記引き置きの実施前)と比較して、加速試験後の粘度変化率が±8%以下であればA、±8%を超え15%以下であればB、15%を超える場合をCとして評価した。評価結果は表の「保存安定性」の欄に記載した。上記粘度変化率は下記式により算出した。粘度変化率が小さいほど保存安定性に優れるといえる。
粘度変化率(%)=|(上記引き置きの完了後の粘度-上記引き置き実施前の粘度)|/(上記引き置き実施前の粘度)×100
[Storage stability]
An accelerated test was performed on the composition prepared in each example or comparative example (conditions for the accelerated test were 38° C. and 3 days of storage in a light-shielded state). After the completion of the holding, the viscosity was measured using a viscometer (Toki Sangyo RE-85L), and compared with the initial state (before the holding), the viscosity change rate after the acceleration test was ± If it is 8% or less, it is evaluated as A, if it exceeds ±8% and is 15% or less, it is evaluated as B, and if it exceeds 15%, it is evaluated as C. The evaluation results are shown in the "storage stability" column of the table. The viscosity change rate was calculated by the following formula. It can be said that the smaller the viscosity change rate, the better the storage stability.
Viscosity change rate (%) =|(Viscosity after completion of the above-mentioned placement-Viscosity before the above-mentioned placement)|/(Viscosity before the above-mentioned placement) x 100
〔作業安定性〕
 黄色灯下での作業を想定し、組成物、又は組成物膜を黄色灯下にて引き置き後に評価を実施した。
[Working stability]
Assuming work under a yellow light, evaluation was carried out after leaving the composition or composition film under a yellow light.
-作業安定性(組成物)-
 各実施例又は比較例において、組成物を透明瓶中、黄色灯下、23℃で12時間引き置きし、粘度変化を測定した。黄色灯としては、HITACHI製、型番:FHF32Y-F、東芝ライテック(株)製、型番:LEEM-40403YY-01、又は、NEC製、型番:FHF32Y-F/LSIを用い、黄色灯から組成物を含む透明瓶までの距離は1m程度とした。粘度変化率が±8%以下であればA、±8を超え15%以下であればB、15を超え20%以下であればC、20%を超える場合はDとして、さらに内容物がゲル化し測定不能となったものをEとして評価した。上記3種のいずれの黄色灯を用いた場合であっても、評価結果は同様であった。
 粘度の測定方法及び粘度変化率の計算方法は上述の保存安定性に記載の方法と同様とした。評価結果は表の「作業安定性(組成物)」の欄に記載した。粘度変化率が小さいほど黄色灯下での作業安定性に優れるといえる。
-Working stability (composition)-
In each example or comparative example, the composition was placed in a transparent bottle under yellow light at 23° C. for 12 hours, and the change in viscosity was measured. As the yellow lamp, HITACHI, model number: FHF32Y-F, Toshiba Lighting & Technology Co., Ltd., model number: LEEM-40403YY-01, or NEC, model number: FHF32Y-F/LSI is used, and the composition is extracted from the yellow lamp. The distance to the transparent bottle containing the sample was about 1 m. A if the viscosity change rate is ±8% or less, B if it exceeds ±8 and 15% or less, C if it exceeds 15 and 20% or less, and D if it exceeds 20%, and the content is a gel. E was evaluated for those that became unmeasurable due to the change in color. The evaluation results were the same regardless of which of the three types of yellow lamps was used.
The viscosity measurement method and the viscosity change rate calculation method were the same as those described in the above storage stability. The evaluation results are shown in the "working stability (composition)" column of the table. It can be said that the smaller the viscosity change rate, the better the working stability under a yellow light.
-作業安定性(組成物膜)-
 組成物膜を黄色灯下で12時間引き置きし、パターン形状により評価した。評価方法の詳細は以下の通りである。
 各実施例又は比較例において、組成物をシリコンウェハ上にスピンコートにて塗布し、ホットプレート上で、100℃で5分間乾燥し、シリコンウェハ上に表の「膜厚(μm)」の欄に記載の厚さの組成物膜を形成した。
 表の「露光条件」の欄に「M」と記載された例においては、シリコンウェハ上の組成物膜を、ステッパー(Nikon NSR 2005 i9C)を用いて露光した。露光波長は表の「露光波長(nm)」の欄に記載の波長とし、200,300,400,500,600,700,800 mJ/cmの各露光エネルギーで、5~25μmまで1μm刻みの1:1ラインアンドスペースパターンが形成されたフォトマスクを用いて、露光を行った。
 表の「露光条件」の欄に「D」と記載された例においては、シリコンウェハ上の組成物膜を、ダイレクト露光装置(アドテック DE-6UH III)を用いて露光した。露光波長は表の「露光波長(nm)」の欄に記載の波長とし、200,300,400,500,600,700,800 mJ/cmの各露光エネルギーで、レーザーダイレクトイメージング露光により5~25μmまで1μm刻みの1:1ラインアンドスペースパターンを露光した。
 露光した組成物膜を表の「現像液」の欄に記載の現像液を用いて60秒間現像し、得られたパターンの線幅で評価した。露光エネルギーの変化に対して、線幅の変化が小さければ、露光ラチチュードが広いことを表し、好ましい結果である。測定限界は5μmであり、下記評価基準に従って評価を行った。評価結果は表の「作業安定性(組成物膜)」の欄に記載した。
<<評価基準>>
A:10μm未満
B:10μm以上20μm未満
C:20μm以上
-Working stability (composition film)-
The composition film was left under a yellow light for 12 hours, and the pattern shape was evaluated. The details of the evaluation method are as follows.
In each example or comparative example, the composition was applied on a silicon wafer by spin coating, dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 5 minutes, and coated on the silicon wafer in the column "Thickness (μm)" of the table. A composition film having the thickness described in 1 was formed.
In the examples with "M" in the "Exposure conditions" column of the table, the composition film on the silicon wafer was exposed using a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C). The exposure wavelength is the wavelength described in the "Exposure wavelength (nm)" column of the table, and the exposure energy is 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mJ/cm 2 , and the exposure energy is 5 to 25 μm in increments of 1 μm. Exposure was performed using a photomask on which a 1:1 line-and-space pattern was formed.
In the examples described as "D" in the "Exposure conditions" column of the table, the composition film on the silicon wafer was exposed using a direct exposure apparatus (ADTEC DE-6UH III). The exposure wavelength is the wavelength described in the “Exposure wavelength (nm)” column of the table, and the exposure energy is 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 mJ / cm 2 , and the laser direct imaging exposure is 5 to 5. A 1:1 line-and-space pattern was exposed at intervals of 1 μm up to 25 μm.
The exposed composition film was developed for 60 seconds using the developer described in the "developer" column of the table, and the line width of the resulting pattern was evaluated. A small change in line width with respect to a change in exposure energy indicates a wide exposure latitude, which is a favorable result. The measurement limit is 5 μm, and evaluation was performed according to the following evaluation criteria. The evaluation results are described in the column of "working stability (composition film)" in the table.
<<Evaluation Criteria>>
A: Less than 10 μm B: 10 μm or more and less than 20 μm C: 20 μm or more
〔耐薬品性の評価〕
 各実施例又は比較例において、調製した樹脂組成物又は比較用組成物を、シリコンウエハ上にスピンコート法により塗布した。上記シリコンウエハをホットプレート上で、100℃で5分間乾燥し、シリコンウエハ上に表の「膜厚(μm)」の欄に記載の厚さであって、均一な厚さの樹脂組成物層を形成した。
 露光条件に「M」と記載された例においては、シリコンウエハ上の樹脂組成物層を、ステッパーを用いて露光した。露光は表中の「露光波長(nm)」に記載した波長の光を用い、フォトマスクを使用せず感光膜の全面に対して行った。露光量は500mJ/cmとした。
 露光条件に「D」と記載された例においては、ダイレクト露光装置(アドテック DE-6UH III)を用いて露光した。露光は表中の「露光波長(nm)」に記載した波長の光を用い、感光膜の全面に対して行った。露光量は500mJ/cmとした。
 次いで、「キュア温度(℃)」の欄に数値が記載された例においては、ホットプレートを使用して、各実施例又は比較例において得られた樹脂膜を、窒素雰囲気下で、10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し、表の「キュア温度(℃)」に記載の温度に達した後「キュア時間(min)」に記載の時間においてその温度を維持し、硬化膜を形成した。
 「キュア温度(℃)」の欄に「IR」と記載された例においては、赤外線ランプ加熱装置(アドバンス理工社製、RTP-6)を用いて、各実施例において得られた樹脂膜を、窒素雰囲気下で、10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し、230℃に達した後「キュア時間(min)」に記載の時間においてその温度を維持し、硬化膜を形成した。
 得られた硬化膜を下記の薬品に下記の条件で浸漬し、溶解速度を算定した。
 薬品:ジメチルスルホキシド(DMSO)と25質量%のテトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド(TMAH)水溶液の90:10(質量比)の混合物
 評価条件:上記硬化膜を上記薬品に75℃で15分間浸漬して浸漬前後の硬化膜の膜厚を比較し、溶解速度(nm/分)を算出した。
 得られた溶解速度の値について、下記評価基準に従って評価し、「耐薬品性」の欄に記載した。溶解速度が小さいほど、耐薬品性に優れるといえる。
-評価基準-
A:溶解速度が250nm/分未満であった。
B:溶解速度が250nm/分未満であった。
[Evaluation of chemical resistance]
In each example or comparative example, the prepared resin composition or comparative composition was applied onto a silicon wafer by spin coating. The silicon wafer is dried on a hot plate at 100° C. for 5 minutes, and a resin composition layer having a uniform thickness and having the thickness described in the “Thickness (μm)” column of the table is formed on the silicon wafer. formed.
In the examples in which the exposure condition was described as "M", the resin composition layer on the silicon wafer was exposed using a stepper. The entire surface of the photosensitive film was exposed without using a photomask using light having a wavelength indicated in "Exposure Wavelength (nm)" in the table. The exposure amount was 500 mJ/cm 2 .
In the examples described as "D" in the exposure condition, exposure was performed using a direct exposure apparatus (ADTEC DE-6UH III). The entire surface of the photosensitive film was exposed to light having a wavelength indicated in "Exposure Wavelength (nm)" in the table. The exposure amount was 500 mJ/cm 2 .
Next, in the examples where numerical values are described in the column of "curing temperature (°C)", a hot plate is used to heat the resin film obtained in each example or comparative example in a nitrogen atmosphere at 10°C/ After reaching the temperature indicated in "Cure temperature (°C)" in the table, the temperature was maintained for the time indicated in "Cure time (min)" to form a cured film. .
In the examples described as "IR" in the column of "curing temperature (°C)", the resin film obtained in each example was cured using an infrared lamp heating device (RTP-6, manufactured by Advance Riko Co., Ltd.). In a nitrogen atmosphere, the temperature was raised at a temperature elevation rate of 10°C/min, and after reaching 230°C, the temperature was maintained for the time described in "curing time (min)" to form a cured film.
The obtained cured film was immersed in the following chemicals under the following conditions, and the dissolution rate was calculated.
Chemical: 90:10 (mass ratio) mixture of dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) and 25% by mass of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) aqueous solution Evaluation conditions: The cured film was immersed in the chemical at 75°C for 15 minutes. The film thickness of the cured film before and after was compared, and the dissolution rate (nm/min) was calculated.
The obtained dissolution rate values were evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria and described in the "Chemical resistance" column. It can be said that the lower the dissolution rate, the better the chemical resistance.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: The dissolution rate was less than 250 nm/min.
B: The dissolution rate was less than 250 nm/min.
-リソ性-
 黄色灯下での引き置きを行わずに、上記作業安定性(組成物膜)に記載の評価と同様の評価を実施した。評価方法及び評価基準は上述の「作業安定性(組成物膜)」に記載の評価方法及び評価基準とし、評価結果は表の「リソ性」の欄に記載した。
-litho-
The same evaluation as the evaluation described in the working stability (composition film) was performed without leaving the film under a yellow light. The evaluation method and evaluation criteria were the evaluation methods and evaluation criteria described in the above "Working stability (composition film)", and the evaluation results were described in the "litho property" column of the table.
 以上の結果から、本発明の樹脂組成物は、黄色灯下での作業安定性に優れることが分かる。
 比較例1に係る比較用組成物は、特定メタロセン化合物を含有しない。このような比較用組成物については、黄色灯下での作業安定性に劣ることが分かる。
From the above results, it can be seen that the resin composition of the present invention is excellent in working stability under yellow light.
The comparative composition according to Comparative Example 1 does not contain a specific metallocene compound. It can be seen that the comparative composition has poor working stability under a yellow light.
<実施例101>
 実施例1において使用した樹脂組成物を、黄色灯下で12時間引き置きした後に、表面に銅薄層が形成された樹脂基材の銅薄層の表面にスピンコート法により層状に適用して、100℃で5分間乾燥し、膜厚20μmの感光膜を形成した後、ステッパー((株)ニコン製、NSR1505 i6)を用いて露光した。露光はマスク(パターンが1:1ラインアンドスペースであり、線幅が10μmであるバイナリマスク)を介して、波長365nmで行った。上記露光後、シクロヘキサノンで2分間現像し、PGMEAで30秒間リンスし、層のパターンを得た。
 次いで、窒素雰囲気下で、10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し、230℃に達した後、230℃で180分間維持して、再配線層用層間絶縁膜を形成した。この再配線層用層間絶縁膜は、絶縁性に優れていた。
 また、これらの再配線層用層間絶縁膜を使用して半導体デバイスを製造したところ、問題なく動作することを確認した。
<Example 101>
The resin composition used in Example 1 was left under a yellow light for 12 hours, and then applied in a layered form by spin coating to the surface of the thin copper layer of the resin substrate having the thin copper layer formed on the surface. , and dried at 100° C. for 5 minutes to form a photosensitive film having a thickness of 20 μm, which was then exposed using a stepper (NSR1505 i6 manufactured by Nikon Corporation). Exposure was performed at a wavelength of 365 nm through a mask (a binary mask with a 1:1 line-and-space pattern and a line width of 10 μm). After the above exposure, the film was developed with cyclohexanone for 2 minutes and rinsed with PGMEA for 30 seconds to obtain a layer pattern.
Next, in a nitrogen atmosphere, the temperature was raised at a rate of 10° C./min, reaching 230° C., and then maintained at 230° C. for 180 minutes to form an interlayer insulating film for rewiring layers. This interlayer insulating film for rewiring layer was excellent in insulating properties.
Moreover, when a semiconductor device was manufactured using these interlayer insulating films for rewiring layers, it was confirmed that the device operated without any problem.

Claims (18)

  1.  樹脂、及び、
     メタロセン化合物を含み、
     前記メタロセン化合物が、金属原子と、置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子と、前記金属原子に直結する芳香環を有し、
     前記芳香環は、前記芳香環に直結する置換基として、ハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を有し、
     前記メタロセン化合物の500nmにおけるモル吸光係数が330mol-1・L・cm-1以下である
    樹脂組成物。
    resin, and
    containing a metallocene compound,
    The metallocene compound has a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and an aromatic ring directly linked to the metal atom,
    The aromatic ring has an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom as a substituent directly connected to the aromatic ring,
    The resin composition, wherein the metallocene compound has a molar absorption coefficient at 500 nm of 330 mol −1 ·L·cm −1 or less.
  2.  樹脂、及び、
     メタロセン化合物を含み、
     前記メタロセン化合物が、金属原子と、置換基を有してもよいシクロペンタジエニル配位子と、前記金属原子に直結する芳香環を有し、
     前記芳香環は、前記芳香環に直結する置換基として、ハロゲン原子、及び、ハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を有する
     樹脂組成物。
    resin, and
    containing a metallocene compound,
    The metallocene compound has a metal atom, an optionally substituted cyclopentadienyl ligand, and an aromatic ring directly linked to the metal atom,
    The resin composition, wherein the aromatic ring has a halogen atom and an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom as substituents directly bonded to the aromatic ring.
  3.  前記樹脂が環化樹脂及びその前駆体よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の樹脂である、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the resin is at least one resin selected from the group consisting of cyclized resins and precursors thereof.
  4.  前記樹脂がポリイミド又はポリイミド前駆体である、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the resin is polyimide or a polyimide precursor.
  5.  重合性化合物を更に含む、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising a polymerizable compound.
  6.  前記メタロセン化合物がチタノセン化合物である、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the metallocene compound is a titanocene compound.
  7.  前記メタロセン化合物とは異なる光重合開始剤を更に含む、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, further comprising a photopolymerization initiator different from the metallocene compound.
  8.  前記メタロセン化合物が下記式(1-1)又は式(1-2)で表される化合物である、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物。

     式(1-1)中、Mはチタン原子、ジルコニウム原子又はハフニウム原子を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はフッ素原子を表し、Rのうち一方はフッ素原子であり、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、Rはハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はフッ素原子を表し、Rのうち一方はフッ素原子であり、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、Rはハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を表す。
     式(1-2)中、Mはそれぞれ独立に、チタン原子、ジルコニウム原子又はハフニウム原子を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はフッ素原子を表し、Rのうち一方はフッ素原子であり、R10はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、R11はハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を表し、R12はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はフッ素原子を表し、R12のうち一方はフッ素原子であり、R13はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、R14はハロゲン原子とは異なる電子求引性基を表し、R15及びR16はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表し、Aは酸素原子又は硫黄原子を表す。
    The resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the metallocene compound is a compound represented by the following formula (1-1) or (1-2).

    In formula (1-1), M represents a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom, each R 1 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and each R 2 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom. , R 2 is a fluorine atom, R 3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, R 4 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom, R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, one of R 5 is a fluorine atom, each R 6 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and R 7 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from the halogen atom.
    In formula (1-2), each M independently represents a titanium atom, a zirconium atom or a hafnium atom, each R 8 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, each R 9 independently represents a hydrogen atom or represents a fluorine atom, one of R 9 is a fluorine atom, R 10 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, R 11 represents an electron-withdrawing group different from a halogen atom, and R 12 Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, one of R 12 is a fluorine atom, each R 13 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and R 14 has an electron-withdrawing property different from that of a halogen atom. group, R 15 and R 16 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and A represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  9.  前記式(1-1)におけるR及びRがそれぞれ独立に、トリフルオロメチル基又はニトロ基であり、前記式(1-2)におけるR11及びR14がそれぞれ独立に、トリフルオロメチル基又はニトロ基である、請求項8に記載の樹脂組成物。 R 4 and R 7 in the formula (1-1) are each independently a trifluoromethyl group or a nitro group, and R 11 and R 14 in the formula (1-2) are each independently a trifluoromethyl group. or a nitro group, the resin composition according to claim 8.
  10.  前記樹脂として環化樹脂又はその前駆体を含み、再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いられる、請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 9, which contains a cyclized resin or a precursor thereof as the resin, and is used for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
  11.  請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物。 A cured product obtained by curing the resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
  12.  請求項11に記載の硬化物からなる層を2層以上含み、前記硬化物からなる層同士のいずれかの間に金属層を含む積層体。 A laminate comprising two or more layers made of the cured product according to claim 11 and a metal layer between any of the layers made of the cured product.
  13.  請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の樹脂組成物を基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程を含む、硬化物の製造方法。 A method for producing a cured product, comprising a film forming step of applying the resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10 onto a substrate to form a film.
  14.  前記膜を選択的に露光する露光工程及び前記膜を現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程を含む、請求項13に記載の硬化物の製造方法。 14. The method for producing a cured product according to claim 13, comprising an exposure step of selectively exposing the film and a development step of developing the film using a developer to form a pattern.
  15.  前記膜を50~450℃で加熱する加熱工程を含む、請求項13又は14に記載の硬化物の製造方法。 The method for producing a cured product according to claim 13 or 14, comprising a heating step of heating the film at 50 to 450°C.
  16.  請求項13~15のいずれか1項に記載の硬化物の製造方法を含む、積層体の製造方法。 A method for producing a laminate, including the method for producing the cured product according to any one of claims 13 to 15.
  17.  請求項13~15のいずれか1項に記載の硬化物の製造方法、又は、請求項16に記載の積層体の製造方法を含む、半導体デバイスの製造方法。 A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, including the method for manufacturing the cured product according to any one of claims 13 to 15 or the method for manufacturing the laminate according to claim 16.
  18.  請求項11に記載の硬化物又は請求項12に記載の積層体を含む、半導体デバイス。 A semiconductor device comprising the cured product according to claim 11 or the laminate according to claim 12.
PCT/JP2023/005417 2022-02-21 2023-02-16 Resin composition, cured product, multilayer body, method for producing cured product, method for producing multilayer body, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device WO2023157911A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2024501426A JPWO2023157911A1 (en) 2022-02-21 2023-02-16

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022024646 2022-02-21
JP2022-024646 2022-02-21

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023157911A1 true WO2023157911A1 (en) 2023-08-24

Family

ID=87578400

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/005417 WO2023157911A1 (en) 2022-02-21 2023-02-16 Resin composition, cured product, multilayer body, method for producing cured product, method for producing multilayer body, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2023157911A1 (en)
TW (1) TW202344568A (en)
WO (1) WO2023157911A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024101295A1 (en) * 2022-11-08 2024-05-16 富士フイルム株式会社 Production method for cured product, production method for laminate, production method for semiconductor device, and semiconductor device

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS61151197A (en) * 1984-12-20 1986-07-09 チバ‐ガイギー アーゲー Titanocenes and radiation-curable composition containing same
JP2004184755A (en) * 2002-12-04 2004-07-02 Hitachi Chemical Dupont Microsystems Ltd Photosensitive composition, photosensitive material, method of manufacturing relief pattern and method of manufacturing polyimide pattern
WO2021172420A1 (en) * 2020-02-28 2021-09-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Curable resin composition, cured film, laminate, cured film production method and semiconductor device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS61151197A (en) * 1984-12-20 1986-07-09 チバ‐ガイギー アーゲー Titanocenes and radiation-curable composition containing same
JP2004184755A (en) * 2002-12-04 2004-07-02 Hitachi Chemical Dupont Microsystems Ltd Photosensitive composition, photosensitive material, method of manufacturing relief pattern and method of manufacturing polyimide pattern
WO2021172420A1 (en) * 2020-02-28 2021-09-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Curable resin composition, cured film, laminate, cured film production method and semiconductor device

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024101295A1 (en) * 2022-11-08 2024-05-16 富士フイルム株式会社 Production method for cured product, production method for laminate, production method for semiconductor device, and semiconductor device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2023157911A1 (en) 2023-08-24
TW202344568A (en) 2023-11-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7259141B1 (en) Method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and treatment liquid
KR20230110590A (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, and semiconductor device
WO2023190064A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2023157911A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, multilayer body, method for producing cured product, method for producing multilayer body, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2023162687A1 (en) Resin composition, cured article, laminate, method for producing cured article, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2023120059A1 (en) Resin composition, cured article, laminate, method for producing cured article, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2023032820A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and compound
WO2022210226A1 (en) Resin composition, cured object, layered product, method for producing cured object, semiconductor device, and compound
WO2022224838A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, semiconductor device, and resin
WO2022172996A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminated body, method for producing cured product, semiconductor device, and base generator
KR20230110589A (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, and semiconductor device
WO2022176869A1 (en) Method for producing permanent film, method for producing multilayer body, and method for producing semiconductor device
WO2023112573A1 (en) Method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate , method for producing semiconductor device, and treatment liquid
WO2023189126A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, layered product, method for producing cured product, method for producing layered product, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2023190061A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
KR20240156619A (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and, semiconductor device
KR20240157718A (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and, semiconductor device
WO2023120314A1 (en) Laminate, device, resin composition, method for manufacturing cured product, method for manufacturing laminate, and method for manufacturing device
WO2024070713A1 (en) Resin composition, insulating film and method for producing interlayer insulating film for redistribution layers
WO2024010026A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, multilayer body, method for producing cured product, method for producing multilayer body, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2023190060A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured product, multilayer body, method for producing cured product, method for producing multilayer body, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2023190062A1 (en) Resin composition, cured article, laminate, method for producing cured article, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
KR20240157719A (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and, semiconductor device
WO2023026892A1 (en) Resin composition, cured article, layered body, cured article production method, layered body production method, semiconductor device production method, semiconductor device, and base generating agent
KR20240156622A (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and, semiconductor device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23756436

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2024501426

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE